TUNDRA_34467U 04.1.

2 5:40 AM ページ1 (2,1)

For your safety and comfort,

read carefully and keep in the vehicle.
 07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU — PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

D Comfortable
D Easy to use
D Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in
top running order is to maintain it properly
from the moment you drive it off the show-
room floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Where to obtain the
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to pre-
vent small problems from growing into larger ones
Repair Manual
later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what
maintenance is required and clearly explains how to The repair manual for TOYOTA TUNDRA may
do the work yourself step−by−step. be purchased from any Toyota dealer or the
Areas covered include such things as spark plug Material Distribution Center. To purchase the
replacement, valve clearance adjustment and en- repair manual, please contact your Toyota
gine oil and filter replacement. dealer or call the Material Distribution Center
toll−free at 1−800−622−2033.
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS: D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331
D Hawaii:
Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515
CANADIAN OWNERS: D When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
D The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com
D Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com
D Canada www.toyota.ca

 2007 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION

All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.

i
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-
age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in
order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
others.
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
NOTICE “Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

ii
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to event of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-
read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the
terms of helping you understand how you can receive the event of collision. However, the more you know about
maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this these systems and how to use them properly, the greater
vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is your chances become of surviving an accident without
the most important Section for you and your family to death or serious injury.
read. Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern- the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys- seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
should be aware of. These systems work together along their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,
occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes
each system is enhanced when it is used properly and for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing
together with other systems. No single occupant restraint the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of
system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.
equal level of restraint which these systems can provide
when used together. That is why it is important for you and
your family to understand the purpose and proper use of
each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

iii
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with Event data recorder
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-
bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-
of death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in
airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-
been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a
time of deployment. This is just one example of how the system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
increase the safety they can provide to you and your fami-
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
ly in the event of an accident.
some or all of the following information:
Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section
D Engine speed
1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time
D Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
of ownership of this vehicle.
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D Position of the transmission selector lever
D Whether the driver and front passenger wore the
seat belts or not
D Driver’s seat position
D Front passenger’s occupant classification

iv
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D SRS airbag deployment data However, if necessary Toyota will:

D SRS airbag system diagnostic data D Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
The information above is intended to be used for the pur- performance
pose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike gen- D Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-
eral data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data poses without disclosing details of the vehicle own-
such as conversation between passengers. er, and only when it is deemed necessary
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a D Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-
third party except when: cation information to a non−Toyota organization for
research purposes
D An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-
ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
D Officially requested by the police or other authorities
D Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
D Ordered by the court

v
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

New vehicle warranty Important health and safety

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
information about your Toyota
warranties:
D New vehicle warranty CAUTION
D Emission control systems warranty
D WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
D Others ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s nents contain or emit chemicals known to the
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual State of California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
Supplement”.
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear con-
tain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
Your responsibility for other reproductive harm.
maintenance D Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci- hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-
formation, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

vi
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Accessories, spare parts and Spark ignition system of your

modification of your Toyota Toyota
A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market. ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod- Standard.
ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Installation of a mobile
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota two−way radio system
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi- As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in
tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the your vehicle could affect the following electronic systems,
modification may not be covered under warranty. be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary
measures or special instructions regarding installation.
D Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system
D SRS airbag system
D Seat belt pretensioner system

vii
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Traction control system Tires and loading on your

D “AUTO LSD” system
Toyota
D Vehicle stability control system
D Cruise control system Underinflated or overinflated tire inflation
D Anti−lock brake system pressure and the excess load may result in the
D Electronic throttle control system deterioration of steering ability and braking
D Tire pressure warning system
ability, leading to an accident. Check the tire
inflation pressure periodically and be sure to
keep the load limits given in this Owner’s
Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure
and load limits, see “Checking tire inflation
pressure” on page 553 in Section 7−2 and
“Vehicle load limits” on page 469 in Section 2.

viii
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Scrapping of your Toyota On−pavement and off−road

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
driving tips
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
ordinary passenger car because it is also designed for
are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
off−road use. It has a significantly higher rollover rate than
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-
other types of vehicles. In addition, this vehicle has a
sioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service
higher ground clearance and center of gravity than that of
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design feature
vehicle.
causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing death or
serious injury. Be sure to read “Off−road vehicle
precautions” on page 442 in Section 2 and “Off−road
driving precautions” on page 478 in Section 3.

ix
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under-
neath the deck for several minutes. It does not indicate a
malfunction.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include airbag, seat belt preten-
sioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

x
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Table of contents
1 OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Page
1 Overview of instruments and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Keys and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3 Occupant restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4 Steering wheel and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5 Lights and Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6 Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7 Engine (ignition) switch, Transmission and Parking brake . . . . . . . . 209
8 Audio and hands−free phone systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
9 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
10 Other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
2 INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR TOYOTA . . . . . . . . . . . 441
3 STARTING AND DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
4 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
5 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE . . . . . . 525
6 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
7 DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
2 Engine and Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
3 Electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
8 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
9 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS AND
CAMPER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
xi
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

xii
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 1
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Steering switches and overhead console overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Instrument panel overview

"Bench seat (view A)
1. Side defroster outlet
2. Instrument panel vents (side vents)
3. Instrument cluster
4. Automatic transmission selector lever
5. Instrument panel vents (center vents)
6. Glove boxes
7. Power door lock switches
8. Power window switches
9. Auxiliary boxes
10. Bottle holders
11. Instrument panel light control dial
XS11029 12. Interior light/personal light main switch
13. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
14. Cargo lamp switch
15. Hood lock release lever
16. Parking brake pedal
17. Power rear view mirror control switch
18. Window lock switch

2
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Separate seat (view A)

1. Side defroster outlet
2. Instrument panel vents (side vents)
3. Instrument cluster
4. Instrument panel vents (center vents)
5. Glove boxes
6. Power door lock switches
7. Power window switches
8. Auxiliary boxes
9. A/V input adapter
(with rear seat entertainment system)
10. Power outlet
XS11030 11. Rear vents (Crew Max models)
12. Center console box
13. Ashtray
14. Cup holders
15. Automatic transmission selector lever
16. Instrument panel light control dial
17. Interior light/personal light main switch
18. Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags
off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
19. Cargo lamp switch
20. Hood lock release lever
21. Parking brake pedal
22. Power rear view mirror control switch

3
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

23. Window lock switch

24. Driving position memory switch

4
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Bench seat (view B)

1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Accessory meter control switch
4. Intuitive parking assist switch
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Audio system or navigation system in-
cluding audio system (For the naviga-
tion system, see the separate “Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Air conditioning controls
8. Outside rear view mirror defogger and/
XS11031 or front windshield wiper de−icer
switch/Back window and outside rear
view mirror defogger and/or front wind-
shield wiper de−icer switch
9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
10. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
11. Passenger airbag off switch
(Regular cab models)
12. AUX adapter
13. Ashtray
14. Power outlet
15. Cigarette lighter
16. Front drive control switch knob
(four−wheel drive models)
5
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

17. Power back window switch

(Crew Max models)
18. Tire pressure warning reset switch
19. “VSC OFF” switch
20. Power outlet main switch
(with rear seat entertainment system)
21. Cruise control switch
22. Engine switch
23. Accessory meter
24. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent
system indicator light
25. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

6
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Separate seat with manual air conditioning system (view B)

1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Accessory meter control switches
4. Intuitive parking assist switch
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Audio system or navigation system in-
cluding audio system (For the naviga-
tion system, see the separate “Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Air conditioning controls
8. Outside rear view mirror defogger and/
XS11032 or front windshield wiper de−icer
switch/Back window and outside rear
view mirror defogger and/or front wind-
shield wiper de−icer switch
9. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
10. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
11. Passenger airbag off switch
(Regular cab models)
12. Power outlet
13. AUX adapter
14. Cigarette lighter
15. “TOW/HAUL” switch
16. Front drive control switch knob
(four−wheel drive models)
7
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

17. Power back window switch

(Crew Max models)
18. Tire pressure warning reset switch
19. “VSC OFF” switch
20. Power outlet main switch
(with rear seat entertainment system)
21. Cruise control switch
22. Engine switch
23. Accessory meter
24. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent
system indicator light
25. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights

8
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Separate seat with automatic air conditioning system (view B)

1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Multi−information display/accessory me-
ter control switches
4. Intuitive parking assist switch
5. Emergency flasher switch
6. Audio system or navigation system in-
cluding audio system (For the naviga-
tion system, see the separate “Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual”.)
7. Outside rear view mirror defogger and/
XS11033a or front windshield wiper de−icer
switch/Back window and outside rear
view mirror defogger and/or front wind-
shield wiper de−icer switch
8. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
9. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
10. Seat heater dials
11. Air conditioning controls
12. Power outlet
13. AUX adapter
14. Cigarette lighter
15. “TOW/HAUL” switch
16. Front drive control switch knob
(four−wheel drive models)
9
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Steering switches and

overhead console overview
"Steering switches "Overhead console
17. Power back window switch
(Crew Max models)
18. Tire pressure warning reset switch
19. “VSC OFF” switch
20. Power outlet main switch
(with rear seat entertainment system)
21. Cruise control switch
XS10010a XS11007a
22. Engine switch
23. Accessory meter
24. Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent sys-
tem indicator light
25. Intuitive parking assist indicator lights Type A
1. Audio remote control switches
2. Telephone switches
3. Talk switch

XS11024

Type B

10
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1. Card holder
2. Interior light switch
3. Interior light
4. Sunglass holder
5. Microphone
6. Personal lights
7. Auxiliary boxes
8. Moon roof switches
(on some Crew Max models)

XS11009e

Type C

11
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Instrument cluster overview

"Type A

XS11036a

1. Service reminder indicators and 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge 7. Automatic transmission shift position
indicator lights 5. Trip meter reset knob indicator lights
2. Speedometer 6. Odometer and two trip meters 8. Automatic transmission shift range
3. Fuel gauge display

12
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Type B

XS11002c

1. Tachometer 5. Voltmeter 10. Automatic transmission shift position

2. Service reminder indicators and 6. Oil pressure gauge indicator lights
indicator lights 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge 11. Automatic transmission shift range
3. Speedometer display
8. Trip meter reset knob
4. Fuel gauge 12. Automatic transmission fluid
9. Odometer and two trip meters temperature gauge

13
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Type C

XS11003c

1. Tachometer 5. Voltmeter 10. Automatic transmission shift position

2. Service reminder indicators and 6. Oil pressure gauge indicator lights
indicator lights 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge 11. Automatic transmission shift range
3. Speedometer display
8. Trip meter reset knob
4. Fuel gauge 12. Automatic transmission fluid
9. Multi−information display temperature gauge

14
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

or Master warning light∗ 1

Brake system warning light∗ 1

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗ 1

(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗ 1

or Anti−lock brake system warning light∗ 1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗ 1

Open door warning light∗ 1

Passenger airbag on−off indicator light

SRS warning light∗ 1

Charging system warning light∗ 1 Tire pressure warning light∗ 1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗ 1 Low windshield washer fluid level warning light∗ 1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

Malfunction indicator lamp∗ 1
warning light∗ 1

Engine immobilizer/theft deterrent system

Low fuel level warning light∗ 1 indicator light

15
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off

Tow/haul mode indicator light
indicator light∗ 4

Headlight low beam indicator light “AUTO LSD” indicator light

Tail light indicator light Cruise control indicator light∗ 2

∗1 : For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

Headlight high beam indicator light
buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.
∗2 : If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 262 in
Turn signal indicator lights Section 1−7.
∗3 : If this light flashes, see “Four−wheel drive system” on page
240 in Section 1−7.
High speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗ 3
∗4 : For details, see “—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
(four−wheel drive models)
switch” on page 114 in Section 1−3.
Low speed four−wheel drive indicator light∗ 3
(four−wheel drive models)

Slip indicator light∗1

Vehicle stability control system off indicator

light∗ 1

16
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 2
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

17
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Keys (without engine Keys (with engine

immobilizer system) immobilizer system)

XS12045 XS12046a XS12049

These keys work in every lock. KEY NUMBER PLATE Your vehicle is supplied with the two
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds Your key number is shown on the plate. kinds of keys.
of keys. Keep the plate in a safe place such as 1. Master keys (black)—These keys work
1. Master keys—These keys work in ev- your wallet, not in the vehicle. in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will
ery lock. If you should lose your keys or if you need one of them to make a new key
need additional keys, duplicates can be with a built−in transponder chip.
2. Sub key—This key will not work in the
glove box and tailgate. made by a Toyota dealer using the key 2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not work
number. in the glove box and tailgate.
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub We recommend writing down the key num- A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
key with the attendant. ber and storing it in a safe place. system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
Since the side doors can be locked with- needed to enable the system to function
out a key, you should always carry a correctly, so be careful not to lose these
spare key in case you accidentally lock keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
your keys inside the vehicle. you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

18
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked with-
out a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle. LS12040 LS12041

NOTICE z When starting the engine, do not

use the key with other transponder
When using a key containing a trans-
keys around (including keys of oth-
ponder chip, observe the following
er vehicles) and do not press other
precautions:
key plates against the key grip.
z When starting the engine, do not Otherwise the engine may not start,
use the key with a key ring resting or may stop soon after it starts. If
on the key grip and do not press this happens, remove the key once
the key ring against the key grip. and then insert it again after remov-
Otherwise the engine may not start, ing other transponder keys (includ-
or may stop soon after it starts. ing keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

19
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

z Do not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-
ic waves.
z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
LS12042 z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
LS12043
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.
z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
z Do not use the key with electromag-
netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE
z Do not bend the key grip.
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key num-
ber and storing it in a safe place.

20
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine immobilizer system

Inserting the registered key in the engine
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The
indicator light will go off.
The system is maintenance−free.

LS12044 XS12001 For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the sys-
The engine immobilizer system is a The system is automatically set when the tem or start the engine.
theft prevention system. When you in- key is removed from the engine switch.
sert the key in the engine switch, the The indicator light will start flashing to NOTICE
transponder chip in the key’s head show the system is set.
Do not modify, remove or disas-
transmits an electronic code to the ve- If any of the following indicator conditions semble the engine immobilizer sys-
hicle. The engine will start only when occurs, contact your Toyota dealer. tem. If any unauthorized changes or
the electronic code in the chip corre-
D The indicator light stays on except modifications are made, proper opera-
sponds to the registered ID code for
when the theft deterrent system is set- tion of the system cannot be guaran-
the vehicle.
ting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent teed.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle system” on page 39 in this Section.)
when you leave the vehicle.
D The indicator light does not start flash-
ing when the key is removed from the
engine switch.
D The indicator light flashes inconsistent-
ly.

21
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Wireless remote control—

For vehicles sold in U.S.A. For vehicles sold in Canada

FCCID:MOZRI−21BTY This device complies with RSS−210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
This device complies with Part 15 of the

XS12030
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the (1) this device may not cause interfer-
following two conditions: ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
(1) this device may not cause harmful that may cause undesired operation of
interference, and (2) this device must
the device.
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.

1. “ ” (lock) switch
CAUTION
2. “ ” (unlock) switch
Changes or modifications not ex-
3. “ ” (alarm) switch
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the The wireless remote control system is
user’s authority to operate the equip- designed to lock or unlock all doors or
ment. activate the alarm from a distance with-
in approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the ve-
hicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.

22
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Locking and unlocking

doors
The wireless remote control transmitter is If you lose your transmitter, contact your
an electronic component. Observe the fol- Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
lowing instructions in order not to cause avoid the possibility of theft, or an
damage to the transmitter. accident. (See “If you lose your wireless
D Do not leave the transmitter in places remote control transmitter” on page 523 in
where the temperature becomes high Section 4.)
such as on the dashboard. For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
XS12035a
D Do not disassemble it. This device complies with Part 15 of the
D Avoid knocking it hard against other FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
objects or dropping it. following two conditions:
D Avoid putting it in water. (1) this device may not cause harmful
You can use up to 4 wireless remote con- interference, and (2) this device must
trol transmitters for the same vehicle. accept any interference received, includ- Locking operation
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed ing interference that may cause unde-
information. sired operation.
If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors or alarm, or For vehicles sold in Canada
operate from a normal distance:
NOTE
D Check for closeness to a radio trans- Operation is subject to the following two
XS12034a
mitter such as a radio station or an
conditions:
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter. (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
D The battery may be depleted. Check any interference, including interference
the battery in the transmitter. To
that may cause undesired operation of
replace the battery, see “—Replacing
the device.
battery” on page 25.

Unlocking operation

23
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To lock and unlock all doors, push the To unlock: Push the “ ” (unlock) switch The time for automatic door lock function
switches of the transmitter slowly and once to unlock the driver’s door alone. can be changed. If your vehicle is
securely. Pushing the switch twice within 3 seconds equipped with the multi−information display
To lock: Push the “ ” (lock) switch. All unlocks all the doors simultaneously. Each (For further information, see
time the “ ” (unlock) switch is pushed, “Multi−information display” on page 187 in
the doors are locked simultaneously. At Section 1−6.), it can be changed by
this time one beep will be heard, and the two beeps will be heard, and the turn yourself. For details, contact your Toyota
turn signal lights flash once. signal lights flash twice. dealer.
Check to see that all the doors are se- This double switch operation to unlock all If the “ ” (lock) or “ ” (unlock) switch
curely locked after locking. the doors can be changed to a single
switch operation. If your vehicle is is kept pressed in, the locking the unlock-
If any of the doors is not securely closed,
equipped with the multi−information display ing operation is not repeated. Release the
locking cannot be performed by the “ ”
(For further information, see switch and then push again.
(lock) switch and a beep will sound con-
“Multi−information display” on page 187 in
tinuously for 10 seconds. However, if the
Section 1−6.), it can be changed by
key is in the engine switch, a beep will
yourself. For details, contact your Toyota
not sound.
dealer.
To stop the beep, close all the doors se-
When you unlock all the doors using the
curely or push the “ ” (unlock) switch.
wireless remote control, the Illuminated
The beep and flashing turn signal lights entry system, interior lights, personal
can be disabled. If your vehicle is lights and cargo lamp will be activated.
equipped with the multi−information display (For further information, see “Interior
(For further information, see lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on
“Multi−information display” on page 187 in page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on
Section 1−6.), these can be changed by page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174
yourself. For details, contact your Toyota in Section 1−5.)
dealer. You have 60 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.

24
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Activating alarm —Replacing battery

For replacement, use a CR2032 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

XS12036 vent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
LS12017
components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be care-
ful not to lose the components.
Holding the “ ” (alarm) switch blows 1. Using a coin or equivalent, open the
the horn intermittently and flashes the z Replace only with the same or transmitter case.
headlights, tail lights, turn signal lights, equivalent type recommended by a
interior light and personal lights. Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
The “ ” switch is used to deter vehicle
to the local laws.
theft when you witness anyone attempting
to break into or damage your vehicle.
Replace the transmitter battery by follow-
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop ing these procedures:
alarm midway, push the “ ” switch once
again, lock or unlock a door with transmit-
ter, or turn the engine switch from the
“LOCK” to “ON” position.
The alarm does not work when the engine
switch is in the “ON” position.

25
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

z Do not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter bat-
LS12018 LS12019 tery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the transmitter case.
z Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

transmitter operates properly. If the trans-
mitter still does not operate properly, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
2. Remove the circuit board, then remove 3. Put in a new transmitter battery with
the discharged transmitter battery. positive (+) side up. Install the circuit
board into the transmitter case.
NOTICE Close the transmitter case securely.
z Take care not to damage the circuit
board. NOTICE
z Do not bend the terminals. z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the transmitter bat-
tery are faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.

26
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Side doors
Vehicles with power door lock system—
When the interior light/personal light main
switch and cargo lamp switch is in the
“DOOR” position and the driver’s door is
unlocked using the key, the Illuminated
entry system, interior lights, personal
XS12002 lights and cargo lamp will be activated.
(For further information, see “Interior
XS12003
lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on
page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on
page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174
in Section 1−5.)
When the interior light/personal light main
switch and cargo lamp switch is in the
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY “DOOR” position and any of the doors is LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn opened, the light will come on. After all INSIDE LOCK KNOB
it. the doors are closed, the light remains on Move the lock knob.
for about 15 seconds before fading out.
To lock: Turn the key forward. To lock: Push the knob forward.
(For further information, see “Interior To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
lights” on page 170, “Personal lights” on
Vehicles with power door lock system— page 171, “Illuminated entry system” on The front doors can be opened by pulling
All the doors lock and unlock simulta- page 173 and “Cargo lamp” on page 174 the inside handles even if the lock knobs
neously with the driver’s door. In the driv- in Section 1−5.) are in the locked position.
er’s door lock, turning the key once will
unlock the driver’s door and twice in suc-
cession will unlock all the door simulta-
neously.

27
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

CAUTION POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Do not pull the inside handle of the Push the switch.

front doors while driving. The doors To lock: Push the switch down on the
will open and an accident may occur. right side.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of XS12005a To unlock: Push the switch down on
the left side.
the vehicle.
Operating the switch simultaneously locks
or unlocks all the doors.
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be If you do either of the following, no door
careful not to lock your keys in the ve- can be unlocked with the power door lock
hicle. switch.
Driver’s side
Vehicles with power door lock system— D Lock all the doors with the key or wire-
The door will not lock if the key is left in less remote control transmitter when all
the engine switch when closing the front the doors are closed.
doors. D Open the driver’s door or front passen-
ger’s door and move the inside lock
knobs of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the doors.

XS12006a The power door lock switch can be reset

in the following ways.
D Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position.
D Unlock all the doors with the key or
wireless remote control transmitter.

Passenger’s side

28
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-

senger’s door with the inside lock CAUTION
knob, and then unlock all the doors
with the power door lock switch. Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the ve-

XS12007 hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the ve-
hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-
vent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

(Double cab and Crew Max models)
Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.
When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

29
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Automatic door locking and

unlocking functions Power windows
Vehicles with power door lock system— The windows can be operated with the
Locking function—All doors are automati- switch on either front door (Regular
cally locked when the vehicle speed goes cab models)/each door (Double cab and
above about 20 km/h (12 mph). Crew Max models).
Unlocking function—All doors are automat- The power windows work when the engine
switch is in the “ON” position.
ically unlocked when the selector lever is
moved to the “P” position with the engine XS12051b Key off operation: If both front doors are
started. closed, they work for 43 seconds even
The following functions can be changed: after the engine switch is turned off. They
stop working when either front door is
D Shift position linked auto lock. opened.
D Driver’s door open linked auto unlock. The indicator light (“AUTO”) on the switch
If your vehicle is equipped with the multi− tells you the switch can be operated.
Regular cab models
information display (For further informa- OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
tion, see “Multi−information display” on
page 187 in Section 1−6.), these can be Use the switch on the driver’s door.
changed by yourself. Normal operation: The window moves as
For details, contact your Toyota dealer. long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.

XS12009b

Double cab and Crew Max models

30
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Automatic operation (to open only):

Push the switch completely down and then Window
release it. The window will fully open. To lock
switch
stop the window partway, lightly pull the
switch up and then release it.

XS12054 XS12052b

Regular cab models Driver’s door switch (Regular cab models)

Window
lock
switch

XS12053 XS12013b

Double cab and Crew Max models Driver’s door switches (Double cab and
Crew Max models)

31
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS
Use the switches on the passenger’s
door (Regular cab models)/passenger’s
doors (Double cab and Crew Max mod-
els) or the switch on the driver’s door
that controls each passenger’s window.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passenger’s window
XS12023a XS12024a (Regular cab models)/passenger’s windows
(Double cab and Crew Max models) can-
not be operated.

Passenger’s door switch Passenger’s door switches (Double cab

(Regular cab models) and Crew Max models)
32
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Back window
(on some models)

CAUTION D Be sure to remove the key when

you leave your vehicle.
To avoid death or serious personal D Never leave anyone (particularly a
injury, you must do the following. small child) alone in your vehicle,
D Before you close the power win- especially with the key still in-
dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
serted. Otherwise, he/she could use
the power window switches and get
XS12043a
You must also make sure the trapped in a window. Unattended
heads, hands and other parts of the person (particularly a small child)
bodies of all occupants are kept can be involved in a serious acci-
completely inside the vehicle. If dent.
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious in- To open the back window, push the le-
jury. When anyone closes the power ver and slide the window.
windows, make sure he or she op- After closing the window, make sure it is
erates the windows safely. completely closed.
D When small children are in the ve-
hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervi-
sion. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unex-
pected use of the switches.

33
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Power back window

(Crew Max models)

CAUTION D Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
To avoid serious personal injury, you especially with the key still in-
must do the following. serted. Otherwise, he/she could use
D Before you close the power back the power back window switch and

XS12063 window, always make sure there is

nobody around the power back win-
get trapped in a window. Unat-
tended person (particularly a small
dow. You must also make sure the child) can be involved in a serious
heads, hands and other parts of the accident.
bodies of all occupants are kept D Keep the back window closed while
completely inside the vehicle. If driving. This not only keeps the
someone’s neck, head or hands get luggage from being thrown out but
caught in a closing window, it also prevents exhaust gases from
The back window can be operated with could result in death or serious in- entering the vehicle.
the switch on the instrument panel. jury. When anyone closes the power
The engine switch must be in the “ON” back window, make sure he or she
position. operates the window safely.

Normal operation: The window moves as D When small children are in the ve-
long as you hold the switch. hicle, never let them use the power
back window switch without super-
To open: Push the switch forward. vision.
To close: Pull the switch backward.
D Be sure to remove the key when
The indicator light on the switch tells you you leave your vehicle.
which of the switch can be operated.

34
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Before removing the

tailgate (with rear view
Tailgate— monitor system only)

CAUTION

Prior to removing the tailgate, discon-

nect the wire harnesses between the
rear view monitor system camera and

XS12014 XS12039c the vehicle. Failure to do so could

cause damage to the vehicle and may
result in personal injury.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle up. These connector covers are used when
The support cables will hold the tailgate removing the tailgate, to prevent the wire
horizontal. harness connectors from being contami-
nated. Store the connector covers in the
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 470 glove box in the plastic bag when not
in Section 2 for precautions when loading using.
luggage.
Connector cover A—Gray connector cover
After closing the tailgate, try pulling it to- Connector cover B—White connector cover
ward you to make sure it is securely
locked.

NOTICE
Avoid driving with the tailgate open.

35
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Connector cover B

XS12031b XS12040b XS12048

Connector 2

1. To disconnect the wire harness connec- 2. Attach the connector cover B (white) to 3. Lower the tailgate. Remove the protec-
tors, press and hold the lock of the the connector 2. tor C located in the vehicle bed by
connector 1 and pull apart. The con- pressing the tabs and pulling the pro-
nectors are located on the vehicle body tector. Pull the wire harness D through
frame, behind the bumper. the hole.
Connector 1—Rear view monitor C: Plastic wire protector
system camera wire D: Rear view monitor system camera
harness connector wire harness
(white)
Connector 2—Vehicle wire harness
connector (gray)

36
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Removal

Connector cover A Support cable bracket

XS12042a XS12015b XS12016a

Connector 1 Clip

4. Attach the connector cover A (gray) to 1. Open the tailgate to the angle where 2. Tilt the tailgate to about 45° from
the connector 1 (white). you can release the brackets on the vertical and pull up the right side of
support cables from the lugs on the tailgate to unhook the right side.
both sides.
To unhook the support cable bracket, keep
pulling up the clip on the bracket and
unhook the bracket.

37
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

NOTICE
z Make sure the support brackets are
securely latched on both side pan-
els when installing the tailgate.

XS12017a z With rear view monitor system—

Store the removed tailgate with the XS12047
back−up camera lens facing upward.
Failure to do so could cause dam-
age to the camera lens.

3. Tilt the tailgate up to about 15° open LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
and slide the tailgate a little to the Insert the master key into the keyhole
right to unhook the left side. and turn it to lock or unlock the tail-
To attach the tailgate, follow the removal gate.
procedure in reverse order. To lock: Turn the key clockwise.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling it to- To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.
ward you to make sure it is securely
closed.
We recommend you keep the tailgate
closed when not in use.

38
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Hood Theft deterrent system

XS12018a XS12019b XS12026a

To open the hood: 2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the The system sounds alarm and flashes
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The auxiliary catch lever and lift the lights when forcible entry is detected.
hood will spring up slightly. hood. The alarm is triggered if any of the
Before closing the hood, check to see that doors or hood is forcibly unlocked or
you have not forgotten any tools, rags, opened or the battery terminal is dis-
CAUTION
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure connected and then reconnected when
Before driving, be sure that the hood it locks into place. If necessary, press the vehicle is locked.
is securely closed and locked. Other- down gently on the front edge to lock it. On some models, the alarm also
wise, the hood may open unexpected- sounds, when someone attempts to
ly while driving and an accident may break the side windows.
occur.

39
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SETTING THE SYSTEM WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

1. Turn the key to the “LOCK” position Activating the system
and remove it. The system will sound the alarm under
The indicator light will start flashing when the following conditions:
the key is removed from the engine D If any of the doors is unlocked or
XS12001 switch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 21 in this Section for details.)
opened without the key or wireless re-
mote control transmitter, or if the hood
2. Have all passengers get out of the is forcibly opened
vehicle. D If the battery terminal is disconnected
3. Close and lock all the doors and hood. and then reconnected
The indicator light will remain on when all Vehicles with the glass breakage sensor—
the doors and hood are closed and D The side windows are tapped or bro-
Indicator light locked. ken.
The system will automatically be set after The indicator light will come on when the
30 seconds. When the system is set, the system is activated.
indicator light will start flashing again.
If the alarm has been activated and the
4. After making sure the indicator light key is not in the engine switch, all the
starts flashing, you may leave the ve- doors will re−lock automatically.
hicle.
After one minute, the alarm will automati-
XS12027a Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
cally stop and the indicator light will start
flashing again.
from the inside will activate the system.

Glass breakage sensor (on some models)

40
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Fuel tank cap

Reactivating the alarm TESTING THE SYSTEM
Once set, the system automatically resets 1. Open all the windows.
the alarm after the alarm stops. 2. Set the system as described above.
The alarm will activate again under the The side doors should be locked with
same circumstances described in the key or wireless remote control
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
transmitter. Be sure to wait until the
indicator light goes off or starts flash- XS12038c
ing.
The alarm will be stopped by the following
two ways: 3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
D Turn the engine switch from the
“LOCK” to “ON” position. 4. Stop the alarm as described above.

D Unlock any of the doors with the key 5. Repeat this operation for the other
or wireless remote control transmitter. doors and hood. When testing the This indicates that the fuel filler door
hood, also check that the system is is on the left side of your vehicle.
These ways cancel the system at the activated when the battery terminal is
same time. disconnected and then reconnected.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

41
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not fill a fuel container in the

bed under any circumstances. A
static electricity charge could cause
a spark and fire hazard. The proper
procedure is to place an approved

XS12020a fuel container on the ground away

from the truck for filling. XS12021a

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the 2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
door toward out as shown. the cap slowly counterclockwise,
When refueling, turn off the engine. then pause slightly before removing
it. After removing the cap, hang it
on the cap hanger.
CAUTION
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- when the cap is opened.
low open flames when refueling. When installing the cap, turn it clock-
The fumes are flammable. wise until one click is heard, in order
D When opening the cap, do not re- to fully close it. The cap returns slight-
move the cap quickly. In hot weath- ly when your hand is released from the
er, fuel under pressure could cause cap after closure, however this does
injury by spraying out of the filler not cause any problems.
neck if the cap is suddenly re- If the cap is not tightened securely, the
moved. malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

42
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Electric moon roof (on some

Crew Max models)
The indicator lamp goes off after driving To operate the moon roof, use the
several times. If the indicator lamp does switches on the overhead console.
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as The moon roof works when the engine
soon as possible. switch is in the “ON” position.
The sun shade can be opened or closed
CAUTION

D Make sure the cap is installed se-

XS12058a by hand.
Sliding operation—
curely to prevent fuel spillage in To open: Push and hold the “SLIDE”
the event of an accident. switch for 1 second on the “ ” (rear)
D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank side.
cap for replacement. It is designed
The roof will fully open automatically. To
to regulate fuel tank pressure.
stop the roof partway, push one of the
Sliding operation
moon roof switches briefly.
When you quickly push and release the
switch, the moon roof will open while the
switch is being pushed and stop when
released.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.

XS12059 When the moon roof is opened fully, the

deflector will raise to reduce the entering
of the strong wind. The angle of the de-
flector will be adjusted according to the
vehicle speed.
To close: Push and hold the “SLIDE”
switch for 1 second on the “ ” (front)
Tilting operation side.

43
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The roof will fully close automatically. To Key off operation: If both front doors are Make sure that the moon roof opens and
stop the roof partway, push one of the closed, the moon roof works for about 43 closes automatically. If the moon roof can-
moon roof switches briefly. seconds even after the engine switch is not be operated properly, have it checked
When you quickly push and release the turned off. It stops working when either by your Toyota dealer.
switch, the moon roof will close while the door is opened.
switch is being pushed and stop when Jam protection function:
released. D If something gets caught between the
Tilting operation— moon roof and frame during slide clos-
To tilt up: Push and hold the “TILT” switch ing operation, the moon roof stops and
for 1 second on the “UP” side. opens, and the deflector stops and
raises fully.
The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push one of the D If something gets caught between the
moon roof switches briefly. moon roof and frame during tilting
down operation, the moon roof stops
When you quickly push and release the and opens fully.
switch, the moon roof will tilt up while the
switch is being pushed and stop when If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
released. this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
To tilt down: Push and hold the “TILT”
switch for 1 second on the indented If the moon roof does not operate auto-
(front) side. matically or the jam protection function
does not operate correctly, you should
The roof will fully tilt down automatically. normalize the moon roof.
To stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly. To normalize the moon roof, push and
hold the switch toward the “UP” (tilt up)
When you quickly push and release the
side or “ ” (sliding close) side. The
switch, the moon roof will tilt down while
moon roof will tilt up and down, then re-
the switch is being pushed and stop when
lease the switch.
released.

44
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

OPERATING FROM OUTSIDE

D Before you close the moon roof,
The moon roof can be opened and closed always make sure there is nobody
with the key operation in the driver’s door around the moon roof. You must
keyhole. also make sure nobody places his
To open: Turn the key fully backward and or her head, hands and other parts
hold it. of the body in the roof opening. If
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof someone’s neck, head or hands get
begins to open. To stop in the middle, caught in the closing roof, it could
return the key. result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
To close: Turn the key fully forward and first make sure it is safe to do so.
hold it.
D Be sure to remove the key when
After the door is locked, the moon roof you leave your vehicle.
XS12061 begins to close. To stop in the middle,
return the key. D Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
CAUTION especially with the key still in-
serted. Otherwise, he/she could use
To avoid death or serious personal the moon roof switch and get
injury, you must do the following. trapped in the roof opening. Unat-
tended person (particularly a small
D While the vehicle is moving, always child) can be involved in a serious
keep the heads, hands and other accident.
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Other- D Never sit on top of the vehicle
wise, they could be killed or seri- around the roof opening.
ously injured if the vehicle stops D Never try jamming any part of your
suddenly or if the vehicle is in- body to activate the jam protection
volved in an accident. function intentionally, as it could re-
sult in death or serious injury.

45
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.

46
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 3
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

47
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Front seats—
Seats —Front seat precautions
While the vehicle is being driven, all ve- Driver seat
hicle occupants should have the seatback D Slightly recline the back of the
upright, sit well back in the seat and prop- CAUTION seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
erly wear the seat belts provided. many drivers can achieve the 250
The SRS driver airbag deploys with mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
CAUTION considerable force, and can cause driver seat all the way forward, sim-
death or serious injury especially if ply by reclining the back of the
D Do not drive the vehicle unless the the driver is very close to the airbag. seat somewhat. If reclining the back
occupants are properly seated. Do The National Highway Traffic Safety of your seat makes it hard to see
not allow any passengers to sit on Administration (“NHTSA”) advises: the road, raise yourself by using a
top of a folded−down seatback, or firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
Since the risk zone for driver airbag the seat if your vehicle has that
in the luggage compartment or car- is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
go area. Persons not properly feature.
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
seated and/or not properly re- in.) from your driver airbag provides D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
strained by seat belts can be killed you with a clear margin of safety. tilt it downward. This points the air-
or severely injured in the event of This distance is measured from the bag toward your chest instead of
emergency braking or a collision. center of the steering wheel to your your head and neck.
D During driving, do not allow any breastbone. If you sit less than 250 The seat should be adjusted as rec-
passengers to stand up or move mm (10 in.) away now, you can ommended by NHTSA above, while
around between seats. Otherwise, change your driving position in sever- still maintaining control of the foot
death or severe injuries can occur al ways: pedals, steering wheel, and your view
in the event of emergency braking D Move your seat to the rear as far of the instrument panel controls.
or a collision. as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

48
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Seat adjustment
precautions
Front passenger seats Front seats
CAUTION
CAUTION CAUTION
D Do not adjust the seat while the
The SRS front passenger airbag also The SRS side airbags are installed in vehicle is moving as the seat may
deploys with considerable force, and the driver and front passenger seats. unexpectedly move and cause the
can cause death or serious injury es- Observe the following precautions. driver to lose control of the vehicle.
pecially if the front passenger is very D Do not lean against the front door D Be careful that the seat does not
close to the airbag. The front passen- when the vehicle is in use, since hit a passenger or luggage.
ger seat should be as far from the the side airbag inflates with consid- D After adjusting the seat position, re-
airbag as possible with the seatback erable speed and force. Otherwise, lease the lever and try sliding the
adjusted, so the front passenger sits you may be killed or seriously in- seat forward and backward to make
upright. jured. sure it is locked in position.
D Do not use seat accessories which D After adjusting the seatback, push
cover the area where the side air- your body back against the seat to
bags inflate. Such accessories may make sure the seat is locked in
prevent the side airbags from acti- position.
vating correctly, causing death or D Do not put objects under the seats.
serious injury. Otherwise, the objects may interfere
D Do not modify or replace the seats with the seat−lock mechanism or
or upholstery of the seats with side unexpectedly push up the seat posi-
airbags. Such change may prevent tion adjusting lever and the seat
the side airbag system from activat- may suddenly move, causing the
ing correctly, disable the system, or driver to lose control of the vehicle.
cause the side airbags to inflate ac-
cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.

49
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)

D While adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.

XS13002a XS13001b

Separate seats (Regular cab models) Separate seats (Double cab and Crew Max
models)
50
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

CAUTION
Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the seat to the de- Avoid reclining the seatback any
sired position with slight body pres- more than needed. The seat belts pro-
sure and release the lever. vide maximum protection in a frontal
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING or rear collision when the driver and
LEVER the front passenger are sitting up
Lean forward and pull the lever up. straight and well back in the seats. If
Then lean back to the desired angle you are reclined, the lap belt may
and release the lever. slide past your hips and apply re-
straint forces directly to the abdomen
3. DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION ANGLE or your neck may contact the shoul-
ADJUSTING KNOB der belt. In the event of a frontal
To change the angle of the seat
cushion on the front side, turn the
collision, the more the seat is re-
clined, the greater the risk of death XS13145b
knob either way. or serious injury.
4. DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING
LEVER
To change the height of the seat,
pull up or push down the lever.
5. DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Push the switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will
change while the switch is pushed.

Bench seats (Regular cab models)

51
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1. SIDE SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING

LEVERS CAUTION
Hold the center of the lever and pull Avoid reclining the seatback any
it up. Then slide the seat to the de- more than needed. The seat belts pro-
sired position with slight body pres- vide maximum protection in a frontal
sure and release the lever. or rear collision when the driver and
2. SIDE SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING the front passenger are sitting up
LEVERS straight and well back in the seats. If
Lean forward and pull the lever up. you are reclined, the lap belt may
Then lean back to the desired angle slide past your hips and apply re-
and release the lever. straint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoul-
3. CENTER SEAT SEATBACK ANGLE der belt. In the event of a frontal
ADJUSTING LEVER
XS13003f Pull the lever up. Then lean back to
collision, the more the seat is re-
clined, the greater the risk of death
the desired angle and release the or serious injury.
lever.
4. DRIVER’S SEAT CUSHION ANGLE
ADJUSTING KNOB
To change the angle of the seat
cushion on the front side, turn the
knob either way.
5. DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING
LEVER
To change the height of the seat,
pull up or push down the lever.

Bench seats (Double cab and Crew Max

models)
52
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Adjusting front seats

(power seat)
1. DRIVER’S SEAT LEG SUPPORT
ADJUSTING SWITCH (on some
models)
Operating this switch raises the
front edge of the seat cushion.
Push the switch on either side.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat
cushion at that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
2. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,

XS13097a XS13147a SEAT HEIGHT AND SEAT CUSHION

ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the control switch in the de-
sired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat
at that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.

Driver’s seat Front passenger’s seat

53
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Folding front passenger’s

seat (Regular cab models)
3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING
SWITCH
Move the control switch in the de-
sired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat-
back at that position.
XS13209 XS13160
CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-
vide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up BEFORE FOLDING FRONT 2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes
straight and well back in the seats. If PASSENGER’S SEAT through the hanger when folding the
you are reclined, the lap belt may front passenger’s seat.
slide past your hips and apply re- 1. Push the seat belt hanger down as
straint forces directly to the abdomen far as it will go when it is in the This prevents the shoulder belt from being
or your neck may contact the shoul- raised position. damaged.
der belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is re- CAUTION
clined, the greater the risk of death
or serious injury. The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.
4. SEAT LUMBER SUPPORT ADJUSTING
SWITCH
Push the switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will
change while the switch is pushed.

54
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13004a XS13005a XS13006

1. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le- 2. Pull the seatback folding lever and You should use the seatback as a tempo-
ver and raise the seatback to its up- fold the seatback down. rary table only when the vehicle is
right position. stopped.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious injury:

D Do not set up the seatback table
while the vehicle is moving.
D Do not sit on the folded seatback.
D Make sure the front passenger’s
seat is securely locked in sliding
position when you set the seat as
a temporary table.

55
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Driving position memory

system (on some models)
This system can memorize the position
NOTICE of the driver’s seat, the tilt and tele-
To prevent damage to the seat, avoid scopic steering, and the outside rear
putting heavy loads on the temporary view mirrors, and recall them at the
table. touch of a button.
Buttons “1” and “2” can memorize two
separate positions. XS13098a

SETTING THE DRIVING POSITION

The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position and the selector lever in the “P”
position.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, the tilt and
telescopic steering, and the outside
rear view mirrors to the desired
position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button,
push button “1” or “2” until a beep
in heard.

56
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The system can memorize up to 2 posi- To reactivate the system, push button “1”
tions by repeating the above steps. If step or “2” again.
2 is performed for a button that already If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,
has a memory setting, the previous posi- the memory will be erased and the posi-
tion will be erased and the new position tions will have to be set again.
will be memorized.
To make only slight changes to an already
memorized position, the easiest way is to
XS13099a CAUTION

first activate the memorized position, then D Do not start the vehicle while the
make the desired changes and perform adjustment are being made.
step 2 above. D Take care not to select the wrong
button, or the seat could strike the
rear passenger or hit your body
RECALLING THE MEMORIZED POSITION against the steering wheel. If this
happens, you can stop the move-
When you push button “1” or “2”, a ment by pressing another driving
beep will sound and the driving posi- position memory switch, or de-
tion will be automatically adjusted to pressing the brake pedal.
the position recorded for that button.
The memorized position can be recalled
under the following conditions:
D The engine switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion and the selector lever is in the “P”
position.
D The key is not in the engine switch
and less than 30 seconds have passed
since opening the driver’s door.
To stop the operation, push any driving
position memory button.

57
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Memory call system using

the wireless remote control
transmitter
When the driver’s door is opened, you If you want to set another driving position,
can recall the memorized position using repeat the above procedure. The previous
the wireless remote control system. setting will be erased and the new posi-
This function can be used after setting the tion will be set.
driving position with the following proce-
dure.
XS13213a

REGISTERING THE DRIVING POSITION

ONTO THE WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROL TRANSMITTER
A wireless remote control transmitter can
memorize only one drive position.
The driver’s door must be closed with the
engine switch turned off.
1. Push and hold a previously memo-
rized driving position button “1” or
“2”.
2. While depressing the above−men-
tioned button, push and hold the un-
lock button on the wireless remote
control transmitter until a beep
sounds.

58
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Rear seats—
—Rear seat precautions

CAUTION D When returning the seatback to the

upright position, observe the follow-
D Do not adjust the seat while the ing precautions in order to prevent
vehicle is moving. death or serious injury in a colli-
D Be careful that the seat does not sion or sudden stop:

XS13214a hit a passenger or luggage.

D Be careful not to get your hands or
Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
feet pinched in the seat. ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
D After adjusting the seat position, re- seat belt from operating properly.
lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make Make sure the seat belts are not
sure it is locked in position. twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
CANCELING THE DRIVING POSITION D After adjusting the seatback, push position and are ready to use.
ONTO THE WIRELESS REMOTE your body back against the seat to
CONTROL TRANSMITTER make sure the seat is locked in
position. Folding down the rear seatbacks will en-
The driver’s door must be closed with the large the luggage compartment. See
engine switch turned off. “—Stowage precautions” on page 470 in
1. Push and hold the “SET” switch. Section 2 for precautions when loading
2. Push and hold the unlock button on luggage.
the wireless remote control transmit-
ter until two beeps sound.
The memory on the wireless remote con-
trol transmitter is disabled. To enable it
again, repeat the above procedure.

59
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Adjusting rear seats

(Crew Max models)
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVERS
D Avoid reclining the seatback any
Hold the center of the lever and pull it more than needed. The seat belts
up. Then slide the seat to the desired provide maximum protection in a
position with slight body pressure and frontal or rear collision when the
release the lever. passengers are sitting up straight
2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING and well back in the seats. If you
LEVERS are reclined, the lap belt may slide
Pull the lever up. Then lean back to the past your hips and apply restraint
desired angle and release the lever. forces directly to the abdomen or
your neck may contact the shoulder
CAUTION belt. In the event of a frontal colli-
sion, the more the seat is reclined,
D Do not adjust the seat while the the greater the risk of death or se-

XS13158 vehicle is moving.

D Be careful that the seat does not
rious injury.
D After adjusting the seat position, re-
hit a passenger or luggage. lease the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.
D After adjusting the seatback, push
your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

NOTICE
Do not fold the rear seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.

60
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Raising rear seat cushion

(Double cab models)

XS13146b XS13122 XS13007

BEFORE RAISING REAR SEAT CUSHION 2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes 3. Raising rear seat cushion.
1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as through the hanger when folding the Pull the lever on the side of the bottom
shown in the illustration. rear seat. cushion and lift up the cushion until it
This prevents the seat belt buckles from This prevents the shoulder belt from being locks.
falling out when you fold the seatback. damaged. When returning the rear seat, pull the le-
ver on the back of the bottom cushion
NOTICE CAUTION and pull the cushion downward until it
locks.
The seat belt and buckles must be The seat belt must be removed from
stowed before you raise the rear the hanger when the seat belt is in Folding down the rear seats will enlarge
seats cushion. use. the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
precautions” on page 470 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage.

61
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Folding down rear seats

(Crew Max models)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the box under
the seat, do not sit on the box when
the bottom cushion is in the raised
position.
XS13157 XS13161
CAUTION

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-
cautions in order to prevent death or
serious injury in a collision or sud-
den stop: BEFORE FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS 2. Make sure the shoulder belt passes
D Make sure the bottom cushion is 1. Stow the rear seat belt buckles as through the hanger when folding the
shown in the illustration. rear seat.
securely locked by trying to pull up
the edge of the bottom cushion. This prevents the seat belt buckles from This prevents the shoulder belt from being
Failure to do so will prevent the falling out when you fold the seatback. damaged.
seat belt from operation properly.
D Make sure the seat belts are not NOTICE CAUTION
twisted or caught under the bottom
To prevent damage to the seat belt The seat belt must be removed from
cushion and are arranged in their
buckles, the seat belt buckles must the hanger when the seat belt is in
proper position and are ready to
be stowed before you fold the seat- use.
use.
back.

62
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Folding down the rear seats will enlarge

the luggage compartment. See “—Stowage CAUTION
precautions” on page 470 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage. When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the follow-
ing precautions in order to prevent

XS13159 death or serious injury in a collision

or sudden stop:
D Make sure the seatback is securely
locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
D Make sure the seat belts are not
FOLDING DOWN REAR SEATS twisted or caught in the seatback
Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever and are arranged in their proper
to unlock the seatback and fold the position and are ready to use.
seatback down until it locks.

CAUTION

Be careful that the seat does not hit

a passenger or luggage.

NOTICE
Do not fold the rear seat seatback
forward with the luggage cover hooks
attached.

63
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Head restraints

XS13008 XS13009 XS13196

Front separate seats Front bench seat Rear seats (Crew Max models)

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.

XS13152 XS13010 Front separate seats (with seat heater)

only—
You can pull up or push down the head
restraint. You can also move the front
head restraint forward or backward. If
such adjustment is desired, pull or push
the base of the head restraint.

Front separate seats (with seat heater) Rear seats (Double cab models)

64
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Armrest (Crew Max models) Seat heaters

Rear center head restraint and front cen-
ter head restraint (bench seats)—When an
occupant sits on the center position of the
rear seats (Double cab and Crew Max
models) or the front seats (bench seats),
always pull up the center head restraint to
the lock position.
The head restraint is most effective when
XS13207 XS13100c
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recom-
mended.

CAUTION

D Adjust the center of the head re- To use the armrest, pull it down as To turn on the seat heater, move the
straint so that it is closest to the shown in the illustrations. dial upward (“L” dial for the left front
top of your ears. seat or “R” dial for the right front
NOTICE seat). At this time, the indicator light
D After adjusting the head restraint, will illuminate to indicate the seat heat-
make sure it is locked in position. To prevent damage to the armrest,
er is operating.
avoid putting heavy loads on it.
D Do not drive with the head re- Move the dial upward or downward to ad-
straints removed. just to the desired temperature.
To turn it off, move the dial downward
until it stops.
When the seat heater is not in use, move
the dial fully downward.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position to operate seat heaters.

65
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
CAUTION NOTICE passengers in the vehicle be properly re-
z Do not put unevenly weighted ob- strained at all times with the seat belts
Occupants must use caution when op- provided. Failure to do so could increase
jects on the seat and do not stick
erating the seat heater because it the chance of injury and/or the severity of
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
may make them feel too hot or cause injury in accidents.
into the seat.
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for; z When cleaning the seats, do not The seat belts provided for your vehicle
use organic substances (paint thin- are designed for people of adult size,
D Babies, small children, elderly per- ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline, large enough to properly wear them.
sons, sick persons or persons with
etc.). They may damage the heater Child. Use a child restraint system ap-
physical disabilities
and seat surface. propriate for the child until the child be-
D Persons who have sensitive skin z To prevent the battery from being comes large enough to properly wear the
D Persons who are exhausted discharged, turn the switch off vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
D Persons who have taken alcohol or when the engine is not running. on page 115 in this Section for details.
drugs which induce sleep (sleeping REGULAR CAB MODELS—
drug, cold remedy, etc.) If a child is too large for a child restraint
To prevent the seat from overheating, system, the child should sit in the seat
do not use the seat heater with a and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
blanket, cushion, or other insulating seat belt.
objects which cover the seat. DOUBLE CAB AND CREW MAX
MODELS—
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.

66
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an CAUTION D Be careful not to damage the belt
accident occurs and the seat belts are not webbing or hardware. Take care that
worn properly, the force of the rapid infla- Persons should ride in their seats they do not get caught or pinched
tion of the airbag may cause death or properly wearing their seat belts in the seat or side doors.
serious injury to the child. whenever the vehicle is moving. D Inspect the belt system periodically.
Otherwise, they are much more likely Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
Do not allow any children to stand up or to suffer serious bodily injury or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An parts. Damaged parts should be re-
death in the event of sudden braking placed. Do not disassemble or
unrestrained child could suffer serious in- or a collision.
jury or death during emergency braking or modify the system.
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit When using the seat belts, observe D Keep the belts clean and dry. If
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms the following: they need cleaning, use a mild soap
does not provide sufficient restraint. D Use the belt for only one person at solution or lukewarm water. Never
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the a time. Do not use a single belt for use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for two or more people—even children. ers, or allow them to come into
specific recommendations. The lap belt D Avoid reclining the seatback any contact with the belts—they may
should be worn securely and as low as more than needed. The seat belts severely weaken the belts. (See
possible over the hips and not on the provide maximum protection in a “Cleaning the interior” on page 529
waist. frontal or rear collision when the in Section 5.)
Injured person. Toyota recommends the driver and the front passenger are D Replace the belt assembly (includ-
use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju- sitting up straight and well back in ing bolts) if it has been used in a
ry, first check with your doctor for specific the seats. If you are reclined, the severe impact. The entire assembly
recommendations lap belt may slide past your hips should be replaced even if damage
and apply restraint forces directly is not obvious.
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the great-
er the risk of death or serious inju-
ry.

67
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-
pletely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This fea-
ture is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
XS13012a XS13125 Tab
restraint” on page 115 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
Buckle retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.

USING FRONT SEAT BELT HANGERS Adjust the seat as needed and sit up CAUTION
(Regular cab models) straight and well back in the seat. To
Raise the front seat belt hanger until it fasten your belt, pull it out of the re- D After inserting the tab, make sure
locks before you fasten the front seat tractor and insert the tab into the the tab and buckle are locked and
belt. buckle. that the belt is not twisted.
You will hear a click when the seat belt You will hear a click when the tab locks D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
hanger locks in raised position. into the buckle. the buckle as this may prevent you
The seat belt length automatically adjusts from properly latching the tab and
CAUTION to your size and the seat position. buckle.
The retractor will lock the belt during a D If the seat belt does not function
Make sure the seat belt hanger is sudden stop or on impact. It also may normally, immediately contact your
secured in the raised position before lock if you lean forward too quickly. A Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
you fasten the seat belt. If it is not, slow, easy motion will allow the belt to until the seat belt is fixed, because
the seat belt may not work properly. extend, and you can move around freely. it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

68
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION
Take up
slack
D Both high−positioned lap belts and
loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to

XS13126
Too high
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event. XS13011
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on hips as possible.
D Do not place the shoulder belt un-
Keep as low on der your arm.
hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
shoulder belts. anchor (Double cab and Crew Max
Position the lap belt as low as possible models)—
on your hips—not on your waist, then ad- Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder your size.
portion upward through the latch plate. To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

69
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Stowing the rear seat belt

buckles (Double cab and
Crew Max models)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to XS13124 XS13146b
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in a colli-
sion.

Double cab models

To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it re-
tracts.

XS13157

Crew Max models

70
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Seat belt extender

The rear seat belt buckles can be If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-
stowed when not in use. curely because they are not long enough,
Seat belt buckles must be stowed before a personalized seat belt extender is avail-
you fold the seatback. able from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer so
that the dealer can order the proper re-
quired length for the extender. Bring the
XS13127
heaviest coat you expect to wear for prop-
er measurement and selection of length.
Additional ordering information is available
at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
D If the seat belt extender has been
When using the seat belt extender, connected to the driver’s seat belt
observe the following precautions. buckle without the driver actually
Failure to follow these instructions wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-
could reduce the effectiveness of the er’s airbag system will judge that
seat belt restraint system in case of the driver is wearing it. In this
an accident, increasing the chance of case, the driver’s airbag may not
death or serious injury. activate correctly, causing death or
D Remember that the extender pro- serious injury in the event of colli-
vided for you may not be safe when sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt
used on a different vehicle, for with the seat belt extender.
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one origi-
nally intended.

71
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Make sure the passenger airbag on− D Do not use the seat belt extender
off indicator light indicates “ON” when installing a child restraint
when using the seat belt extender system on the front or rear passen-
for the front passenger seat. If the ger seat. If installing a child re-
indicator light indicates “OFF”, dis- straint system with the seat belt ex-
tender connected to the seat belt,
connect the extender tongue from
the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
XS13128
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat
could cause death or serious injury
belt extender after making sure the to the child or other passengers in
indicator light indicates “ON”. If the event of collision.
you use the seat belt extender
while the indicator light indicates
“OFF”, the front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front pas- To connect the extender to the seat
senger side may not activate cor- belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
rectly, which could cause death or buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
serious injury in the event of colli- the buckle release buttons of the ex-
sion. tender and the seat belt are both facing
D Do not use the seat belt extender outward as shown.
if it is not absolutely necessary. You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extend-
er itself.

72
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Seat belt pretensioners

As far as the seat belt extender on the The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
front passenger side is concerned, do not er will not activate if no passenger is
fail to disconnect the extender from the detected in the front passenger seat by
seat belt after the above operation in or- the front passenger occupant classification
der to activate the front passenger airbag system. However, the front passenger’s
correctly when getting into the vehicle seat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-
next time.
When not in use, remove the extender
XS13020 gage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up regardless of the presence
and store in the vehicle for future use. of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
CAUTION
classification system” on page 105 in this
D After inserting the tab, make sure Section.)
the tab and buckle are locked and The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-
that the lap and shoulder portions The driver and front passenger seat bags may not operate together in all colli-
of the belt and the seat belt extend- belt pretensioners are designed to be sions.
er are not twisted. activated in response to a severe fron-
tal impact. On vehicles equipped with
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in curtain shield airbags, the pretensioners
the buckle as this may prevent you are also activated during vehicle roll
from properly latching the tab and over.
buckle.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal
D If the seat belt does not function impact or a vehicle roll over, the front
normally, immediately contact your seat belts are quickly drawn back by the
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat retractors so that the belts snugly restrain
until the seat belt is fixed, because the occupants.
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

73
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

8. SRS warning light

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-
sor and airbag sensor.

XS13132a XS13139 When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
The seat belt pretensioners will not oper- The seat belt pretensioner system con- remain locked.
ate in a vehicle rollover if the “RSCA sists mainly of the following components
OFF” indicator light is on. For details, see and their locations are shown in the il- CAUTION
“—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags lustration.
off switch” on page 114 in this Section. 1. Front airbag sensors D Do not modify, remove, strike or
open the seat belt pretensioner as-
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light semblies, airbag sensor or sur-
3. Front passenger occupant classification rounding area or wiring. Failure to
ECU follow these instructions may pre-
vent the seat belt pretensioners
4. Load sensor
from activating correctly, cause sud-
5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies den operation of the system or dis-
6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle able the system, which could result
switch in death or serious injury. Consult
your Toyota dealer about any repair
7. Airbag sensor assembly and modification.

74
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not modify or change the sus- NOTICE

pension system. Such changes may
Do not perform any of the following
cause the driver airbag, front pas-
changes without consulting your
senger airbag, seat belt pretension-
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
ers and curtain shield airbags to
interfere with proper operation of the
inflate accidentally, which could re-
sult in death or serious injury.
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
XS13135a
D Do not use tires or wheels other z Installation of electronic devices
than the manufacturer’s recom-
such as a mobile two−way radio,
mended size. Such a use may cause
cassette tape player or compact
the driver airbag, front passenger
disc player
airbag, seat belt pretensioners and
curtain shield airbags to inflate ac- z Repairs on or near the front seat
cidentally, which could result in belt pretensioner assemblies This indicator comes on when the en-
death or serious injury. For details, z Modification of the suspension sys- gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
see “Checking and replacing tires” tem tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
on page 556 in Section 7−2. This means the seat belt pretensioners
z Modification of the front end struc-
ture are operating properly.
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or con-
sole

75
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

This warning light system monitors the D If any seat belt does not retract or can
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag not be pulled out due to a malfunction
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag or activation of the relevant seat belt
sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, pretensioner.
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
belt buckle switch, front passenger surrounding area has been damaged.
occupant classification system∗ , passenger
airbag off switch, passenger airbag on−off
XS13121
indicator light, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, “RSCA OFF”
indicator light, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. (For details, see “Service
reminder indicators and warning buzzers”
on page 197 in Section 1−6.)
∗ : The front passenger occupant classifica- In the following cases, contact your Toyota
tion system includes the front passenger dealer as soon as possible:
occupant classification ECU, load sensor, D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch. illustration) was involved in an accident
If any of the following conditions occurs, that was not severe enough to cause
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your D Either seat belt pretensioner assembly
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. or surrounding area is scratched,
D The light does not come on when the cracked, or otherwise damaged.
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.
D The light comes on while driving.

76
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag (Regular cab
models)
Vehicles with bench seats—The SRS air-
bags are designed to protect the driver CAUTION
and right front passenger and they are not
designed to protect an occupant in the D The SRS front airbag system is de-
front center seating position. signed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
In response to a severe frontal impact,
XS13130a the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries inflating airbags if they do not wear
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s the available seat belts properly.
head or chest caused by hitting the ve- During sudden braking just before
hicle interior. a collision, an unrestrained driver
The SRS front passenger airbag will not or front passenger can move for-
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- activate if there is no passenger sitting in ward into direct contact with or
the right front passenger seat. However, close proximity to the airbag which
tem) front airbags are designed to pro-
vide further protection for the driver the front passenger airbag may deploy if may then deploy during the colli-
and right front passenger in addition to luggage is put in the seat. (As for the sion. To ensure maximum protection
front passenger occupant classification in an accident, the driver and all
the primary safety protection provided
by the seat belts. system, see “—Front passenger occupant passengers in the vehicle must
classification system” on page 105 in this wear their seat belts properly. Wear-
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED Section.) ing a seat belt properly during an
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor accident reduces the chances of
Always wear your seat belt properly.
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The death or serious injury or being
airbag system controls airbag deployment thrown out of the vehicle. For in-
power for the driver and right front pas- structions and precautions concern-
senger. The driver airbag system consists ing the seat belt system, see “Seat
of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. belts” on page 66 in this Section.
The front passenger’s airbag system con-
sists of the front passenger occupant clas-
sification sensor etc.

77
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Improperly seated and/or restrained CAUTION

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the D Do not turn off the passenger air-
deploying airbags. An infant or bag off switch except when a mem-
child who is too small to use a seat ber of a passenger risk group iden-
belt should be properly secured
using a child restraint system. For XS13218 tified in TABLE 1 is occupying the
right front passenger seating posi-
instructions concerning the tion.
installation of a child restraint D When the passenger airbag off
system, see “Child restraint” on switch is turned off, the front pas-
page 115 in this Section. Indicator light senger airbag will not inflate in a
collision and turning off the front
passenger airbag can reduce the
The passenger airbag system is occupant protection which your ve-
equipped with a off switch and indica- hicle safety systems can provide to
tor light. Turning the passenger airbag you in certain accidents and in-
off switch clockwise to the “AUTO” crease the likelihood of death or
position makes the front passenger air- serious injuries.
bag system operational. To disable the
front passenger airbag system, turn the
off switch counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove the key. The
“OFF” indicator light will come on
when the front passenger airbag system
has been disabled.
See “—Passenger airbag off switch” on
page 86 in this Section for detail.

78
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The SRS front airbags are designed to

TABLE 1: A PASSENGER RISK GROUP
deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the front seat because: sions where the magnitude and duration
D Vehicle has no rear seat; of the forward deceleration of the ve-
hicle exceeds the designed threshold
D Vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear−facing infant seat; level.
or
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
D The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, severity of the impact is above the de-
makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver signed threshold level, comparable to an
can constantly monitor the child’s condition. approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: into a fixed barrier that does not move or
D Vehicle has no rear seat: deform.
D Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, However, this threshold velocity will be
children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
available in the rear seat(s) of vehicle; or an object, such as a parked vehicle or
D The child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician, sign pole, which can move or deform on
makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
constantly monitor the child’s condition. underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which according to his or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
or her physician: It is possible that in some collisions
D Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger: and where the forward deceleration of the ve-
D Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the hicle is very close to the designed thresh-
potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if old level, the SRS front airbags and seat
belted, to hit the dashboard, or windshield in a crash. belt pretensioners may not activate togeth-
er.
For more detailed information concerning about the passenger risk group, please Always wear your seat belts properly.
contact NHTSA at 1−888−327−4236 or Transport Canada at 1−800−333−0371.

79
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Hitting a curb, Falling into or

edge of pavement jumping over a
Collision from the rear or hard surface
XS13118 XS13110
deep hole
XS13141a
Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover
Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags are not generally The SRS front airbags may also deploy The SRS front airbag system consists
designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- if a serious impact occurs to the under- mainly of the following components, and
volved in a side or rear collision, if it side of your vehicle. Some examples their locations are shown in the illustra-
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low− are shown in the illustration. tion.
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a 1. Front airbag sensors
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, de- 2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
ployment of the SRS front airbags may 3. Airbag module for front passenger
occur. (airbag and inflator)
4. Passenger airbag off switch
5. Front passenger occupant classification
ECU
6. Load sensor
7. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch
8. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
80
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

9. Driver’s seat position sensor When the airbags inflate, they produce a Deployment of the airbags happens in a
10. Airbag sensor assembly loud noise and release some smoke and fraction of a second, so the airbags must
residue along with non−toxic gas. This inflate with considerable force. While the
11. Airbag module for driver does not indicate a fire. This smoke may system is designed to reduce serious inju-
(airbag and inflator) remain inside the vehicle for some time, ries, primarily to the head and chest, it
12. SRS warning light and may cause some minor irritation to may also cause other, less severe injuries
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
safing sensor and airbag sensor. wash off any residue as soon as possible are usually in the nature of minor burns
to prevent any potential skin irritation with or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the soap and water. If you can safely exit a deploying airbag can cause more seri-
forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an from the vehicle, you should do so imme- ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s
impact results in a forward deceleration diately. hands, arms, chest or head is in close
beyond the designed threshold level, the proximity to the airbag module at the time
system triggers the airbag inflators. At this of deployment. This is why it is important
time a chemical reaction in the inflators for the occupant to: avoid placing any
very quickly fills the airbags with non−tox- object or part of the body between the
ic gas to help restrain the forward motion occupant and the airbag module; sit
of the occupants. The front airbags then straight and well back into the seat; wear
quickly deflate, so that there is no ob- the available seat belt properly; and sit as
struction of the driver’s vision should it be far as possible from the airbag module,
necessary to continue driving. while still maintaining control of the ve-
hicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflat-
ing airbag.

81
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION For instructions and precautions con- CAUTION

cerning the seating position, see
The driver or front passenger who is “—Front seat precautions” on page A member of a passenger risk group
too close to the steering wheel or 48 in this Section. should never sit or be occupied in
dashboard during airbag deployment the right front passenger seat with
can be killed or seriously injured. airbag off switch in the “AUTO” posi-
Toyota strongly recommends that: tion. (For details, see “—SRS driver
D The driver sit as far back as pos- airbag and front passenger airbag” on
sible from the steering wheel while page 77 in this Section.)
still maintaining control of the ve-
hicle.
D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.
D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.
D If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without the driver actually
wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-
er’s airbag system will judge that
the driver is wearing it. In this
case, the driver’s airbag may not
activate correctly, causing death or
serious injury in the event of colli-
sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.

82
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13018 XS13019 XS13022b

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat D Toyota strongly recommends that all D Do not put anything or any part of
or lean against the dashboard when infants and children be placed in your body on or in front of the
the vehicle is in use, since the the rear seat of the vehicle and be dashboard or steering wheel pad
front passenger airbag could inflate properly restrained. that houses the front airbag sys-
with considerable speed and force. D Do not hold a child on your lap or tem. They might restrict inflation or
Anyone who is up against, or very in your arms. Use a child restraint cause death or serious injury as
close to, an airbag when it inflates, system in the seat. For instructions they are projected rearward by the
can be killed or seriously injured. concerning the installation of a force of the deploying airbags. Like-
Sit up straight and well back in the child restraint system, see “Child wise, the driver and front passenger
seat, and always use your seat belt restraint” on page 115 in this Sec- should not hold objects in their
properly. tion. arms or on their knees.

83
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not modify or remove any wir- D Do not use tires or wheels other NOTICE
ing. Do not modify, remove, strike than the manufacturer’s recom-
Do not perform any of the following
or open any components such as mended size. Such a use may cause
changes without consulting your
the steering wheel pad, steering the driver airbag, front passenger
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
wheel, column cover, dashboard airbag, seat belt pretensioners and
interfere with proper operation of the
near the front passenger airbag, curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-
SRS airbag system in some cases.
front passenger airbag cover, front cidentally, which could result in
passenger airbag or airbag sensor death or serious injury. For details, z Installation of electronic devices
assembly. Doing so may prevent the see “Checking and replacing tires” such as a mobile two−way radio,
front airbag system from activating on page 556 in Section 7−2. cassette tape player or compact
correctly, cause sudden activation disc player
Failure to follow these instructions
of the system or disable the sys- can result in death or serious injury. z Modification of the suspension sys-
tem, which could result in death or Consult your Toyota dealer about any tem
serious injury. repair and modification. z Modification of the front end struc-
D Do not modify or change the sus- If you wish to modify your vehicle for ture
pension system. Such changes may a person with a physical disability, z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
cause the driver airbag, front pas- consult your Toyota dealer. It may bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
senger airbag, seat belt pretension- dangerously interfere with the SRS winches or any other equipment to
ers and curtain shield airbags to front airbags operation. the front end
inflate accidentally, which could re-
sult in death or serious injury. z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, con-
sole, steering column, steering
wheel, front passenger’s seat or
dashboard near the front passenger
airbag

84
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

This warning light system monitors the The SRS warning light will come on and
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag passenger airbag on−off indicator light will
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in
sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, the front passenger occupant classification
driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front system.
passenger occupant classification system∗ ,
XS13135a passenger airbag off switch, passenger
airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA
OFF” indicator light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.)
∗ : The front passenger occupant classifica-
This indicator comes on when the en- tion system includes the front passenger
gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi- occupant classification ECU, load sensor
tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds. and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
This means the SRS airbags are operat- switch.
ing properly. If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.
D The light comes on while driving.

85
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Passenger airbag off switch

(Regular cab models)
Operate off switch as follows:
Insert key into the keyhole.
To turn the front passenger airbag
on—Turn the key clockwise to the “AUTO”
position. At this time, the indicator light

XS13134a XS13218 condition varies depending on the

occupant in the right front passenger seat.
(For details, see “—Front passenger
occupant classification system” on page
105 in this Section.)
Indicator light To turn the front passenger airbag
off—Turn the key counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove it. At this time,
In the following cases, contact your Toyota This off switch is designed to disable the “OFF” indicator light comes on. If the
dealer as soon as possible: the front passenger airbag in order to key is removed at any other position than
allow usage, if necessary, when a “OFF”, the switch will automatically return
D The SRS airbags have been inflated.
member of a passenger risk group to the “AUTO” position.
D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the identified in TABLE 1 is occupying the
illustration) was involved in an accident right front passenger seating position.
that was not severe enough to cause (For details, see “—SRS driver airbag
the SRS airbags to inflate. and front passenger airbag” on page 77
D The pad section of the steering wheel in this Section.)
or front passenger airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

86
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag
(Double cab and Crew Max models)

D When the passenger airbag off

switch is turned off, the front pas-
senger airbag will not inflate in a
collision and turning off the front
passenger airbag can reduce the

XS13215 occupant protection which your ve-

hicle safety systems can provide to XS13131
you in certain accidents and in-
crease the likelihood of death or
serious personal injuries.
For details, see “—SRS driver airbag
and front passenger airbag” on page
77 in this Section.
The SRS warning light and the passen- The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
ger airbag on−off indicator light will in- tem) front airbags are designed to pro-
dicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction vide further protection for the driver
in the passenger airbag off switch. and right front passenger in addition to
the primary safety protection provided
CAUTION by the seat belts.

D Do not turn off the passenger air-

bag off switch except when a mem-
ber of a passenger risk group iden-
tified in TABLE 1 is occupying the
right front passenger seating posi-
tion.

87
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED The SRS front passenger airbag will not
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor activate if there is no passenger sitting in CAUTION
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The the right front passenger seat. However,
airbag system controls airbag deployment the front passenger airbag may deploy if D The SRS front airbag system is de-
power for the driver and front passenger. luggage is put in the seat. (As for the signed only as a supplement to the
The driver airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification primary protection of the driver and
driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front system, see “—Front passenger occupant front passenger seat belt systems.
passenger’s airbag system consists of the classification system” on page 110 in this The driver and front passenger can
front passenger occupant classification Section.) be killed or seriously injured by the
sensor etc. inflating airbags if they do not wear
Always wear your seat belt properly. the available seat belts properly.
Vehicles with bench seats—The SRS air- During sudden braking just before
bags are designed to protect the driver a collision, an unrestrained driver
and right front passenger, and they are or front passenger can move for-
not designed to protect an occupant in the ward into direct contact with or
front center seating position. close proximity to the airbag which
In response to a severe frontal impact, may then deploy during the colli-
the SRS front airbags work with the seat sion. To ensure maximum protection
belts to help reduce injury by inflating. in an accident, the driver and all
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries passengers in the vehicle must
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s wear their seat belts properly. Wear-
head or chest caused by hitting the ve- ing a seat belt properly during an
hicle interior. accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For in-
structions and precautions concern-
ing the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” on page 66 in this Section.

88
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The SRS front airbags are designed to

D Improperly seated and/or restrained deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-
infants and children can be killed sions where the magnitude and duration
or seriously injured by the of the forward deceleration of the ve-
deploying airbags. An infant or hicle exceeds the designed threshold
child who is too small to use a seat level. Collision from the
belt should be properly secured
using a child restraint system.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the de-
XS13119 rear

Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in signed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision Collision from
the rear seat of the vehicle and the side
properly restrained. The rear seat is when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or Vehicle rollover
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the deform.
installation of a child restraint However, this threshold velocity will be The SRS front airbags are not generally
system, see “Child restraint” on considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-
page 115 in this Section. an object, such as a parked vehicle or volved in a side or rear collision, if it
sign pole, which can move or deform on rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
underride collision (e.g. a collision in collision of any type causes sufficient
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
ployment of the SRS front airbags may
It is possible that in some collisions occur.
where the forward deceleration of the ve-
hicle is very close to the designed thresh-
old level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

89
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

8. Driver’s seat position sensor

9. Airbag sensor assembly
10. Airbag module for driver
Hitting a curb, Falling into or
edge of pavement (airbag and inflator)
jumping over a
or hard surface deep hole 11. SRS warning light
XS13111 XS13104a The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the
forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an
impact results in a forward deceleration
Landing hard or vehicle falling beyond the designed threshold level, the
system triggers the airbag inflators. At this
time a chemical reaction in the inflators
The SRS front airbags may also deploy The SRS front airbag system consists very quickly fills the airbags with non−tox-
if a serious impact occurs to the under- mainly of the following components, and ic gas to help restrain the forward motion
side of your vehicle. Some examples their locations are shown in the illustra- of the occupants. The front airbags then
are shown in the illustration. tion. quickly deflate, so that there is no ob-
1. Front airbag sensors struction of the driver’s vision should it be
necessary to continue driving.
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
3. Airbag module for front passenger loud noise and release some smoke and
(airbag and inflator) residue along with non−toxic gas. This
4. Front passenger occupant classification does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
ECU remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
5. Load sensor the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle wash off any residue as soon as possible
switch to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
diately.
90
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must CAUTION For instructions and precautions con-
inflate with considerable force. While the cerning the seating position, see
system is designed to reduce serious inju- The driver or front passenger who is “—Front seat precautions” on page
ries, primarily to the head and chest, it too close to the steering wheel or 48 in this Section.
may also cause other, less severe injuries dashboard during airbag deployment
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These can be killed or seriously injured.
are usually in the nature of minor burns Toyota strongly recommends that:
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of D The driver sit as far back as pos-
a deploying airbag can cause more seri- sible from the steering wheel while
ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s still maintaining control of the ve-
hands, arms, chest or head is in close hicle.
proximity to the airbag module at the time D The front passenger sit as far back
of deployment. This is why it is important as possible from the dashboard.
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the D All vehicle occupants be properly
occupant and the airbag module; sit restrained using the available seat
straight and well back into the seat; wear belts.
the available seat belt properly; and sit as D If the seat belt extender has been
far as possible from the airbag module, connected to the driver’s seat belt
while still maintaining control of the ve- buckle without the driver actually
hicle. wearing the seat belt, the SRS driv-
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel er’s airbag system will judge that
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot the driver is wearing it. In this
for several minutes after deployment, so case, the driver’s airbag may not
do not touch! The airbags inflate only activate correctly, causing death or
once. The windshield may be damaged by serious injury in the event of colli-
absorbing some of the force of the inflat- sion. Be sure to wear the seat belt
ing airbag. with the seat belt extender.

91
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13018 XS13019 XS13022b

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat D Toyota strongly recommends that all D Do not put anything or any part of
or lean against the dashboard when infants and children be placed in your body on or in front of the
the vehicle is in use, since the the rear seat of the vehicle and be dashboard or steering wheel pad
front passenger airbag could inflate properly restrained. that houses the front airbag sys-
with considerable speed and force. D Do not hold a child on your lap or tem. They might restrict inflation or
Anyone who is up against, or very in your arms. Use a child restraint cause death or serious injury as
close to, an airbag when it inflates, system in the rear seat. For instruc- they are projected rearward by the
can be killed or seriously injured. tions concerning the installation of force of the deploying airbags. Like-
Sit up straight and well back in the a child restraint system, see “Child wise, the driver and front passenger
seat, and always use your seat belt restraint” on page 115 in this Sec- should not hold objects in their
properly. tion. arms or on their knees.

92
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not modify or remove any wir- D Do not use tires or wheels other NOTICE
ing. Do not modify, remove, strike than the manufacturer’s recom-
Do not perform any of the following
or open any components such as mended size. Such a use may cause
changes without consulting your
the steering wheel pad, steering the driver airbag, front passenger
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
wheel, column cover, dashboard airbag, seat belt pretensioners and
interfere with proper operation of the
near the front passenger airbag, curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-
SRS front airbag system in some
front passenger airbag cover, front cidentally, which could result in
cases.
passenger airbag or airbag sensor death or serious injury. For details,
assembly. Doing so may prevent the see “Checking and replacing tires” z Installation of electronic devices
front airbag system from activating on page 556 in Section 7−2. such as a mobile two−way radio,
correctly, cause sudden activation cassette tape player or compact
Failure to follow these instructions
of the system or disable the sys- disc player
can result in death or serious injury.
tem, which could result in death or Consult your Toyota dealer about any z Modification of the suspension sys-
serious injury. repair and modification. tem
D Do not modify or change the sus- If you wish to modify your vehicle for z Modification of the front end struc-
pension system. Such changes may a person with a physical disability, ture
cause the driver airbag, front pas- consult your Toyota dealer. It may z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
senger airbag, seat belt pretension- dangerously interfere with the SRS bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
ers and curtain shield airbags to front airbags operation. winches or any other equipment to
inflate accidentally, which could re-
the front end
sult in death or serious injury.
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, con-
sole, steering column, steering
wheel, front passenger’s seat or
dashboard near the front passenger
airbag

93
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system includes the front passenger
occupant classification ECU, load sensor
and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch.
If either of the following conditions occurs,
XS13135a this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
XS13133a
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.
This indicator comes on when the en- D The light comes on while driving. In the following cases, contact your Toyota
gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi- The SRS warning light will come on and dealer as soon as possible:
tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds. passenger airbag on−off indicator light will D The SRS front airbags have been in-
This means the SRS front airbags are indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in flated.
operating properly. the front passenger occupant classification
system. D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
This warning light system monitors the illustration) was involved in an accident
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
that was not severe enough to cause
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat D The pad section of the steering wheel
belt buckle switch, front passenger or front passenger airbag cover
occupant classification system∗ , passenger (shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
airbag on−off indicator light, seat belt cracked, or otherwise damaged.
pretensioner assemblies, inflators, “RSCA
OFF” indicator light, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (For details, see
“Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 197 in Section 1−6.)
94
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the
NOTICE SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-
Do not disconnect the battery cables bags in the impacted side work with the
before contacting your Toyota dealer. seat belts to help reduce injury by inflat-
ing. The SRS side airbags help reduce
injuries mainly to the driver’s or right front
XS13102 passenger’s chest. The SRS curtain shield
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s and all window−side passenger’s
head and help prevent them from being
thrown out of the vehicle.
The SRS side airbag on the passenger
seat will not activate if there is no pas-
senger sitting in the right front passenger
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- seat. However, the side airbag on the pas-
tem) side airbags and curtain shield air- senger seat may deploy if luggage is put
bags are designed to provide further in the seat. (As for the front passenger
protection for the driver and all win- occupant classification system, see
dow−side passengers in addition to the “—Front passenger occupant classification
primary safety protection provided by system” on page 110 in this Section.)
the seat belts.
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-
senger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear outside
seat.

95
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Roll sensing function:

In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur- CAUTION D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her
tain shield airbags on both sides work head or any part of his/her body
with the seat belts to help reduce injury D The SRS side airbag and curtain against the door or the area of the
by inflating. The curtain shield airbags shield airbag system is designed seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, only as a supplement to the prima- side rail from which the SRS side
all window−side passenger’s head and ry protection of the driver, right airbag and curtain shield airbag
help prevent them from being thrown out front passenger and rear outside deploy even if he/she is a child
of the vehicle. (This function can be passenger seat belt systems. To en- seated in the child restraint system.
turned off if inflation is not desired. See sure maximum protection in an ac- It is dangerous if the SRS side air-
“—Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags cident, the driver and all passen- bag and curtain shield airbag in-
off switch” on page 114 in this Section.) gers in the vehicle must wear their flate, and the impact of the deploy-
seat belts properly. Wearing a seat ing airbag could cause death or se-
The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti- belt properly during an accident re- rious injury to the occupant.
vate even when the side airbags are not duces the chances of death or seri-
activated. D Improperly seated and/or restrained
ous injury or being thrown out of infants and children can be killed
Always wear your seat belt properly. the vehicle. For instructions and or seriously injured by the deploy-
precautions concerning the seat ing airbags. An infant or child who
belt system, see “Seat belts” on is too small to use a seat belt
page 66 in this Section. should be properly secured using a
child restraint system. Toyota
strongly recommends that all in-
fants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and prop-
erly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint sys-
tem, see “Child restraint” on page
115 in this Section.

96
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Collision from the rear

XS13113 XS13115 XS13116

Collision from the front
The angle of Skidding vehicle
vehicle tip−up hitting a curb
Vehicle rollover is marginal stone

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield The SRS side airbags are not generally The SRS curtain shield airbags may in-
airbag system may not activate if the designed to inflate if the vehicle is in- flate if the angle of vehicle tip−up is
vehicle is subjected to a collision from volved in a front or rear collision, if it marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s
the side at certain angles, or a collision rolls over, or if it is involved in a low− tires hit a curb stone laterally as shown
to the side of the vehicle body other speed side collision. in the illustration.
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
The curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

97
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Hitting a curb, edge Falling into or

of pavement or jumping over
Collision from hard surface a deep hole
XS13109
Collision from the
the front
rear XS13111 XS13105c

Pitch end over end Landing hard or vehicle falling

Regular cab models

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
generally designed to inflate if the ve- may deploy if a serious impact occurs
hicle is involved in a front or rear colli- to the underside of your vehicle. Some
sion, if it pitches end over end, or if examples are shown in the illustration.
it is involved in a low−speed side colli-
sion.

XS13107c

Double cab models

98
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors When the airbags inflate, they produce a
8. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle fairly loud noise and release some smoke
switch and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
9. Airbag sensor assembly remain inside the vehicle for some time,
10. Curtain shield airbag sensors and may cause some minor irritation to
XS13165 The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
sensor assembly. to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
In a severe side impact, the side and from the vehicle, you should do so imme-
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the diately.
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain Deployment of the airbags happens in a
Crew Max models shield airbag inflators. At this time a fraction of a second, so the airbags must
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly inflate with considerable force. While the
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help system is designed to reduce serious inju-
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield ries, it may also cause minor burns or
airbag system consists mainly of the fol- restrain the lateral motion of the occu-
pants. abrasions and swelling.
lowing components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration. In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor Front seats as well as parts of the front
assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
1. SRS warning light hot for several minutes, but the airbags
inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
2. Passenger airbag on−off indicator light in the inflators quickly fills the airbags themselves will not be hot. The airbags
3. Curtain shield airbag modules with non−toxic gas to help restrain the are designed to inflate only once.
(airbag and inflator) lateral motion of the occupants.
4. Front passenger occupant classification
ECU
5. Load sensor
6. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)

99
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they in-
flate, the driver, front passenger and XS13031 XS13132a
rear outside passengers must:
D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their
backs upright and against the seats
at all times.
Improper sitting and wearing of the
seat belts may not retain you inside D Do not allow anyone to lean against D Make sure the “RSCA OFF”
the vehicle. the door when the vehicle is in use, indicator light is off. The curtain
since the side airbag and curtain shield airbags will not inflate in a
shield airbag could inflate with con- vehicle rollover if this indicator
siderable speed and force. Other- light is on and you may be killed or
wise, he/she may be killed or seri- seriously injured. For details, see
ously injured. Special care should “—Roll sensing of curtain shield
be taken especially when you have airbags off switch” on page 114 in
a small child in the vehicle. this Section.
D Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.
100
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13030 XS13033 XS13035

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her D Do not allow anyone to kneel on D Do not allow anyone to get his/her
head closer to the area where the the passenger seat, facing the pas- head or hands out of windows
side airbag and curtain shield air- senger’s side door, since the side since the curtain shield airbags
bag inflate, since these airbags airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with considerable
could inflate with considerable could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured.
may be killed or seriously injured. may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should be taken espe-
Special care should be taken espe- Special care should be taken espe- cially when you have a small child
cially when you have a small child cially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
in the vehicle. in the vehicle.

101
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain

XS13023 XS13024 shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook direct-
ly.
D Do not use seat accessories which
cover the parts where the side air-
bags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from acti-
D Do not attach a cup holder or any D Do not attach a microphone or any vating correctly, causing death or
other device or object on or around other device or object around the serious injury.
the door. When the side airbag in- area where the curtain shield airbag
flates, the cup holder or any other activates such as on the windshield D Do not modify or replace the seats
device or object will be thrown with glass, side door glass, front and or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
great force or the side airbag may rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
the side airbag system from activat-
not activate correctly, resulting in grips. When the curtain shield air-
death or serious injury. Likewise, bags inflate, the microphone or oth- ing correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate ac-
the driver and front passenger er device or object will be thrown
cidentally, resulting in death or seri-
should not hold objects in their away with great force or the curtain
arms or on their knees. shield airbags may not activate cor- ous injury.
rectly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

102
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not disassemble or repair the If you wish to modify your vehicle for
front and rear pillars and roof side a person with a physical disability,
rail containing the curtain shield consult your Toyota dealer. It may
airbags. Such changes may disable dangerously interfere with the SRS
the system or cause the curtain side airbags and curtain shield air-
shield airbags to inflate accidental-
ly, resulting in death or serious in-
bags operation.
XS13135a
jury.
NOTICE
D Do not modify or change the sus-
pension system. Such changes may Do not perform any of the following
cause the driver airbag, front pas- changes without consulting your
senger airbag, seat belt pretension- Toyota dealer. Such changes can
ers and curtain shield airbags to interfere with proper operation of the
inflate accidentally, which could re- SRS side airbag and curtain shield This indicator comes on when the en-
sult in death or serious injury. airbag system in some cases. gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
D Do not use tires or wheels other tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
z Installation of electronic devices
than the manufacturer’s recom- This means the SRS side airbags and
such as a mobile two−way radio,
mended size. Such a use may cause curtain shield airbags are operating
cassette tape player or compact
the driver airbag, front passenger properly.
disc player
airbag, seat belt pretensioners and
z Modification of the suspension sys-
curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-
tem
cidentally, which could result in
death or serious injury. For details, z Modification of the side structure of
see “Checking and replacing tires” the passenger compartment
on page 556 in Section 7−2. z Repairs made on or near the con-
Failure to follow these instructions sole or front seat
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.

103
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

This warning light system monitors the The SRS warning light will come on and
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- passenger airbag on−off indicator light will
sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- indicate “OFF” if there is a malfunction in
sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- the front passenger occupant classification
er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt system.
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system∗ , passenger airbag
off switch, passenger airbag on−off indica-
tor light, seat belt pretensioner assem-
blies, inflators, “RSCA OFF” indicator light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(For details, see “Service reminder indica-
tors and warning buzzers” on page 197 in
Section 1−6.)
∗ : The front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system includes the front passenger
XS13137
occupant classification ECU, load sensor
and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch.
If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.
D The light comes on while driving.

104
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Front passenger occupant

classification system
(Regular cab models)
In the following cases, contact your Toyota Your vehicle is equipped with a front
dealer as soon as possible: passenger occupant classification sys-
D Any of the SRS side airbags and cur- tem. The system detects conditions
tain shield airbags have been inflated. 1—4 (Shown in the table on page 107)
Based on these conditions, the systems
D The portion of the doors (shaded in the below are activated or deactivated:
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause D Front passenger airbag XS13216
the SRS side airbags and curtain D Side airbag on the right front passen-
shield airbags to inflate. ger seat
D The surface of the seats with the side D Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is er
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam- The system monitors the weight and
aged. load on the right front passenger seat,
D The portion of the front pillars, rear and the seat belt buckle switch to de- The passenger airbag on−off indicator
pillars or headlining (padding) contain- termine conditions 1—4. light indicates the actuation of the front
ing the curtain shield airbag inside passenger airbag, side airbag on the
In order to ensure that the system de- front passenger seat and front passen-
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched, tects the conditions correctly:
cracked, or otherwise damaged. ger seat belt pretensioner.
D Do not place a heavy load on the right The passenger airbag on−off indicator
NOTICE front passenger seat or the seatback light will indicate “ON” and “OFF”
table, etc. when the engine switch is turned to the
Do not disconnect the battery cables
D Do not attach a commercial seatback “ON” position. After about four sec-
before contacting your Toyota dealer.
table or other heavy item to the back onds, it will go off. After that, the front
of the right front passenger seat. passenger occupant classification sys-
D Do not apply pressure to the right front tem operates and judges whether to in-
passenger seat by resting hands or dicate “ON” or “OFF”.
legs on the seatback.

105
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The indicator light will indicate “OFF” 4. Ask the front passenger to adjust the
when the engine switch is in the “ON” seatback to the upright position and to
position with the condition 2 in the table sit up straight on the center of the seat
shown below. cushion, with his/her legs comfortably
If the front passenger occupant classifica- extended forward.
tion system determines that a person of 5. Turn the engine switch on, having the
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, one
passenger remain in that position until
the passenger airbag on−off indicator
XS13215
of the following is likely to have occurred: light indicates “ON”.
D Objects are placed under the front pas- If the “OFF” indicator remains illuminated,
senger seat. move the right front passenger seat fully
D The front passenger seatback is in rearward.
contact with the back wall.
To ensure that the system correctly de- The SRS warning light will come on
tects the presence or absence of a person and the passenger airbag on−off indica-
of adult size sitting in the right front pas- tor light will indicate “OFF” if there is
senger seat, make sure that none of the a malfunction in the front passenger
above occur. occupant classification system. Contact
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-
minated when a person of adult size is
seated in the right front passenger seat.
If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, follow
the procedure below:
1. Turn the engine switch off.
2. Make sure the airbag off switch is set
to the “AUTO” position.
3. Make sure the right front passenger
seat belt is worn correctly.

106
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected by Passenger Curtain

Passenger Front Side airbag
the front passenger airbag off shield Front
airbag SRS passenger’s Front on the right
occupant classification switch airbag in passenger’s
on−off warning seat belt passenger front
system∗ 1 position the front seat belt
indicator light reminder airbag passenger
passenger pretensioner
light light seat
side
“AUTO” “ON” Activated
1 Adult∗ 2
1. Off Flashing∗ 5 Activated
“OFF” “OFF” Deactivated

2. Child∗ 3 or child “AUTO”

“OFF”∗ 6 Off Flashing∗ 5 Deactivated Activated
restraint system∗ 4 “OFF”
Not
“AUTO”
3. Unoccupied illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated
Activated
“OFF” “OFF”
4. There is a “AUTO”
malfunction in the “OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated
system “OFF”

∗1 : The right front passenger on the bench seat

∗2 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗3 : When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

107
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

∗4 : Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 115 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗5 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
∗6 : In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 115 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

108
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION D Do not recline the front passenger D Wear the seat belt properly.
seatback so far that it touches a D Make sure the front passenger’s
To avoid potential death or serious backwall. This may cause the “OFF” seat belt tab has not been left in-
injury when the front passenger occu- indicator to be illuminated, which serted in the buckle before some-
pant classification system does not indicates that the passenger’s air- one sits in the front passenger
detect the conditions correctly, ob- bags will not deploy in the event of seat.
serve the following. a severe accident. If the seatback
touches the backwall, return the D Do not place a heavy load on the
D Make sure the passenger airbag on− front passenger seat, etc.
off indicator light indicates “ON” seatback to a position where it
when using the seat belt extender does not touch the backwall. D Do not apply pressure to the front
for the front passenger seat. If the Keep the front passenger seatback passenger seat by resting hands or
indicator light indicates “OFF”, dis- as upright as possible when the ve- legs on the seatback.
connect the extender tongue from hicle is moving. Reclining the seat- D Do not put objects under the front
the seat belt buckle, then reconnect back excessively may lessen the ef- passenger seat.
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat fectiveness of the seat belt system. D Do not attach any heavy items to
belt extender after making sure the D If an adult sits in the front passen- the back of the front passenger
indicator light indicates “ON”. If ger seat, the passenger airbag on− seat.
you use the seat belt extender off indicator light should indicate
while the indicator light indicates D When it is unavoidable to install the
“ON”. If the “OFF” indicator is illu- forward−facing child restraint sys-
“OFF”, the front passenger airbag minated, ask the passenger to sit
and side airbag on the front pas- tem on the front passenger seat,
up straight, well back in the seat, install the child restraint system on
senger side may not activate cor- feet on the floor and with the seat
rectly, which could cause death or the front passenger seat in the
belt worn correctly. If the “OFF” proper order. (As for the installation
serious injury in the event of colli- indicator still remains illuminated,
sion. order, see “—Installation with seat
move the front passenger seat fully belt” on page 118 in this Section.)
rearward.

109
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Front passenger occupant

classification system
(Double cab and Crew Max models)
Your vehicle is equipped with a front
D Do not modify or remove the front passenger occupant classification sys-
seats. tem. The system detects conditions
D Do not kick the front passenger 1—4 (Shown in the table on page 112)
seat or subject it to severe impact. Based on these conditions, the systems
Otherwise, the SRS warning light below are activated or deactivated:
may come on to indicate a malfunc-
tion of the detection system. In this
D Front passenger airbag XS13216
case, contact your Toyota dealer im-
D Side airbag on the right front passen-
mediately. ger seat
D Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-
er
The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
may indicate “ON” (the front passenger The system monitors the weight and
airbag and side airbag on the front load on the right front passenger seat,
passenger seat may deploy) even if and the seat belt buckle switch to de- The passenger airbag on−off indicator
observing the above cautions, when a termine conditions 1—4. light indicates the actuation of the front
child sits in, or a forward−facing child passenger airbag, side airbag on the
In order to ensure the system detects front passenger seat and front passen-
restraint system is installed on the front the conditions correctly:
passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions ger seat belt pretensioner.
in “—SRS driver airbag and front
D Do not place a heavy load on the right The passenger airbag on−off indicator
front passenger seat or the seatback light will indicate “ON” and “OFF”
passenger airbag” on page 77, “—SRS
table, etc. when the engine switch is turned to the
side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on
page 95 and “Child restraint” on page 115 D Do not attach a commercial seatback “ON” position. After about four sec-
in this Section. table or other heavy item to the back onds, it will go off. After that, the front
of the right front passenger seat. passenger occupant classification sys-
D Do not apply pressure to the right front tem operates and judges whether to in-
passenger seat by resting hands or dicate “ON” or “OFF”.
legs on the seatback.

110
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The indicator light will indicate “OFF” Make sure that the “ON” indicator is illu-
when the engine switch is in the “ON” minated when a person of adult size is
position with the condition 2 in the table seated in the right front passenger seat.
shown below. If the “OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask
If the front passenger occupant classifica- the passenger to sit up straight, well back
tion system determines that a person of in the seat, and with the seat belt worn
adult size sits in the right front passenger
seat but the “OFF” indicator is illuminated,
correctly. If the “OFF” indicator remains
illuminated, either ask the passenger to
XS13215
one of the following is likely to have oc- move to the rear seat, or if that is not
curred: possible, move the right front passenger
seat fully rearward.
D A rear passenger lifts the front passen-
ger seat cushion with their legs.
D Objects are placed under the front pas-
senger seat. The SRS warning light will come on
D The front passenger seatback is in and the passenger airbag on−off indica-
contact with the rear seat. tor light will indicate “OFF” if there is
a malfunction in the front passenger
To ensure that the system correctly de- occupant classification system. Contact
tects the presence or absence of a person your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
of adult size sitting in the right front pas-
senger seat, make sure that none of the
above occur.

111
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

Condition detected by Side airbag Curtain shield
the front passenger Front Front
Passenger Front on the right airbag in the
occupant classification SRS warning passenger’s passenger’s
airbag on−off passenger front front
system∗ 1 light seat belt seat belt
indicator light airbag passenger passenger
reminder light pretensioner
seat side
1. Adult∗ 2 “ON” Off Flashing∗ 5 Activated
2. Child∗ 3 or child
“OFF”∗ 6 Off Flashing∗ 5 Deactivated Activated
restraint system∗ 4
Not
3. Unoccupied Off Off Deactivated Deactivated
illuminated Activated
4. There is a
malfunction in the “OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated
system
∗1 : The right front passenger on the bench seat.
∗2 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗3 : When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗4 : Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 115 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗5 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
∗6 : In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 115 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

112
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION D Do not recline the front passenger D Wear the seat belt properly.
seatback so far that it touches a D Make sure the front passenger’s
To avoid potential death or serious rear seat. This may cause the seat belt tab has not been left in-
injury when the front passenger occu- “OFF” indicator to be illuminated, serted in the buckle before some-
pant classification system does not which indicates that the passen- one sits in the right front passen-
detect the conditions correctly, ob- ger’s airbags will not deploy in the ger seat.
serve the following. event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat re- D Do not place a heavy load on the
D Make sure the passenger airbag on− front passenger seat or the seat-
off indicator light indicates “ON” turn the seatback to a position
where it does not touches the rear back table, etc.
when using the seat belt extender
for the front passenger seat. If the seat. D Do not apply pressure to the front
indicator light indicates “OFF”, dis- Keep the front passenger seatback passenger seat by resting hands or
connect the extender tongue from as upright as possible when the ve- legs on the seatback.
the seat belt buckle, then reconnect hicle is moving. Reclining the seat- D Do not let a rear passenger lift the
the seat belt. Reconnect the seat back excessively may lessen the ef- front passenger seat with their feet
belt extender after making sure the fectiveness of the seat belt system. or press on the seatback with their
indicator light indicates “ON”. If D If an adult sits in the front passen- legs.
you use the seat belt extender ger seat, the passenger airbag on− D Do not put objects under the front
while the indicator light indicates off indicator light should indicate passenger seat.
“OFF”, the front passenger airbag “ON”. If the “OFF” indicator is illu-
and side airbag on the front pas- D Do not attach a commercial seat-
minated, ask the passenger to sit back table or other heavy item to
senger side may not activate cor- up straight, well back in the seat,
rectly, which could cause death or the back of the right front passen-
feet on the floor and with the seat ger seat.
serious injury in the event of colli- belt worn correctly. If the “OFF”
sion. indicator still remains illuminated, D Child restraint systems installed on
either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat should not contact the
the rear seat, or if that is not pos- front seatbacks.
sible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.

113
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch
The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
D When it is unavoidable to install the may indicate “ON” (the front passenger
forward−facing child restraint sys- airbag and side airbag on the front
tem on the front passenger seat, passenger seat may deploy) even if
install the child restraint system on observing the above cautions, when a
the right front passenger seat in child sits in, or a forward−facing child
the proper order. (As for the instal-
lation order, see “—Installation with
restraint system is installed on the front
passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions
XS13029
seat belt” on page 128 in this Sec- in “—SRS driver airbag and front
tion.) passenger airbag” on page 87, “—SRS
D Do not modify or remove the front side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on
seats. page 95 and “Child restraint” on page 115.
D Do not kick the front passenger
seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light The roll sensing of curtain shield air-
may come on to indicate a malfunc- bags off switch (“RSCA OFF” switch)
tion of the detection system. In this can turn off the curtain shield airbags
case, contact your Toyota dealer im- and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle
mediately. rollover. This switch should only be
used if inflation is not desired (such as
extreme off−road driving).

114
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-
for a few seconds with the engine switch CAUTION propriate child restraint systems for
on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes children.
on and the roll sensing function is turned D Before normal driving, make sure
the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
off. When you push the switch again, the and Canada now require the use of a
indicator light goes off and the roll sens- off.
child restraint system.
ing function is turned on. (For details D When the roll sensing function is
about the roll sensing function, see turned off (and the “RSCA OFF” Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.
“—SRS side airbags and curtain shield indicator light is on), the curtain If a child is too large for a child restraint
airbags” on page 95 in this Section.) shield airbags and seat belt preten- system, the child should sit in the rear
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield sioners will not work in a vehicle seat and must be restrained using the
airbags on impacted side will inflate even rollover. Turning off the curtain vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
if the roll sensing function is turned off. shield airbags and seat belt preten- page 66 in this Section for details.
(For details about the curtain shield air- sioners reduces occupant protection
bags, see “—SRS side airbags and curtain which your vehicle safety systems CAUTION
shield airbags” on page 95 in this Sec- can provide in accidents and in-
tion.) crease the likelihood of death or D For effective protection in automo-
In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt serious injuries. bile accidents and sudden stops, a
pretensioners will work even if the roll child must be properly restrained,
sensing function is turned off. (For details using a seat belt or child restraint
about the seat belt pretensioners, see system depending on the age and
“—Seat belt pretensioners” on page 73 in size of the child. Holding a child in
this Section.) your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an acci-
If the engine switch is turned to “ACC” or dent, the child can be crushed
“LOCK” with the roll sensing function off against the windshield, or between
and then the engine switch is turned back you and the vehicle’s interior.
to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn
back on automatically.

115
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Regular cab models— If you must put infant or child age D A forward−facing child restraint sys-
Toyota strongly urges use of a 1 to 12 in a passenger risk group tem should be allowed to be
proper child restraint system which on the right front seat, make sure installed on the front passenger
conforms to the size of the child. that the passenger airbag off switch seat only when it is unavoidable.
Double cab and Crew Max models— is in the “OFF” position with the Always move the seat as far back
Toyota strongly urges use of a key removed and that the indicator as possible even if the passenger
proper child restraint system which light is on. (For details, see “—SRS airbag on−off indicator light indi-
conforms to the size of the child, driver airbag and front passenger cates “OFF”, because the front pas-
installed on the rear seat. Accord- airbag” on page 77 in this Section.) senger airbag could inflate with
ing to accident statistics, the child D Never install a rear−facing child re- considerable speed and force.
is safer when properly restrained in straint system on the front passen- Otherwise, the child may be killed
the rear seat than in the front seat. ger seat even if the passenger air- or seriously injured.
D Regular cab models— bag on−off indicator light indicates D Do not allow the child to lean his/
Never put infant or child age 1 to “OFF”. In the event of an accident, her head or any part of his/her
12 in a passenger risk group on the the impact of the rapid inflation of body against the door or the area
right front passenger seat with the the front passenger airbag could of the seat, front or rear pillar or
passenger airbag off switch in the cause death or serious injury to the roof side rail from which the side
“AUTO” position. In the event of an child if the rear−facing child re- airbags or curtain shield airbags
accident, the force of the rapid straint system is installed on the deploy even if the child is seated in
inflation of the front passenger air- front passenger seat. the child restraint system. It is dan-
bag can cause death or serious in- gerous if the side airbag and cur-
jury to the child. tain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child.

116
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Types of child restraint

—Child restraint system system
A child restraint system for a small Child restraint systems are classified into
D Do not use the seat belt extender child or baby must itself be properly the following 3 types depending on the
when installing a child restraint restrained on the seat with the lap por- child’s age and size.
system on the front or rear passen- tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
ger seat. If installing a child re- (A) Infant seat
carefully consult the manufacturer’s (B) Convertible seat
straint system with the seat belt instructions which accompany the child
extender connected to the seat belt, (C) Booster seat
restraint system.
the seat belt will not securely hold Install the child restraint system following
the child restraint system, which To provide proper restraint, use a child the instructions provided by its manufac-
could cause death or serious injury restraint system following the manufactur- turer.
to the child or other passengers in er’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-
the event of collision. curing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
D Make sure you have complied with system.
all installation instructions provided Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its For instructions about how to use the an-
by the child restraint manufacturer chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
and that the system is properly se- manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations. page 139, 142 or 145 in this Section.
cured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury The child restraint system should be The child restraint lower anchorages
to the child in the event of a sud- installed in the rear seat if your vehicle approved for your vehicle may also be
den stop or accident. is equipped with rear seats. According to used. See “—Installation with child
accident statistics, the child is safer when restraint lower anchorages” on page 147,
properly restrained in the rear seat than 149 or 151 in this Section.
in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from in-
juring passengers in the event of a sud-
den stop or accident.

117
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Installation with seat belt

(Regular cab models)

XS13028 XS13027 XS13036

(A) Infant seat (C) Booster seat

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

XS13026

(B) Convertible seat

118
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

D If you must install a rear−facing

child restraint system on the right
front passenger seat, make sure

XS13217 XS13219 that the front passenger airbag off

switch is in the “OFF” position with
the key removed and that the indi-
cator light is on.
D Never install a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the center front
seat.

When you install a rear−facing child re-

CAUTION straint system which belongs to a pas-
senger risk group on the right front
Never install a rear−facing child re- passenger seat, turn the passenger air-
straint system on the front passenger bag off switch counterclockwise to the
seat with the passenger airbag off “OFF” position and remove the key.
switch in the “AUTO” position. In the (For details, see “—SRS driver airbag
event of an accident, the force of the and front passenger airbag” on page 77
rapid inflation of the front passenger in this Section.)
airbag can cause death or serious in-
jury to the child if the rear−facing The indicator light comes on when the
child restraint system is installed on system is off.
the front passenger seat.

119
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Same angle CAUTION

Same position D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions

XS13150a XS13039 of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
To install the infant seat: Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
D Bench seat: In order to firmly se-
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through ately. Do not install the child
cure the child restraint system to
or around the infant seat following the restraint system on the seat until
the right front passenger seat, align
the seatback angle and seat posi- instructions provided by its manufactur- the seat belt is fixed.
tion of the right front passenger er and insert the tab into the buckle
seat to match the center front pas- taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.
senger seat. Otherwise, it could
cause death or injury in a collision.

120
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13040 XS13041 XS13042

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
in the lock mode. When the belt is against the seat cushion and seatback, CAUTION
then retracted even slightly, it cannot let the shoulder belt retract as far as
be extended. it will go to hold the infant seat secure- Push and pull the child restraint sys-
ly. tem in different directions to be sure
To hold the infant seat securely, make it is secure. Follow all the installation
sure the belt is in the lock mode before instructions provided by its manufac-
letting the belt retract. turer.

121
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13044 XS13067 XS13220

To remove the infant seat: (B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

Press the buckle release button and allow CAUTION
A convertible seat must be used in for-
the belt to retract completely. The belt will ward−facing or rear−facing position de-
move freely again and be ready to work Rear−facing child restraint system:
pending on the child’s age and size of Never install a rear−facing child re-
for an adult or older child passenger. the child. When installing, follow the straint system on the front passenger
manufacturer’s instructions about the seat with the passenger airbag off
applicable age and size of the child as switch in the “AUTO” position. In the
well as directions for installing the event of an accident, the force of the
child restraint system. rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious in-
jury to the child if the rear−facing
child restraint system is installed on
the front passenger seat.

122
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION CAUTION

D If you must install a rear−facing Forward−facing child restraint system:

child restraint system on the right A forward−facing child restraint
front passenger seat, make sure system which belongs to a passenger

XS13219 that the passenger airbag off switch

is in the “OFF” position with the
risk group should never be installed
on the right front passenger seat with
key removed and that the indicator the passenger airbag off switch in the
light is on. “AUTO” position, because the force
D Never install a rear−facing child re- of the deploying airbag could cause
straint system on the center front death or serious injury to the child in
seat. forward seating position. (For details,
see “—SRS driver airbag and front
When you install a rear−facing child re- passenger airbag” on page 77 in this
straint system which belongs to a pas- Section.)
senger risk group on the right front
passenger seat, turn the passenger air-
bag off switch counterclockwise to the
“OFF” position and remove the key.
(For details, see “—SRS driver airbag
and front passenger airbag” on page 77
in this Section.)
The indicator light comes on when the
system is off.

123
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Same angle CAUTION

Same position D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions

XS13151 XS13047 of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
To install the forward−facing convertible Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
D Bench seat: In order to firmly se- seat: ately. Do not install the child
cure the child restraint system to
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through restraint system on the seat until
the center front passenger seat,
align the seatback angle and seat or around the convertible seat following the seat belt is fixed.
position of the right front passen- the instructions provided by its
ger seat to match the center front manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
passenger seat. If the child restraint
system cannot be firmly secured, belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
install it onto the right front pas- tight.
senger seat. Otherwise, it could For instructions concerning the installation
cause death or injury in a collision. of the rear−facing convertible seat, see
D Bench seat: If the child restraint “(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” on
system installed on the center front page 118.
passenger seat interferes with the
driver, install it onto the right front
passenger seat.

124
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13048 XS13049 XS13050

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it 3. While pressing the convertible seat
in the lock mode. When the belt is firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION
then retracted even slightly, it cannot seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
be extended. as far as it will go to hold the convert- Push and pull the child restraint sys-
ible seat securely. tem in different directions to be sure
To hold the convertible seat securely, it is secure. Follow all the installation
make sure the belt is in the lock mode instructions provided by its manufac-
before letting the belt retract. turer.

125
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

A forward−facing child restraint

system which belongs to a passenger
risk group should never be installed

XS13051 XS13052 on the right front passenger seat with

the passenger airbag off switch in the
“AUTO” position, because the force
of the deploying airbag could cause
death or serious injury to the child in
forward seating position. (For details,
see “—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag” on page 77 in this
To remove the convertible seat: (C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION Section.)
Press the buckle release button and allow A booster seat must be used in for-
the belt to retract completely. The belt will ward−facing position only.
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

126
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION D If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your
D Always make sure the shoulder belt child from death or serious injury.
is positioned across the center of Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
child’s shoulder. The belt should be ately. Do not install the child

XS13053 kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.
D Both high−positioned lap belts and
loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
To install the booster seat: sliding under the lap belt during a
Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the collision or other unintended event.
lap and shoulder belt through or around Keep the lap belt positioned as low
the booster seat and across the child fol- on a child’s hips as possible.
lowing the instructions provided by its D For child’s safety, do not place the
manufacturer and insert the tab into the shoulder belt under child’s arm.
buckle taking care not to twist the belt. D After inserting the tab, make sure
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly the tab and buckle are locked and
across the child’s shoulder and that the that the lap and shoulder portions
lap belt is positioned as low as possible of the belt are not twisted.
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
page 66 in this Section for details. the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

127
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Installation with seat belt

(Double cab and Crew Max
models)

XS13051 XS13054 XS13055

To remove the booster seat: (A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

Press the buckle release button and allow CAUTION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
the belt to retract. facing position only. D Never install a rear−facing child re-
straint system on the front passen-
ger seat even if the passenger air-
bag on−off indicator light indicates
“OFF”. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of
the front passenger airbag could
cause death or serious injury to the
child if the rear−facing child re-
straint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

128
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Same angle

Same position

XS13056 XS13193 XS13057

To install the infant seat:

D Do not install a child restraint sys- D Crew Max models: When installing
tem on the rear seat if it interferes a child restraint system in the rear 1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
with the lock mechanism of the seat center position, adjust both or around the infant seat following the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or seat cushions to the same position instructions provided by its manufactur-
front seat occupant, may be killed and align both seatbacks at the er and insert the tab into the buckle
or seriously injured in case of sud- same angle. Otherwise, the child re- taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.
den braking or a collision. straint system cannot be securely
D If the driver’s seat position does restrained and this may cause death
not allow sufficient space for safe or serious injuries in a collision.
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the rear right
seat. Child restraint system
installed on the rear seat should
not contact the front seatbacks.

129
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.
D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
XS13058 XS13059
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it 3. While pressing the infant seat firmly
ately. Do not install the child in the lock mode. When the belt is against the seat cushion and seatback,
restraint system on the seat until then retracted even slightly, it cannot let the shoulder belt retract as far as
the seat belt is fixed. be extended. it will go to hold the infant seat secure-
To hold the infant seat securely, make ly.
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

130
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13060 XS13061 XS13062

To remove the infant seat: (B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

CAUTION Press the buckle release button and allow A convertible seat must be used in for-
the belt to retract completely. The belt will ward−facing or rear−facing position de-
Push and pull the child restraint sys- move freely again and be ready to work
tem in different directions to be sure pending on the age and size of the
for an adult or older child passenger. child. When installing, follow the
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac- manufacturer’s instructions about the
turer. applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

131
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Install the child restraint system on the 6. While pressing the convertible seat 1. Turn the engine switch off.
front passenger seat only when it is un- firmly against the seat cushion and 2. Remove the child restraint system.
avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
front passenger occupant classification as far as it will go to hold the convert- 3. When reinstalling a child restraint sys-
system. In order to activate the occupant ible seat securely. tem, make sure the seatback does not
classification system correctly, install the press the child restraint system into
forward−facing child restraint system on the seat cushion. If this occurs, adjust
CAUTION
the front passenger seat in the following the seatback angle slightly.
order: Push and pull the child restraint sys- 4. Then make sure the head restraint is
1. Turn the engine switch to the “ON” tem in different directions to be sure not pressing the child restraint system
position. it is secure. Follow all the installation into the seat cushion. If this occurs,
instructions provided by its manufac- raise the head restraint.
2. Move the right front passenger seat to turer.
the rearward position. 5. Turn the engine switch on again.
3. When it is unavoidable, put the child The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
7. Put a child on the child restraint sys- should indicate “OFF”. If the indicator light
restraint system on the front passenger
tem and secure the child, complying still indicates “ON” when the engine switch
seat without putting your weight on the
with the instructions provided by the is turned to the “ON” position, then the
front passenger seat.
child restraint system manufacturer. SRS front passenger airbag and side air-
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat bag on the passenger side may deploy in
The passenger airbag on−off indicator light
belt buckle. an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in
should indicate “OFF” when the engine
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it switch is in the “ON” position and the this condition. Remove the child restraint
in the lock mode. When the belt is child is in the child restraint system after system and contact your Toyota dealer.
then retracted even slightly, it cannot following these procedures. The “OFF” in-
be extended. To hold the seat securely, dicator indicates the SRS front passenger
make sure the belt is in the lock mode airbag and side airbag on the passenger
before letting the belt retract. side will not deploy. if the indicator light
indicates “ON”, do the following procedure:

132
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-
ger seat. A forward−facing child re-
straint system should only be
installed on the front passenger XS13063 XS13064
seat when unavoidable. If you must
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, put the
seat in its most rearward position, Move seat
and install the forward−facing child fully back
restraint system in the proper or-
der. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can CAUTION D A forward−facing child restraint sys-
not detect the presence of the child tem should be allowed to be
restraint system and the front pas- D Never install a rear−facing child re- installed on the front passenger
senger airbag and side airbag on straint system on the front passen- seat only when it is unavoidable.
the front passenger seat could ger seat even if the passenger air- Always move the seat as far back
deploy, and the impact could cause bag on−off indicator light indicates as possible even if the passenger
death or serious injury to the child. “OFF”. In the event of an accident, airbag on−off indicator light indi-
the impact of the rapid inflation of cates “OFF”, because the front pas-
the front passenger airbag could senger airbag could inflate with
cause death or serious injury to the considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
child if the rear−facing child re-
or seriously injured.
straint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.

133
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not allow the child to lean his/ Same angle

her head or any part of his/her
body against the door or the area Same position
of the seat, front or rear pillar or
roof side rail from which the side
airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dan-
XS13065 XS13194
gerous if the side airbag and cur-
tain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child.

D Do not install a child restraint sys- D Crew Max models: When installing
tem on the rear seat if it interferes a child restraint system in the rear
with the lock mechanism of the seat center position, adjust both
front seats. Otherwise, the child or seat cushions to the same position
front seat occupants may be killed and align both seatbacks at the
or seriously injured in case of sud- same angle. Otherwise, the child re-
den braking or a collision. straint system cannot be securely
D If the driver’s seat position does restrained and this may cause death
not allow sufficient space for safe or serious injuries in a collision.
installation, install the child re-
straint system on the rear right
seat. Child restraint system
installed on the rear seat should
not contact the front seatbacks.

134
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions

XS13066 of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
XS13068
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
To install the forward−facing convertible Contact your Toyota dealer immedi- 2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
seat: ately. Do not install the child in the lock mode. When the belt is
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through restraint system on the seat until then retracted even slightly, it cannot
or around the convertible seat following the seat belt is fixed. be extended.
the instructions provided by its To hold the convertible seat securely,
manufacturer and insert the tab into make sure the belt is in the lock mode
the buckle taking care not to twist the before letting the belt retract.
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.
For instructions concerning the installation
of the rear−facing convertible seat, see
“(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION” on
page 128.

135
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13069 XS13070 XS13071

3. While pressing the convertible seat To remove the convertible seat:

firmly against the seat cushion and CAUTION Press the buckle release button and allow
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract the belt to retract completely. The belt will
as far as it will go to hold the convert- Push and pull the child restraint sys- move freely again and be ready to work
ible seat securely. tem in different directions to be sure for an adult or older child passenger.
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufac-
turer.

136
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Do not allow the child to lean his/

her head or any part of his/her
body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar or
roof side rail from which the side

XS13072 XS13073 airbags or curtain shield airbags

deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dan-
gerous if the side airbag and cur-
tain shield airbag inflate, and the
impact could cause death or seri-
Move seat ous injury to the child.
fully back

(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

CAUTION
A booster seat must be used in for-
ward−facing position only. D A forward−facing child restraint sys-
tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the passenger
airbag on−off indicator light indi-
cates “OFF”, because the front pas-
senger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.

137
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Same angle CAUTION

Same position D Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be

XS13195 XS13074 kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.
D Both high−positioned lap belts and
loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
To install the booster seat: sliding under the lap belt during a
D Crew Max models: When installing collision or other unintended event.
a child restraint system in the rear Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the
lap and shoulder belt through or around Keep the lap belt positioned as low
seat center position, adjust both on a child’s hips as possible.
seat cushions to the same position the booster seat and across the child fol-
and align both seatbacks at the lowing the instructions provided by its D For child’s safety, do not place the
manufacturer and insert the tab into the shoulder belt under child’s arm.
same angle. Otherwise, the child re-
buckle taking care not to twist the belt. D After inserting the tab, make sure
straint system cannot be securely
restrained and this may cause death Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly the tab and buckle are locked and
or serious injuries in a collision. across the child’s shoulder and that the that the lap and shoulder portions
lap belt is positioned as low as possible of the belt are not twisted.
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
page 66 in this Section for details. the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

138
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Using a top strap

(Regular cab models)

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed. XS13071 XS13075

To remove the booster seat: Follow the procedure below for a child
Press the buckle release button and allow restraint system that requires the use
the belt to retract. of a top strap.

139
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Use the anchor bracket on the back panel

Symbol mark to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
passenger seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the

XS13076a anchor brackets.

XS13077

Anchor brackets

Bench seats
TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Remove the passenger head re-
straint.

Anchor
bracket

XS13144a
Symbol mark

Separate seats

140
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS13078 XS13079 XS13080

2. Lightly push down on the top sur- 3. Fix the child restraint system with 4. Replace the passenger head re-
face of the anchor bracket cover, the seat belt. straint.
then pull it forward to remove. Latch the hook onto the anchor Store any removed covers in a safe place
bracket and tighten the top strap. such as the glove box.
For instructions on installing the child re- Be sure to replace all covers when the
straint system, see “Child restraint” on anchor bracket is not in use.
page 115 in this Section.

141
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Using a top strap

(Double cab models)

CAUTION

D When returning the seatback to its

original position, make sure the
seatback is securely locked by
pushing forward and rearward on
the top of the seatback. XS13082a XS13084a
D Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child
restraint system is secure by push-
ing and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Follow all the installation in-
structions provided by its manufac-
Right position Left position
turer.

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

XS13083a

Center position

142
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Inner anchor
strap ring(s)

XS13085d XS13086a XS13087b

Strap or
routing device

Use the strap or routing device and the TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET: 2. Pull up the strap.
inner anchor strap rings to attach the top 1. Raise the head restraints.
strap.
Anchor strap ring are installed for each
rear seating position.

143
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Routing
device
Inner anchor
strap ring

XS13088b XS13089b XS13090b

3. Fix the child restraint system with 4. Latch the hook onto the inner an- 5. Lower the head restraints.
the seat belt. chor strap ring and tighten the top For instructions on installing the child re-
Route the top strap through the strap. straint system, see “Child restraint” on
routing device as shown in the il- page 115 in this Section.
lustration.
CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-
straint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

6. If two child seats will be installed,

use the outboard seating positions.

144
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Using a top strap

(Crew Max models)

Anchor brackets

XS13197 XS13198 XS13199

Symbol

Follow the procedure below for a child Use the anchor brackets behind the rear TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
restraint system that requires the use seat seatbacks to secure the top strap. 1. Remove the head restraint.
of a top strap. Anchor brackets are installed for each
seating position of the rear seat.
This symbol indicates the locations of
user ready anchor brackets.

145
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

D When returning the seatback to its

original position, make sure the
seatback is securely locked by

XS13200 XS13210 pushing forward and rearward on

the top of the seatback. Failure to
do so will prevent the seat belt
from operating properly.
D Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child
restraint system is secure by push-
ing and pulling it in different direc-
2. Open the anchor bracket cover with 3. Pull the seatback release lever and tions. Follow all the installation in-
the symbol as shown in the illustra- swing the seatback forward slightly, structions provided by its manufac-
tion. then latch the hook onto the anchor turer.
bracket. Return the seatback to its
original position.
Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt and tighten the top
strap.
For instructions on installing the child re-
straint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 115 in this Section.

146
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages
(Regular cab models)

1st lock
position

XS13202 XS13091 XS13143

12th lock
position

4. Replace the head restraint. Lower anchorages for the child restraint CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
5. If two child seats will be installed, systems complying with the FMVSS225 INSTALLATION
use the outboard seating positions. or CMVSS210.2 specifications are 1. Fold down the seatback and back to
installed in the front seat. the 1st lock position until it locks
The anchorages are installed in the gap into place. Adjust the seatback to
between the seat cushion and seatback of the 12th lock position.
the right side of the seat as shown in the Make sure the seatback is locked secure-
illustration. ly.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

147
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

2. Widen the slits of the seat cushion

slightly and confirm the position of
the lower anchorages near the but-
ton on the seat cushion.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the pres-
ence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
XS13092e XS13093e strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 139 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruc-
tion manual equipped with each product.

Canada only Canada only

Type A Type B

148
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages
(Double cab models)

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular ob-
jects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught. XS13094
D Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

XS13095
D After securing the child restraint
system, never slide or recline the Lower anchorages for the child restraint
seat. systems complying with the FMVSS225
or CMVSS210.2 specifications are
installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
both outside rear seats as shown in the
illustration.
Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the Canada only
vehicle.
Type A

149
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION CAUTION
1. Widen the gap between the seat D When using the lower anchorages
cushion and seatback slightly and for the child restraint system, be
confirm the position of the lower an- sure that there are no irregular ob-
chorages near the button on the jects around the anchorages or that
seatback. the seat belt is not caught.
2. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower D Push and pull the child restraint
straps onto the anchorages and system in different directions to be
tighten the lower straps. sure it is secure. Follow all the
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the installation instructions provided by
anchorages. its manufacturer.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on
XS13096
D After securing the child restraint
a child restraint system indicates the pres- system, never lift up the seat cush-
ence of a lower connector system. ion.
If your child restraint system has a top D Do not install a child restraint sys-
strap, it should be anchored. (For the tem on the rear seat if it interferes
installation of the top strap, see “—Using with the lock mechanism of the
a top strap” on page 142 in this Section.) front seats. Otherwise, the child or
For installation details, refer to the instruc- front seat occupant(s) may be killed
tion manual equipped with each product. or seriously injured in case of sud-
den braking or a collision.

Canada only

Type B

150
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages
(Crew Max models)

3rd lock 1st lock

position position

XS13203 XS13206

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225
CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION
SYSTEM XS13204
or CMVSS210.2 specifications are 1. Fold down the seatback and back to
installed in the rear seat. the 1st lock position (most upright
The anchorages are installed in the gap position) until it locks into place.
between the seat cushion and seatback of Adjust the seatback to the 3rd lock
both outside rear seats as shown in the position.
illustration. Make sure the seatback is locked secure-
Child restraint systems complying with the ly.
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
Canada only
vehicle.
Type A

151
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

2. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and CAUTION
confirm the position of the lower an-
chorages near the button on the D When using the lower anchorages
seatback. for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular ob-
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower jects around the anchorages or that
straps onto the anchorages and the seat belt is not caught.
tighten the lower straps.
D Push and pull the child restraint
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the system in different directions to be
anchorages. sure it is secure. Follow all the
For owners in Canada—The symbol on installation instructions provided by
a child restraint system indicates the pres- its manufacturer.
ence of a lower connector system.
XS13205
D When using the lower anchorages
If your child restraint system has a top for the child restraint system, en-
strap, it should be anchored. (For the sure that the seat is moved to the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using rear−most position, with the seat-
a top strap” on page 145 in this Section.) back close to the child restraint
For installation details, refer to the instruc- system.
tion manual equipped with each product. D After securing the child restraint
system, never slide or recline the
seat.
D Do not install a child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
Canada only front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sud-
Type B den braking or a collision.

152
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 4
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

153
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tilt and telescopic steering

Tilt steering wheel wheel

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishan-

XS14002 dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious XS14001
injuries.
D After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

To change the steering wheel angle, To adjust the steering wheel position,
hold the steering wheel, push down the push down the lock release lever. Then
lock release lever, tilt the steering tilt the steering wheel to the desired
wheel to the desired angle and return angle, push or pull it to the desired
the lever to its original position. steering column length and pull up the
lock release lever.

154
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Power tilt and telescopic

steering wheel

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishan-
dle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious XS14003 XS14004
injuries.
D After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down to make
sure it is locked in position.

ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT OF TELESCOPIC STEER-

TILT ING COLUMN
To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, To adjust the steering column length,
push the control switch upward or push the control switch forward or
downward to set it to the desired posi- backward to set the steering wheel to
tion. the desired position.
When the key is removed from the engine
CAUTION switch, the steering column moves forward
away from the driver and also tilts up for
Do not adjust the steering wheel easy exit and entry.
while the vehicle is moving. Doing so
may cause the driver to mishandle When the key is inserted into the engine
the vehicle and an accident may oc- switch, the steering column returns to the
cur resulting in death or serious inju- previously set position.
ries. This feature can be set inoperative. Ask
your Toyota dealer.

155
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Outside rear view mirrors—

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
CAUTION see the side of your vehicle in the mir-
ror.
Do not adjust the steering column
while the vehicle is moving. Doing so Extend type only—Each mirror is divided
may cause the driver to mishandle into two and has two different curvatures.
The lower part of the mirror offers a wider
the vehicle and an accident may oc-
cur resulting in death or serious inju- XS14005 field of vision than the upper part. Dis-
tances will therefore appear to be different
ries.
in the lower and upper part of the mirrors.
Be careful when judging the size or dis-
tance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
Normal type seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the
outside rear view mirror defogger switch,
the heater panels in the outside rear view
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror
surface. (See “Outside rear view mirror
XS14021 defogger” on page 177 in Section 1−5.)

Extend type

156
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Power rear view mirror

control
To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
CAUTION
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
D Do not adjust the mirror while the be adjusted
vehicle is moving. Doing so may Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
cause the driver to mishandle the (right).
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious inju- XS14006a 2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direc-
ries. tion.
D On some models, since the mirror Mirrors can be adjusted when the engine
surfaces can get hot, do not touch switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
them when the defogger switch is Vehicles with the driving position memory
on. system—The position of the outside rear
Type A view mirrors and driver’s seat can be
memorized. For details, see “Driving
position memory system” on page 56 in
Section 1−3.

NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mir-
XS14007a ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

Type B

157
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Folding rear view mirrors

The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push back-
ward.
Vehicles with a mirror folding button

XS14008 XS14009 only—

If the engine switch is turned from “LOCK”
to “ACC” the mirror will move automatical-
ly according to the position of the mirror
folding button.
If folding button is not fully depressed, the
mirror may come out of its normal posi-
Normal type tion. If this happens, depress the button
FOLDING MIRRORS (type B only) again to return it to the normal position.
To fold mirrors for parking in restricted
areas, push the mirror folding button. CAUTION
The engine switch must be in the “ACC”
or “ON” position. Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and pas-
Position 1—To fold the mirrors senger side rear view mirrors must
Position 2—To return the mirrors back to
their original positions XS14023a be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury and any mir-

ror malfunction, do not touch the mir-
ror while it is moving.
Extend type

158
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Anti−glare inside rear view

—Extending rear view mirrors mirror

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. It may cause the
driver to mishandle the vehicle and

XS14022 XS14010 an accident may occur resulting in

death or serious injuries.

The mirrors can be slid outward to im- Adjust the mirror so that you can just
prove visibility around wide trailers. see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-
ror.
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

159
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Auto anti−glare inside rear

view mirror
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
To turn off and on the automatic function,
XS14011 push the “ ” switch. XS14012
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.
When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just To ensure correct functioning of anti−
see the rear of your vehicle in the mir- glare mirror sensors located on both
CAUTION
ror. sides of the mirror, do not touch or
This mirror is equipped with auto anti− cover the sensors with your finger or
Do not adjust the mirror while the
glare function. The function is designed a piece of cloth, etc.
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
to reduce glare from the headlights of cause the driver to mishandle the ve-
the vehicle behind you during night hicle and an accident may occur re-
driving. sulting in death or serious injuries.
When the engine switch is in the “ON”
position, the inside rear view mirror al-
ways turns on in the automatic function
mode.
The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.

160
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Sun visors Vanity mirrors

XS14013 XS14014 XS14015

Type A
To block out glare, move the sun visor. On some models: To block the glare from
To block out glare from the front—Swing the front when the main sun visor is
down the sun visor (position 1). swung to the lateral side (position 2),
swing down the sub visor.
To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the sun visor, remove it from the
CAUTION
hook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-
tion 2). Do not extend the plate at the end of
If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
slide the sun visor backward (to position
the sun visor when the visor is in the
position 1. It can cover the anti−glare
XS14016
3). inside rear view mirror and obstruct
the rear view.

Type B

161
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To use the vanity mirror, swing down

the sun visor and open the cover.
Vanity lights (type B only)—
The lights come on when you open the
cover.
To adjust the brightness of the lights, slide
the switch.

162
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 5
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights and Wipers
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Cargo lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Exterior foot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Outside rear view mirror defoggers and front windshield
wiper de−icer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Back window and outside rear view mirror defoggers and
front windshield wiper de−icer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

163
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Headlights and turn signals

(without automatic light
control system)
HEADLIGHTS To turn them on again, turn the engine
To turn on the following lights: Twist switch to the “ON” position or actuate the
the headlight/turn signal lever knob. headlight switch.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate and If you are going to park for over one
instrument panel lights week, make sure the headlight switch is
off.
LS15028a For Canada—The tail light indicator (green
light) on the instrument panel will tell you The timing for the headlights turning off
that the tail lights are on. can be changed. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
Position 2—Headlights and all of the
above NOTICE
For the U.S.A.—The headlight low beam
To prevent the battery from being dis-
indicator light (green light) on the instru-
For the U.S.A. charged, do not leave the lights on
ment panel will tell you that the low
for a long period when the engine is
beams are on.
not running.
Automatic light cut off system
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when any of the doors is opened
and closed with the engine switch in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position and the lever at

LS15027
position 2.
The lights also automatically turn off when
the driver’s door is opened with the lever
at position 1.
If the doors are locked by the wireless
remote control transmitter, the lights auto-
matically turn off immediately.
For Canada

164
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Daytime running light (DRL) system (on

some models)
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
can make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day. The
DRL system can be helpful in many differ-
ent driving conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the short periods after
LS15025a LS15026a
dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your front turn
signal lights come on when:
D The engine switch is on with the en-
gine running.
D The knob is in the “OFF” position or High−Low beams—For high beams, turn TURN SIGNALS
position 1. the headlights on and push the lever away To signal a turn, push the headlight/
from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- turn signal lever up or down to position
D The parking brake is released. ward you (position 2) for low beams. 1.
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob The headlight high beam indicator light
to position 2, flashing the high beam The engine switch must be in the “ON”
(blue light) on the instrument panel will position.
headlights or turn the engine switch to the tell you that the high beams are on.
“ACC” or “LOCK” position. The lever automatically returns after you
Flashing the high beam headlights make a turn, but you may have to return
(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way it by hand after you change lanes.
back. The high beam headlights turn off
when you release the lever. To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
You can flash the high beam headlights 2) and hold it.
with the knob turned to “OFF”.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out.
165
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Headlights and turn signals

(with automatic light control
system)
HEADLIGHTS However, the brightness of the instrument
To turn on the following lights: Twist cluster, air conditioning controls indicator
the headlight/turn signal lever knob. lights and passenger airbag on−off indica-
tor light will not be reduced in daytime
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate, even when the tail lights/headlights are
side marker and instrument panel lights turned on.
XS15019b For Canada—The tail light indicator lights
up in the instrument cluster.
Position 2—Headlights and all of the
above
For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicator
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or all
For the U.S.A.
of the lights in position 1
They automatically turn on or off depend-
ing on the darkness of the surroundings.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are need-
ed immediately when entering a dark tun-
nel, parking structure, etc.

XS15010b When the tail lights/headlights are turned

on, the brightness of the instrument clus-
ter will be reduced slightly unless the in-
strument panel light control knob is turned
fully upward.

For Canada

166
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Automatic light cut off system

NOTICE
Position 1 or position 3 with the tail
lights on— To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on
The lights automatically turn off when the
for a long period when the engine is
driver’s door is opened with the engine
not running.
XS15011 switch in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Position 2 or 3 with the headlights on—
Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
The lights automatically turn off after 30 (on some models)
seconds when any of the doors is opened
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
and closed with the engine switch in the can make it easier for others to see the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.
front of your vehicle during the day. The
If the lock switch of the wireless remote DRL system can be helpful in many differ-
The automatic light control sensor is on control transmitter is pushed when all the ent driving conditions, but they can be
the top of the driver’s side instrument doors are already locked, the lights auto- especially helpful in the short periods after
panel. matically turn off immediately. dawn and before sunset.
Do not place anything on the instrument The time before the headlights turn off The DRL system will make the front turn
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the can be changed. If your vehicle is signal lights come on when:
windshield to block this sensor. equipped with the multi−information dis-
D The engine is on with the engine run-
play, it can be changed by yourself. For
If you feel that the automatic light control ning.
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
comes into operation too early or too late, D The knob is in the “OFF” position,
have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota If any of the doors is left open, the lights
position 1 or position 3 with the tail
dealer. automatically turn off after 20 minutes.
lights on.
To turn them on again, turn the engine
D The parking brake is released.
switch to the “ON” position or actuate the
headlight switch. To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to position 2 or position 3 with the head-
If you are going to park for over one
lights on, flashing the high beam head-
week, make sure the headlight switch is
lights or turn the engine switch to the
off.
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.
167
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 568 in Section 7−3.

XS15020b XS15031a

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn TURN SIGNALS

the headlights on and push the lever away To signal a turn, push the headlight/
from you (position 1). Pull the lever to- turn signal lever up or down to position
ward you (position 2) for low beams. 1.
The headlight high beam indicator light The engine switch must be in the “ON”
(blue light) on the instrument panel will position.
tell you that the high beams are on.
The lever automatically returns after you
Flashing the high beam headlights make a turn, but you may have to return
(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way it by hand after you change lanes.
back. The high beam headlights turn off
when you release the lever. To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
You can flash the high beam headlights 2) and hold it.
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

168
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the en-
gine is not running.
XS15002a XS15003

To turn on the emergency flashers, To adjust the brightness of the instru-

push the switch. ment panel lights, turn the dial.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn With the dial set in the full intensity posi-
them off, push the switch once again. tion, the intensity of the instrument panel
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn lights will not be reduced even when the
other drivers if your vehicle must be tail lights/headlights are turned on.
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as pos-
sible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operat-
ing.

169
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Front fog lights Interior lights

XS15001a XS15012 XS15022a

Type A (front) Type C (rear)

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn sig-
nal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.

XS15014 XS15005

Type B (rear) Interior/personal light main switch

170
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Personal lights (with power

door lock system)
—Front personal lights
To turn on the interior lights, operate
the interior/personal light main switch.
The lights can be turned on or off by
pushing each switch when the interior/
personal light main switch is in the
“DOOR” or “OFF” position.
The interior/personal light main switch has
the following positions:
XS15004 XS15005
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”— The lights can be turned on or off
by pushing each switch.
“DOOR”—Turn the light on when any of
the doors is opened. Type A Interior/personal light main switch
If all the doors are closed, when the engi-
ne switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
tion, the lights will come on and remain
on for about 15 seconds.
If all the doors are closed and the engine
switch is in the “ACC” position interior
light will go off immediately.
Type B and Type C—For details, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in
XS15032
this Section.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened with the switch at the “DOOR”
position for 20 minutes or more. Type B

171
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Rear personal lights

(Crew Max models)
To turn on the front personal lights, To turn on the rear personal lights, op-
operate the interior/personal light main erate the interior/personal light main
switch. switch.
The lights on your side can be turned The lights on your side can be turned
on or off by pushing each lens when on or off by pushing each lens or
the interior/personal light main switch switch when the interior/personal light
is in the “DOOR” or “OFF” position. XS15033 main switch is in the “DOOR” or “OFF”
position.
The interior/personal light main switch has
the following positions: The interior/personal light main switch has
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time. the following position:
“OFF”—The lights can be turned on or off “ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
by pushing each lens. “OFF”—The lights can be turned on or off
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of Type A by pushing each lens or switch.
the doors is opened. For details, see “DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
“Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in the doors is opened. For details, see
this Section. “Illuminated entry system” on page 173 in
To prevent the battery being discharged, this Section.
the lights will automatically turn off when To prevent the battery being discharged,
the key is removed and the door is left the lights will automatically turn off when
opened with the switch at the “DOOR” the key is removed and the door is left
position for 20 minutes or more. XS15015 opened with the switch at the “DOOR”
position for 20 minutes or more.

Type B

172
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Illuminated entry system (with power door lock system)

The following lights will come on when
any of the doors are opened. After all
the doors are closed, the lights remain
on for about 15 seconds before fading
out.
1. Foot light
2. Engine switch light
3. Front personal lights—with the “DOOR”
position
4. Rear personal lights/Interior light
(rear)—with the “DOOR” position
When any of the doors are unlocked, the

XS15017a lights will come on and remain on for

about 15 seconds before fading out.
If all the doors are closed, when the engi-
ne switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-
tion, the lights will come on and remain
on for about 15 seconds.
The duration of the lighting can be
changed. If your vehicle is equipped with
the multi−information display, it can be
changed by yourself. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
If all the doors are closed and the engine
switch is in the “ACC” position, the engine
switch light, interior light, foot light and
personal lights will go off immediately.

173
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Cargo lamp
If all the doors are locked, all the lights The cargo lamp is designed to light up
will fade out. the rear deck of your vehicle.
To prevent the battery being discharged, CARGO LAMP OPERATION
the lights will automatically turn off when The cargo lamp should only be kept on
the key is removed from the engine switch during cargo loading or unloading.
and the door is left opened for about 20
minutes. The cargo lamp switch has the following
positions:
“ON” position—Keeps the light on all the
time.
“OFF” position—Keeps the light off all the
time.
“DOOR” position—The cargo lamp comes

XS15008 on under the following cases:

D When locking and unlocking the doors
(vehicles with the power door lock sys-
tem)
You can operate the cargo lamp by this
method when all the doors are closed
and the engine switch is in the “LOCK”
position or the key is removed.
To turn on: Unlock the door with the
key or the wireless remote control
transmitter.
The cargo lamp will automatically turn
off after 15 seconds.
To turn off: Lock the doors with the
key, the power door lock switch or the
wireless remote control transmitter.
174
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Exterior foot lights (with

driving position memory
system)
D When opening and closing the doors The lights will come on when the doors
To turn on: Open any of the doors. are unlocked simultaneously using either
To turn off: Close all the doors. the power door lock switches or the wire-
less remote control. This light remains on
D When the engine switch is in the “ON” for 15 seconds before fading out when
position, the cargo lamp will go off im- any door is opened, and additional 15
mediately. seconds after all the doors are closed.
D When the engine switch is in the However, in the following cases, the light
“LOCK” position or the key is removed, goes off immediately.
the cargo lamp will automatically go off
after 15 seconds. D Doors are locked with wireless remote
control.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off in D The selector lever is put in a position
about 20 minutes after the key is removed other than “P” with the engine switch
from the engine switch. XS15018b on.
D The doors are locked via the driver’s
This feature is deactivated when the engi-
ne switch is in the “ON” position. door key cylinder.
D The doors are locked via the switches
either inside the driver’s or front pas-
senger’s door.

175
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Windshield wipers and

washer (type A)
The “INT TIME” band lets you adjust the When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
wiping time interval when the wiper lever the washer nozzles do not become
is in the intermittent position (position 1). blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
Twist the band upward to increase the contact your Toyota dealer to have the
time between sweeps, and downward to vehicle serviced.
decrease it.
XS15029a To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.
NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
If the windshield wipers are off, they will try to clear it with a pin or other
operate a couple of times after the washer object. The nozzle will be damaged.
squirts.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 567 in
To turn on the windshield wipers, move Section 7−3.
the lever to the desired setting. In freezing weather, warm the windshield
The engine switch must be in the “ON” with the defroster before using the washer.
position. This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
Lever position Speed setting can block your vision.
Position 1 Intermittent
NOTICE
Position 2 Slow
Do not operate the wipers if the wind-
Position 3 Fast shield is dry. It may scratch the
For a single sweep of the windshield, glass.
push the lever up and release it.

176
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Outside rear view mirror

Windshield wipers and defoggers and front windshield
washer (type B) wiper de−icer (on some models)
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

XS15030a NOTICE
XS14017b
Do not operate the wipers if the wind-
shield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure that

the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked, Type A
To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting. contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position. NOTICE
Lever position Speed setting If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
Position 1 Slow try to clear it with a pin or other

XS14018b
object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Position 2 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,

push the lever up and release it.
To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you and release it.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 567 in Type B
Section 7−3.
177
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Back window and outside rear view

mirror defoggers and front windshield
wiper de−icer (Crew Max models)
To defog or defrost the outside rear Make sure you turn the defoggers off
view mirrors, push the switch. when the mirror surfaces are clear or the
The engine switch must be in the “ON” wiper blades have de−iced. Leaving the
position. defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
The heater panels in the outside rear view stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
mirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-
faces. An indicator light will illuminate to
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
XS15034
indicate the defoggers are operating.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-
On some models, the front windshield wip- ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
er de−icer also operates simultaneously by before operating the switch.
this switch. On vehicles with the front
windshield wiper de−icer, the front wind-
shield wiper blades will be de−iced.
Type A
Push the switch once again to turn the
defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off af-
ter the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.

CAUTION

Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, XS15035a

do not touch them when the switch
is on.

Type B

178
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To defog or defrost the back window,

push the switch with the back window CAUTION
closed.
On vehicles with outside rear view
The engine switch must be in the “ON” mirror defoggers, since the mirror
position. surfaces can get hot, do not touch
The thin heater wires on the inside of the them when the defogger switch is on.
back window will quickly clear the window
surface. An indicator light will illuminate to Make sure you turn the defoggers off
indicate the defogger is operating. when the surfaces are clear or the wiper
On some models, the outside rear view blades have de−iced. Leaving the defog-
mirror defoggers and/or the front wind- gers on for a long time could cause the
shield wiper de−icer also operate simulta- battery to discharge, especially during
neously by this switch. On vehicles with stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
the outside rear view mirror defoggers, the not designed for drying rain water or for
heater panel in the outside rear view mir- melting snow.
rors will quickly clear the mirror surfaces. On vehicles with outside rear view mirror
On vehicles with the front windshield wip- defoggers, if the outside rear view mirrors
er de−icer, the front windshield wiper are heavily coated with ice, use a spray
blades will be de−iced. de−icer before operating the switch.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defoggers off. NOTICE
The system will automatically shut off af- When cleaning the inside of the back
ter the defoggers have operated about 15 window, be careful not to scratch or
minutes. damage the heater wires or connec-
tors.

179
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

180
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 6
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

181
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine coolant temperature

Fuel gauge gauge
The gauge indicates the approximate
Low fuel quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
level
warning when the engine switch is on.
light Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

XS16001a It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full. XS16003a
The needle moves when braking, acceler-
ating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
Type A fuel tank as soon as possible. Type A
On inclines or curves, due to the move-
ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
Low fuel needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
level
warning warning light may come on earlier than
light usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
XS16002a the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp will go off after driving
XS16004a
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

Type B Type B

182
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Oil pressure gauge

The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the engine switch is
NOTICE Normal
driving
on. The engine operating temperature z Do not remove the thermostat in
will vary with changes in weather and the engine cooling system as this
engine load. Idling
may cause the engine to overheat.
If the needle moves into the red zone, The thermostat is designed to con-
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
trol the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
XS16005
engine to cool. the specified operating range.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe z Do not continue driving with an
operating conditions, such as: overheated engine. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in Section 4.
D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high Type A
speed driving.
D Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic. Normal
D Towing a trailer. driving

Idling

XS16006

Type B

183
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Automatic transmission fluid

temperature gauge (with
towing package)
The oil pressure gauge indicates engine Automatic transmission fluid tempera-
oil pressure when the engine switch is ture gauge indicates automatic trans-
on. Check it while driving to make sure mission fluid temperature when the en-
that the needle is in the proper range. gine switch is on. Check it while
If the oil pressure should stay below the driving to make sure that the needle is
normal range, pull off the road to a safe in the proper range.
place and stop the engine immediately.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
XS16015c The gauge displays the current tempera-
ture of the automatic transmission fluid.
shop for assistance. The gauge informs the driver of changes
High range in the automatic transmission fluid temper-
Oil pressure may not build up when the
oil level is too low. The oil pressure ature especially if it becomes too high
gauge is not designed to indicate oil level, while towing a heavy trailer or hauling a
and the oil level must be checked using heavy load.
the level dipstick. Type A If the needle reads high range while you
are driving, slow down and pull off the
NOTICE road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and
put the selector lever in “P”. With the
Do not drive the vehicle with the oil
engine idling, wait until the needle reads
pressure below the normal range until
below the high range. If the needle reads
the cause is fixed—it may ruin the
below the high range, you may start the
engine.
vehicle again. If the needle reads the high

XS16016c range, call a Toyota dealer or qualified

repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE
High range
Continued driving with reading in the
high range may damage the automatic
transmission.
Type B

184
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Voltmeter Tachometer
The voltmeter tells whether the battery
is charged or discharged. Check it
while the engine is running—the needle
should always indicate as shown above.
If the needle reads below or above the
normal range while the engine is running,
XS16007b it indicates the charging system needs im-
mediate repair.
XS16009
However, it is normal for the needle to
drop below the normal range during en-
gine starting.
Normal range

Type A Type A

XS16008b XS16010

Normal range

Type B Type B

185
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Odometer and two trip

meters (without
multi−information display)
The tachometer indicates engine speed 3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per trip meters to zero, and also change
minute). Use it while driving to select the meter display.
correct shift points and to prevent en- To change the meter display, quickly
gine lugging and over−revving. push and release the knob. The meter
Driving with the engine running too fast display changes in the order from the
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
XS16011b odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
the slower the engine speed, the greater time you push.
the fuel economy. To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-
play the meter A reading, then push
NOTICE and hold the knob until the meter is
Do not let the indicator needle get set to zero. The same process can be
into the red zone. This may cause This meter displays the odometer and applied for resetting the trip meter B.
severe engine damage. two trip meters.
1. Odometer—Shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-
trical power source is disconnected.

186
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Multi−information display—
The following information is displayed The unit variations are as follows;
on the multi−information display when CAUTION
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” Information Unit A Unit B
position. Do not adjust the display while the Average fuel
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust consumption and L/100
D Cruise information the display only when the vehicle is MPG
Instantaneous fuel km
D Odometer and two trip meters stopped. consumption
D Warning messages
Driving range MILES km
D Feature customization SELECTING UNIT
You can select the unit between En- Average vehicle
During ordinary driving, cruise information MPH km/h
glish/U.S. customary system and metric speed
is displayed. However, in case the vehicle
has a system malfunction or if there is unit.
some information that the driver should be To select unit A (English/U.S. customary
informed of, a warning message appears system) or unit B (metric unit), push the
on the display. See “—Warning messages” “SETUP US/M” button to display “UNITS”
on page 193 for details. screen on the multi−information display,
If the electrical power source has been and push the “SELECT RESET” button
disconnected from the cruise information while the screen is displayed. Then push
display, the display will automatically be the “INFO” or “SETUP US/M” button to
set to the initial mode. change the display screen and complete
the unit change. (At this time, the outside
When the instrument panel lights are temperature display on the accessory
turned on, the brightness of the display meter also changes.)
will be reduced.
At extremely low temperatures, the multi−
information display may respond slowly,
and the display changes may be delayed.

187
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Cruise information
Each time you push the “INFO” button,
the display toggles through the follow-
ing
1. Zoom display of odometer and trip me-
ter
2. Average fuel consumption
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption
4. Driving range
5. Driving time
6. Average vehicle speed
The displayed values in the cruise infor-
mation display indicate general driving
XS16012C conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
habits and road conditions.
When the engine switch is on, the last
previously used mode displayed just be-
fore the engine switch is off will appear.

188
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1. Zoom display of odometer and trip The display indicates 0 when the vehicle If the low fuel level warning light comes
meter is stopped with the engine running. on, refuel the vehicle even if the display
The odometer and one of the trip meters The calculation is reset when the engine indicates that the vehicle can be driven
are displayed simultaneously. See switch is turned off. further.
“—Odometer and two trip meters”. 4. Driving range (“Distance To Empty”) 5. Driving time (“Trip Timer”)
2. Average fuel consumption The distance the vehicle can travel with To calculate the driving time, display
(“Average Fuel Economy”) the remaining fuel is calculated and the “Trip Timer” after the engine has
Average fuel consumption is calculated displayed based on the quantity of re- been started. Then press the “SELECT
and displayed based on total driving maining fuel and past fuel consumption. RESET” button. To stop the calculation,
distance and total fuel consumption press the “SELECT RESET” button
The driving range display indicates the again.
with the engine running. approximate distance that you can drive
The displayed value is updated every 10 until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is Driving time is counted from 0:00:00. Up
seconds. different from the actual distance traveled. to 99:59:59 (99 hours, 59 minutes and 59
seconds) can be displayed. When the driv-
To reset the calculations, push and hold The displayed value is updated every time ing time exceeds 99:59:59, the counter
the “SELECT RESET” button for more the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is returns to 0:00:00.
than 2 seconds. consumed.
If the engine switch is turned off while the
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal- driving time is being calculated, the cal-
(“Current Fuel Economy”) culation is reset. However, when only a culation will cease. When the engine is
The instantaneous fuel consumption is small amount of fuel is added to the tank, next started, it will automatically resume
calculated and displayed based on dis- the display may not be reset. from the previous value.
tance and fuel consumption at 20 revo- The actual driving range varies with driv- If the “SELECT RESET” button is pressed
lutions of the engine. ing habits and road conditions. If fuel con- to cease the calculation and then the en-
The displayed value is updated for a short sumption is good, the driving range will be gine switch is turned off, the calculation
time. longer than indicated. If fuel consumption will not resume when the engine is next
is poor, the driving range will be shorter started. In this case, press the “SELECT
An accurate figure may not be shown if than indicated.
the vehicle is driving down a long slope, RESET” button to start the calculation.
and engine brake is applied. (The display To reset the calculation, push and hold
will indicate the extremely low fuel con- the “SELECT RESET” button for more
sumption.) than 2 seconds.
189
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Feature customization
6. Average vehicle speed Your vehicle includes a variety of electron- 2. Customize the item with the “SELECT
(“Average Speed”) ic features that can be customized to your RESET” button.
Average vehicle speed is calculated and preferences. The vehicle can be custom- D Door lock and unlock warning function
displayed based on total driving dis- ized while the vehicle is stopped.
Screen text: KEYLESS ENTRY
tance and total driving time with the “KEYLESS ENTRY” is used for some cus- FEEDBACK
engine running. tomization item names in the screen dis-
play. It means “Wireless door lock” in this “LAMPS + TONE”∗ “LAMPS”
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds. owner’s manual.
1. Select the item you want to customize “OFF” “TONE”
To rest the calculations, push and hold the
“SELECT RESET” button for more than 2 with the “SETUP US/M” button.
seconds. UNITS D Time for automatic door lock function
Screen text: KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYLESS ENTRY FEEDBACK
RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS ENTRY RELOCK TIMER “60 SECONDS”∗ “120 SECONDS”

KEYLESS ENTRY “30 SECONDS” “OFF”

ALL DOORS UNLOCK

DOOR AUTO LOCKING D Double switch operation to unlock all

the doors
DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING Screen text: KEYLESS ENTRY ALL
DOORS UNLOCK
HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF TIMER
“2 PRESSES”∗ ⇔ “1 PRESS”

COURTESY LAMPS OFF TIMER

DEFAULT SETTING

190
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Automatic door locking function D Time period before lights turn off After customizing is complete, press the
Screen text: DOOR AUTO LOCKING Screen text: COURTESY OFF TIMER “SET UP” button to set the selected item.
If the customization fails, the previous set-
“SHIFT OUT “ABOVE 12MPH “15 SECONDS”∗ “30 SECONDS” ting will be displayed. If no button is
OF PARK” (Metric: 20 km/h)”∗ pressed for 10 seconds, the display
“OFF” “8 SECONDS” switches to INFO mode.
As for any items except “UNITS”, the set-
D Automatic door unlocking function D Default settings of all items
tings cannot be changed at a vehicle
Screen text: DOOR AUTO UNLOCKING Screen text: HOLD RESET TO speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more. A mes-
RESTORE DEFAULT SETTINGS sage, “PLEASE STOP VEHICLE TO
“SHIFT TO “DRIVER DOOR
PARK”∗ OPEN” CHANGE SETTINGS”, will be indicated on
∗: Default setting the screen and customizing operation can-
“OFF” not be accomplished.

D Time period before lights turn off (if a If the “SYSTEM ERROR” message is indi-
cated on the screen, the customizing op-
door is opened and closed, and engine
eration cannot be performed due to a
switch is in ACC or LOCK)
communication error. In such cases, turn
Screen text: HEADLAMPS AUTO OFF the engine switch off and then on again.
TIMER When the communication returns to nor-
“30 SECONDS”∗ “60 SECONDS” mal, the customizing operation can then
be performed. If the “SYSTEM ERROR”
“0 SECONDS” message is indicated again, contact your
“90 SECONDS” Toyota dealer.

191
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Odometer and two trip

meters
This meter displays the odometer and To reset trip meter A to zero, display
two trip meters. the meter A reading, then push and
Selecting the zoom display of the hold the knob until the meter is set to
odometer and trip meter allows the zero. The same process can be applied
odometer and one of the trip meters to for resetting trip meter B.
be displayed simultaneously.
XS16013d 1. Odometer—Shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
Normal display You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-
trical power source is disconnected.
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also changes
the meter display.

XS16014c To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

Zoom display

192
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Warning messages
Message Status Action

(a) Parking brake is not released. Release parking brake.

(b) Engine coolant temperature is too high. Stop your vehicle and allow engine to cool.

(c) Any of doors are opened.

opened Close doors completely
completely.

193
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Message Status Action

(d) Fuel in tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up tank.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature is

(e) too high.
Stop and check.

(f) Oil change is nearly due. Check engine oil.

(g) Oil change is due. Replace engine oil.

(h) Washer fluid level is low. Add washer fluid.

194
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When the message appears, the low fuel

NOTICE level warning light comes on, and a warn-
(a)
Do not continue driving with an over- ing tone also sounds. If it appears, fill the
heated engine. See “If your vehicle fuel tank as soon as possible.
This message is to warn the driver that
the parking brake is not completely re- overheats” on page 502 in Section 4. The message disappears by pressing the
leased at a vehicle speed of 5 km/h (3 “SELECT RESET” button when the engine
mph) or more. switch is in the “ON” position. However,
(c) the low fuel level warning light remains
Stop the vehicle and release the park-
on.
ing brake fully.
When the message appears, the master
warning light flashes, the brake system (e)
warning light remains on, and an intermit-
tent warning tone also sounds. This message is to warn the driver that
the automatic transmission fluid tem-
This message is to remind the driver
perature is too high.
(b) that one or more of the doors are
opened. If the automatic transmission fluid temper-
ature is too high, the message appears,
This message is to warn the driver that Close the door securely. the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
the engine coolant temperature is too The message appears, the master warning ture warning light comes on, and a warn-
high. light flashes, the open door warning light ing tone also sounds.
Stop the vehicle and allow the engine remains on, and a warning tone also If this message appears while you are
to cool. sounds when the vehicle speed rises driving, slow down and pull off the road.
The message appears, the master warning above 5 km/h (3 mph).
Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put
light flashes, and a warning tone also the selector lever in “P”. With the engine
sounds. (d) idling, wait until the message goes off. If
the message goes off, you may start the
vehicle again. If the message does not go
This message is to remind the driver
off, call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
that the fuel is nearly empty.
shop for assistance.

195
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

2. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”

NOTICE position while holding down the trip
(g) (U.S.A. only)
Continue driving with the warning meter reset knob.
message on may result in damage of This message is to remind the driver to Hold down the knob for at least 5
the automatic transmission. change the engine oil. seconds. The information display indicates
“MAINT REQD RESET MODE
Change the engine oil as soon as pos-
COMPLETE”, the master warning light
sible.
(f) (U.S.A. only) comes on and the tone sounds.
If the driving distance after the previous
If the system fails to reset, perform the
oil change reaches 8000 km (5000 miles),
This message is to remind the driver to above procedure again.
the message appears, the master warning
change the engine oil. The message is light comes on, and a warning tone also
a prior notice. sounds. The message stays on when the (h)
Toyota recommends that the engine oil engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
be changed as soon as possible. tion.
This message appears when the washer
If the driving distance after the previous The engine oil maintenance data must be fluid level becomes very low.
oil change reaches 7200 km (4500 miles), reset after the engine oil change. See
Fill the tank as soon as possible.
the message appears for about 15 sec- “Resetting the engine oil maintenance
data” below for the procedure to reset the The message appears the master warning
onds, the master warning light comes on,
system. light comes on and a warning tone also
and a warning tone also sounds.
sounds.
The engine oil maintenance data must be Resetting the engine oil maintenance
data If the message appears, fill the washer
reset after the engine oil change. See
tank as soon as possible. For instruc-
following “Resetting the engine oil The engine oil maintenance data must be
tions, see “Adding washer fluid” on
maintenance data”. reset after replacement of the engine oil.
page 567 in Section 7−3.
Reset the data by the following procedure:
1. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position with the trip meter A
reading shown. (For details, see
“Odometer and two trip meters” on
page 186 in this Section.)
196
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

or
(a) If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(indicator and buzzer)

(b) Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(indicator and buzzer)

(c) Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(indicator and buzzer)

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

197
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(g) Replace engine oil.

(h) Fill up tank.

or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(i) If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

and
If the “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes and the slip indicator light comes on, contact
(j) Toyota dealer.

(k) Close all doors.

(indicator and buzzer)

198
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

Adjust tire inflation pressure. If the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute,
(m) contact Toyota dealer.

(n) Stop and check.

(o) Read a warning message on multi−information display.

(p) Add washer fluid.

(q) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

(r) Parking brake reminder buzzer Release parking brake.

(s) Four−wheel drive system warning Shift the transfer mode correctly.
buzzer

199
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(t) Open moon roof reminder buzzer Close moon roof.

200
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(a) Brake System Warning Light and (b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
buzzer CAUTION and Buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases If either of the following conditions The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
when the engine switch is in the “ON” occurs, immediately stop your vehicle buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
position. at a safe place and contact your Once the engine switch is turned to “ON”
D When the parking brake is applied... Toyota dealer. or “START”, the reminder light flashes and
This light comes on for a few seconds D The light does not turn off even buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt is
when the engine switch is turned to the after the parking brake is released not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the
“ON” position even after the parking brake while the engine is running. belt, the light continues flashing and the
is released. buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
In this case, the brakes may not
D When the brake fluid level is low... work properly and your stopping If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
distance will become longer. De- (12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
press the brake pedal firmly and the buzzer will sound for about 10 sec-
CAUTION
bring the vehicle to an immediate onds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfas-
It is dangerous to continue driving stop. tened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle
normally when the brake fluid level is D The brake system warning light re- speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the
low. mains on together with the “ABS” buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the
warning light. buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer
Have your vehicle checked at your In this case, not only the anti−lock still sounds, make sure the front passen-
Toyota dealer in the following case: brake system will fail but also the ger’s seat belt is fastened.
D The light does not come on even if the vehicle will become extremely un-
parking brake is applied when the engi- stable during braking.
ne switch is in the “ON” position.
D The light does not come on even if the
engine switch is turned on with the
parking brake released.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

201
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Re- (d) Charging System Warning Light (e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
minder Light and Buzzer This warning light comes on when the Light
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi- This light warns that the engine oil pres-
have the front passenger buckle up the tion, and goes off when the engine is sure is too low.
seat belt. started. If it flickers or stays on while you are
Once the engine switch is turned to the When there are problems in the charging driving, pull off the road to a safe place
“ON” position, the reminder light flashes if system while the engine is running, the and stop the engine immediately. Call a
a passenger sits in the right front passen- warning light comes on. Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
ger seat and does not fasten the seat assistance.
belt. NOTICE The light may occasionally flicker when
If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h When the charging system warning the engine is idling or it may come on
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, light comes on while the engine is briefly after a hard stop. There is no
the buzzer will sound for 10 seconds. running, malfunctions such as the en- cause for concern if it then goes out when
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, gine drive belt being broken may have the engine is accelerated slightly.
the buzzer will sound in a different tone occurred. If the warning light comes The light may come on when the oil level
for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle speed on, immediately stop the vehicle in a is extremely low. It is not designed to
drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the buzzer safe place and contact your Toyota indicate low oil level, and the oil level
will continue to sound. To stop the buzzer, dealer. must be checked using the level dipstick.
fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer still
sounds, make sure the driver’s seat belt NOTICE
is fastened.
Do not drive the vehicle with the
The buzzer can be disabled. For details,
warning light on—even for one block.
contact your Toyota dealer.
It may ruin the engine.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light to flash and
buzzer to sounds.

202
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
This lamp comes on when the engine possible to service the vehicle. (I/M) programs
switch is turned to the “ON” position If engine speed does not increase when Your vehicle may not pass a state
and goes off after the engine starts. the accelerator pedal is depressed, there emission inspection if the malfunction
This means that the warning light sys- may be a problem somewhere in the elec- indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
tem is operating properly. tronic throttle control system. Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- emission control system and OBD
comes on while driving, first check the er, if you depress the accelerator pedal (On−Board Diagnostics) system before
followings. more firmly and slowly, you can drive your taking your vehicle for the inspection.
D Empty fuel tank vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as Maintenance (I/M) programs” in Section 6.
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi- possible.
ately. (g) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Even if the abnormality of the electronic Light (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
D Loose fuel tank cap throttle control system is corrected during This light acts as a reminder to replace
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely low speed driving, the system may not be the engine oil.
tighten it. recovered until the engine is stopped and
the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” This light will come on when the engine
These cases are temporary malfunctions. switch is turned to the “ON” position and
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off or “LOCK” position.
will go off after about a few seconds.
after taking several driving trips.
CAUTION When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
If the lamp does not go off even after miles) after the engine oil replacement,
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer Be especially careful to prevent erro- this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
as soon as possible. neous pedal operation. and then flashes for about 12 seconds
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel with the engine switch turned to the “ON”
tank cap is not loose... position. If you continue driving without
D There is a problem somewhere in the replacing the engine oil, and if the
engine, emission control system, elec- distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000
tronic throttle control system, automatic miles), the light will come on after the
transmission electrical system or warn- engine switch is turned to “ON” position.
ing light system itself. The light will remain on thereafter.

203
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the light is flashing, we recommend that (i) “ABS” Warning Light D The light does not come on when the
you replace the engine oil at an early The light comes on when the engine engine switch is turned to the “ON”
opportunity depending on the driving and switch is turned to the “ON” position. If position, or remains on.
road conditions. If the light comes on, the anti−lock brake system and the brake D The light comes on while you are dri-
replace it as soon as possible. assist system work properly, the light ving.
The system must be reset after the turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter, A warning light turning on briefly during
engine oil replacement. Reset the system if either of the systems malfunctions, the operation does not indicate a problem.
by the following procedure: light comes on again.
1. Turn the engine switch to the “OFF” When the “ABS” warning light is on (and CAUTION
position with the trip meter A reading the brake system warning light is off), the
shown. (For details, see “Odometer and following systems do not operate, but the If the “ABS” warning light remains on
two trip meters” on page 186 in this brake system still operates conventionally. together with the brake system warn-
Section.) D Anti−lock brake system ing light, immediately stop your ve-
2. Turn the engine switch to the “ON” hicle at a safe place and contact your
D Brake assist system Toyota dealer.
position while holding down the trip
meter reset knob. D Traction control system In this case, not only the anti−lock
Hold down the knob for at least 5 D “AUTO LSD” system brake system will fail but also the
seconds. The trip meter A indicates D Vehicle stability control system vehicle will become extremely unsta-
“000000” and the light goes off. ble during braking.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
If the system fails to reset, the light will the brake system warning light is off), the
continue flashing. anti−lock brake system does not operate,
(h) Low Fuel Level Warning Light so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
This light comes on when the fuel level road surfaces.
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible. If either of the following conditions oc-
curs, this indicates a malfunction some-
On inclines or curves, due to the move- where in the components monitored by
ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level the warning light system. Contact your
warning light may come on earlier than Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
usual. service the vehicle.
204
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(j) “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes ∗: The front passenger occupant classifica-
The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes and and the slip indicator light comes on tion system includes the front passenger
the slip indicator light comes on to warn while driving. occupant classification ECU, load sensor
that there is a problem somewhere in the (k) Open Door Warning Light and buzz- and front passenger’s seat belt buckle
following: er switch.
D Vehicle stability control system This light remains on until all the doors If either of the following conditions occurs,
are completely closed. this indicates a malfunction somewhere in
D Traction control system the parts monitored by the warning light
D “AUTO LSD” system The buzzer also sounds once when any system. Contact your Toyota dealer as
of the doors is not completely closed at soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The lights come on when the engine the vehicle speed 5 km/h (3 mph) or
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and more. Stop the vehicle and close all the D The light does not come on when the
will go off after a few seconds. doors completely. engine switch is turned to the “ON”
If the “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes position or remains on for more than
(l) SRS Warning Light 6 seconds.
and the slip indicator light comes on dur-
ing driving, the above mentioned systems This light will come on when the engine D The light comes on while driving.
will not work. However, if the brakes oper- switch is turned to the “ON” position.
After about 6 seconds, the light will go (m) Tire Pressure Warning Light
ate normally when applied, it is not a
problem to continue driving. off. This means the systems of the air- This light warns that the tire inflation pres-
bag and front seat belt pretensioners sure of one or more of your tires (except
In the following cases, contact your Toyota are operating properly. for the temporary spare tire) is low. The
dealer: light comes on when the engine switch is
This warning light system monitors the
D The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen- turned to the “ON” position. It goes off
do not come on after the engine switch sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen- after a few seconds. This indicates that
is turned to the “ON” position. sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv- the tire pressure warning system is func-
D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt tioning properly.
and the slip indicator light remains on buckle switch, front passenger occupant
after the engine switch is turned to the classification system∗ , passenger airbag
“ON” position. off switch, passenger airbag on−off indica-
tor light, seat belt pretensioner assem-
blies, inflators, “RSCA OFF” indicator light,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
205
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the light comes on, stop your vehicle in (r) Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer
a safe place as soon as possible and
NOTICE
The buzzer acts once when the parking
check that the tire inflation pressure of all Continued driving with the warning brake is not completely released at the
four tires is as specified on the tire and light on may damage the automatic vehicle speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.
loading information label. (See “Checking transmission. Stop the vehicle and release the parking
tire inflation pressure” on page 553 in brake fully.
Section 7−2.) The light should go off
(o) Master Warning Light (s) Four−wheel Drive System Warning
several minutes after the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted. If the master warning light comes on, a Buzzer (four−wheel drive models)
message appears on the multi−information This buzzer reminds you that the transfer
If the warning light comes on after blink-
display. Depending on the conditions a mode is not selected correctly.
ing for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning
warning tone may sound. (See “—Warning
system may be malfunctioning. Contact If the buzzer sounds when you shift the
messages” on page 193 in this Section for
your Toyota dealer. transfer from “2WD” to “4H”, “4H” to
instructions.)
For details, see “Tire pressure warning “2WD”, “4L” to “4H”, “4H” to “4L”, or “4L”
(p) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level to “2WD” mode, follow the instructions in
system” on page 254 in Section 1−7.
Warning Light “Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in
(n) Automatic Transmission Fluid Tem- Section 1−7.
The light warns that the windshield washer
perature Warning Light
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at (t) Open Moon Roof Reminder Buzzer
This light warns that the automatic trans- your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
mission fluid temperature is too high. This buzzer acts as a reminder to close
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 567 in
the moon roof when you turn the engine
If this light comes on while you are driv- Section 7−3.)
switch off and open the driver’s door.
ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop The light will come on when the engine
the vehicle at a safe place and put the switch is turned to the “ON” position and
selector lever in “P”. With the engine id- will go off after a few seconds.
ling, wait until the light goes off. If the
(q) Key Reminder Buzzer
light goes off, you may start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for the key when you open the driver’s door
assistance. with the engine switch in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

206
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER D Low windshield washer fluid level warn- If any service reminder indicator or warn-
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level ing light ing buzzer does not function as described
warning light) The SRS warning light goes off after above, have it checked by your Toyota
Vehicles without multi−information dis- about 6 seconds. dealer as soon as possible.
play— Vehicles with multi−information display—
1. Apply the parking brake. 1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the doors. 2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should The open door warning light should
come on. come on.
3. Close the door. 3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go The open door warning light should go
off. off.
4. Turn the engine switch to the “ON” 4. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position, but do not start the engine. position, but do not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators ex- All the service reminder indicators ex-
cept the open door warning light should cept the open door warning light should
come on. come on.
The following service reminder indica- The following service reminder indica-
tors go off after a few seconds: tors go off after a few seconds:
D Engine oil replacement reminder light D “ABS” warning light
D “ABS” warning light D “RSCA OFF” indicator light
D “RSCA OFF” indicator light D “VSC OFF” indicator light
D “VSC OFF” indicator light D “AUTO LSD” indicator light
D “AUTO LSD” indicator light D Tire pressure warning light
D Tire pressure warning light D Slip indicator light
D Slip indicator light The SRS warning light goes off after
about 6 seconds.
207
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

208
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 7
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Engine (ignition) switch, Transmission and Parking
brake
Engine (ignition) switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Four−wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
“AUTO LSD” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

209
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine (ignition) switch

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be re-
NOTICE
moved only at this position. Do not leave the engine switch in the
You must push in the key to turn the “ON” position if the engine is not
engine switch from “ACC” to the “LOCK” running. The battery will discharge
position. The selector lever must be put and the ignition could be damaged.
XS17001a in the “P” position before pushing the key.
Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—
Once you remove the key, the engine im-
mobilizer system is automatically set. (See
“Engine immobilizer system” on page 21
in Section 1−2.)
When starting the engine, the engine
“START”—Starter motor on. The key switch may seem stuck at the “LOCK”
will return to the “ON” position when position. To free it, first be sure the key
released. is pushed all the way in, and then rock
For starting tips, see page 473 in Section the steering wheel slightly while turning
3. the key gently.

“ON”—Engine on and all accessories Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
on.
from underneath the deck for several min-
This is the normal driving position. utes. This is normal operation and does
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio not indicate a malfunction. (See “Leak
operate, but the engine is off. detection pump” on page x.)
If you leave the engine switch in the It is not a malfunction if the needles on
“ACC” or “LOCK” position and open the all meters and gauges move slightly when
driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”,
remove the key. “ON” or “START” position.

210
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Automatic transmission (floor shift type)

"5−speed models
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
Selector lever only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the engine
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key re-
moval
R: Reverse

XS17002a N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
S: “S” mode driving
Shift with the brake pedal +: Upshift range
depressed. (The engine switch −: Downshift range
must be in “ON” position.)

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, lean the

selector lever leftward or rightward.

211
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(b) Normal driving D Automatic shifting point change con-

CAUTION trol:
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 474 in The most suitable shift range is se-
Never put your foot on the accelera- lected depending on the driver’s accel-
Section 3. The transmission must be in tor pedal while shifting.
“P” or “N”. erator pedal operation and vehicle con-
dition.
When the front drive control switch knob 3. Release the parking brake and brake
is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel (c) Driving in “S” mode
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
drive), the driving pattern selector setting slowly for smooth starting. The shift range position can be
has no effect on gear shift timing. (See changed in “S” mode. When the selec-
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con- tor lever is in the “S” position, the
this Section for information of the front trol— shift range position can be switched
drive control lever.) AI shifting control selects the most between “5” (fifth range) and “1” (first
2. With your foot holding down the brake suitable shift range automatically ac- range) by shifting the selector lever to
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. cording to the driver’s operation and the “+” (up) or “−” (down) position. By
driving condition. shifting the lever to the “+” (up) posi-
When the lever is in the “D” position, the tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-
automatic transmission system will select AI shifting control operates automatical-
ly with the selector lever in the “D” ond, the highest shift range position
the most suitable gear for running condi- can be obtained. However, it cannot be
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- position. When the lever is moved to
the “S” position, this function will be changed while cruise control is acti-
ing, hard towing, etc. vated. When the selector lever is
cancelled.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel shifted to the “S” position, shift range
economy and quieter driving. If the engine D Shifting control on the slope: position “4” (fourth range) is selected
coolant temperature is low or when the On inclines, you can drive smoothly automatically.
front drive control switch knob is in “4L” with reduced shifting quantity. On de-
clines, the vehicle will shift down auto- However, if the selector lever is shifted
(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the to the “S” position when AI shifting
transmission will not shift into the over- matically to obtain optimum engine
braking and reduce the driver’s foot control is being performed, the initial
drive gear even in the “D” position. (See shift range position may be “3” (third
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in braking load.
range). This is because the suitable
this Section for information of the front shift range is selected depending on
drive control.) the driving condition.

212
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur- Shift range positions
rent shift range position are shown on the D “5” (Fifth range):
instrument cluster. The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and overdrive
(fifth) gears according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions.
D “4” (Fourth range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting

XS17028 will be obtained on an uphill road.

D “3” (Third range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
is necessary.
D “2” (Second range):
First or second gear will be selected
automatically according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions. This
range is to be used when engine brak-
ing stronger than that of the “3” range
position is necessary.
1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range
213
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D “1” (First range): Maximum allowable speeds Four−wheel drive models without towing
The gear is fixed in first regardless of To get on a highway or to pass slower package
vehicle speed and driving conditions. traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec- —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
This range is to be used when maxi- essary. Make sure you observe the follow- range km/h (mph)
mum engine braking is necessary. ing maximum allowable speed in each 1 23 (14)
If you attempt to downshift the transmis- range: 2 40 (24)
sion when it is not possible to downshift 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine 3 58 (36)
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone 4 68 (42)
sounds twice. range km/h (mph) 5 68 (42)
1 59 (36)
2 102 (63) Four−wheel drive models with towing
NOTICE package
3 148 (91)
Do not drive in the “3”, “2” or “1” —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
range when driving at high speed or range km/h (mph)
Without towing package
climbing a gentle slope for a long 1 22 (13)
time. Otherwise the transmission or range km/h (mph) 2 38 (23)
engine may overheat causing damage. 1 61 (37) 3 56 (34)
2 105 (65) 4 64 (39)
3 154 (95) 5 64 (39)
With towing package
range km/h (mph)
NOTICE
1 58 (36) Do not downshift if you are going
2 100 (62) faster than the maximum allowable
3 147 (91) speed for the next lower range.

214
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When the “S” mode indicator light does For decreasing the vehicle speed, see Four−wheel drive models with towing
not come on even with the selector lever “Cruise control” on page 262 in this package
moved to the “S” position, there may be a Section. —Front drive control switch knob
problem somewhere in the system. Have D Move the selector lever down to the at “2WD” or “4H”
your vehicle checked/repaired by your “−” side to select the “3” range. The . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this transmission will downshift to third
case, you can drive in the same condition —Front drive control switch knob
range when the vehicle speed drops at “4L”
as in the “D” position. down to or lower than the following . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)
(d) Using engine braking speed, and stronger engine braking will
be enabled. D Move the selector lever down to the
To use engine braking, you can downshift “−” side to select the “2” range. The
the transmission as follows: 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine transmission will downshift to second
D When driving in the “D” position— . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 km/h (84 mph) range when the vehicle speed drops
Shift the selector lever to “S” position. 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine down to or lower than the following
When driving in the “5” range within Two−wheel drive models speed, and more powerful engine brak-
the “S” position— —without towing package ing than that of the “3” range position
Move the selector lever down to the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph) will be enabled.
“−” side to select the “4” range. The —with towing package 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
transmission will downshift to fourth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 km/h (57 mph)
range and engine braking will be en- Four−wheel drive models without tow- 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
abled. ing package Two−wheel drive models
When the cruise control is being used, —Front drive control switch knob —without towing package
engine braking can not be enabled be- at “2WD” or “4H” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)
cause the cruise control is not can- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
celled. However, engine braking will be —with towing package
automatically enabled if the vehicle —Front drive control switch knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph)
speed is higher than the set speed of at “4L”
the cruise control depending on the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)
driving conditions.

215
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Four−wheel drive models without tow- 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine Four−wheel drive models with towing
ing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) package
—Front drive control switch knob 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine —Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H” Two−wheel drive models at “2WD” or “4H”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph) —without towing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph) —Front drive control switch knob
at “4L” at “4L”
—with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (21 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph)
Four−wheel drive models with towing Four−wheel drive models without tow- CAUTION
package ing package
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob Be careful when downshifting on a
at “2WD” or “4H” at “2WD” or “4H” slippery surface. The abrupt change
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph) in engine speed could cause the ve-
—Front drive control switch knob hicle to skid or spin.
—Front drive control switch knob
at “4L”
at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 km/h (20 mph)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph)
D Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “1” range. The
transmission will downshift to first
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than the following
speed, and maximum engine braking
will be enabled.

216
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(e) Backing up (g) Good driving practice (h) If you cannot shift the selector le-
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up ver out of “P” position
2. With the brake pedal held down with and down between third gear and over- If you cannot shift the selector lever from
your foot, shift the selector lever to the drive when climbing a gentle slope, the “P” position even though the brake
“R” position. shift the selector lever into “S” posi- pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
tion. override button. For instructions, see “If
NOTICE D When towing a trailer, in order to main- you cannot shift automatic transmission
tain engine braking efficiency, do not selector lever” on page 522 in Section 4.
Never shift into reverse while the ve-
use the transmission in “D”. Select an
hicle is moving.
appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

(f) Parking CAUTION

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down, Always keep your foot on the brake
fully depress the parking brake pedal pedal while stopped with the engine
to apply the parking brake securely. running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion. NOTICE

CAUTION Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on
Never attempt to move the selector an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
lever into “P” position under any cir- the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
cumstances while the vehicle is mov- al, as this can cause the transmission
ing. Serious mechanical damage and to overheat.
loss of vehicle control may result.

217
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"6−speed models
Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
Selector lever only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the engine
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key re-
moval
R: Reverse

XS17002a N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
S: “S” mode driving
Shift with the brake pedal +: Upshift range
depressed. (The engine switch −: Downshift range
must be in “ON” position)

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, lean the

selector lever leftward or
rightward.

218
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(b) Normal driving D Automatic shifting point change con-

CAUTION trol:
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 474 in The most suitable shift range is se-
Never put your foot on the accelera- lected depending on the driver’s accel-
Section 3. The transmission must be in tor pedal while shifting.
“P” or “N”. erator pedal operation and vehicle con-
dition.
When the front drive control switch knob 3. Release the parking brake and brake
is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel (c) Driving in “S” mode
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
drive), the driving pattern selector setting slowly for smooth starting. The shift range position can be
has no effect on gear shift timing. (See changed in “S” mode. When the selec-
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con- tor lever is in the “S” position, the
this Section for information of the front trol— shift range position can be switched
drive control lever.) AI shifting control selects the most between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first
2. With your foot holding down the brake suitable shift range automatically ac- range) by shifting the selector lever to
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. cording to the driver’s operation and the “+” (up) or “−” (down) position. By
driving condition. shifting the lever to the “+” (up) posi-
When the lever is in the “D” position, the tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-
automatic transmission system will select AI shifting control operates automatical-
ly with the selector lever in the “D” ond, the highest shift range position
the most suitable gear for running condi- can be obtained. However, it cannot be
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- position. When the lever is moved to
the “S” position, this function will be changed while cruise control is acti-
ing, hard towing, etc. vated. When the selector lever is
cancelled.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel shifted to the “S” position, shift range
economy and quieter driving. If the engine D Shifting control on the slope: position “4” (fourth range) or “5” (fifth
coolant temperature is low or when the On inclines, you can drive smoothly range) is selected depending on the ve-
front drive control switch knob is in “4L” with reduced shifting quantity. On de- hicle speed.
(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the clines, the vehicle will shift down auto-
transmission will not shift into the over- matically to obtain optimum engine
drive gear even in the “D” position. (See braking and reduce the driver’s foot
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in braking load.
this Section for information of the front
drive control.)

219
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

However, if the selector lever is shifted Shift range positions

to the “S” position when AI shifting D “6” (Sixth range):
control is being performed, the initial The most suitable gear is selected au-
shift range position may be “2” (second tomatically between first and overdrive
range) or “3” (third range). This is be- (sixth) gears according to the vehicle
cause the suitable shift range is se- speed and driving conditions.
lected depending on the driving condi-
tion. D “5” (Fifth range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
The “S” mode indicator light and the cur- tomatically between first and fifth gears
rent shift range position are shown on the according to vehicle speed and driving
instrument cluster. conditions. This range is suitable for
acceleration such as when you want to
pass a vehicle running ahead of you

XS17028 during high speed driving.

D “4” (Fourth range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting
will be obtained on an uphill road.
D “3” (Third range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
1: Upshift range is necessary.
2: Downshift range
220
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D “2” (Second range): Maximum allowable speeds Four−wheel drive models with towing
First or second gear will be selected To get on a highway or to pass slower package
automatically according to the vehicle traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec- —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
speed and driving conditions. This essary. Make sure you observe the follow-
range is to be used when engine brak- range km/h (mph)
ing maximum allowable speeds in each 1 22 (13)
ing stronger than that of the “3” range range:
position is necessary. 2 38 (23)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine 3 56 (34)
D “1” (First range): Without towing package 4 64 (39)
The gear is fixed in first regardless of 5 64 (39)
vehicle speed and driving conditions. range km/h (mph)
1 62 (38) 6 64 (39)
This range is to be used when maxi-
mum engine braking is necessary. 2 106 (65)
3 154 (95)
NOTICE
If you attempt to downshift the transmis-
With towing package Do not downshift if you are going
sion when it is not possible to downshift
faster than the maximum allowable
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone range km/h (mph)
speed for the next lower range.
sounds twice. 1 59 (36)
2 101 (62)
3 147 (91) When the “S” mode indicator light does
not come on even with the selector lever
Four−wheel drive models without towing
moved to the “S” position, there may be a
package
problem somewhere in the system. Have
—Front drive control switch knob at “4L” your vehicle checked/repaired by your
range km/h (mph) Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this
1 23 (14) case, you can drive in the same condition
2 40 (24) as in the “D” position.
3 58 (36)
4 68 (42)
5 68 (42)
6 68 (42)

221
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(d) Using engine braking For ways to decrease the vehicle Four−wheel drive models without tow-
To use engine braking, you can downshift speed, see “Cruise control” on page ing package
the transmission as follows: 262 in this Section. —Front drive control switch knob
D When driving in the “D” position— D Move selector lever down to the “−” at “2WD” or “4H”
Shift the selector lever to the “S” side to select the “3” range. The trans- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
position. mission will downshift to third range —Front drive control switch knob
when the vehicle speed drops down to at “4L”
D When driving in the “6” range within or lower than the following speed, and
the “S” position— . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)
more powerful engine braking than that
Move the selector lever down to the of the “4” range position will be en- Four−wheel drive models with towing
“−” side to select the “5” range. The abled. package
transmission will downshift to fifth —Front drive control switch knob
range and engine braking will be en- 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models at “2WD” or “4H”
abled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)
D Move the selector lever down to the —without towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph) —Front drive control switch knob
“−” side to select the “4” range. The at “4L”
transmission will downshift to fourth —with towing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)
range and stronger engine braking will . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)
be enabled. D Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “2” range. The
When the cruise control is being used, transmission will downshift to second
even if you downshift the transmission, range when the vehicle speed drops
engine braking will not be enabled be- down to or lower than the following
cause the cruise control is not can- speed, and more powerful engine brak-
celled. However, engine braking will be ing will be enabled.
automatically enabled if the vehicle
speed is higher than the set speed of
the cruise control depending on the
driving conditions.

222
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models Two−wheel drive models CAUTION
—without towing package —without towing package Be careful when downshifting on a
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph) slippery surface. The abrupt change
—with towing package —with towing package in engine speed could cause the ve-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) hicle to skid or spin.
Four−wheel drive models without tow- Four−wheel drive models without tow-
ing package ing package (e) Backing up
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
at “2WD” or “4H” at “2WD” or “4H” 2. With the brake pedal held down with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph) your foot, shift the selector lever to the
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob “R” position.
at “4L” at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (21 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph) NOTICE
Four−wheel drive models with towing Four−wheel drive models with towing Never shift into reverse while the ve-
package package hicle is moving.
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob
at “2WD” or “4H” at “2WD” or “4H” (f) Parking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
at “4L” at “4L”
fully depress the parking brake pedal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 km/h (21 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)
to apply the parking brake securely.
D Move selector lever down to the “−”
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
side to select the “1” range. The down-
shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
shift to first range when the vehicle
tion.
speed drops down to or lower than the
following speed, and maximum engine
braking will be enabled.

223
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
Never attempt to move the selector
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
lever into “P” position under any cir-
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
cumstances while the vehicle is mov-
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
ing. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
XS17036a
(g) Good driving practice (h) If you cannot shift the selector le-
D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up ver out of “P” position
and down between fourth gear and If you cannot shift the selector lever from
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, the “P” position even though the brake
shift the selector lever into “S” posi- pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
tion. (i) “TOW/HAUL” switch
override button. For instructions, see “If (on some models)
D When towing a trailer, in order to main- you cannot shift automatic transmission
tain engine braking efficiency, do not selector lever” on page 522 in Section 4. Use “TOW/HAUL” mode when pulling a
use the transmission in “D”. Select an trailer or hauling a heavy load. In this
appropriate shift range in “S” mode. mode, the driving and engine braking per-
formance is improved in accordance with
towing conditions or increased load.
CAUTION
To turn on: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch
Always keep your foot on the brake “TOW/HAUL” mode is activated and
pedal while stopped with the engine “TOW/HAUL” mode indicator light comes
running. This prevents the vehicle on by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch.
from creeping.

224
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To turn off: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch

once again and the “TOW/HAUL” mode
indicator light goes off.
“TOW/HAUL” mode is canceled by press-
ing “TOW/HAUL” switch again or by turn-
ing the engine switch to “OFF”.
Even when “TOW/HAUL” mode is used
during normal driving, no damage is
caused to the engine or the transmission.
However, fuel economy is reduced and the
transmission and/or engine driving charac-
teristics may feel unusual.
Toyota recommends using “TOW/HAUL”
mode only when a heavy trailer or a large
heavy load is towed.

225
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Automatic transmission (column−shift type)

"5−speed models
Your automatic transmission has a shift
Selector lever lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the engine
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key re-
moval
R: Reverse

XS17026a N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
Shift with the brake pedal S: “S” mode driving
depressed. (The engine switch
+: Upshift range
must be in “ON” position.)
−: Downshift range

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, pull the

lever toward you and shift
down. Shift the lever up and
push outward.

226
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(b) Normal driving D Automatic shifting point change con-

CAUTION trol:
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 474 in The most suitable shift range is se-
Never put your foot on the accelera- lected depending on the driver’s accel-
Section 3. The transmission must be in tor pedal while shifting.
“P” or “N”. erator pedal operation and vehicle con-
dition.
When the front drive control switch knob 3. Release the parking brake and brake
is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel (c) Driving in “S” mode
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
drive), the driving pattern selector setting slowly for smooth starting. The shift range position can be
has no effect on gear shift timing. (See changed in “S” mode. When the selec-
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con- tor lever is in the “S” position, the
this Section for information of the front trol— shift range position can be switched
drive control lever.) AI shifting control selects the most between “5” (fifth range) and “1” (first
2. With your foot holding down the brake suitable shift range automatically ac- range) by turning the “S” mode switch
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. cording to the driver’s operation and of the selector lever to the “+” (up) or
driving condition. “−” (down) direction. By turning the
When the lever is in the “D” position, the “S” mode switch to the “+” (up) direc-
automatic transmission system will select AI shifting control operates automatical-
ly with the selector lever in the “D” tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-
the most suitable gear for running condi- ond, the highest shift range position
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- position. When the lever is moved to
the “S” position, this function will be can be obtained. However, it cannot be
ing, hard towing, etc. changed while cruise control is acti-
cancelled.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel vated. When the selector lever is
economy and quieter driving. If the engine D Shifting control on the slope: shifted to the “S” position, shift range
coolant temperature is low or when the On inclines, you can drive smoothly position “4” (fourth range) is selected
front drive control switch knob is in “4L” with reduced shifting quantity. On de- automatically.
(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the clines, the vehicle will shift down auto-
However, if the selector lever is shifted
transmission will not shift into the over- matically to obtain optimum engine
braking and reduce the driver’s foot to the “S” position when AI shifting
drive gear even in the “D” position. (See control is being performed, the initial
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in braking load.
shift range position may be “3” (third
this Section for information of the front range). This is because the suitable
drive control.) shift range is selected depending on
the driving condition.
227
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The “S” mode indicator light and the cur- Shift range positions
rent shift range position are shown on the D “5” (Fifth range):
instrument cluster. The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and overdrive
(fifth) gears according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions.
D “4” (Fourth range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting

XS17027 will be obtained on an uphill road.

D “3” (Third range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
is necessary.
D “2” (Second range):
First or second gear will be selected
automatically according to the vehicle
speed and driving conditions. This
range is to be used when engine brak-
ing stronger than that of the “3” range
position is necessary.
1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range
228
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D “1” (First range): Maximum allowable speeds Four−wheel drive models without towing
The gear is fixed in first regardless of To get on a highway or to pass slower package
vehicle speed and driving conditions. traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec- —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
This range is to be used when maxi- essary. Make sure you observe the follow-
mum engine braking is necessary. range km/h (mph)
ing maximum allowable speed in each 1 23 (14)
If you attempt to downshift the transmis- range: 2 40 (24)
sion when it is not possible to downshift 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine 3 58 (36)
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone 4 68 (42)
sounds twice. range km/h (mph)
1 59 (36) 5 68 (42)
NOTICE 2 102 (63) Four−wheel drive models with towing
3 148 (91) package
Do not drive in the “3”, “2” or “1”
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
range when driving at high speed or
without towing package range km/h (mph)
climbing a gentle slope for a long
time. Otherwise the transmission or range km/h (mph) 1 22 (13)
engine may overheat causing damage. 1 61 (37) 2 38 (23)
2 105 (65) 3 56 (34)
3 154 (95) 4 64 (39)
with towing package 5 64 (39)

range km/h (mph) NOTICE

1 58 (36)
2 100 (62) Do not downshift if you are going
3 147 (91) faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.

229
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When the “S” mode indicator light does For decreasing the vehicle speed, see Four−wheel drive models with towing
not come on even with the selector lever “Cruise control” on page 262 in this package
moved to the “S” position, there may be a Section. —Front drive control switch knob
problem somewhere in the system. Have D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec- at “2WD” or “4H”
your vehicle checked/repaired by your tor lever to the “−” side to select the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this “3” range. The transmission will down-
case, you can drive in the same condition —Front drive control switch knob
shift to third range when the vehicle at “4L”
as in the “D” position. speed drops down to or lower than the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)
(d) Using engine braking following speed, and stronger engine
braking will be enabled. D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-
To use engine braking, you can downshift tor lever to the “−” side to select the
the transmission as follows: 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine “2” range. The transmission will down-
D When driving in the “D” position— . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 km/h (84 mph) shift to second range when the vehicle
Shift the selector lever to “S” position. 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine speed drops down to or lower than the
When driving in the “5” range within Two−wheel drive models following speed, and more powerful en-
the “S” position— —without towing package gine braking than that of the “3” range
Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph) position will be enabled.
tor lever to the “−” side to select the 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
—with towing package
“4” range. The transmission will down- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 km/h (57 mph)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 km/h (82 mph)
shift to fourth range and engine braking
Four−wheel drive models without tow- 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
will be enabled.
ing package Two−wheel drive models
When the cruise control is being used,
—Front drive control switch knob —without towing package
engine braking can not be enabled be-
at “2WD” or “4H” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph)
cause the cruise control is not can-
celled. However, engine braking will be . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph) —with towing package
automatically enabled if the vehicle —Front drive control switch knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph)
speed is higher than the set speed of at “4L”
the cruise control depending on the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)
driving conditions.

230
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Four−wheel drive models without tow- 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

ing package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) CAUTION
—Front drive control switch knob 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine Be careful when downshifting on a
at “2WD” or “4H” Two−wheel drive models slippery surface. The abrupt change
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 km/h (57 mph) —without towing package in engine speed could cause the ve-
—Front drive control switch knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph) hicle to skid or spin.
at “4L” —with towing package
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (21 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph) (e) Backing up
Four−wheel drive models with towing Four−wheel drive models without tow- 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
package ing package 2. With the brake pedal held down with
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob your foot, shift the selector lever to the
at “2WD” or “4H” at “2WD” or “4H” “R” position.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 km/h (55 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 km/h (24 mph)
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob NOTICE
at “4L” at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 km/h (20 mph) Never shift into reverse while the ve-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph) hicle is moving.
D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec- Four−wheel drive models with towing
tor lever to the “−” side to select the package (f) Parking
“1” range. The transmission will down-
shift to first range when the vehicle —Front drive control switch knob 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
speed drops down to or lower than the at “2WD” or “4H”
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
following speed, and maximum engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 km/h (23 mph)
fully depress the parking brake pedal
braking will be enabled. —Front drive control switch knob to apply the parking brake securely.
at “4L”
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)
shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
tion.

231
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
Never attempt to move the selector
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
lever into “P” position under any cir-
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
cumstances while the vehicle is mov-
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
ing. Serious mechanical damage and
al, as this can cause the transmission
loss of vehicle control may result.
to overheat.

(g) Good driving practice (h) If you cannot shift the selector le-
D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up ver out of “P” position
and down between third gear and over- If you cannot shift the selector lever from
drive when climbing a gentle slope, the “P” position even though the brake
shift the selector lever into “S” posi- pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
tion. override button. For instructions, see “If
D When towing a trailer, in order to main- you cannot shift automatic transmission
tain engine braking efficiency, do not selector lever” on page 522 in Section 4.
use the transmission in “D”. Select an
appropriate shift range in “S” mode.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

232
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"6 speed models

Your automatic transmission has a shift
Selector lever lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the engine
switch in “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key re-
moval
R: Reverse

XS17026a N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
Shift with the brake pedal S: “S” mode driving
depressed. (The engine switch +: Upshift range
must be in “ON” position) −: Downshift range

Shift normally.

To select “S” or “D”, pull the

lever toward you and shift
down. Shift the lever up and
push outward.

233
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(b) Normal driving D Automatic shifting point change con-

CAUTION trol:
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 474 in The most suitable shift range is se-
Never put your foot on the accelera- lected depending on the driver’s accel-
Section 3. The transmission must be in tor pedal while shifting.
“P” or “N”. erator pedal operation and vehicle con-
dition.
When the front drive control switch knob 3. Release the parking brake and brake
is in “4L” (low−speed position, four−wheel (c) Driving in “S” mode
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
drive), the driving pattern selector setting slowly for smooth starting. The shift range position can be
has no effect on gear shift timing. (See changed in “S” mode. When the selec-
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting con- tor lever is in the “S” position, the
this Section for information of the front trol— shift range position can be switched
drive control lever.) AI shifting control selects the most between “6” (sixth range) and “1” (first
2. With your foot holding down the brake suitable shift range automatically ac- range) by turning the “S” mode switch
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”. cording to the driver’s operation and of the selector lever to the “+” (up) or
driving condition. “−” (down) direction. By turning the
When the lever is in the “D” position, the “S” mode switch to the “+” (up) direc-
automatic transmission system will select AI shifting control operates automatical-
ly with the selector lever in the “D” tion and holding it for at least 1 sec-
the most suitable gear for running condi- ond, the highest shift range position
tions such as normal cruising, hill climb- position. When the lever is moved to
the “S” position, this function will be can be obtained. However, it cannot be
ing, hard towing, etc. changed while cruise control is acti-
cancelled.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel vated. When the selector lever is
economy and quieter driving. If the engine D Shifting control on the slope: shifted to the “S” position, shift range
coolant temperature is low or when the On inclines, you can drive smoothly position “4” (fourth range) or “5” (fifth
front drive control switch knob is in “4L” with reduced shifting quantity. On de- range) is selected depending on the ve-
(low−speed position, four−wheel drive), the clines, the vehicle will shift down auto- hicle speed.
transmission will not shift into the over- matically to obtain optimum engine
drive gear even in the “D” position. (See braking and reduce the driver’s foot
“Four−wheel drive system” on page 240 in braking load.
this Section for information of the front
drive control.)

234
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

However, if the selector lever is shifted Shift range positions

to the “S” position when AI shifting D “6” (Sixth range):
control is being performed, the initial The most suitable gear is selected au-
shift range position may be “2” (second tomatically between first and overdrive
range) or “3” (third range). This is be- (sixth) gears according to the vehicle
cause the suitable shift range is se- speed and driving conditions.
lected depending on the driving condi-
tion. D “5” (Fifth range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
The “S” mode indicator light and the cur- tomatically between first and fifth gears
rent shift range position are shown on the according to vehicle speed and driving
instrument cluster. conditions. This range is suitable for
acceleration such as when you want to
pass a vehicle running ahead of you

XS17027 during high speed driving.

D “4” (Fourth range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting
will be obtained on an uphill road.
D “3” (Third range):
The most suitable gear is selected au-
tomatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
and driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
1: Upshift range is necessary.
2: Downshift range
235
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D “2” (Second range): Maximum allowable speeds Four−wheel drive models without towing
First or second gear will be selected To get on a highway or to pass slower package
automatically according to the vehicle traffic, maximum acceleration may be nec- —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
speed and driving conditions. This essary. Make sure you observe the follow-
range is to be used when engine brak- range km/h (mph)
ing maximum allowable speeds in each 1 23 (14)
ing stronger than that of the “3” range range:
position is necessary. 2 40 (24)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine 3 58 (36)
D “1” (First range): Two−wheel drive models without towing 4 68 (42)
The gear is fixed in first regardless of package 5 68 (42)
vehicle speed and driving conditions. 6 68 (42)
This range is to be used when maxi- range km/h (mph)
mum engine braking is necessary. 1 62 (38) Four−wheel drive models with towing
2 106 (65) package
If you attempt to downshift the transmis- 3 154 (95)
sion when it is not possible to downshift —Front drive control switch knob at “4L”
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone Two−wheel drive models with towing range km/h (mph)
sounds twice. package 1 22 (13)
range km/h (mph) 2 38 (23)
1 59 (36) 3 56 (34)
2 101 (62) 4 64 (39)
3 147 (91) 5 64 (39)
6 64 (39)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.

236
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When the “S” mode indicator light does When the cruise control is being used, 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
not come on even with the selector lever even if you downshift the transmission, Two−wheel drive models
moved to the “S” position, there may be a engine braking will not be enabled be- —without towing package
problem somewhere in the system. Have cause the cruise control is not can- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
your vehicle checked/repaired by your celled. However, engine braking will be
Toyota dealer as soon as possible. In this automatically enabled if the vehicle —with towing package
case, you can drive in the same condition speed is higher than the set speed of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)
as in the “D” position. the cruise control depending on the Four−wheel drive models without tow-
(d) Using engine braking driving conditions. ing package
To use engine braking, you can downshift For ways to decrease the vehicle —Front drive control switch knob
the transmission as follows: speed, see “Cruise control” on page at “2WD” or “4H”
262 in this Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 km/h (85 mph)
D When driving in the “D” position—
Shift the selector lever to the “S” D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec- —Front drive control switch knob
position. tor to the “−” side to select the “3” at “4L”
range. The transmission will downshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 km/h (32 mph)
D When driving in the “6” range within to third range when the vehicle speed
the “S” position— Four−wheel drive models with towing
drops down to or lower than the follow- package
Turn the “S” mode switch of the se- ing speed, and more powerful engine
lector to the “−” side to select the “5” braking than that of the “4” range posi- —Front drive control switch knob
range. The transmission will down- tion will be enabled. at “2WD” or “4H”
shift to fifth range and engine braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 km/h (81 mph)
will be enabled. —Front drive control switch knob
D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec- at “4L”
tor to the “−” side to select the “4” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 km/h (31 mph)
range. The transmission will downshift
to fourth range and stronger engine
braking will be enabled.

237
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec- D Turn the “S” mode switch of the selec-
tor to the “−” side to select the “2” tor to the “−” side to select the “1” CAUTION
range. The transmission will downshift range. The downshift to first range
to second range when the vehicle when the vehicle speed drops down to Be careful when downshifting on a
speed drops down to or lower than the or lower than the following speed, and slippery surface. The abrupt change
following speed, and more powerful en- maximum engine braking will be en- in engine speed could cause the ve-
gine braking will be enabled. abled. hicle to skid or spin.
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models Two−wheel drive models (e) Backing up
—without towing package —without towing package 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph) 2. With the brake pedal held down with
—with towing package —with towing package your foot, shift the selector lever to the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) “R” position.
Four−wheel drive models without tow- Four−wheel drive models without tow- NOTICE
ing package ing package
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob Never shift into reverse while the ve-
at “2WD” or “4H” at “2WD” or “4H” hicle is moving.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 km/h (58 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 km/h (25 mph)
(f) Parking
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob
at “4L” at “4L” 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 km/h (21 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 km/h (9 mph) 2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
Four−wheel drive models with towing Four−wheel drive models with towing fully depress the parking brake pedal
package package to apply the parking brake securely.
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob 3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
at “2WD” or “4H” at “2WD” or “4H” shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 km/h (55 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 km/h (24 mph) tion.
—Front drive control switch knob —Front drive control switch knob
at “4L” at “4L”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 km/h (21 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 km/h (8 mph)
238
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
Never attempt to move the selector
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
lever into “P” position under any cir-
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
cumstances while the vehicle is mov-
the vehicle using the accelerator ped-
ing. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
al, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
XS17032b
(g) Good driving practice (h) If you cannot shift the selector le-
D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up ver out of “P” position
and down between fourth gear and If you cannot shift the selector lever from
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope, the “P” position even though the brake
shift the selector lever into “S” posi- pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
tion. (i) “TOW/HAUL” switch
override button. For instructions, see “If (on some models)
D When towing a trailer, in order to main- you cannot shift automatic transmission
tain engine braking efficiency, do not selector lever” on page 522 in Section 4. Use “TOW/HAUL” mode when pulling a
use the transmission in “D”. Select an trailer or hauling a heavy load. In this
appropriate shift range in “S” mode. mode, the driving and engine braking per-
formance is improved in accordance with
towing conditions or increased load.
CAUTION
To turn on: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch
Always keep your foot on the brake “TOW/HAUL” mode is activated and
pedal while stopped with the engine “TOW/HAUL” mode indicator light comes
running. This prevents the vehicle on by pressing “TOW/HAUL” switch.
from creeping.

239
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Four−wheel drive system

(a) Front drive control
To turn off: Push “TOW/HAUL” switch Use the front drive control switch knob
once again and the “TOW/HAUL” mode to select the following transfer modes.
indicator light goes off. “2WD” (high speed position, two−wheel
“TOW/HAUL” mode is canceled by press- drive): Front drive control switch knob at
ing “TOW/HAUL” switch again or by turn- “2WD”
ing the engine switch to “OFF”. Use this for normal driving on dry hard−
Even when “TOW/HAUL” mode is used surfaced roads. This position gives greater
during normal driving, no damage is economy, quietest ride, least wear and
caused to the engine or the transmission. better vehicle control.
However, fuel economy is reduced and the “4H” (high speed position, four−wheel
transmission and/or engine driving charac- drive): Front drive control switch knob at
teristics may feel unusual. “4H”
Toyota recommends using “TOW/HAUL” The “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
mode only when a heavy trailer or a large
heavy load is towed.
XS17003b indicator light comes on when the “4H”
mode is selected.
Use this for greater traction than two−
wheel drive. (When you experience a loss
of power, such as wheel spinning.) This
position provides greater traction than
two−wheel drive.
In this mode, the vehicle stability control
system is off. (See “Vehicle stability
control system” on page 250 in this
Section.)
“4L” (low speed position, four−wheel
drive): Front drive control switch knob at
“4L”

240
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(b) A.D.D. (automatic

disconnecting differential) (c) Shifting procedure
The “4LO” (low speed four−wheel drive) The A.D.D. can be engaged or disen- SHIFTING BETWEEN “2WD” AND “4H”
indicator light comes on when the “4L” gaged by the shifting operations de- To shift from “2WD” to “4H”, reduce the
mode is selected. scribed in “(c) Shifting procedure”. vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62
Use this for maximum power and traction. You should drive in four−wheel drive for mph) and turn the front drive control
Use “4L” position for climbing or descend- at least 16 km (10 miles) each month. switch knob fully clockwise.
ing steep hills, off−road driving, and hard This will assure that the front drive com- When the ambient temperature is −15_C
pulling in sand, mud or deep snow. ponents are lubricated. (5.0_F) or lower, shifting must be per-
See “(c) Shifting procedure” for further in- formed with the vehicle speed below 70
structions. km/h (43 mph).
In this mode, the vehicle stability control If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
system is off. (See “Vehicle stability indicator light continues to blink when you
control system” on page 250 in this operate the front drive control switch knob
Section.) from the “2WD” to the “4H” position, this
reminds you that the transfer mode is not
securely in “4H” mode. Drive straight
ahead while accelerating or decelerating.
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive)
indicator light continues to blink and the
buzzer sounds when you operate the front
drive control switch knob from the “2WD”
to the “4H” position, this reminds you that
the transfer mode is not in “4H” mode.
Stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle
speed to less than 100 km/h (62 mph).
(When the ambient temperature is −15_C
(5.0_F) or lower, speed needs to be re-
duced to below 70 km/h (43 mph).) Oper-
ate the switch knob again.

241
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If there is any malfunction within the 4. Maintain this condition until the “4LO”
CAUTION brake system, “4HI” or “4LO” indicator or “4HI” indicator light comes on.
light blinks and the transfer mode may not If the “4LO” indicator light continues to
Never operate the front drive control be able to be shifted from “4H” to “2WD”.
switch knob if the wheels are slip- blink...
ping. Stop the slipping or spinning If the indicator light continues to blink If this indicator light continues to blink
before operating. even if doing so, contact your Toyota when you operate the front drive control
dealer as soon as possible. There may be switch knob to the “4H” or “4L” position,
a trouble in the four−wheel drive system. stop the vehicle completely, shift the auto-
To shift from “4H” to “2WD”, reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 100 km/h (62 matic transmission selector lever securely
CAUTION into “N” and operate the switch knob
mph) and turn the front drive control
switch knob fully counterclockwise. again.
Never operate the front drive control
When you operate the front drive control switch knob if the wheels are slip- INFORMATION
switch knob from “4H” to “2WD” with the ping. Stop the slipping or spinning
vehicle speed at 100 km/h (62 mph) or before operating. z If the engine coolant temperature is
higher, the “4HI” indicator light continues too low the transfer mode may not
to blink and buzzer sounds. When the be able to be shifted. When the en-
SHIFTING BETWEEN “4H” AND “4L” gine is warmer operate the switch
switch knob is returned from “2WD” to
“4H”, the indicator light turns off and the To shift between “4H” and “4L” knob again.
buzzer stops sounding. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop z If the automatic transmission selec-
If the “4HI” (high speed four−wheel drive) with the brake pedal held down. tor lever is moved before the indi-
indicator light continues to blink when you 2. Shift the automatic transmission selec- cator comes on, the transfer mode
operate the front drive control switch knob tor lever into “N”. may not be shifted completely. In
from the “4H” to the “2WD” position, this this case, stop the vehicle com-
3. To shift from “4H” to “4L”, push and pletely, return the automatic trans-
reminds you that the transfer mode is not turn the front drive control switch knob
securely in “2WD” mode. Drive straight mission selector lever to “N” and
fully clockwise. operate the switch knob again.
ahead while accelerating or decelerating, To shift from “4L” to “4H”, turn the
or drive forward or backward for a short front drive control switch knob counter-
distance. clockwise.

242
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Traction control system

If there is any malfunction in the brake The traction control system automatical-
system or the engine, “4HI” or “4LO” indi- ly helps prevent the spinning of the
cator light blinks and the transfer mode rear wheels (two−wheel drive models)
may not be able to be shifted from “4H” or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models)
to “4L”. when the vehicle is started or acceler-
If the indicator continues to blink even if ated on slippery road surfaces.
doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible. There may be a trouble
When the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the system automatically
XS17004a
in the four−wheel drive system. turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and Type A
power to the rear wheels (two−wheel
drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel
drive models) cannot be maintained,
even though the traction control sys-
tem is in operation. Do not drive the
vehicle at any speed or in maneuver-
ing conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In si-
tuations where the road surface is XS17005a
covered with ice or snow, your ve-
hicle should be fitted with snow tires
or tire chains. Always drive at an ap-
propriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.

Type B

243
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

NORMAL DRIVING MODE The brake actuator temperature increases

Leave the system on during ordinary during continuous operation of the follow-
driving so that it can operate when ing systems under conditions such as on
needed. slippery roads.

You may hear a sound in the engine D Traction control system

compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
D “AUTO LSD” system
If the brake actuator temperature becomes
XS17010a
begins to move. This means that the trac- too high while any of the systems is oper-
tion control system is in self−check mode, ating, a buzzer will start to sound intermit-
but does not indicate a malfunction. tently to indicate that the traction control
When the traction control system is oper- system can no longer operate. In this
ating, the following conditions occur: case, immediately stop your vehicle at a
D The system controls the spinning of the safe place.
rear wheels (two−wheel drive models) If the system continues to operate, the TRACTION CONTROL OFF MODE
or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models). buzzer sound changes from intermittent to (two−wheel drive mode only)
At this time, the slip indicator light continuous. (The continuous buzzer When getting the vehicle out of mud or
blinks. sounds for about 3 seconds.) snow, etc., and only one of the rear
D You may feel vibration or noise in your At this time, the slip indicator light comes wheels begins to spin, it may be benefi-
vehicle, caused by operation of the on and the traction control system tempo- cial to turn off the traction control sys-
brakes. This indicates the system is rarily stops operating in order to protect tem. This system which also controls
functioning properly. the brake actuator. (Although the traction engine performance may interfere with
control system does not operate, it is not the process of freeing the rear wheels.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the engine switch is turned a problem to continue driving.) The sys-
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light tem is automatically restored after a short
does not come on when the engine switch time and the slip indicator light goes off.
is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

244
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To turn off the traction control system:

Briefly push the “VSC OFF” switch. The CAUTION
traction control system turns off and
the traction control off mode turns on. Do not drive with the traction control
system continuously turned off.
The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
will come on.
To turn on: Briefly push the “VSC OFF” XS17024a
switch once again.
The “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights
will go off.
If the engine is turned off while the
“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights are
on and then restarted, the indicator lights Type A
will turn off automatically.
When you push and hold the “VSC OFF”
switch for 3 seconds or more with the
vehicle stopped, the vehicle stability con-
trol system will be turned off. See “AUTO
LSD system” on page 246 in this Section.
“AUTO LSD” and slip indicator lights come
on for a few seconds when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
XS17025a
the indicator lights do not come on when
the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type B

245
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“AUTO LSD” system

The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
and the slip indicator light comes on and the slip indicator light comes on
The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes and during driving.
the slip indicator light comes on to warn
that there is a problem somewhere in the
following:
D Traction control system XS17009
D Vehicle stability control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
When the system is normal and the engi-
ne switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the lights will come on and go off after a
few seconds. The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction
If the “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes by using the traction control system to
and the slip indicator light comes on dur- control engine performance and braking
ing driving, the traction control system will when only one of the rear wheels be-
not work. However, because the brakes gins to spin.
operate normally when applied, it is not a This system should be used only when
problem to continue driving. wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or
In the following cases, contact your Toyota rough surface.
dealer: This system is effective when only one of
D The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights the rear wheels is spinning.
do not come on after the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
and the slip indicator light remains on
after the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

246
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The “AUTO LSD” is activated under the

CAUTION following conditions. At this time, the
“AUTO LSD”, slip indicator and “VSC
Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system OFF” (“AUTO LSD” mode) lights will
in conditions other than the above. A come on.
much greater steering effort and more
D The driving mode is set in the two−
careful cornering control will be re-
quired. XS17010a wheel drive mode (In the four−wheel
drive mode, the system does not
work.)
D Driving at a speed under 100 km/h (62
mph)
D Traction control off mode or “AUTO
LSD” mode turns on.
Traction control off mode
Traction control off mode
To turn on the traction control off mode,
briefly push the “VSC OFF” switch.
Then, the “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator
lights will come on.
The following systems will be ready to be

XS17046
activated:
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Vehicle stability control system
To turn off the traction control off mode,
briefly push the “VSC OFF” switch again
and the “AUTO LSD” and slip indicator
lights will go off.
“AUTO LSD” mode

247
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When you push and hold the “VSC OFF” Make sure the “AUTO LSD”, slip indicator
switch for 3 seconds or more with the and “VSC OFF” (“AUTO LSD” mode) lights
vehicle stopped, the “AUTO LSD” mode come on under the above condition when
will be turned on. you use the “AUTO LSD” system.
“AUTO LSD” mode The slip indicator light blinks when the
system is controlling the spinning of the
To turn on the “AUTO LSD” mode, push
and hold the “VSC OFF” switch for 3 sec- XS17044 rear wheels.
onds or more with the vehicle stopped. The “AUTO LSD”, slip indicator and “VSC
The “AUTO LSD”, slip indicator and “VSC OFF” (“AUTO LSD” mode) lights come on
OFF” lights will come on. for a few seconds when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position. If the indi-
The following system will be ready to be cator lights do not come on when the
activated: engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
D “AUTO LSD” system Type A tion, contact your Toyota dealer.
To turn off the “AUTO LSD” mode, briefly The brake actuator temperature increases
push the “VSC OFF” switch again and the during continuous operation of the follow-
“AUTO LSD”, slip indicator and “VSC ing systems under conditions such as on
OFF” lights will go off. slippery roads.
When you push and hold the “VSC OFF” D “AUTO LSD” system
switch for 3 seconds or more with the D Traction control system
XS17043
vehicle stopped, the “AUTO LSD” mode
turns off, and the “VSC OFF” mode turns If the brake actuator temperature becomes
on. See “Vehicle stability control system” too high while any of these systems is
on page 250 in this Section. operating, a buzzer will start to sound
intermittently to indicate that the “AUTO
In both Traction control off mode and LSD” system can no longer operate. In
“AUTO LSD” mode: this case, immediately stop your vehicle at
If the engine is turned off while the slip a safe place.
indicator, “AUTO LSD” and “VSC OFF”
lights are on and then restarted, the indi- Type B
cator lights will turn off automatically.
248
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the system continues to operate, the The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
buzzer sound changes from intermittent to and the slip indicator light comes on
continuous. (The continuous buzzer The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes and
sounds for about 3 seconds.) the slip indicator light comes on to warn
At the time the slip indicator light will that there is a problem somewhere in the
come on and the “AUTO LSD” system following:
temporarily stops operating in order to
protect the brake actuator. (Although the
XS17024a D “AUTO LSD” system
“AUTO LSD” system does not operate, it D Traction control system
is not a problem to continue driving.) The D Vehicle stability control system
system will be automatically restored after When the system is normal and the engi-
a short time. ne switch is turned to the “ON” position,
the lights will come on and will go off
Type A after a few seconds.
If the “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
and the slip indicator light comes on dur-
ing driving, the “AUTO LSD” system will
not work. However, because the brakes
operate normally when applied, it is not a
problem to continue driving.

XS17025a
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights
do not come on after the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
and the slip indicator light remains on
after the engine switch is turned to the
Type B “ON” position.

249
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Vehicle stability control

system (two−wheel drive
mode only)
D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes The vehicle stability control system
and the slip indicator light comes on helps provide integrated control of sys- CAUTION
while driving. tems such as the anti−lock brake sys-
tem, traction control, engine control, D Do not rely excessively on the ve-
CAUTION etc. This system automatically controls hicle stability control system. Even
the output of the brakes or engine to if the vehicle stability control sys-
Do not drive with the “AUTO LSD” help prevent the vehicle from skidding tem is operating, you must always
system continuously turned on. when cornering on a slippery road sur- drive carefully and attentively to
face or when the steering wheel is op- avoid serious injury. Reckless driv-
erated abruptly. ing will result in an unexpected ac-
cident. If the slip indicator light
The vehicle stability control system is acti- blinks and an alarm sounds, special
vated when the vehicle speed is more care should be taken while driving.
than 15 km/h (9 mph).
D Only use tires of specified size. The
You may hear a sound in the engine size, manufacturer, brand and tread
compartment for a few seconds when the pattern for all 4 tires should be the
engine is started or just after the vehicle same. If you use the tires other
begins to move. This means that the sys- than specified, or different type or
tem is in self−check mode, but does not size, the vehicle stability control
indicate a malfunction. system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 556 in Section 7−2.)

250
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the vehicle stability control system is

operating to prevent skidding, the slip indi-
cator light blinks and an alarm sounds
intermittently. Special care should be tak-
en while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
XS17004a seconds when the engine switch is turned
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light
XS17006a
does not come on when the engine switch
is turned on, contact your Toyota dealer.

Type A Type A

XS17005a XS17007a

Type B Type B

251
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The vehicle stability control system au- When you push and hold the “VSC OFF”
tomatically turns off, and the “VSC switch for 3 seconds or more with the
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, vehicle stopped, the “AUTO LSD” mode
when the four−wheel drive mode is set. turns off and the “VSC OFF” mode turns
The “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on on.
for a few seconds when the engine switch After the indicator light turns off, the “VSC
is turned to the “ON” position, and then
turns off. If the four−wheel drive mode is
XS17046 OFF” and slip indicator lights will come
on.
set, the indicator light is illuminated again. “VSC OFF” mode can turn off the fol-
lowing systems:
D Vehicle stability control system
D Traction control system
When getting the vehicle out of mud or D “AUTO LSD” system (two−wheel drive
newly fallen snow, etc., it may be bene- mode)
ficial to turn off the vehicle stability
D Active traction control system (four−
control system. This system which also
wheel drive mode)
controls engine performance interferes
with the process of freeing the rear To turn on: Briefly push the “VSC OFF”
wheels (two−wheel drive models). switch once again.
To turn off the vehicle stability control The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights
system: Push and hold the “VSC OFF” will go off.
switch for 3 seconds or more with the If the engine is turned off while the “VSC
vehicle stopped. The vehicle stability OFF” and slip indicator lights are on and
control system turns off and the “AUTO then restarted, the indicator lights will turn
LSD” mode turns on. off automatically.
The “AUTO LSD”, slip indicator and “VSC
OFF” lights will come on.

252
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights

come on for a few seconds when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion. If the indicator lights do not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer.
XS17035a XS17024a

Type A
CAUTION

Do not drive with the vehicle stability

control system continuously turned
off.

XS17025a

Type B

253
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire pressure warning system

The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes The tire pressure warning system warns
and the slip indicator light comes on and the slip indicator light comes on you that the tire inflation pressure is
The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes and while driving. low.
the slip indicator light comes on to warn The tire pressure warning system is not
that there is a problem somewhere in the a substitute for checking normal tire infla-
following: tion pressure. Check the tire inflation
D Vehicle stability control system pressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-
larly.
D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system CAUTION
The light comes on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and The warning system may not activate
will go off after a few seconds. immediately if blowout or sudden air
loss should occur.
If the “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
and the slip indicator light comes on dur-
ing driving, the vehicle stability control
system will not work. However, if the
brakes operate normally when applied, it
is not a problem to continue driving.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
D The “VSC OFF” and slip indicator lights
do not come on after the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
D The “VSC OFF” indicator light flashes
and the slip indicator light remains on
after the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

254
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The tire pressure warning light comes on

when the engine switch is turned to the CAUTION
“ON” position and goes off after a few
seconds. This means the tire pressure If the tire pressure warning light
warning system is operating properly. If comes on, be sure to observe the
the tire inflation pressure becomes low, following precautions. Failure to do

XS17013b the light comes on again. In this case,

adjusting the tire inflation pressure will
so could cause loss of vehicle control
and result in death or serious injury.
turn off the light after several minutes. If D Stop your vehicle in a safe place as
the light comes on after blinking for 1 soon as possible. Adjust the tire
minute, the tire pressure warning system inflation pressure immediately.
is not working properly. D If the tire pressure warning light
Indicator comes on even after tire inflation
Type A Meanings Do this pressure adjustment, it is probable
status
that you have a flat tire. Check the
Adjust the tires. If the tire is flat, change to
Tire inflation
tire the temporary spare tire and have
ON pressure is
inflation the flat tire repaired by the nearest
low
pressure Toyota dealer.
Have the D Avoid abrupt maneuvering and brak-
Tire pressure
ON after system ing. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
warning
XS17014b blinking for
1 minute
system
malfunction
checked at
your Toyota
you could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel or the brakes.
dealer

Type B

255
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The tire pressure warning light may turn

on due to natural causes such as natural CAUTION As an added safety feature, your ve-
air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes hicle has been equipped with a tire
caused by temperature. In this case, ad- Each tire, including the spare (if pro- pressure monitoring system (TPMS−
justing the tire inflation pressure will turn vided), should be checked monthly tire pressure warning system) that il-
off the light after several minutes. when cold and inflated to the inflation luminates a low tire pressure telltale
pressure recommended by the vehicle (tire pressure warning light) when one
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset manufacturer on the vehicle placard or more of your tires is significantly
switch should not turn off the tire pressure or tire inflation pressure label (tire under−inflated. Accordingly, when the
warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation and load information label). (If your low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
pressure will turn off the light. vehicle has tires of a different size sure warning light) illuminates, you
The temporary spare tire is not equipped than the size indicated on the vehicle should stop and check your tires as
with the tire pressure warning valve and placard or tire inflation pressure label soon as possible, and inflate them to
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning (tire and load information label), you the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
light will not turn off even though the flat should determine the proper tire infla- nificantly under−inflated tire causes
tire is replaced with the temporary spare tion pressure for those tires.) the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with tire failure. Under−inflation also re-
the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire duces fuel efficiency and tire tread
inflation pressure. The tire pressure warn- life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
ing light will turn off after several minutes. dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under−inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).

256
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Your vehicle has also been equipped TPMS (tire pressure warning system) NOTICE
with a TPMS (tire pressure warning malfunctions may occur for a variety
z Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
system) malfunction indicator to indi- of reasons, including the installation
tire as tire pressure warning valve
cate when the system is not operat- of replacement or alternate tires or
and transmitter will be damaged.
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure wheels on the vehicle that prevent
warning system) malfunction indicator the TPMS (tire pressure warning sys- z When the tires must be repaired or
is combined with the low tire pres- tem) from functioning properly. Al- replaced, have them repaired or re-
sure telltale (tire pressure warning ways check the TPMS (tire pressure placed by the nearest Toyota dealer
light). When the system detects a warning system) malfunction telltale or an authorized tire dealer. The
malfunction, the telltale will flash for after replacing one or more tires or tire pressure warning valves and
approximately one minute and then wheels on your vehicle to ensure that transmitters will be affected by the
remain continuously illuminated. This the replacement or alternate tires and installation or removal of tires.
sequence will continue upon subse- wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure
quent vehicle start−ups as long as warning system) to continue to func-
the malfunction exists. When the mal- tion properly.
function indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.

257
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING D If a window tint that affects the radio
LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING wave signals is installed.
FOR 1 MINUTE... D If there is a lot of snow or ice on the
If the tire pressure warning light comes vehicle, in particular around the wheels
on after blinking for 1 minute when the or wheel housings.
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
XS17018b position, the tire pressure warning sys-
tem is not working properly.
D If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.
D If tire chains are used.
The system will be disabled in the follow- If the tire pressure warning light continues
ing conditions: to come on after blinking for 1 minute
(When the condition becomes normal, the when the engine switch is turned to the
system will work properly.) “ON” position, have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
D If tires not equipped with tire pressure
Type A Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire
warning valves and transmitters are
used. pressure warning system may not work
properly with some types of tires.
D If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is not Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
registered in the tire pressure warning switch should not turn off the tire pressure
computer. warning light.
The system may be disabled in the follow- For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

XS17017b ing conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the This device complies with Part 15 of the
system will work properly.) FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
D If electronic devices or facilities using
similar radio wave frequencies are (1) This device may not cause harmful
nearby. interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, includ-
D If a radio set at similar frequencies is ing interference that may cause unde-
Type B in use in the vehicle.
sired operation.

258
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

NOTICE: D Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
This equipment has been tested and tenna. When replacing the tires and wheels, be
found to comply with the limits for a sure to install tire pressure warning valves
D Increase the separation between the and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part equipment and receiver.
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are pressure warning valves and transmitters
designed to provide reasonable protec- D Connect the equipment into an outlet are registered in the tire pressure warning
on a circuit different from that to computer. When replacing a tire pressure
tion against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment which the receiver is connected. warning valve and transmitter, it is neces-
generates, uses and can radiate radio D Consult the dealer or an experienced sary to register the ID code of tire pres-
frequency energy and, if not installed radio/TV technician for help. sure warning valve and transmitter. Have
and used in accordance with the instruc- the ID code registered by your Toyota
FCC WARNING: dealer.
tions, may cause harmful interference to Changes or modifications not ex-
radio communications. However, there is pressly approved by the party respon- If the ID code is not registered, the sys-
no guarantee that interference will not sible for compliance could void the tem will not work properly. After driving
occur in a particular installation. If this for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure
user’s authority to operate the equip-
equipment does cause harmful interfer- ment. warning light comes on after blinking for
ence to radio or television reception, 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is en- For vehicles sold in Canada NOTICE
couraged to try to correct the interfer-
Operation is subject to the following two When the tires or tire pressure warn-
ence by one or more of the following
conditions: ing valves and transmitters must be
measures:
replaced, have them replaced by your
(1) this device may not cause interfer- Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-
ence, and (2) this device must accept ing valves and transmitters will be
any interference, including interference affected by the installation or removal
that may cause undesired operation of of tires.
the device.

259
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D When changing the tire inflation pres- If you push the tire pressure warning re-
sure according to the instruction for set switch accidentally and initialization is
traveling speed, load weight or tire performed, adjust the tire inflation pres-
size. sure to the specified level and initialize
To initialize the system, perform the the system again.
following:
XS17016a 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
tires to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (See “Tires” on page
591 in Section 8.)
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING RESET 3. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
SWITCH position.
When initializing the system, the present 4. Push and hold the tire pressure warn-
tire inflation pressure is stored as stan- ing reset switch until the tire pressure
dard. The tire pressure warning system warning light blinks slowly three times.
determines decreased air pressure by
comparing the present and the standard 5. Wait for several minutes with the engi-
tire inflation pressures. When you change ne switch “ON”, and then turn the engi-
the set tire inflation pressure, it is neces- ne switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
sary to initialize the tire pressure warning tion.
system. If you push the tire pressure warning re-
D When rotating the tires on vehicles dif- set switch while the vehicle is moving,
fering with front and rear tire inflation initialization is not performed.
pressures.

260
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Parking brake
If the tire pressure warning light does not
blink slowly three times when you push
and hold the tire pressure warning reset
switch, initialization has failed and the tire
pressure warning system may not work
properly. In this case, initialize the system
XS17018b again. If initialization cannot be performed,
have the system checked at your Toyota
XS17029
dealer.

CAUTION

Do not push the tire pressure warn-

ing reset switch without first adjust-
Type A Type A
ing the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not come
on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the
tire inflation pressure is actually nor-
mal.

XS17017b XS17030

Type B Type B

261
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Cruise control
When parking, firmly apply the parking The cruise control is designed to main-
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping. tain a set cruising speed without requir-
To set: Fully depress the parking brake ing the driver to operate the accelera-
pedal. For better holding power, first de- tor. Cruising speed can be set to any
press the brake pedal and hold it while speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
setting the parking brake. Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal once again.
ties, cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades. However, changes in ve-
XS17022
To remind you that the parking brake is hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you CAUTION
release the parking brake.
D To help maintain maximum control
CAUTION of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Before driving, be sure the parking heavy or varying traffic, or on slip- To turn the cruise control on, press the
brake is fully released and the park- pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or “ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator
winding roads. light on the instrument panel will come on
ing brake reminder light is off.
to indicate that the cruise control is opera-
D Be careful about vehicle speed as
tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button
it may increase when driving down-
again turns the system off.
hill with the cruise control on.
When the system is turned off, cruising
speed must be reset when the cruise con-
trol is turned on again.
When the engine switch is turned off, the
system is also automatically turned off. To
use the cruise control again, press the
“ON−OFF” button again to turn it on.

262
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

CAUTION push the lever down in the “−SET” direc-
tion and release it. This sets the vehicle
To avoid accidentally engaging the at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-
cruise control, turn the system off tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
when it is not in use. Make sure the or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.
XS17023 tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED to the acceleration.
5−speed models—The transmission must CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL
be in the “D” position or the shift range
position must be in “4” (fourth range) or The cruise control may be temporarily
“5” (fifth range) in “S” mode before you cancelled by the driver or by the system
itself under certain circumstances. Tempo-
set the cruising speed.
rary cancellation allows the set cruising
6−speed models—The transmission must speed to remain in memory.
be in the “D” position or the shift range
position must be in between “4” (fourth The cruise control can be temporarily can-
celled by doing the following:
range) and “6” (sixth range) in “S” position
before you set the cruising speed. D Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-
rection and releasing it
D Depressing the brake pedal
Under certain circumstances, the cruise
control is temporarily cancelled:

263
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D When vehicle speed falls below 40 RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
km/h (25 mph) Push the lever up in the “+RES” direction If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes
D When vehicle stability control is acti- and hold it. Release the lever when the when using the cruise control, press the
vated desired speed is attained. While the lever “ON−OFF” button to turn the system off
When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain and then press it again to turn it on.
mph) below the set speed, the cruise con- speed. If any of the following conditions then oc-
trol is cancelled and the set speed is However, a faster way to reset is to ac- curs, there is some trouble in the cruise
erased from memory. celerate the vehicle and then push the control system.
The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on lever down in the “−SET” direction. D The indicator light does not come on.
to indicate that the system is still in op- RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED D The indicator light flashes again.
eration. Push the lever down in the “−SET” direc- D The indicator light goes out after it
To turn the cruise control off, press the tion and hold it. Release the lever when comes on.
“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the the desired speed is attained. While the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off. lever is held down, the vehicle speed will If this is the case, contact your Toyota
gradually decrease. dealer and have your vehicle inspected.
If the cruise control automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have However, a faster way to reset is to de-
your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal- press the brake pedal and then push the
er at the earliest opportunity. lever down in the “−SET” direction.
RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL Even if you downshift from “D” to “S” with
If the cruise control is temporarily can- the cruise control on, engine braking will
celled, the cruising speed can be resumed not be enabled because the cruise control
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES” is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
direction. speed, reset to a slower speed with the
cruise control lever or depress the brake
Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25 pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
mph). control is cancelled.

264
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 8
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio and hands−free phone systems
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
AUX adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Rear seat entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Audio/video system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Hands−free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the sepa-
rate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual.”

265
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Reference

XS18005a XS18001a XS18002a

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player Type 3: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
(with compact disc changer controller) with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗ with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗
controller) controller)
∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr tun-
er and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

NOTICE
To clean radio panel, wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth (for avoidance of
damage to radio panel’s paint).

266
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Using your audio system—

—Some basics
This section describes some of the basic TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
features on Toyota audio systems. Some CAUTION
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
information may not pertain to your sys- on and off.
tem. For vehicle sold in U.S.A. and
Canadas: Push “AM”, “DISC·AUX”, “FM1”, “FM2”,
Your audio system works when the engine “AM·SAT”∗ or “LOAD” to turn on that func-
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. D Part 15 of the FCC Rules
tion without pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn
FCC Warning: on the compact disc player, a compact
NOTICE Any unauthorized changes or modifi- disc must be loaded in the player.
cations to this equipment will void
To prevent the battery from being dis- You can turn on the compact disc player
the user’s authority to operate this
charged, do not leave the audio sys- by inserting a compact disc.
device.
tem on longer than necessary when
D Laser products You can turn off the compact disc player
the engine is not running.
by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio
D Do not take this unit apart or at- system was previously off, then the entire
tempt to make any changes your- audio system will be turned off when you
self. This is an intricate unit that eject the compact disc. If the radio was
uses a laser pickup to retrieve previously on, it will come on again.
information from the surface of ∗:
compact discs. The laser is care- Use of satellite radio requires XMr
fully shielded so that its rays re- tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
main inside the cabinet. There- dealer for details.
fore, never try to disassemble the SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
player or alter any of its parts Push “AM”, “DISC·AUX”, “FM1”, “FM2”,
since you may be exposed to la- “AM·SAT”∗ or “LOAD” if the system is al-
ser rays and dangerous voltages. ready on but you want to switch from one
D This product utilizes a laser. Use function to another.
of controls or adjustments or per- ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
formance of procedures other tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
than those specified herein may dealer for details.
result in hazardous radiation ex-
posure.
267
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

LISTENING TO THE XMr SATELLITE How to subscribe: All fees and programming are the respon-
RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2 and type You must enter into a separate service sibility of the XMr Satellite Radio and are
3) agreement with the XMr Satellite Radio in subject to change.
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in order to receive satellite broadcast pro- Satellite tuner technology notice:
your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota gramming in the vehicle. Additional activa- Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded
satellite receiver and antenna (or equiva- tion and service subscription fees apply Type Approval Certificates from XMr Sat-
lents) must be purchased and installed. A that are not included in the purchase price ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility
subscription to the XMr Satellite Radio of the vehicle and optional digital satellite with the services offered by the XMr Sat-
service is also necessary. tuner. For complete information on sub- ellite Radio.
scription rates and terms, or to subscribe
How to subscribe to an XMr Satellite to the XMr Satellite Radio, visit XMr on Displaying the radio ID
Radio the web at www.xmradio.com or call an Each XMr tuner is identified with a unique
An XMr Satellite Radio is a tuner de- XMr ’s Listener Care at 1−800−967−2346. radio ID. You will need the radio ID when
signed exclusively to receive broadcasts The XMr Satellite Radio is solely respon- activating XMr service or when reporting
provided under a separate subscription. sible for the quality, availability and con- a problem.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous tent of the satellite radio services pro- If you select the “CH 000” using the
states. vided, which are subject to the terms and “TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-
conditions of the XMr Satellite Radio cus- phanumeric characters appears. If you se-
tomer service agreement. lect another channel, display of the ID
Customers should have their radio ID code is canceled. The channel (000) alter-
ready; the radio ID can be found by tun- nates the display between the radio ID
ing to “channel 000” on the radio. For and the specific radio ID code.
details, see “Displaying the radio ID” be- ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
low. tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.
TONE AND BALANCE
For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.

268
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tone YOUR RADIO ANTENNA After you eject a compact disc single, do
How good an audio program sounds to To remove an antenna, carefully turn it not insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) disc
you is largely determined by the mix of counterclockwise. until “DISC” disappears from the display.
the treble, midrange (JBL brand audio sys-
tem∗ only), and bass levels. In fact, differ- NOTICE NOTICE
ent kinds of music and vocal programs Do not use an adaptor for compact
To prevent damage to the antenna,
usually sound better with different mixes disc singles—it could cause tracking
make sure it is removed before driv-
of treble, midrange, and bass. errors or interfere with the ejection of
ing your Toyota through an automatic
You can adjust sound characteristics. Dif- car wash. compact discs.
ferent sound characteristics can be re-
corded for each audio source. YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER
∗: If a JBL brand audio system is (type 1) CHANGER (type 2 and type 3)
installed, the “JBL” logo is shown on When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
the panel. button, wait for the load/eject status light
with the label side up. The player will play
Balance from track 1 through to the end of the to turn green, then gently push the disc
disc. Then it will play from track 1 again. in with the label side up. This compact
A good balance of the left and right stereo
disc player can store up to six discs. The
channels and of the front and rear sound
NOTICE player will play from track 1 through to
levels is also important.
the end of the disc. Then it will play from
Keep in mind that if you are listening to Never try to disassemble or oil any track 1 of the next disc.
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing part of the compact disc player. Do
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
the right/left balance will increase the vol- not insert anything other than com-
(4.7 in.) discs only.
ume of one group of sounds while de- pact discs into the slot.
creasing the volume of another.
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player does not need
an adaptor to play compact disc singles.
Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3
in.) in diameter−smaller than standard
discs.
269
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS18007

NOTICE
z Do not stack up two discs for in-
sertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc player or changer.
Insert only one compact disc into
slot at a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than com-
pact discs into the slot.

270
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Controls and features

"Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

XS18006a

271
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) (Reverse/Fast−forward button) Switching over the Speed Automatic

These buttons are used to preset and Sound Levelizer (ASL) level
tune in radio stations. Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward or be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or reverse within a compact disc. When you tion, turning the knob allows you to select
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the release the button, the compact disc play- from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and
button until you hear a beep—this will set er will resume playing. tone settings. The ASL system automati-
the station to the button. The preset but- AM cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-
ton number will appear on the display. dance with the driving speed. This helps
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio ensure an optimal listening experience
To recall a preset station: Push the button and select the AM band. “AM” will appear even if noise levels rise while driving.
for the station you want. The preset but- on the display.
ton number and station frequency will ap- DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-
pear on the display. ance adjustment function) Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
This radio can store one AM and two FM compact disc.
Each time you push the
stations for each button. (The display will “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob, the mode When the audio system is set into com-
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you changes. To adjust the tone and balance, pact disc operation, the display shows the
push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.) turn the knob. track number currently being played.

(Eject button) BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis- To switch between CD and AUX (external
play ranges from −5 to 5. device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-
Push the compact disc eject button to ton. The AUX mode is only available when
eject a compact disc. TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis- AUX adapter is connected to the system.
play ranges from −5 to 5. When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between will appear on the display.
the front and rear speakers. The display Error messages
ranges from F7 to R7.
If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between tem will display following error messages.
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7. “WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
272
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam- FM1 FM2 RAND (Random)
aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on Compact disc player
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it. the radio and select the FM band. “FM1” There are two random features—you can
“NO DISC”: Eject the disc or magazine. or “FM2” will appear on the display. This either listen to the tracks on one compact
Set the disc or magazine again. system allows you to set twelve FM sta- disc in random order, or listen to the
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside tions, two for each of the preset button. tracks on all the compact discs in the
the system. Eject the disc or magazine. MP3/FOLDER (Folder up/down) magazine in random order.
Set the disc or magazine again. To skip up or down to a different folder: To play the tracks on one disc in random
“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your Push “” or “” side of the order:
Toyota dealer to inspect. “MP3/FOLDER” several times until the Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer number of the folder you want to listen to button 1). “ ” will appear on the
lid of separate unit is open. Close the appears on the display. display and the player will perform the
compact disc changer lid. To jump to the first file in the first folder: tracks on the disc you are listening to in
Push and hold the “” side of the button random order. To turn off the random fea-
If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
until you hear a beep. ture, push this button again.
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc When playing a disc featuring both audio With compact disc changer only—
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio To play all the tracks in the magazine in
data disc. data (CD−DA) is played. random order:
If the malfunction still exists, take your PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
vehicle to your Toyota dealer. Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
 DISC  on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the pear on the display and the player will
volume. perform all the tracks on all the discs in
With compact disc changer only—
the magazine in random order. To turn off
Use these buttons to select a disc you the random feature, push this button
want to listen to. again.
Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

273
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

MP3/WMA player RPT (Repeat) MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features— Compact disc player There are two repeat features—you can
you can either listen to all of the files on There are two repeat features—you can repeat a single file or an entire folder.
the compact discs in random order. You either replay a disc track or a whole com- Repeating a file:
can also listen to the files in a single pact disc. Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
folder in random order. button 2) while the file is playing.
Repeating a track:
To randomly play the files in a folder: Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset “ ” will appear on the display. When
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset button 2) while the track is playing. the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
button 1). “ ” will appear on the “ ” will appear on the display. When This process will be continued until you
display. the track ends, it will automatically replay. push the button again to turn off the re-
To randomly play all of the files on the To turn off the repeat feature, push this peat feature.
compact disc: button again. Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1) With compact disc changer only— Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “ ” will until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
Repeating a disc:
appear on the display and the player will pear on the display. The player will repeat
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
play all of the files on the disc in random all of the files in the folder. When the last
order. To turn off the random playback until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap- file in the folder ends, the folder will re-
feature, push this button again. pear on the display. The player will repeat peat from the beginning. To turn off the
all the tracks on the disc you are listening repeat feature, push this button again.
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

274
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SCAN Compact disc player MP3/WMA player

Radio There are two scan features—you can ei- There are two scan features—you can ei-
You can either scan all the frequencies on ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-
a band or scan only the preset stations scan the first tracks of all the discs in the ic disc or scan the first file of all the
for that band. magazine. folder.
To scan the preset stations: Scanning the tracks on a disc: Scanning the files on a folder:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display will appear on the display and the player
the next preset station up the band, stay and the player will scan all the tracks on will scan all the files in the folder you are
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the the disc you are listening to. To stop listening to. To select a file, push the
next preset station. To stop scanning, scanning, push this button again. If the “SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
push this button again. player scanned all the tracks on the disc, disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-
it will stop scanning. mal play resumes.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- With compact disc changer only— Scanning the first file of all the folders:
ton. The radio will find the next station up Scanning the first tracks of all the discs Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds, in the magazine: “ ” will appear on the display and
and then scan again to the next station. Push and hold the “SCAN” button until the player will scan the first file of the
To stop scanning, push this button again. you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear next folder. To select a folder, push the
on the display and the player will scan the “SCAN” again. After all the folders have
first track of the next disc. To stop scan- been scanned in one pass, normal play
ning, push this button again. If the player resumes.
has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.

275
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down) MP3/WMA player TEXT

Radio Use this button to file up or down to a Compact disc player
In the seek mode, the radio finds and different file. This button is used to change the display
plays the next station up or down the Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/ for the compact disc that contains text
station band. TRACK” several times until the file you data.
To seek the next station, quickly push and want to listen to appears on the display. To change the display, quickly push and
release “” or “” side of the If you want to return to the beginning of release the “TEXT” button while the com-
“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to the current file, push the “” side of the pact disc is playing. The display changes
find the station after that. button one time. in the order from the elapsed time to disc
Compact disc player ST (Stereo reception) display title to track title, then back to the
Your radio automatically changes to stereo elapsed time.
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track. reception when a stereo broadcast is re- If this button is pushed while a compact
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the disc that does not contain text data is
Push “” or “” side of the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of the amount of channel separation to prev- display.
the track you want to listen to appears on ent the weak signal from creating noise.
the display. If you want to return to the If the entire disc or track title does not
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the appear on the display, push and hold the
beginning of the current track, quickly radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
push the down side of the button one button until you hear a beep. The rest of
tion. the title will appear.
time.

276
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

MP3/WMA player
This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album
title to track title to artist name, then back
to the elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on
the display.
If the entire text data is not displayed,
push and hold it until you hear a beep.
The rest of the text data will appear.
TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)
Radio
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the fre-
quency.
MP3/WMA player
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
file down.

277
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

XS18003a

278
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) To recall a preset channel: Push the but- (Reverse/Fast−forward button)
These buttons are used to preset and ton for the channel you want. The preset
tune in radio stations. button number and channel number will Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or
appear on the display. “ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or This radio can store three XMr channels reverse within a compact disc. When you
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the for each button. (The display will show release the button, the compact disc play-
button until you hear a beep—this will set “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push er will resume playing.
the station to the button. The preset but- “AM·SAT”∗ button.) AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite Ra-
ton number will appear on the display. ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr dio∗ )
To recall a preset station: Push the button tuner and service. Contact your Toyota Push the “AM·SAT”∗ button to turn on the
for the station you want. The preset but- dealer for details. radio and select the AM or XMr band.
ton number and station frequency will ap- “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-
(Eject button)
pear on the display. pear on the display.
This button is used to eject one or all
This radio can store one AM and two FM Error messages
compact discs.
stations for each button. (The display will If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you To eject the current compact disc, push
your audio system will display following
push “AM·SAT”∗ , “FM1” or “FM2” button.) and release the compact disc eject button.
error messages.
XMr Satellite Radio∗ — To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset
“ANTENNA”:
button 3) or “” (preset button 4) until the
These buttons are used to preset and number of the disc you want to eject is D The XMr antenna is not connected.
tune in radio channels. displayed. Push and release the eject but- Check whether the XMr antenna cable
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in ton. is attached securely.
the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or To eject all discs at a time, press and D A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the hold the eject button until you hear a the surrounding antenna cable. See a
button until you hear a beep—this will set beep. The last compact disc played before Toyota certified dealer.
the channel to the button. The preset but- pushing the button will be ejected first. If
ton number will appear on the display. the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.

279
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“UPDATING”: “− − −”: The channel you selected is no BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
D You have not subscribed to the XMr longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds the right and left speakers. The display
Satellite Radio. The radio is being up- until the radio returns to the previous ranges from L7 to R7.
dated with the latest encryption code. channel or “CH001”. If it does not change Switching over the Speed Automatic
Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for automatically, select another channel. Sound Levelizer (ASL) level
subscription information. When a con- The XMr Listener Care Center is also ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
tact is canceled, you can choose the available on the phone, please call be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-
“CH000” and all free−to−air channels. 1−800−967−2346 during the following tion, turning the knob allows you to select
D The premium channel you selected is hours: from LOW, MID and HIGH volume and
not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec- Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. East- tone settings. The ASL system automati-
onds until the radio returns to the pre- ern Time cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-
vious channel or “CH001”. If it does Sunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern Time dance with the driving speed. This helps
not change automatically, select anoth- ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr ensure an optimal listening experience
er channel. If you want to listen to the tuner and service. Contact your Toyota even if noise levels rise while driving.
premium channel, contact the XMr Sat- dealer for details. DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
ellite Radio. AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound bal- Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too ance adjustment function) compact disc.
weak at the current location. Wait until Each time you push the
your vehicle reaches a location with a When the audio system is set into com-
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob, the mode pact disc operation, the display shows the
stronger signal. changes. To adjust the tone and balance, track, or track and disc number currently
“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio turn the knob. being played.
or program information. Wait until the unit BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-
has received the information. To switch between CD and AUX (external
play ranges from −5 to 5. device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-
“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis- ton. The AUX mode is only available when
not broadcasting any programming. Select play ranges from −5 to 5. AUX adapter is connected to the system.
another channel. When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display will appear on the display.
ranges from F7 to R7.

280
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Error messages  DISC  MP3/WMA player

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- Use these buttons to select a disc you To skip up or down to a different folder:
tem will display following error messages. want to listen to. Push “” or “” side of the
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset “TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool button 4) until the number of the disc you number of the folder you want to listen to
down. want to listen appears on the display. appears on the display.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam- FM1 FM2 To jump to the first file in the first folder:
aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side Push and hold the “” side of the button
Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on until you hear a beep.
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it. the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
“NO DISC”: Eject the disc. Set the disc or “FM2” will appear on the display. This When playing a disc featuring both audio
again. system allows you to set twelve FM sta- data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
tions, two for each of the preset button. data (CD−DA) is played.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)
again. XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your When you push the “” or “” side of
Toyota dealer to inspect. the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving
If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display, a XMr channel, the current channel cate-
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA gory appears on the display.
data has been inserted. Remove the disc When the channel category appears, push
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA either “” or “” side of the
data disc. “TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the
If the malfunction still exists, take your next or previous category.
vehicle to your Toyota dealer. ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

281
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

LOAD PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) MP3/WMA player

This button is used to load the compact Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system There are two random playback features—
discs in the compact disc player. This on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the you can either listen to all of the files on
player can store up to six discs. volume. the compact discs in random order. You
To load one compact disc only, quickly RAND (Random) can also listen to the files in a single
push and release the button. When the folder in random order.
Compact disc player
indicators on both sides of the slot turn To randomly play the files in a folder:
green, insert a compact disc. After the There are two random features—you can Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will either listen to the tracks on one compact
button 1). “ ” will appear on the
close. disc in random order, or listen to the
display.
tracks on all the compact discs in the
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter magazine in random order. To randomly play all of the files on the
will close after 15 seconds. compact disc:
To play the tracks on one disc in random
To load multiple compact discs, push and Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
order:
hold the button (until you hear a beep Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset until you hear a beep. “ ” will
when the audio system is on). When the appear on the display and the player will
button 1). “ ” will appear on the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn play all of the files on the disc in random
display and the player will perform the
green, insert a compact disc. After the order. To turn off the random playback
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will feature, push this button again.
random order. To turn off the random fea-
close. After a few seconds, the shutter
ture, push this button again.
will automatically open again and the indi-
cators will turn green so the next disc can To play all the tracks in the magazine in
be inserted. The same process can be random order:
applied for loading the rest of the discs. Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL” until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
will appear on the display. pear on the display and the player will
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter perform all the tracks on all the discs in
will close after 15 seconds. the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

282
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

RPT (Repeat) MP3/WMA player SCAN

Compact disc player There are two repeat features—you can Radio
There are two repeat features—you can repeat a single file or an entire folder. You can either scan all the frequencies on
either replay a disc track or a whole com- Repeating a file: a band or scan only the preset stations
pact disc. Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset for that band.
Repeating a track: button 2) while the file is playing. To scan the preset stations:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset “ ” will appear on the display. When Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
button 2) while the track is playing. the file ends, it will repeat automatically. you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
“ ” will appear on the display. When This process will be continued until you the next preset station up the band, stay
the track ends, it will automatically replay. push the button again to turn off the re- there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
To turn off the repeat feature, push this peat feature. next preset station. To stop scanning,
button again. Repeating a folder: push this button again.
Repeating a disc: Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2) To scan all the frequencies:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap- Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
pear on the display. The player will repeat ton. The radio will find the next station up
until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
all of the files in the folder. When the last the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
pear on the display. The player will repeat and then scan again to the next station.
file in the folder ends, the folder will re-
all the tracks on the disc you are listening To stop scanning, push this button again.
to. When the disc ends, the player will peat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again. XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat You can either scan the currently selected
feature, push this button again. channel category or scan only the preset
channels for the band.

283
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To scan the preset channels: Scanning the tracks on a disc: Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display “ ” will appear on the display and
display. The radio will tune in the next and the player will scan all the tracks on the player will scan the first file of the
preset channel up the band, stay there for the disc you are listening to. To stop next folder. To select a folder, push the
5 seconds, and then move to the next scanning, push this button again. If the “SCAN” again. After all the folders have
preset channel. To stop scanning, push player scanned all the tracks on the disc, been scanned in one pass, normal play
this button again. it will stop scanning. resumes.
To scan the currently selected channel Scanning the first tracks of all the discs SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)
category: in the magazine:
Radio
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear In the seek mode, the radio finds and
radio will find the next channel in the on the display and the player will scan the plays the next station up or down the
same channel category up the band, stay first track of the next disc. To stop scan- station band.
there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. ning, push this button again. If the chang- To seek the next station, quickly push and
To stop scanning, push this button again. er has scanned all the discs, it will stop release “” or “” side of the
∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr scanning. “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota MP3/WMA player find the station after that.
dealer for details. XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
There are two scan features—you can ei-
Compact disc player ther scan the files in a folder on a specif- To select the next channel within the cur-
There are two scan features—you can ei- ic disc or scan the first file of all the rent channel category, push the “” or
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or folder. “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the Scanning the files on a folder: Repeat until a desired channel is found.
magazine. Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN” ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
will appear on the display and the player tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
will scan all the files in the folder you are dealer for details.
listening to. To select a file, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-
mal play resumes.
284
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Compact disc player TEXT Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a XMr Satellite Radio∗ 1 — This button is used to change the display
different track. When you push the “TEXT” button, the for the compact disc that contains text
Push “” or “” side of the display changes as follows: data.
“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM To change the display, quickly push and
the track you want to listen to appears on TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA- release the “TEXT” button while the com-
the display. If you want to return to the TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME pact disc is playing. The display changes
beginning of the current track, quickly Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be in the order from the elapsed time to disc
push the down side of the button one displayed. (Some information will not be title to track title, then back to the
time. fully displayed.) elapsed time.
MP3/WMA player The message display will be canceled if If this button is pushed while a compact
Use this button to file up or down to a any button that affects the display is disc that does not contain text data is
different file. pushed. playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/ If there is no song/program title or artist
TRACK” several times until the file you name/feature associated with the channel If the entire disc or track title does not
want to listen to appears on the display. at that time, “− − − − −” will appear on the appear on the display, push and hold the
If you want to return to the beginning of display. button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the current file, push the “” side of the the title will appear.
This XMr tuner supports “Audio Services”
button one time. (Music and Talk) of only XMr Satellite
ST (Stereo reception) display Radio and “Text Information”∗ 2 linked to
Your radio automatically changes to stereo the respective audio services.
reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ∗1 : Use of satellite radio requires XMr
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces dealer for details.
the amount of channel separation to prev- ∗2 : Text Information includes, Channel
ent the weak signal from creating noise. Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the Category Name.
radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
tion.
285
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

MP3/WMA player TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

This button is used to change the display Radio
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
data. step up the frequency. Turn the knob
To change the display, quickly push and counterclockwise to step down the fre-
release the “TEXT” button while the quency.
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
title to track title to artist name, then back step up the channel. Turn the knob coun-
to the elapsed time. terclockwise to step down the channel.
∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on dealer for details.
the display. MP3/WMA player
If the entire text data is not displayed, Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
push and hold it until you hear a beep. file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
The rest of the text data will appear. file down.

286
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Type 3
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

XS18004a

287
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons) To recall a preset channel: Push the but- (Reverse/Fast−forward button)
These buttons are used to preset and ton for the channel you want. The preset
tune in radio stations. button number and channel number will Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or
appear on the display. “ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or This radio can store three XMr channels reverse within a compact disc. When you
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the for each button. (The display will show release the button, the compact disc play-
button until you hear a beep—this will set “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push er will resume playing.
the station to the button. The preset but- “AM·SAT”∗ button.) AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite Ra-
ton number will appear on the display. ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr dio∗ )
To recall a preset station: Push the button tuner and service. Contact your Toyota Push the “AM·SAT”∗ button to turn on the
for the station you want. The preset but- dealer for details. radio and select the AM or XMr band.
ton number and station frequency will ap- “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-
(Eject button)
pear on the display. pear on the display.
This button is used to eject one or all
This radio can store one AM and two FM Error messages
compact discs.
stations for each button. (The display will If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you To eject the current compact disc, push
your audio system will display following
push “AM·SAT”∗ , “FM1” or “FM2” button.) and release the compact disc eject button.
error messages.
XMr Satellite Radio∗ — To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset
“ANTENNA”:
button 3) or “” (preset button 4) until the
These buttons are used to preset and number of the disc you want to eject is D The XMr antenna is not connected.
tune in radio channels. displayed. Push and release the eject but- Check whether the XMr antenna cable
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in ton. is attached securely.
the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or To eject all discs at a time, press and D A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the hold the eject button until you hear a the surrounding antenna cable. See a
button until you hear a beep—this will set beep. The last compact disc played before Toyota certified dealer.
the channel to the button. The preset but- pushing the button will be ejected first. If
ton number will appear on the display. the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.

288
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“UPDATING”: “− − −”: The channel you selected is no BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
D You have not subscribed to the XMr longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds the right and left speakers. The display
Satellite Radio. The radio is being up- until the radio returns to the previous ranges from L7 to R7.
dated with the latest encryption code. channel or “CH001”. If it does not change Switching over the Speed Automatic
Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for automatically, select another channel. Sound Levelizer (ASL) level
subscription information. When a con- The XMr Listener Care Center is also ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
tact is canceled, you can choose the available on the phone, please call be turned on and off by turning the knob.
“CH000” and all free−to−air channels. 1−800−967−2346 during the following The ASL system automatically adjusts vol-
D The premium channel you selected is hours: ume and tone in accordance with the driv-
not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec- Monday—Saturday: 6 a.m.—2 a.m. East- ing speed. This helps ensure an optimal
onds until the radio returns to the pre- ern Time listening experience even if noise levels
vious channel or “CH001”. If it does Sunday: 8 a.m.—8 p.m. Eastern Time rise while driving.
not change automatically, select anoth- ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
er channel. If you want to listen to the tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
premium channel, contact the XMr Sat- dealer for details. Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
ellite Radio. compact disc.
AUDIO/CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-
“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too ance adjustment function) When the audio system is set into com-
weak at the current location. Wait until pact disc operation, the display shows the
Each time you push the track, or track and disc number currently
your vehicle reaches a location with a “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob, the mode
stronger signal. being played.
changes. To adjust the tone and balance,
“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio turn the knob. To switch between CD and AUX (external
or program information. Wait until the unit device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis- ton. The AUX mode is only available when
has received the information. play ranges from −5 to 5. AUX adapter is connected to the system.
“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis- When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
not broadcasting any programming. Select play ranges from −5 to 5. will appear on the display.
another channel.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

289
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Error messages  DISC  MP3/WMA player

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- Use these buttons to select a disc you To skip up or down to a different folder:
tem will display following error messages. want to listen to. Push “” or “” side of the
“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset “TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool button 4) until the number of the disc you number of the folder you want to listen to
down. want to listen appears on the display. appears on the display.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam- FM1 FM2 To jump to the first file in the first folder:
aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side Push and hold the “” side of the button
Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on until you hear a beep.
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it. the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
“NO DISC”: Eject the disc. Set the disc or “FM2” will appear on the display. This When playing a disc featuring both audio
again. system allows you to set twelve FM sta- data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
tions, two for each of the preset button. data (CD−DA) is played.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc. Set the disc TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)
again. XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your When you push the “” or “” side of
Toyota dealer to inspect. the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving
If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display, a XMr channel, the current channel cate-
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA gory appears on the display.
data has been inserted. Remove the disc When the channel category appears, push
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA either “” or “” side of the
data disc. “TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the
If the malfunction still exists, take your next or previous category.
vehicle to your Toyota dealer. ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

290
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

LOAD PWR·VOL (Power and Volume) MP3/WMA player

This button is used to load the compact Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system There are two random playback features—
discs in the compact disc player. This on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the you can either listen to all of the files on
player can store up to six discs. volume. the compact discs in random order. You
To load one compact disc only, quickly RAND (Random) can also listen to the files in a single
push and release the button. When the folder in random order.
Compact disc player
indicators on both sides of the slot turn To randomly play the files in a folder:
green, insert a compact disc. After the There are two random features—you can Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will either listen to the tracks on one compact
button 1). “ ” will appear on the
close. disc in random order, or listen to the
display.
tracks on all the compact discs in the
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter magazine in random order. To randomly play all of the files on the
will close after 15 seconds. compact disc:
To play the tracks on one disc in random
To load multiple compact discs, push and Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
order:
hold the button (until you hear a beep Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset until you hear a beep. “ ” will
when the audio system is on). When the appear on the display and the player will
button 1). “ ” will appear on the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn play all of the files on the disc in random
display and the player will perform the
green, insert a compact disc. After the order. To turn off the random playback
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will feature, push this button again.
random order. To turn off the random fea-
close. After a few seconds, the shutter
ture, push this button again.
will automatically open again and the indi-
cators will turn green so the next disc can To play all the tracks in the magazine in
be inserted. The same process can be random order:
applied for loading the rest of the discs. Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL” until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
will appear on the display. pear on the display and the player will
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter perform all the tracks on all the discs in
will close after 15 seconds. the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

291
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

RPT (Repeat) MP3/WMA player SCAN

Compact disc player There are two repeat features—you can Radio
There are two repeat features—you can repeat a single file or an entire folder. You can either scan all the frequencies on
either replay a disc track or a whole com- Repeating a file: a band or scan only the preset stations
pact disc. Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset for that band.
Repeating a track: button 2) while the file is playing. To scan the preset stations:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset “ ” will appear on the display. When Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
button 2) while the track is playing. the file ends, it will repeat automatically. you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
“ ” will appear on the display. When This process will be continued until you the next preset station up the band, stay
the track ends, it will automatically replay. push the button again to turn off the re- there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
To turn off the repeat feature, push this peat feature. next preset station. To stop scanning,
button again. Repeating a folder: push this button again.
Repeating a disc: Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2) To scan all the frequencies:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2) until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap- Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-
pear on the display. The player will repeat ton. The radio will find the next station up
until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-
all of the files in the folder. When the last the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
pear on the display. The player will repeat and then scan again to the next station.
file in the folder ends, the folder will re-
all the tracks on the disc you are listening To stop scanning, push this button again.
to. When the disc ends, the player will peat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again. XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat You can either scan the currently selected
feature, push this button again. channel category or scan only the preset
channels for the band.

292
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To scan the preset channels: Scanning the tracks on a disc: Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the ton. “SCAN” will appear on the display “ ” will appear on the display and
display. The radio will tune in the next and the player will scan all the tracks on the player will scan the first file of the
preset channel up the band, stay there for the disc you are listening to. To stop next folder. To select a folder, push the
5 seconds, and then move to the next scanning, push this button again. If the “SCAN” again. After all the folders have
preset channel. To stop scanning, push player scanned all the tracks on the disc, been scanned in one pass, normal play
this button again. it will stop scanning. resumes.
To scan the currently selected channel Scanning the first tracks of all the discs SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)
category: in the magazine:
Radio
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but- Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
ton. “SCAN” appears on the display. The you hear a beep. “ ·SCAN” will appear In the seek mode, the radio finds and
radio will find the next channel in the on the display and the player will scan the plays the next station up or down the
same channel category up the band, stay first track of the next disc. To stop scan- station band.
there for 5 seconds, and then scan again. ning, push this button again. If the chang- To seek the next station, quickly push and
To stop scanning, push this button again. er has scanned all the discs, it will stop release “” or “” side of the
∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr scanning. “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota MP3/WMA player find the station after that.
dealer for details. XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
There are two scan features—you can ei-
Compact disc player ther scan the files in a folder on a specif- To select the next channel within the cur-
There are two scan features—you can ei- ic disc or scan the first file of all the rent channel category, push the “” or
ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or folder. “” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the Scanning the files on a folder: Repeat until a desired channel is found.
magazine. Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN” ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
will appear on the display and the player tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
will scan all the files in the folder you are dealer for details.
listening to. To select a file, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-
mal play resumes.
293
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Compact disc player TEXT Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a XMr Satellite Radio∗ 1 — This button is used to change the display
different track. When you push the “TEXT” button, the for the compact disc that contains text
Push “” or “” side of the display changes as follows: data.
“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM To change the display, quickly push and
the track you want to listen to appears on TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEA- release the “TEXT” button while the com-
the display. If you want to return to the TURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME pact disc is playing. The display changes
beginning of the current track, quickly Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be in the order from the elapsed time to disc
push the down side of the button one displayed. (Some information will not be title to track title, then back to the
time. fully displayed.) elapsed time.
MP3/WMA player The message display will be canceled if If this button is pushed while a compact
Use this button to file up or down to a any button that affects the display is disc that does not contain text data is
different file. pushed. playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
Push “” or “” side of the “SEEK/ If there is no song/program title or artist
TRACK” several times until the file you name/feature associated with the channel If the entire disc or track title does not
want to listen to appears on the display. at that time, “− − − − −” will appear on the appear on the display, push and hold the
If you want to return to the beginning of display. button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the current file, push the “” side of the the title will appear.
This XMr tuner supports “Audio Services”
button one time. (Music and Talk) of only XMr Satellite
ST (Stereo reception) display Radio and “Text Information”∗ 2 linked to
Your radio automatically changes to stereo the respective audio services.
reception when a stereo broadcast is re- ∗1 : Use of satellite radio requires XMr
ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces dealer for details.
the amount of channel separation to prev- ∗2 : Text Information includes, Channel
ent the weak signal from creating noise. Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the Category Name.
radio switches from stereo to mono recep-
tion.
294
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)
MP3/WMA player TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)
This button is used to change the display Radio
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
data. step up the frequency. Turn the knob
To change the display, quickly push and counterclockwise to step down the fre-
release the “TEXT” button while the
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display
quency.
XMr Satellite Radio∗ —
XS18008a
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
title to track title to artist name, then back step up the channel. Turn the knob coun-
to the elapsed time. terclockwise to step down the channel.
∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on dealer for details. Some parts of the audio system can be
the display. MP3/WMA player adjusted using the switches on the steer-
If the entire text data is not displayed, Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to ing wheel.
push and hold it until you hear a beep. file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to Details of the specific switches, controls,
The rest of the text data will appear. file down. and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “MODE” switch
3. “” switch

295
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1. Volume control switch To seek a station: With compact disc changer only—
Push “+” side to increase the volume. The Push and hold the “” or “” side of the Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
volume continues to increase while the switch until you hear a beep. Do this switch until the disc you want to listen to
switch is being pushed. again to find the next station. If you push is set.
the switch on either side during the seek
Push “−” side to decrease the volume. mode, seeking will be cancelled. MP3/WMA player
The volume continues to decrease while To select a desired file:
the switch is being pushed. To step up or down the frequency, push
and hold the switch even after you hear Quickly push and release the “” or “”
2. “MODE” switch a beep. When you release from the side of the switch until the file you want
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio switch, the radio will begin seeking up or to listen to is set. If you want to return
mode. Each push changes the mode se- down for a station. Do this again to find to the beginning of the current file, push
quentially if the desired mode is ready to the next station. the “” side of the switch once, quickly.
use. XMr Satellite Radio∗ — To select a desired folder:
To turn the audio system on, push the Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
To select a preset channel, push the “” switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
“MODE” switch. or “” side of the switch. Repeat until a until the folder you want to listen to is
To turn the audio system off, push and desired channel is found. set.
hold the “MODE” switch until the system ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
turns off. With compact disc changer only—
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
3. “” switch dealer for details. To select a desired disc:
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
Radio Compact disc player switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
This switch has the following features— Use this switch to skip up or down to a until the disc you want to listen to is set.
To select a preset station: different track in either direction.
Quickly push and release the “” or “” Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch. Do this again to select side of the switch until the track you want
the next preset station. to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

296
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

AUX adapter
If you install an audio system other than
a genuine audio system, you will not be
able to use the AUX adapter.

NOTICE

XS18009 To reduce the chance of audio noise,

do not leave mini plug connected to
AUX adapter without auxiliary play-
back device connected.

An AUX adapter is installed on the in-

strument panel.
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX
adapter, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s
speaker system.
To use the AUX adapter, switch to the
AUX mode (external device mode) by
pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the
AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear
on the display. To adjust the volume, turn
the “PWR·VOL” knob.
When using a portable audio device con-
nected to the power outlet or cigarette
lighter, noise may occur during playback.
If this happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
297
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Rear seat entertainment system—

The rear seat entertainment system con-
sists of the following components.
1. Power outlet main switch
2. Front audio system
3. DVD player
4. Rear seat entertainment system display
5. Rear seat entertainment system con-
troller
6. A/V input adapter
7. Power outlet

XS18030b

Separate seats type

298
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The rear seat entertainment system con-

sists of the following components.
1. Power outlet main switch
2. Front audio system
3. DVD player
4. Rear seat entertainment system display
5. Rear seat entertainment system con-
troller
6. Power outlet
7. A/V input adapter

XS18031b

Bench seat type

299
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Display
The rear seat entertainment system is de- You can purchase a wireless headphones
signed for the rear passengers to enjoy at a Toyota dealer.
audio and DVD video separately from the
front audio system. CAUTION
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated when the engine switch is in D Do not operate a motor vehicle
the “ACC” or “ON” position. while using headphones. Doing so
may cause an accident, resulting in
XS18017
The rear passengers can enjoy DVD vid- death or serious injury.
eo, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD
and MP3. D With DVD player:
The rear seat entertainment system can Conversational speech on some
play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD DVDs is recorded at a low volume
text, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc is to emphasize the impact of sound
loaded in the DVD player. effects. If you adjust the volume To open the display, push the lock release
assuming that the conversations button.
You can enjoy videos and sound when represent the maximum volume lev-
your personal audio system is connected el that the DVD will play, you may
to the input terminal adapter. For details, be startled by louder sound effects
refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. or when you change to a different
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment audio source. Be sure to adjust the
system with a wireless headphones. The volume with this in mind.
wireless headphones can be used within Make sure the volume is not in-
rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the creased, before you turn on the
headphones will mute. For details, refer to headphone.
the manufacturer’s instructions.
With some wireless headphones generally
available in the market, it may be difficult
to catch sound properly. Toyota recom-
mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless
headphones.

300
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

NOTICE
z Benzene or alkaline solutions may
damage the coated surface of the
screen.

XS18018 XS18019 z To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not turn on the rear
seat entertainment system longer
than necessary when the engine is
not running.

INFORMATION
Pull the display down to an easily view- To close, push the display up until you z Wipe off fingerprints on the surface
able angle (between 90_ and 125_) hear a click. of the display using a glass clean-
ing cloth.
The illumination of the screen is automati-
NOTICE cally turned off when the display is z The displayed image may become
The screen should be cleaned with a closed. However, the rear seat entertain- darker and moving images may be
dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed ment system is not turned off. slightly distorted when the display
by hand or wiped with a hard cloth, is cold.
the surface of the screen may be CAUTION z When you look at the screen
scratched. through polarized material such as
To reduce the chance of injury in polarized sunglasses, the screen
case of an accident or sudden stop may be dark and hard to see. If so,
while driving, close the display when change the angle of the screen,
it is not in use. look at the screen from different
angles, adjust the screen settings
on the “Display” screen, or take off
your sunglasses.

301
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Rear seat entertainment

system controller
The rear seat entertainment system can BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
be operated with the rear seat entertain- (for new vehicle owners)
ment system controller and buttons on the A battery is already set in the control-
DVD player unit. The system cannot be ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-
operated by touching the switches on the vents the battery from being dis-
screen directly. charged. Before using the controller,

CAUTION
remove the insulating sheet according
to the following procedure.
Z17448
Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE 1. Remove the cover of the controller

as shown.
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to ex-
plode or leak.

302
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-
tem controller, direct the signal output
portion of the controller to the signal
reception portion of the rear seat enter-
tainment system display.
Z17449 The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

2. Remove the insulating sheet. XS18020 To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the seatback pocket when it is not in
use.

303
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
z Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
z Do not sit on or place heavy ob-
jects on the controller.
z Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on
the instrument panel) for a long
time.

304
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Control buttons
"Controller
1. “DVD” button
This button turns on the DVD mode.
2. “VIDEO” button
This button causes the display to use
the video signal from an external video
device.
3. “OFF” button
This button turns off the rear seat en-
tertainment system.
4. Joystick
This joystick selects a control switch,
mode switch on the screen or the
Z18004y menu for the disc.
5. “ENT” button
This button inputs the selected switch
or the selected menu for the disc.
6. “FOLDER ” button
This button selects a desired folder.
7. “FOLDER ” button
This button selects a desired folder.

8. “ ” button
This button fast forwards a screen
when the DVD player is operated.

305
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

9. “ ” button 16. “ANGLE” button REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

This button stops a screen when the This button selects the angle of the For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.
DVD player is operated. screen when the DVD player is oper-
ated. CAUTION
10. “SET UP” button
17. “SEARCH” button
This button indicates the initial set up Special care should be taken to pre-
screen when the DVD player is oper- This button indicates the title search vent small children from swallowing
ated. screen when the DVD player is oper- the removed battery or components.
ated.
11. “MENU” button
18. “TOP MENU” button
This button indicates the menu screen
This button indicates the title selection NOTICE
for DVD video when the DVD player is
operated. screen for DVD video when the DVD z When replacing the battery, be care-
player is operated. ful not to lose the components.
12. “AUDIO” button
This button indicates the changing au- 19. “ ” button z Replace only with the same or
dio screen when the DVD player is This button reverse a screen when the equivalent type recommended by a
operated. DVD player is operated. Toyota dealer.
13. “SUB TITLE” button z Dispose of used batteries according
20. “ ” button
to the local laws.
This button indicates the changing sub- This button plays or pauses a screen
title screen when the DVD player is when the DVD player is operated.
operated.
21. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button
14. “DISPLAY” button
This button selects track/chapter.
This button adjusts the color, tone,
contrast and brightness of the screen. 22. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

15. “SIZE” button This button selects track/chapter.

This button changes the display mode 23. “OPTION” button

when the DVD player is operated or This button indicates the control
the video mode is on. switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.
306
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

NOTICE
z Be sure that the positive side and
negative side of the controller bat-
tery should be faced correctly.

Z17448 Z17458 z Do not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.
z Do not touch or move any compo-
nents inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion.
z Close the battery case securely.
Replace the battery according to the fol- 2. Remove the discharged batteries and
lowing procedure: put in the new batteries as shown.
Install the cover. After replacing the battery, check that the
1. Remove the cover of the controller as controller operates properly. If the control-
shown. ler still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

307
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Buttons on the DVD player unit

1. “DVD” button
This button turns on the rear seat en-
tertainment system and selects the
mode.
2. “VIDEO” button
This button causes the display to use
the video signal from an external video
device.
3. “ TRACK·CHAPTER ” button
This button skips directly to a desire
track or chapter.
4. “ ” button
XS18021 This button plays or pauses a screen
when the DVD player is operated.
5. “OPTION” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.
6. Joystick/“ENT” button
The joystick selects a control switch
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
The “ENT” button inputs the selected
switch or the selected menu for the
disc.

308
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Turning the rear seat

entertainment system on and
off
7. “DISC” indicator light To turn on the system, push the “DVD”
This light indicates that the disc is button or “VIDEO” button.
loaded. When the “DVD” button is pushed, the
disc load screen changes to the DVD
8. “ ” button player operation screen.

Z17453
This button ejects a disc. When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, the
images and sounds from the personal au-
dio machine are output.
The “DVD” button is effective only when a
disc is inserted.

Controller

XS18022

DVD player unit

309
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Front audio system

operation
The rear DVD player can be operated
through the front audio system.

Z17455 Z18033

To turn off the system, push the “OFF” Vehicles with navigation system—The rear
button. seat entertainment system can be
When the front audio system is turned off, switched ON and OFF by pushing the
the rear audio system and the DVD player “Rear” switch on the front audio system.
will be turned off simultaneously.

310
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Rear system lock

The audio system controls in the instru-
ment panel allow the operation of the rear
seat entertainment system by rear seat
passengers to be disabled.
Turning on the rear system lock prevents
small children from using the remote con-
troller or operation panel of the DVD play-
er unit to operate the rear seat entertain-
Z18031E Z17443
ment system during driving.
Turn the audio system on. Push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until
“RSE” is displayed. Then, turn the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,
and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL” Vehicles with navigation system— When the rear system lock is on and any
knob.
Push the “INFO” button to change the button is pushed on the remote controller
screen to “Screen Setting”. or the operation panel, the screen shown
above is displayed for approximately 6
Push the “ON” switch on the “Screen seconds.
Setting” screen to turn on the “Rear
system lock”. Then push “OK”. Even when the rear system lock is turned
on during play mode, the images and
sounds continue without interruption.
The condition of the rear system lock is
maintained, even when the engine switch
is turned off.

311
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—DVD player
The DVD player can play audio CDs/ If a disc which is not playable is inserted,
MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts, “DISC CHECK” will also appear on the
dts−CDs and video CDs. screen. For appropriate discs for this play-
For appropriate discs for this player, see er, see “Audio/video system operating
“Audio/video system operating hints” on hints” on page 342 in this Section.
page 342 in this Section. The player will play the track or chapter,
The DVD player works when the engine XS18023 and it will play from the beginning of the
track or chapter again after it reaches the
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
end.
To turn on the DVD player, a disc must
be loaded in the player.
CAUTION
To turn off the player, eject the disc.
Error messages This product is a class 1 laser prod-
uct. Use of controls or adjustments
If the player malfunctions, your audio sys- INSERTING THE DISC or performance of procedures other
tem will display following error messages. Insert the compact disc into the slot than those specified herein may re-
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the with the label side up. sult in hazardous radiation exposure.
screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty, “DISC” indicator light turns on while the Do not open covers and do not repair
damaged or it was inserted upside down. disc is loaded. by yourself. Refer servicing to quali-
Clean the disc or insert it correctly. fied personnel.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot
If “REGION ERROR” appears on the be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”
screen: It indicates that the DVD region and disc number appear on the screen.
code is not set properly. NOTICE
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the Never try to disassemble or oil any
screen: There is a problem inside the part of the DVD player. Do not insert
player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again. anything other than a disc into the
If the malfunction still exists, take your slot.
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

312
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—DVD player operation

switches
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player needs an adap-
tor to play compact disc singles. Compact
disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in di-
ameter−smaller than standard discs.

XS18024 Z17461

EJECTING THE DISC The DVD player can be operated with the
controller buttons directly.
Push the “ ” button.
1. “DVD” button
2. “SET UP” button
3. “MENU” button
4. “AUDIO” button
5. “SUB TITLE” button
6. “ANGLE” button
7. “SIZE” button
8. “SEARCH” button
9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “ ”, “ ”, “ ” and “ ” buttons

313
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The player can also be operated with the

switches on the screen.
To operate the switches on the screen,
select the switch by the joystick and push
the “ENT” button. You cannot select the
switches on the screen by touching them
Z17456 directly. Z17462
When the switch is selected by the joys-
tick, the outline of the switch changes to
blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the
switch will be highlighted in green.

Controller Controller

XS18025 XS18026

DVD player unit DVD player unit

314
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES

ON AND OFF
To turn on the operation switches, push
the “OPTION” button on the controller.

Z18008 Z17402

Top page (DVD video operation switch) Top page (video CD)

Z17401 Z18009

Second page (DVD video operation Second page (video CD)

switch)
315
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

There are operation switches on the “Page

1” and “Page 2” screens.
To change the screen, push the “Page 1”
or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

Z17404 Z18010

On the screen
If “ ” appears on the screen when
you select a switch, it indicates that
the switch cannot work.

Z17462

Controller

316
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—DVD player operation

NOTE: The playback condition of some
DVD video discs may be determined by CAUTION
the DVD video software producer. This
DVD player plays discs as the software Conversational speech on some DVDs
producer intended. Therefore, some is recorded at a low volume to em-
functions may not work properly. Be phasize the impact of sound effects.

XS18026 sure to read the instruction manual for

the DVD video disc separately provided.
If you adjust the volume assuming
that the conversations represent the
For detailed information about DVD maximum volume level available for
video discs, see “—DVD video disc the DVD, you may be startled by
information” on page 337 in this louder sound effects or when you
Section. change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant
Precautions for DVD video discs
impact on the human body or pose a
DVD player unit When recording on a DVD video, video driving hazard. Keep this in mind
CD or audio tracks may not record in when you adjust the volume.
To turn off the switches on the screen, some cases while the menu is displayed.
push the “OPTION” button on the control- As audio will not play in this case, verify
ler once again or push the “Hide Buttons” that the video tracks are playing and then
on the screen. activate playback.
The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while playing
back certain DVD video discs.

317
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE

DISC ON OR OFF
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch
on the screen. You can also turn on the
menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or
“TOP MENU” button on the controller. Z18012
For the operation of the menu screen, see
the separate manual for the DVD disc.

Z18011 You can select the menu for the disc by

the joystick and the “ENT” button on the
controller.

318
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

OPERATING THE “ ”, “ ”, “ ”
AND “ ” SWITCHES/BUTTONS
“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/but-
ton to pause the disc or to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
“ ” switch/button: This switch/button
stops a screen when the DVD player is
operated.
“ ” and “ ” switches/buttons: Push
and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch/button
to fast forward or reverse. When you re-

Z18013 lease the switch/button, the DVD player

will resume playing. Z17409
Push the “ ” switch/button while paus-
ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion
video replay.

319
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED SELECTING THE TITLE

SCREEN To display the searching title screen, push
To skip to the predetermined screen, push the “Search” switch on the screen. You
the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts can also display the screen by pushing
playing from the beginning of the predeter- the “SEARCH” button on the controller.
mined screen.
For further details of the predetermined
screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.

Z17410

320
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,
and then the changing subtitle language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”
button on the controller.
Z17411

Select the title number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button to
Z17413
enter the number. The player starts play-
ing disc for that title number. The selected
title number will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.

321
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen
and then the changing audio language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button
on the controller.
Z17414

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,

another language stored on the disc is se-
Z17415
lected.
To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide
Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected subtitle language will appear
on the screen.

322
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,
and then the changing angle screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the
controller.
Z17416

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,

another language stored on the disc is se-
Z17417
lected.
To turn off the audio language screen,
push the “Hide Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected audio language will appear
on the screen.

323
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,
and then the initial setting screen will ap-
pear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-
troller. You can change the initial setting.
Z17413 After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

The angle can be selected for discs that

are multi−angle compatible when the “ ”
Z17419
mark appears on the screen. Each time
you push the “Angle” switch, the angle
changes. The angle number which you
can select will appear on the screen.
To turn off the screen, push the “Hide
Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

324
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Z18019
Z18017 Z18018

Setup Menu screen

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE To select an audio language, use the joys-
Push the “Audio Language” switch on the tick to enter the appropriate 4−digit lan-
There are initial setting switches on the guage code. For details of the language
“Setup Menu” and the “Select Audio
“Setup Menu” screen. codes, see the language code list.
Lang.” screen appears.
After you change the initial setting, push If a code which is not on the list is en-
Select the language you want to hear by
the “Enter” switch. The initial setting tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the
pushing the appropriate switch on the
switch will be turned off and return to the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enter
screen.
picture previously. the code of the language you want to hear
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, again.
When the “Default” switch is pushed, all
push the “Back” switch.
menus are initialized. To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”
If you cannot find the language you want screen, push the “Back” switch.
to hear, push the “Others” switch. The
“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will ap-
pear.

325
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Z18020 Z18021 Z18022

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE To enter the code of the language you CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE
To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.” want to read, use the joystick to enter the To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,
screen, push the “Subtitle Language” appropriate 4−digit language code. For de- push the “DVD Language” switch on the
switch on the “Setup Menu” screen. tails about the language codes, see the “Setup Menu” screen.
language code list.
Select the language you want to read by Select the language you want to read on
pushing the appropriate switch on the Push the “ENT” button on the controller. If the screen.
screen. numbers which are not on the list are en-
tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, “Incorrect code” screen will appear. Enter push the “Back” switch.
push the “Back” switch. the language code you want to read If you cannot find a language you want to
If you cannot find the language you want again. read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
to read, push the “Others” switch. The To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.” DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.
“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will ap- screen, push the “Back” switch on the
pear. screen.

326
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Z18023 Z18024 Z18025

To enter the code of the language you TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER
want to read, use the joystick to enter the OFF RESTRICTIONS
appropriate 4−digit language code. For de- The angle mark can be turned on for You can restrict the play back screen by
tails about the language codes, see the discs that are multi−angle compatible. setting the viewer restrictions. You can
language code list. prevent the restriction with a password.
Each time you push the “Angle Mark”
Push the “ENT” button on the controller. If switch on the screen, the angle mark Some discs do not supply a restriction.
numbers which are not on the list are en- turns on or off alternately. To set the level of viewer restriction, push
tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup
“Incorrect code” screen will appear. Enter Menu” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”
the language code you want to read screen will appear.
again.
To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

327
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Pushing the “SIZE” button on the control-
ler causes the display modes to change
sequentially as follows:

Z18026 Z18027 Normal Wide1 Wide2

Enter the password and push the “ENT” Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller
button. The “Select Restriction Level” the level number, the stricter the age limit.
screen will appear. Push the “Back” switch to return to the
You cannot change the setting without in- “Setup Menu” screen.
putting the password. When you forget or
change the password, push the “A” side
of the joystick ten times to initialize the
password.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.

328
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

LANGUAGE CODE LIST 0125 Aymara 0610 Fiji

Code Language 0126 Azerbaijani 0615 Faroese
0514 English 0201 Bashkir 0625 Frisian
1001 Japanese 0205 Byelorussian 0701 Irish
0618 French 0207 Bulgarian 0704 Scots−Gaelic
0405 German 0208 Bihari 0712 Galician
0920 Italian 0209 Bislama 0714 Guarani
0519 Spanish 0214 Bengali 0721 Gujarati
2608 Chinese 0215 Tibetan 0801 Hausa
1412 Dutch 0218 Breton 0809 Hindi
1620 Portuguese 0301 Catalan 0818 Croatian
1922 Swedish 0315 Corsican 0821 Hungarian
1821 Russian 0319 Czech 0825 Armenian
1115 Korean 0325 Welsh 0901 Interlingua
0512 Greek 0401 Danish 0905 Interlingue
0101 Afar 0426 Bhutani 0911 Inupiak
0102 Abkhazian 0515 Esperanto 0914 Indonesian
0106 Afrikaans 0520 Estonian 0919 Icelandic
0113 Amharic 0521 Basque 0923 Hebrew
0118 Arabic 0601 Persian 1009 Yiddish
0119 Assamese 0609 Finnish 1023 Javanese

329
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1101 Georgian 1320 Maltese 1911 Slovak

1111 Kazakh 1325 Burmese 1912 Slovenian
1112 Greenlandic 1401 Nauru 1913 Samoan
1113 Cambodian 1405 Nepali 1914 Shona
1114 Kannada 1415 Norwegian 1915 Somali
1119 Kashmiri 1503 Occitan 1917 Albanian
1121 Kurdish 1513 (Afan) Oromo 1918 Serbian
1125 Kirghiz 1518 Oriya 1919 Siswati
1201 Latin 1601 Punjabi 1920 Sesotho
1214 Lingala 1612 Polish 1921 Sundanese
1215 Laothian 1619 Pashto, Pushto 1923 Swahili
1220 Lithuanian 1721 Quechua 2001 Tamil
1222 Latvian 1813 Rhaeto−Romance 2005 Telugu
1307 Malagasy 1814 Kirundi 2007 Tajik
1309 Maori 1815 Romanian 2008 Thai
1311 Macedonian 1823 Kinyarwanda 2009 Tigrinya
1312 Malayalam 1901 Sanskrit 2011 Turkmen
1314 Mongolian 1904 Sindhi 2012 Tagalog
1315 Moldavian 1907 Sangho 2014 Setswana
1318 Marathi 1908 Serbo−Croatian 2015 Tonga
1319 Malay 1909 Sinhalese 2018 Turkish

330
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

2019 Tsonga USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-
2020 Tatar
ton on the controller. The status screen
2023 Twi will appear on the screen.
2111 Ukrainian
2118 Urdu Z17464
2126 Uzbek
2209 Vietnamese
2215 Volapük
2315 Wolof
2408 Xhosa
SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK
2515 Yoruba To select the chapter/track, push the
2621 Zulu “CHAPTER/TRACK ” button or
“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button on the
controller until the number of the
chapter/track you want to select appears
on the screen.

331
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—DVD player operation

(video CD/audio CD/CD
text/MP3)

Z17489 Z17433 Z18009

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER Enter the disc menu number by using the OPERATING THE “ ”, “ ” AND
(video CD only) joystick and push the “ENT” button. The
“ ” SWITCHES (video CD only)
Push the “Select Number” switch and then player starts playing the disc from the en-
the disc menu number search screen will tered disc menu number. The entered disc “ ” switch: Push this switch to pause
appear. You can also display the screen menu number will appear on the screen. the disc or to cancel the pause and return
by pushing the “SEARCH” button on the Push the “Back” switch to return to the to normal playing.
controller. menu screen.
“ ” and “ ” switches: Push this
switch to fast forward or reverse. If you
want to return to the beginning of the cur-
rent track, release the switch.
Video CD only—
Push the “ ” switch/button while paus-
ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion
video replay.

332
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Z17435 Z17490 Z18006

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK CHANGING A MULTIPLEX
CD only) (video CD only) TRANSMISSION (video CD only)
Push the “Return” switch to turn on the Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu” Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a
menu screen for the disc. switch while the disc menu is displayed. multiplex transmission. The mode changes
For the operation of the menu screen, see The next or previous page will appear on from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back
the manual for the video CD. the screen. to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”
Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu” switch.
switch while the player is playing video.
The next or previous track will be
searched and played.

333
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

CD only) When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen ton on the controller. The control screen
and then the initial setting screen will ap- will appear on the screen.
pear. You can also display the screen by CD text only—
pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-
troller. You can change the initial setting.
(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”
Z18028 The disc title and track title will appear on
the screen when pushing the “DVD” but-
on page 324 in this Section for details.) ton.
After the setting is done, the player plays Details of the specific switches, controls
from the beginning of the chapter or the and features are described below.
track. 1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RPT” switch while the track
CD Text
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the re-
peat feature, push this switch again.
2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in ran-
dom order. To turn off the random fea-

Z18029 ture, push this switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc. To
stop scanning, push this switch again.
When the player has scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-
CD MP3 ning.

334
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Screen adjustment
MP3 only— 3. “SCAN” switch You can adjust the color, contrast, tone
Folder and file names will appear on the When the “SCAN” switch is pushed, all and brightness of the screen.
screen when the “DVD” button is pushed. the files in a current folder will be Push the “DISPLAY” button on the control-
The details of the specific switches, con- scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of ler and the “Display” screen will appear.
trols, and features are described below. each file are played sequentially until The screen may turn purple to deflect the
all the files are scanned. When the sunlight. This is not a malfunction.
1. “RPT” switch switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-
When the “RPT” switch is pushed while onds, the first 10 seconds of each ini-
a track is played, the track file will be tial file of all the folders in the disk will
played repeatedly until the switch is be played sequentially until the entire
pushed again. When the switch is initial files are scanned. To stop scan-
pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the ning, push the switch again.
files in a folder will be played repeat- 4. “FLD ” switch
edly. To turn off repeat play mode,
push the switch again. When the switch is pushed, the initial
2. “RAND” switch file of the next folder will be played.

When the “RAND” switch is pushed, 5. “ FLD” switch

the files in a current folder will be When the switch is pushed, the initial
played in random order. When the file of the previous folder will be
switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec- played.
onds, all the files in the disk will be
6. “DETAIL” switch
played in random. To turn off random
play mode, push the switch again. When the switch is pushed while a
track is played, the detailed file infor-
mation of the track will be displayed.

335
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Selecting the video mode

After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”
button or “DISPLAY” button to return to
the previous screen.

Z18030 Z17478

Operate the joystick up and down to se- The audio machine connected to the input
lect Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color terminal adapter can be played in the vid-
and left and right to make adjustments. eo mode.

+ or To select the video mode, push the

− or “RED” “VIDEO” button on the controller.
“GREEN”
Brightness Darkens Brightens
Weakens Strengthens
Contrast
the contrast the contrast
Weakens Strengthens
Tone
the tone the tone
Strengthens Strengthens
Color the red the green
color color

336
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—DVD video disc information

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS Marks shown on DVD video discs: DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
This DVD player conforms to NTSC col- DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
or TV formats. DVD video discs con- that holds video. DVD video discs have
Indicates NTSC format
forming to other formats such as PAL adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-
of color TV.
or SECAM cannot be used. dards of digital compression technologies.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs The picture data is compressed by 1/40
have a region code indicating where the on average and stored. Variable rate en-
disc can be used. If the DVD video disc Indicates the number coded technology in which the volume of
is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot of audio tracks. data assigned to the picture is changed
use it in this DVD player. If you attempt depending on the picture format has also
to play an inappropriate DVD video disc been adopted. Audio data is stored using
in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” PCM and Dolby digital, which enables
Indicates the number higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-
appears on the screen. Even if the DVD
of language subtitles. ti−angle and multi−language features will
video disc does not have a region code,
in some cases you cannot use it. also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.
Indicates the number Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
of angles. what can be viewed in conformity with the
level of restrictions of the country. The
level of restrictions varies depending on
Indicates the screen the DVD video disc. Some DVD video
to be selected. discs cannot be played at all, or violent
Wide screen: 16:9 scenes are skipped or replaced with other
Standard: 4:3 scenes.

Indicates regions in Level 1: DVD video discs for children can

which this video disc be played.
can be played. Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children
ALL: all countries and G−rated movies can be played.
Number: region code

337
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—A/V input adapter

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can Manufactured under license from Dolby The rear entertainment system plays vid-
be played. Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Dolby Digital”, eos and sound when an audio−video
Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the “Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol equipment is connected to the A/V input
same scene at different angles. are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. adapter. For details, refer to the manufac-
Confidential unpublished works. turer’s instructions.
Multi−language feature: You can select E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
the language of the subtitles and audio. rights reserved.
Region codes: Region codes are provided This product incorporates copyright
on DVD players and DVD discs. If the protection technology that is protected
DVD video disc does not have the same by method claims of certain U.S. pat-
region code as the DVD player, you ents and other intellectual property
cannot play the disc on the DVD player. rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-
For region codes, see page 337. tion and other rights owners. Use of
Audio: This DVD player can play liner this copyright protection technology
PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio must be authorized by Macrovision Cor-
format DVD. Other decoded type cannot poration, and is intended for home and
be played. other limited viewing uses only unless
Title and chapter: Video and audio pro- otherwise authorized by Macrovision
grams stored on DVD video discs are di- Corporation. Reverse engineering or
vided in parts by title and chapter. disassembly is prohibited.

Title: The largest unit of the video and “dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater
audio programs stored on DVD video Systems, Inc.
discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one
album, or one audio program is assigned
as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title
comprises plural chapters.

338
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Power outlet
To use the adapter, open the cover.
The A/V input adapter is composed of 3
input adapters.
Yellow: Image input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter

XS18032 White: Audio input adapter

XS10094
NOTICE
Close the cover when the A/V input
adapter is not in use. Inserting a for-
eign object other than the appropriate
plug may cause electrical failure or
Separate seats type short circuit. Separate seats type

XS18033 XS10092

Bench seat type Bench seat type

339
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

This power outlet is designed for use as

a power supply for the audio device con- CAUTION
nected to the input terminal adapter.
D Use of the power outlet when it is
The engine switch must be in the “ON” wet with drinking water or snow
position for the power outlet to be used. may result in electrical shocks and
The maximum capacity for this power out-
let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to XS18029 is extremely dangerous. The power
outlet must be thoroughly dried be-
use an appliance that requires more than fore use.
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit D Do not allow children to use or
will activate and cut the power supply. play with the power outlet.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates D Be careful not to get any part of
within the 115 VAC/100W limits. your body caught in the power out-
let lid.
To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel. D When using electrical appliances,
strictly follow any cautions and no-
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate tices written on their labels and in
that the power outlet is ready for use. the manufacturers’ instruction
Push the main switch once again to turn manuals.
the power outlet off. When the power out- D Do not modify, disassemble or
let is not in use, make sure that the main repair the power outlet or its
switch is turned off. inverter, in any way. Doing so may
result in unexpected malfunctions
or accidents, which could cause
serious damage or injuries. Contact
a Toyota dealer for any necessary
repairs.

340
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To prevent injuries and accidents, se- D Inserting inappropriate or badly fit- z Keep the lid closed when the power
curely fix all electric appliances be- ting plugs into the power outlet. outlet is not in use. Do not insert
fore use and do not use any ap- any items other than appropriate
pliances that may do any of the fol- plugs, as this may cause electrical
lowing: NOTICE failure or short circuits.
D Distract the driver while driving, or z To prevent the battery from being z After inserting a plug, gently close
hamper safe driving. the power outlet lid. Failure to do
discharged, turn off all the vehicle’s
so may cause damage to the plug.
D Result in a fire or burn injuries due electronic equipment and accesso-
to the appliance rolling, falling or ries, such as the headlights, fog z If any electrical appliances are to
overheating while driving. lights and air conditioning, when be used while driving, securely fas-
electrical appliances that consume ten both the appliances and their
D Emit steam, while the windows of in excess of 100W are used contin- cables to prevent them from falling
the cabin are closed. uously for long periods of time. or getting caught any of the power-
Do not perform any of the following. train components.
z To prevent any damage caused by
Doing so is very dangerous and may heat, do not use any electrical ap- z Do not use plug adaptors to con-
cause unexpected accidents, such as pliances that give off intense heat nect too many plugs to the power
electric shocks. such as toasters, in any locations outlet.
D Using the power outlet for electric including the internal or external z If the power outlet is loose when an
heaters while sleeping. trim, seats and deck. electrical appliance plug is con-
D Contaminating the power outlet with z Do not use any electrical ap- nected, replace the outlet. Contact
liquid substances or mud. pliances, which are easily affected a Toyota dealer for any necessary
by vibration or heat, inside the ve- replacements.
D Handling electrical appliance plugs hicle. Vibration while driving, or the
at the power outlet with wet hands heat of the sun while parking, may
or feet. result in damage to those electrical
D Inserting foreign objects into the appliances.
power outlet.
D Using malfunctioning electric ap-
pliances.

341
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Audio/video system operating

hints
Certain electrical appliances may cause
z If the power outlet gets dirty, turn radio noise.
NOTICE
the main switch off and use a soft,
clean, dry−wet cloth to wipe it gent- To ensure correct audio system op-
ly. Do not use any cleansing materi- eration:
als, such as organic solvents, wax, z Be careful not to spill beverages
or compound cleaners, as these over the system.
may damage the power outlet or z Do not put anything other than a
cause it to malfunction. compact disc into the slot.
z Keep the power outlet free from
z Do not put anything other than a
dust and foreign materials and
DVD video, DVD audio, video CD,
clean it regularly.
dts−CD or audio CD into the DVD
player.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even if z The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
their power consumption is under 115
noise from the speakers of the sys-
VAC/100W. These appliances may not
operate properly. tem which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
D Appliances with high initial peak watt- malfunction.
age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
RADIO RECEPTION
pumps, electric tools, etc.
Usually, a problem with radio reception
D Measuring devices which process pre-
does not mean there is a problem with
cise data: medical equipment, measur-
your radio—it is just the normal result of
ing instruments, etc.
conditions outside the vehicle.
D Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sen-
sor lamps, etc.

342
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

For example, nearby buildings and terrain Station swapping—If the FM signal you ∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr
can interfere with FM reception. Power are listening to is interrupted or weak- tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
lines or telephone wires can interfere with ened, and there is another strong station dealer for details.
AM signals. And of course, radio signals nearby on the FM band, your radio may
have a limited range. The farther you are tune in the second station until the origi- NOTICE
from a station, the weaker its signal will nal signal can be picked up again.
This equipment has been tested and
be. In addition, reception conditions AM found to comply with the limits for a
change constantly as your vehicle moves.
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by class B digital device, pursuant to
Here are some common reception prob- the upper atmosphere—especially at night. Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-
lems that probably do not indicate a prob- These reflected signals can interfere with its are designed to provide reasonable
lem with your radio: those received directly from the radio sta- protection against harmful interfer-
FM tion, causing the radio station to sound ence in a residential installation. This
alternately strong and weak. equipment generates, uses and can
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25 Station interference—When a reflected sig-
not installed and used in accordance
miles). Once outside this range, you may nal and a signal received directly from a
with the instructions, may cause
notice fading and drifting, which increase radio station are very nearly the same
harmful interference to radio commu-
with the distance from the radio transmit- frequency, they can interfere with each
nications. However, there is no guar-
ter. They are often accompanied by distor- other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
antee that interference will not occur
tion. cast.
in a particular installation.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective, Static—AM is easily affected by external
making it possible for two signals to reach sources of electrical noise, such as high
your antenna at the same time. If this tension power lines, lightening, or electri-
happens, the signals will cancel each oth- cal motors. This results in static.
er out, causing a momentary flutter or XMr∗
loss of reception.
Alternation or modifications carried out
Static and fluttering—These occur when without appropriate authorization may in-
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or validate the user’s right to operate the
other large objects. Increasing the bass equipment.
level may reduce static and fluttering.

343
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

If this equipment does cause harmful PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS
interference to radio or television re-
ception, which can be determined by D Type 2 and type 3—The player is in-
turning the equipment off and on, the tended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.)
user is encouraged to try to correct discs only.
the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
D Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player and DVD XS18016
—Reorient or relocate the receiving player from working. On hot days, use
antenna. the air conditioning to cool the vehicle
interior before you use the players.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver. D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player and
—Connect the equipment into an out- DVD player skip.
let on a circuit different from that to
D If moisture gets into your compact disc Compact disc player
which the receiver is connected.
player and DVD player, the players D Use only compact discs marked as
—Consult the dealer or an experi- may not play even though they appear shown above. The following products
enced radio/TV technician for help. to be working. Remove the disc from may not be playable on your compact
the player and wait until it dries. disc player.
SACD
CAUTION dts−CD
Copy−protected CD
Compact disc players and DVD play- CD−ROM
ers use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation ex-
posure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the player correctly.

344
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Audio CDs

DVD video
discs

Video CDs Special shaped discs Low quality discs

DVD player
D Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your DVD player.
SACD
Copy−protected CD
CD−ROM
Z17058
DVD−R
DVD+R
DVD−RW
DVD+RW
DVD−ROM
DVD−RAM
Transparent/translucent discs Labeled discs

345
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

NOTICE
z Do not use special shaped, trans-
parent/translucent, low quality or la-
beled discs such as those shown in
the illustrations. The use of such
discs may damage the player or
changer, or it may be impossible to
eject the disc.
z This system is not designed for use Correct Wrong
of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc
because it may cause damage to
the player or changer.
D Handle the discs carefully, especially To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−
when you are inserting them. Hold free cloth that has been dampened with
them on the edge and do not bend water. Wipe in a straight line from the
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on center to the edge of the disc (not in
them, particularly on the shiny side. circles). Dry it with another soft, lint−free
D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or cloth. Do not use a conventional record
other disc damage could cause the cleaner or anti−static device.
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)
D Remove discs from the compact disc
player when you are not playing them.
Store them in their plastic cases away
from moisture, heat, and direct sun-
light.

346
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

MP3/WMA FILES D WMA files can contain a WMA tag that D The MP3/WMA player does not play
D MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA is used in the same way as an ID3 back MP3/WMA files from discs record-
(Windows Media Audio) are audio com- tag. WMA tags carry information such er using packet write data transfer
pression standards. as track title, artist name. (UDF format). Discs should be re-
D The emphasis function is available only corded using “pre−mastering” software
D The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 rather than packet−write software.
and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and when playing MP3/WMA files recorded
CD−RW discs. at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system D M3u playlists are not compatible with
can play MP3 files with sampling fre- the audio player.
The unit can play disc recordings com- quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.
patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level D MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
However, the emphasis function is not formats are not compatible with the au-
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file available for files recorded at these fre-
system. dio player.
quencies.)
D When naming an MP3 or WMA file, D The MP3 player is compatible with
D The sound quality of MP3/WMA files VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
add the appropriate file extension (.mp3 generally improves with higher bit
or .wma). rates. In order to achieve a reasonable D When playing back files recorded as
D The MP3/WMA player plays back files level of sound quality, discs recorded VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play
with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are time will not be correctly displayed if
MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise recommended. fast−forward or reverse operations are
and playback errors, use the appropri- used.
Playable bit rates
ate file extensions. MP3 files: D It is not possible to check folders that
D Multi−session compatible CDs can also MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps do not include MP3/WMA files.
be played. MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps D MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-
D MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 WMA files: els deep can be played. However, the
Tag Ver.1.0, Ver.1.1 and Ver.2.2, and Ver7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps start of playback may be delayed when
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot dis- Ver9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps using discs containing numerous levels
play disc title, track title and artist of folders. For this reason, we recom-
name in other formats. mend creating discs with no more than
two levels of folders.
D It is possible to play up to 192 folders
or 255 files on one disc.
347
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D The play order of the compact disc CD−R and CD−RW discs
with the structure shown on the left is D CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been
as follows: subject to the “finalizing process” (a
001.mp3
002.mp3 MP3 player (rear seat entertainment sys- process that allows discs to be played
tem) on a conventional CD player) cannot
Folder 1
be played.
RS18193 003.mp3
Folder 2
001.mp3 002.mp3 . . . 006.mp3
D It may not be possible to play CD−
R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music
004.mp3
MP3/WMA player (front audio system) CD recorder or a personal computer
005.mp3
001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3 because of disc characteristics,
Folder 3 scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
006.mp3 condensation, etc. on the lens of the
D MP3 player (rear seat entertainment unit.
MP3 player (rear seat entertainment sys- system)—It is possible to play up to
tem)
D It may not be possible to play discs
253 folders on one disc. recorded on a personal computer de-
D MP3/WMA player (front audio sys- pending on the application settings and
tem)—It is possible to play up to 192 the environment. Record with the cor-
folders or 255 files on one disc. rect format. (For details, contact the
001.mp3 D The order changes depending on the appropriate application manufacturers of
PC and MP3/WMA encoding software the applications.)
002.wma
Folder 1 you use. D CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged

RS18193 003.mp3 by direct exposure to sunlight, high

temperatures or other storage condi-
Folder 2
tions. The unit may be unable to play
004.mp3
some damaged discs.
005.wma
D If you insert a CD−RW disc into the
Folder 3
MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
006.mp3
more slowly than with a conventional
CD or CD−R disc.
MP3/WMA player (front audio system)
348
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot TERMS ISO 9660 format—

be played using the DDCD (Double Packet write— This is the international standard for the
Density CD) system. formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.
This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on−demand to For the ISO 9660 format, there are two
CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is levels of regulations.
written to floppy or hard discs. Level 1:
ID3 Tag— The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-
This is a method of embedding track−re- ter file names, with a 3 character file ex-
lated information in an MP3 file. This em- tension. File names must be composed of
bedded information can include the track one−byte capital letters and numbers. The
title, the artist’s name, the album title, the “_” symbol may also be included.)
music genre, the year of production, com- Level 2:
ments and other data. The contents can The file name can have up to 31 charac-
be freely edited using software with ID3 ters (including the separation mark “.” and
tag editing functions. Although the tags file extension). Each folder must contain
are restricted to the number of characters, fewer than 8 hierarchies.
the information can be viewed when the
track is played back. m3u—
WMA Tag— Playlists created using “WINAMP” software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. MP3—
WMA tags carry information such as track MP3 is an audio compression standard
title, artist name. determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organiza-
tion). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on convention-
al discs.

349
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Hands−free phone system—

—Reference
WMA— Phone Setup (see page 356) Security (see page 361)
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio D Pair phone D Set PIN
compression format developed by Micro- To use the hands−free system, you The PIN can be set or changed.
soft. It compresses files into a size small- need to register your phone in the sys-
er than that of MP3 files. The decoding D Phone book lock
tem.
formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and The phone book can be locked.
9. D Change name
D Phone book unlock
The registered phone names can be
changed. The locked phone book can be un-
locked.
D Delete
System Setup (see page 365)
The registered phone can be deleted.
D Adjust Guidance Volume
D List phone
Guidance volume can be adjusted.
The registered phone names can be
checked. D Initialize
D Select phone Phone Book (see page 365)
The registered phones can be selected. D Add Entry
D Set passkey Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.
The passkey can be changed.
D Change Name
The registered names can be changed.
D Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

350
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Some basics
D Delete Speed Dial This system supports Bluetoothr, a
The registered speed dial can be de- wireless system that allows you to
leted. make or receive calls without taking
your hands from the steering wheel and
D List names without using cables to connect the
The registered names can be checked. phone and system.
D Set Speed Dial The phone must be paired to the system
Speed dials can be set before using the hands−free feature. If
your cellular phone does not support Blue-
Redial (see page 373) toothr, this system will not function.
Callback (see page 374)
Making a phone call (see page 376) CAUTION
Receiving a phone call (see page 378)
XS18010a
While you are driving, do not use a
Talking on the phone (see page 379) cellular phone or connect the Blue-
toothr phone.

NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone in
the car. The temperature indoor may
be high and damage the phone.

351
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The system may not function in the follow- When transferring ownership of the ve-
ing conditions and places: hicle: FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A
IC ID: 1551A−BTAU01A
D The cellular phone is turned off. A lot of personal data is registered MADE IN MEXICO
D The current position is outside the when you use the hands−free system.
When transferring ownership of the ve- This device complies with Part 15 of the
communication area.
hicle, initialize the system. FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is
D The cellular phone is not connected. subject to the following two conditions:
If you initialize it, the former state will
D The cellular phone has a low battery. (1) This device may not cause harmful
never come back again. Pay much atten-
interference, and (2) this device must
D The cellular phone is hiding behind the tion when initializing the data.
accept any interference received, includ-
seat or in the glove box and console You can initialize the following data in the ing interference that may cause unde-
box. system. sired operation.
D The cellular phone touches or is cov- D Phone book data
ered with metal materials.
D Dialed numbers and received calls
This system supports the following ser- CAUTION
vice. D Speed dial
D Bluetoothr phone data Changes or modifications not ex-
D HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0.
pressly approved by the party respon-
D OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1. D Security code
sible for compliance could void the
If your cellular phone does not support user’s authority to operate the equip-
HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetoothr ment.
phone, and take OPP service individually.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

352
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Control and features

"Steering switches and microphone

NOTE: This equipment has been tested CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
and found to comply with the limits for Exposure
a Class B digital device, pursuant to This equipment complies with FCC radi-
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-
are designed to provide reasonable trolled equipment and meets the FCC
protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment
radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guide-
lines in Supplement C to OET65. This XS18011a
generates, uses and can radiate radio equipment has very low levels of RF
frequency energy and, if not installed energy that it deemed to comply without
and used in accordance with the instruc- maximum permissive exposure evalua-
tions, may cause harmful interference to tion (MPE). But it is desirable that it
radio communications. However, there is should be installed and operated with at
no guarantee that interference will not least 20 cm and more between the ra-
occur in a particular installation. If this diator and person’s body (excluding ex- Steering switches
equipment does cause harmful interfer- tremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).
ence to radio or television reception, Co−location: This transmitter must not
which can be determined by turning the be co−located or operated in conjunction
equipment off and on, the user is en- with any other antenna or transmitter.
couraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following
measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving an-
tenna. XS18012a
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help. Overhead console (Type A)

353
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

2. Talk switch
Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−
free system on and initiates the speech
command system.
Pushing and holding the talk switch ends

XS18013a the speech command system.

3. Off−hook switch
Pushing the off−hook switch turns the
hands−free system on.
When receiving a call, pushing the off−
hook switch allows you to talk on the
phone.
Overhead console (Type B)
4. On−hook switch
When the hands−free system is on, push-
1. Volume control switch ing the on−hook switch turns the hands−
To increase the volume: Push “+”. free system off.
To decrease the volume: Push “−”. 5. Microphone
The volume continues increasing or de- The microphone is used when talking on
creasing while the switch is being pushed. the phone or using the speech command
When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or system.
more, the volume automatically increases
without switch adjustment. When your
speed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), the
volume automatically returns to its original
level.

354
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"Audio unit
1. “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
Turning the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob dis-
plays the menu items, names, numbers,
etc. to be selected. To select an item,
push the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob. Due to
safety concerns, the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob does not function while the vehicle
is in motion.
2. Display
Displays such items as the reception lev-
el, a party’s name and phone number. See
“DISPLAY” described on the following
page for further details about the display.
XS18014 3. “TEXT” button
When the party’s name or phone number
is too long to be displayed, pushing and
holding the “TEXT” button displays the re-
maining characters.
4. Preset buttons
Pushing the preset button displays the
registered speed dial numbers.

355
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Phone Setup
2. Reception level display The phone setup menu includes the fol-
Displays the reception level of the radio lowing:
wave signals. This may not match the D Pair Phone
display on the cellular phone. The recep- To use the hands−free system, you need
tion level of some cellular phones may not to register your phone in the system.
be displayed.
XS18015a The number of bars is greater when the
Once you have registered it, you can
make a hands−free call. Up to 6 phones
signal received is stronger. can be registered.
3. Message display D Select Phone
Displays phone numbers, names, com- When the system connects to Bluetoothr,
ments, menu items, etc. the phone previously used is automatically
selected. Select a different phone if nec-
essary. Only the selected phone can be
DISPLAY used with the hands−free system.
1. Bluetoothr display D Change Name
Displays when a Bluetoothr connection is The registered phone names can be
made. If there is no display, the changed.
Bluetoothr connection has not been made
and communication between the phone D List Phones
and system is not possible. When using The registered phone names can be
the hands−free system, make sure that checked.
“BT” is displayed. The display is updated The following can be performed during the
in real time. name playback:
D Select phone
D Change name
D Delete

356
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Set Passkey To pair phones “The phone is paired and ready for use.
The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8 1. Push the talk switch and say “Pair Returning to the main menu.” is heard and
digit code can be input as a passkey. phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” “Paired” is displayed.

D Delete knob until “Pair Phone” is displayed The system may not function in the follow-
and push the knob. ing cases:
The registered phones can be deleted.
“Pair. Push the talk switch and say a D If 6 phones have already been regis-
To enter the phone setup menu name for the phone.” is heard. tered.
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or D If the vehicle is moving.
hands−free system on. turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until D If the system cannot communicate with
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “Record Name” is displayed, push the the phone.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until knob and say “XXX (desired phone ∗:
“Setup” is displayed and push the name)”. Passkey is a password required to reg-
knob. ister a phone to the system.
“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
“Setup. Please push the talk switch and Otherwise, say go back.” is heard. INFORMATION
say security, or phone setup.” is heard. 3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
z To use the hands−free system, you
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
need to register your phone in the
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Confirm” is displayed and push the
system. Once you have registered
“Phone Setup” is displayed and push knob.
it, you can make a hands−free call.
the knob. “XXX Ready for phone pairing. Please use Up to 6 phones can be registered.
“Phone setup. Push the talk switch and the phone to connect it to the hands−free
z For the operation of the phone, see
say pair phone, select phone, change system. The passkey for the phone is....”
the manual that comes with your
name, list phones, set passkey or delete.” is heard.
cellular phone.
is heard. After “HANDS FREE” is displayed, a pass-
z The passkey can be changed. See
“XXX (phone name) already selected.” is key∗ is displayed and “Searching.” is
page 360 for changing the passkey.
heard and “XXX (phone name)” is dis- heard.
played. 4. Input the passkey displayed on the
If no phone has been registered, the sys- screen into the phone.
tem may not function properly.

357
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To select a phone When the phone is selected by using To change a name

1. Push the talk switch and say “Select the knob: 1. Push the talk switch and say “Change
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” “XXX selected. Returning to the phone name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Select Phone” is displayed setup.” is heard. knob until “Change Name” is displayed
and push the knob. The system may not function in the follow- and push the knob.
“Select phone. Push the talk switch and ing cases: “Change name. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name or say list phones.” D If the phone is not found. say the phone name to change.” is heard.
is heard. 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
D If the system does not recognize the
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or voice command. turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until the phone name that you want to
the desired phone name is displayed change is displayed and push the
and push the knob. knob.
When the phone is selected by a voice
command:
“XXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
“XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

358
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When the phone is selected by a voice When the phone is selected by using The system may not function in the follow-
command: the knob: ing cases:
“XXX Push the talk switch and say “XXX Push the talk switch and say D If no phone has been registered.
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard D If the system does not recognize the
and “XXX” is displayed. and “XXX” is displayed. voice command.
1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or 1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or To list phones
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the “Confirm” is displayed and push the 1. Push the talk switch and say “List
knob. knob. phones”, or turn the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “List
“Push the talk switch and say a new “Push the talk switch and say a new Phones” is displayed and push the
name.” is heard. name.” is heard. knob.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “List phones. To select a name, push the
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until talk switch during the name playback.” is
“Record Name” is displayed, push the “Record Name” is displayed, push the heard.
knob and say “XXX (desired phone knob and say “XXX (desired phone
name)”. name)”. 2. Follow voice guidance instructions.
“XXX Push the talk switch and say “XXX Push the talk switch and say “Push the talk switch and say select
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is phone, change name, or delete.” is heard.
heard. heard. Select one of the following:
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or 3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the “Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob. knob.
“Name changed. Returning to the phone “Name changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard and “Changed” is dis- setup.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-
played. played.

359
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Select phone To set a passkey When using the knob:

Push the talk switch and say “Select 1. Push the talk switch and say “Set 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” passkey”, or turn the select a number. Push the
knob until “Select Phone” is displayed and “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Set “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
push the knob. Passkey” is displayed and push the 2. When the passkey is set, push the
For further details on selecting a phone, knob. “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
see page 358. “Set Passkey. The passkey is required for “Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
Change name the phone pairing process. Push the talk setup.” is heard.
switch and say a new passkey.” is heard
Push the talk switch and say “Change and passkey is displayed. The system may not function in the follow-
name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” ing cases:
knob until “Change Name” is displayed 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to D If the passkey has less than 4 digits.
and push the knob.
select a number. D If the passkey has more than 8 digits.
For further details on changing a name,
see page 358. When using a voice command:

Delete “XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, continue
Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, or adding numbers, or say go back or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until delete.” is heard and “XXXX (new
“Delete” is displayed and push the knob. passkey)” is displayed.
For further details on deleting a phone, Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
see page 361. the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
If no phone has been registered, the sys- “Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
tem may not function properly. “Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

360
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Security
To delete a phone The system may not function in the follow- The security menu includes the following:
1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, ing cases: D Set PIN (Personal Identification Num-
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob D If no phone has been registered. ber)
until “Delete” is displayed and push the D If the system does not recognize the The PIN can be set or changed.
knob. voice command. D Phone book lock
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say the
phone name to delete.” is heard. The phone book can be locked.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or When the phone book is locked, the fol-
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until lowing functions cannot be used:
the phone name you want to delete is D Dial by name and number
displayed and push the knob. D Redial
When using a voice command: D Callback
“XXX Push the talk switch and say D Speed Dial
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed. D Phone Setup
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn D PhoneBook
the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until D Set PIN
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob. D Phone book unlock
“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.” The locked phone book can be unlocked.
is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
When using the knob:
“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”
is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

361
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To enter the security menu To set a PIN When using a voice command:
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the Push the talk switch and say “Set PIN”, 1. Push the talk switch and say “XXX
hands−free system on. or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until (new PIN number)”.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “Set PIN” is displayed and push the knob. 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “There is no PIN number set. Please turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the register a PIN number. Please push the “Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob. talk switch and say a four−digit PIN knob.
“Setup. Please push the talk switch and number.” is heard. “The PIN number has been set. Returning
say security, or phone setup.” is heard. to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or is displayed.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until When using the knob:
“Security” is displayed and push the 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
knob. select a number. Push the
“Security. Push the talk switch and say “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
set PIN, phone book lock, or phone book 2. Repeat the above procedure until the
unlock.” is heard. entire four−digit number is set.
3. When the PIN is set, push the
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
4. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.

362
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the PIN is to be changed: To lock the phone book When using a voice command:
“There is a PIN number in place. Push 1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone “XXXX Push the talk switch and say
the talk switch and say the correct PIN book lock”, or turn the confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
number.” is heard and “Current PIN?” is “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Phbk and “XXXX” is displayed.
displayed. Lock” is displayed and push the knob. Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “There is a PIN number in place. Push the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
use the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to in- the talk switch and say the correct PIN “Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
put the current PIN number. number.” is heard and “PIN?” is displayed. “PIN number accepted. The phone book is
“Please push the talk switch and say a 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or now locked. Returning to the main menu.”
four−digit PIN number.” is heard. turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to is heard and “Locked” is displayed.
2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX select a number. When using the knob:
(new PIN number)”. 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
“The PIN number has been set. Returning select a number. Push the
to the security.” is heard and “Completed” “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
is displayed. 2. When the PIN number is set, push the
If the current number is not correct, the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
system may not function properly. “XXXX Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard and “Locked” is displayed.

363
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The system may not function in the follow- When using a voice command: The system may not function in the follow-
ing cases: “XXXX Push the talk switch and say ing cases:
D If the current number is not correct. confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard D If the current number is not correct.
D If the phone book has already been and “XXXX” is displayed. D If the phone book has already been
locked. Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn unlocked.
D If the PIN number does not exist. the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob. INFORMATION
To unlock the phone book
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is A shortcut to each of the following
1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone now unlocked. Returning to the main functions is available. Enter the
book unlock”, or turn the menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is dis- phone book menu, push the off−hook
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Phbk played. switch, and say either of the follow-
Unlock” is displayed and push the
When using the knob: ing:
knob.
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to z Phone book lock
“Phonebook unlock. There is PIN number
in place. Push the talk switch and say the select a number. Push the z Phone book unlock
correct PIN number.” is heard and “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
“Current PIN?” is displayed. 2. When the PIN number is set, push the
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to “XXXX Push the talk switch and say
select a number. confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is dis-
played.

364
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—System Setup —Phone Book

The system setup menu includes the fol- To initialize The phone book menu includes the follow-
lowing: 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until ing:
D Adjust Guidance Volume “Initialize” is displayed and push the D Add Entry
D Initialize knob. Phone numbers and voice tags can be
To enter the system setup menu “System initialization. This will erase all registered.
user information in the hands free system; D Change Name
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the including paired phones, phone book
hands−free system on. entries, and call history. Select confirm to The registered names can be changed.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is D Delete Entry
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until heard. The registered names can be deleted.
“Setup” is displayed and push the 2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
knob. D Delete Speed Dial
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
3. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until knob. The registered speed dial can be deleted.
“System Setup” is displayed and push “System initialization. This will erase all D List Names
the knob. user information in the hands free system; The registered names can be checked.
“System setup. Please select guidance including paired phones, phone book D Set Speed Dial
volume or initialize.” is heard. entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is Speed dials can be set.
To adjust the guidance volume
heard.
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Guidance Vol” is displayed and push 3. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the knob. “Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Guidance will be at this volume” is heard
and the present volume level is displayed. “Initialized. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard.
2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
adjust the volume and push the knob.

365
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To enter the phone book menu To add entry (a) By voice

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the The add entry includes the following: 1. Push the talk switch and say “By
hands−free system on. (a) By Voice voice”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or knob until “By Voice” is displayed and
(b) By Phone push the knob.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Phonebook” is displayed and push the (c) Call History “Voice entry. Push the talk switch and say
knob. (d) Manual Input the number.” is heard.
“Phone book. Please push the talk switch Push the talk switch and say “Add entry”, 2. Push the talk switch and say the dial
and say add entry, change name, delete or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until number that you want to register.
entry, list names set speed dial or delete “Add Entry” is displayed and push the “To store, push the talk switch and say
speed dial.” is heard. knob. confirm. Otherwise, continue adding
If the phone book is locked, the system “Add Entry. How will the number be numbers, or say go back or delete.” is
may not function properly. entered. Push the talk switch and say by heard and number is displayed.
voice, by phone, or call history.” is heard. 3. Follow voice guidance instruction.

366
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If “Confirm” is said, then input a voice Confirm (b) By Phone

tag. Push the talk switch and say “Confirm”, or 1. Push the talk switch and say “By
“Push the talk switch and say a name.” turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until phone”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
is heard. “Confirm” is displayed and push the knob. knob until “By Phone” is displayed and
1. Push the talk switch and say the name “Returning to the phone book.” is heard. push the knob.
of the dial number that you want to Speed Dial “Phone entry. Prepare to send the
register. information from the phone. When ready,
1. Push the talk switch and say “Set push the talk switch and say confirm.” is
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say speed dial”, or turn the
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Speed
heard. Dial” is displayed and push the knob. 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Set speed dial. Push the preset button to “Confirm” is displayed and push the
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until assign to XXXX” is heard.
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.
knob. 2. Push the desired preset button. “Send the information at this time.” is
“Stored. To register this as a speed dial “Preset... is now assigned. Returning to heard.
entry, push the talk switch and say set the phone book.” is heard. After the system has received the name
speed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.” is The system may not function in the follow- and phone number, “Push the talk switch
heard and “Stored” is displayed. ing cases: and say confirm. To select an alternate
3. Select one of the following: D If the phone book is full. number, say next or previous. Otherwise,
say go back.” is heard and “XXX (name)”
D Confirm D If the dial number has more than 24 and “XXX (number)” is displayed.
D Speed Dial digits.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions,
push the talk switch and say “Confirm”,
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
until the dial number that you want to
register is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 366.
367
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(c) Call History Outgoing (d) Manual Input

1. Push the talk switch and say “Call 1. Push the talk switch and say 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
history”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” “Outgoing”, or turn the “Manual Input” is displayed and push
knob until “Call history” is displayed “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until the knob.
and push the knob. “Outgoing” is displayed and push the 2. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to
“Call history. Push the talk switch and say knob. select a number. Push the
incoming or outgoing.” is heard and “Call “Most recent outgoing call was XXXX” is “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob to set.
History” is displayed. heard and the outgoing number is dis- 3. When the number is set, push the
2. Select one of the following: played. “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob.
D Incoming “Push the talk switch and say confirm. Next, input a voice tag.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is
D Outgoing heard. For further details, see page 366.
Incoming
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or INFORMATION
1. Push the talk switch and say turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Incoming”, or turn the the dial number that you want to regis- z The system can recognize single
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until ter is displayed and push the knob. digits from zero to nine # (pound),
“Incoming” is displayed and push the ∗ (star), and + (plus). Numbers that
Next, input a voice tag.
knob. are ten or greater are not recog-
For further details, see 366. nized.
“Most recent incoming call was XXXX” is
heard and the incoming number is dis- z To speed up input, it is a good idea
played. to group all digits into a continuous
“Push the talk switch and say confirm. string. However, you can enter each
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is digit individually or group digits to-
heard. gether in preferred string lengths.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or The display corresponding to each op-
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until eration appears on the screen as fol-
the dial number that you want to regis- lows:
ter is displayed and push the knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 366.
368
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To list names
Input operation— Display: “995”
The voice tags can be edited during the
You say: “Nine, nine, five” Repeating the above operation deletes name playback.
Voice output: “995 to store push the the last digits in reverse order of in-
put. 1. Push the talk switch and say “List
talk switch and say confirm. names”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
Otherwise, continue adding numbers, Delete operation— knob until “List Names” is displayed
or say go back, or delete.” You say: “Delete” and push the knob.
Display: “995” Voice output: “Deleted. Push the talk “List names. To select a name, push the
You say: “Seven, three, four” switch and say the number.” talk switch during the name playback.” is
Voice output: “734 to store push the Display: “Delete” heard.
talk switch and say confirm. Other- The display will return to the initial 2. Follow voice guidance instructions.
wise, continue adding numbers, or screen that allows a number to be “XXXX selected.” is heard and “Selected”
say go back, or delete.” input. is displayed.
Display: “995734” If you push the off−hook switch during the
Repeat the above procedure until the name playback, you can dial the number
entire number that you want to regis- of the selected name.
ter is input.
Go back operation—
You say: “Go back”
Voice output: “Go back. The last
numbers said have been removed.
Push the talk switch and say the
number.”

369
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Editing the voice tags Delete Entry To delete entry

The following can be performed: Push the talk switch and say “Delete 1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete
D Dial entry”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” entry”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL”
knob until “Delete Entry” is displayed and knob until “Delete Entry” is displayed
D Change Name push the knob. and push the knob.
D Delete Entry For further details, see page 370. “Delete entry. Push the talk switch and
D Speed Dial Speed dial say the name to delete.” is heard.
“Push the talk switch and say dial, change Push the talk switch and say “Set speed 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
name, delete entry, or set speed dial.” is dial”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
heard and “Selected” is displayed. until “Speed Dial” is displayed and push the name that you want to delete is
Dial the knob. displayed and push the knob.

Push the talk switch and say “Dial”, or For further details, see page 372. When using a voice command:
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “XXXX Push the talk switch and say
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob. confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
Change Name and “XXXX” is displayed.

Push the talk switch and say “Change Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
knob until “Change Name” is displayed “Confirm” is displayed and push knob.
and push the knob. “Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is
For further details, see page 371. heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
When using the knob:
“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is
heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
The system may not function is the follow-
ing cases:
D If no name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.
370
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To delete speed dial To change name When using a voice command:

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete 1. Push the talk switch and say “Change “XXXX Push the talk switch and say
speed dial”, or turn the name”, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
“AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Del Spd knob until “Change Name” is displayed and “XXXX” is displayed.
Dial” is displayed and push the knob. and push the knob. 1. Follow voice guidance instruction, or
“Delete speed dial. Push the preset button “Change name Push the talk switch and turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
to delete from speed dial.” is heard. say the name to change” is heard. “Confirm” is displayed and push the
2. Select the preset button that you want 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or knob.
to delete. turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Push the talk switch and say a new
“To delete preset... push the talk switch the dial number that you want to name.” is heard.
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” change is displayed and push the 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
is heard. knob. turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “Record Name” is displayed, push the
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until knob and say “XXX (new name)”.
“Confirm” is displayed and push the “XXXX Push the talk switch and say
knob. confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
“Deleted.” is heard and “Deleted” is dis- heard.
played. 3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
“Returning to the phone book.” is heard turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
The system may not function in the follow- knob.
ing cases:
“Name changed. Returning to the phone
D If not speed dial has been registered. book.” is heard and “Changed” is dis-
D If the preset button has not been as- played.
signed.

371
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When using the knob: To set speed dial When using a voice command:
“Push the talk switch and say a new 1. Push the talk switch and say “Set “XXXX To register this as a speed dial
name.” is heard. Speed dial”, or turn the entry, push the talk switch and say
1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Speed confirm. Otherwise, push the talk switch
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until Dial” is displayed and push the knob. and say go back.” is heard and “XXXX” is
“Record Name” is displayed, push the “Set speed dial. Push the talk switch and displayed.
knob and say “XXX (new name)”. say a name.” is heard. 1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until “Confirm” is displayed and push the
heard. the dial number that you want to regis- knob.
2. Follow voice guidance instruction, or ter is displayed and push the knob. “Push and hold the preset button to as-
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until sign to XXXX” is heard.
“Confirm” is displayed and push the 2. Push the desired preset button.
knob. “preset... is now assigned. Returning to
“Name changed. Returning to the phone the phone book.” is heard.
book.” is heard and “Changed” is dis- When using the knob:
played.
“Push the preset button to assign to
The system may not function is the follow- XXXX” is heard.
ing cases:
Push and hold the desired preset button.
D If no name has been registered.
“preset... is now assigned. Returning to
D If the system does not recognize the the phone book.” is heard.
voice command.
The system may not function in the follow-
ing cases:
D If not name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

372
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Redial
The following can be performed: Dial
INFORMATION
D Dial Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
A shortcut to each of the following the number that you want to dial is dis-
D Delete
functions is available. Push the off− played and push the knob. After that, do
hook switch and talk switch, and say D Store the one of the following:
one of the following: To enter the redial D Push the off−hook switch.
z Phone book add entry 1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the D Push the talk switch and say “dial”.
z Phone book change name hands−free system on.
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
z Phone book delete entry 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or “Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
z Phone book delete speed dial Delete
“Redial” is displayed and push the
z Phone book list names knob. 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
z Phone book set speed dial “Redial. Most recent outgoing call was the dial number that you want to delete
XXXX” is heard and outgoing history is is displayed and push the knob.
displayed. 2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
“Please push the off−hook switch to dial. or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say until “Delete” is displayed and push the
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.” knob.
is heard. “Delete. Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Deleted.” is heard.

373
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Callback
Store The following can be performed:
INFORMATION
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until D Dial
the dial number that you want to regis- z Up to five outgoing calls can be
D Delete
ter is displayed and push the knob. stored in the system.
D Store
2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”, z When five outgoing calls are stored
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob in memory, the oldest outgoing call To enter the callback
until “Store” is displayed and push the is deleted to make room in memory 1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
knob. for new calls. hands−free system on.
“Store. Push the talk switch and say z Only the latest outgoing call is 2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is stored when the same telephone turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
heard. number is dialed. “Callback” is displayed and push the
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or z A shortcut to “Redial” is available. knob.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until Push the off−hook switch twice. “Callback. Most recent incoming call was
“Confirm” is displayed and push the XXXX” is heard and incoming history is
knob. displayed.
Next, input a voice tag. “Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
For further details, see page 366. Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”
The system may not function in the follow- is heard.
ing cases:
D If there is no outgoing history.
D If the phone book is locked.

374
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Dial Store
INFORMATION
Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until 1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
the number that you want to dial is dis- the dial number that you want to regis- z Up to five incoming calls can be
played and push the knob. After that, do ter is displayed and push the knob. stored in the system.
the one of the following: 2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”, z When five incoming calls are stored
D Push the off−hook switch. or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob in memory, the oldest incoming call
until “Store” is displayed and push the is deleted to make room in memory
D Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
knob. for new calls.
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob. “Store. Push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is
Delete heard.
1. Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until 3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
the dial number that you want to delete turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
is displayed and push the knob. “Confirm” is displayed and push the
2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, knob.
or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob Next, input a voice tag.
until “Delete” is displayed and push the
knob. For further details, see page 366.
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say The system may not function in the follow-
confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard. ing cases:
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or D If there is no incoming history.
turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until D If the phone book is locked.
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Deleted.” is heard.

375
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Making a phone call

If the cellular phone is not registered, this To speed dial When using a voice command:
system cannot be used. See page 356 for 1. Push the preset button where the de- “XXXX Push the off−hook switch to dial.
registering a cellular phone. Make sure sired number is set. The name or tele- Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
that “BT” is displayed and get the cellular phone number is displayed. dial, or go back.” is heard. After that, do
phone ready to use. the one of the following:
2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.
There are 3 way to make a phone call D Push the off−hook switch.
with this system. To dial by Name
1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by D Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
D Speed dial
name”. D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
A phone call can be made with a preset “Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
button in which a phone number is regis- “Dial by name. Please push the talk
tered. See page 372 for setting the preset switch and say the stored name, or say When using the knob:
buttons. list names.” is heard and “Dial by Name” It calls the number.
is displayed.
D Dial by Name The system may not function in the follow-
2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX”, ing cases:
The system dials the numbers correspond- or turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob
ing to the spoken names registered in the until the phone name that you want to D If there is no number registered in the
system. dial is displayed and push the knob. preset button.
D Dial by Number D If the system does not recognize the
The system dials to the spoken numbers. voice command.
To make a phone call
Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

376
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To dial by Number
INFORMATION INFORMATION
1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by
z The phone numbers registered in Number”. z The system can recognize single
the phone book can be retrieved. digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
“Dial by number. Please push the talk
z The system does not recognize that ∗ (star), and + (plus). Numbers that
switch and say the number.” is heard and
the voice tag is not registered in are ten or greater are not recog-
“Dial by Num” is displayed.
the registered cellular phone. For nized.
2. Push talk switch and say “XXXX”.
details about voice tags, see “To z To speed up input, it is a good idea
add entry” on page 366. “Push the off−hook switch to dial. to group all digits into a continuous
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say string. However, you can enter each
z A shortcut to “Dial by name” is
dial, go back, or delete.” is heard. digit individually or group digits to-
available. Push the talk switch and
say “Dial XXX (name you want to To dial the number, do the one of the gether in preferred string lengths.
dial)”. following: The display corresponding to each op-
D Push the off−hook switch. eration appears on the screen as fol-
lows:
D Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
Input operation—
D Turn the “AUDIO/CONTROL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob. You say: “Nine, nine, five”
If the number exceeds 24 digits, the sys- Voice output: “995 push the off−hook
tem may not function properly. switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.”
Display: “995”
You say: “Seven, three, four”
Voice output: “734 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.”

377
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Receiving a phone call

When receiving a phone call, a ring tone
Display “995734” Cancel operation— is audible and the system changes into
Repeat the above procedure until the Do either one of the following: the telephone mode.
entire number that you want to dial is z Push the on−hook switch at anytime When receiving a phone call, the display
input. during the operation. is as follows. The display differs depend-
Go back operation— z Push the talk switch and say ing on whether or not the vehicle is in
You say: “Go back” “Cancel” after the beep at anytime motion.
Voice output: “Go back, the last during the operation except while a When the vehicle is stopped:
numbers entered have been removed. call in connected. Number, name, or “Incoming” is displayed.
Push the talk switch and continue When the vehicle is in motion:
adding numbers otherwise say dial,
go back, or delete.” “Incoming“ is displayed.
Display: “995” Do either one of the following:
Repeating the above operation deletes D Pushing the off−hook switch allows you
the last digits in reverse order of in- to talk on the phone.
put. D Pushing the on−hook switch refuses
Delete operation— the call.
You say: “Delete” To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”
on the steering volume controls. Volume
Voice output: “Deleted. The entire adjustment cannot be done using the au-
number to dial has been deleted. dio system.
Please push the talk switch and say
the number.” Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steering
volume controls mutes the ring.
Display: “Dial by Num”
When receiving an international phone
The display will return to the initial call, the name of the party may not be
screen that allows a number to be displayed correctly depending on the cellu-
input. lar phone.

378
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Talking on the phone

To transfer a call to the phone: While talking on the phone, the display is To transfer a call from the phone:
The received call can be transferred from as follows. The display differs depending Pushing the off−hook switch while talking
the hands−free system to the cellular on whether or not the vehicle is in motion. on the cellular phone that is connected to
phone that is connected to Bluetoothr. For When the vehicle is stopped: Bluetoothr allows you to talk hands−free.
details, refer to the user’s guide for the Number is displayed. To transfer a call to the phone:
cellular phone. When the vehicle is in motion: The call can be transferred from the
“Talking“ is displayed. hands−free system to the phone that is
When the call is finished, push the on− connected to Bluetoothr. For details, refer
hook switch. to the user’s guide for the cellular phone.
In the following situations, your voice may
not reach the party.
D Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If you talk at the same
time, the voice may not reach each
other. (It is not a malfunction.)
D Keep the volume of receiving voice
down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.
When you talk on the phone, speak
clearly towards the microphone.
D When driving on a rough road.
D When driving at high speeds.
D When the window is open.
D When the air conditioning vents face
the microphone.
D When the sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.

379
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

380
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 9
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Automatic air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Instrument panel and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

381
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Manual air conditioning system—

—Controls
1. Fan speed selector
2. “A/C” button
3. Air intake selector
4. Temperature selector (passenger side
temperature control)
5. Air flow selector
6. Temperature selector (driver side
temperature control)

XS19019

382
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Fan speed selector Temperature selector (passenger side)

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to Turn the knob to adjust the tempera-
the right to increase, to the left to de- ture—to the right to warm, to the left to
crease. cool.
Temperature selector (driver side) Independent setting—
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature— When the passenger side selector is
in a position other than the “SYNC” G18021
to the right to warm, to the left to cool.
position, the temperature only on pas-
“MAX A/C” position—Turning the tempera- senger side can be adjusted using the
ture selector knob to the “MAX A/C” posi- selector. This function is canceled
tion turns on the air conditioning and sets when the passenger side temperature
the air intake selector to RECIRCULATE selector is turned to the “SYNC” posi-
for quick cooling. tion.
Simultaneous setting— Air flow selector
When the passenger side selector is Turn the knob to select the vents used for
in the “SYNC” position, the tempera-
air flow.
tures on both driver and passenger
sides can be simultaneously adjusted 1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
using the driver side selector. This instrument panel vents and the rear
function is canceled when the passen- vents.
ger side temperature selector is 2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
turned to the right. vents, the instrument panel vents and
the rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

383
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly In this position, the air conditioning

from the floor vents and windshield turns on regardless of the “A/C button
vents. indicator comes on or goes off. This is
Turning the air flow selector to the not a malfunction.
floor/windshield position turns on the For details about air flow selector settings,
defogging/defrosting function with the see “Air flow selector settings” described
purpose of clearing the windshield. below. XS19014
In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clear the windshield quickly. If you
want to return the setting to RECIRCU-
LATE mode, press the air intake selec-
tor button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified Air intake selector
heating or cooling. This setting clears Press the button to select the air source.
the windshield more quickly.
1. Recirculate (indicator light is on)—Re-
5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
circulates the air inside the vehicle.
windshield vents.
2. Fresh (indicator light is off)—Draws
Turning the air flow selector to the outside air into the system.
windshield position turns on the defog-
ging/defrosting function and the air con- To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
ditioning with the purpose of clearing the air intake mode may change automati-
the windshield. cally to FRESH depending on the condi-
tion of the air conditioning system.
In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clear the windshield quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.

384
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If the ambient temperature drops, the air

intake mode will automatically change
from RECIRCULATE to FRESH after a few
minutes. This automatic change control
mode can be cancelled by pushing and
holding the button for longer than 2 sec-
onds. The automatic change control mode
will be reactivated if the engine switch is
turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

385
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips

D To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open long enough for the
hot air to escape. This operation allows
the air conditioning to cool the interior
more quickly.
D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
∗2 leaves or snow, for example).
D On humid days, do not blow cold air
∗2 ∗1 on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
∗1 temperature on the inside and outside

XS19026a of the windshield.

D Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate through-
∗2 ∗1 out the vehicle.
∗1 D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.
D When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
∗2 ∗1 ∗1 : Double cab and Crew Max models closing the windows, it is recommended
∗2 : Crew Max models
∗1 that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “OFF”.
:Independent setting
386
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D If following another vehicle on a dusty Heating Air conditioning

road, or driving in windy and dusty For best results, set controls to: For best results, set controls to:
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF” Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the Temperature—Towards red zone Temperature—Towards blue zone
outside passage and prevent outside Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
air and dust from entering the vehicle Air flow—FLOOR Air flow—PANEL
interior. Air conditioning—OFF Air conditioning—ON
D For quick heating, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been
warmed.
D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.
D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

387
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Defogging D On humid days, do not blow cold air

Condition: Moisture is on the inside of the on the windshield—the difference be-
windshield. tween the outside and inside tempera-
tures could make the fogging worse.
For best results, set controls to:
D When side windows fog up, turn the
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF” side vents toward the windows.
XS19013a Temperature—Towards red zone to heat;
blue zone to cool
Defrosting
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Condition: Moisture is on the outside of
Air flow—WINDSHIELD the windshield.
For best results, set controls to:
Turning the air flow selector to the wind-
shield or floor/windshield position turns on Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
the defogging function with the purpose of Temperature—Towards red zone
D For quick cooling, turn the temperature clearing the windshield. Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
selector knob to the “MAX A/C” posi- When turning the air flow selector to wind- Air flow—WINDSHIELD
tion. The air conditioning will automati- shield or floor/windshield position, air in- Turning the air flow selector to the wind-
cally turn on and the air intake selector take selector mode changes to FRESH shield or floor/windshield position turns on
will be set to RECIRCULATE. automatically to clear the windshield the defrosting function with the purpose of
Ventilation quickly. If you want to return the setting clearing the windshield.
to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-
For best results, set controls to: When turning the air flow selector to wind-
take selector button once again. However,
if the air flow selector is in the windshield shield or floor/windshield position, air in-
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
position, it is not possible to return to take selector mode changes to FRESH
Temperature—Towards blue zone
RECIRCULATE. automatically to clear the windshield
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
quickly. If you want to return the setting
Air flow—PANEL Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
to RECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-
Air conditioning—OFF heating or cooling. This setting clears the take selector button once again. However,
front view more quickly. if the air flow selector is in the windshield
position, it is not possible to return to
RECIRCULATE.

388
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.
D To heat the vehicle interior while de-
frosting the windshield, choose floor/
windshield air flow.

389
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Automatic air conditioning system

(on some Double cab and Crew Max models)—
—Controls
1. Fan speed selector
2. “AUTO” button
3. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
on—individual setting on driver and front
passenger)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
off—simultaneous setting on driver and
front passenger)
4. “A/C” button
5. Air flow selector
6. Windshield air flow button

XS19020a 7. Temperature selector

(“PASS TEMP”)
(individual setting on front passenger
side only)
8. “DUAL” button
9. Air intake selector
10. “OFF” button

390
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“AUTO” button “DUAL” button —“PASS TEMP” knob

For automatic operation of the air condi- Push the button to change the mode of This knob changes the temperature on the
tioning, press the “AUTO” button. The the temperature setting. front passenger side only.
“AUTO” button will turn on, indicating that With the indicator on—Individual temper- “OFF” button
the automatic operation mode has been ature setting for driver and front passen-
selected. Push the button to turn off the air condi-
ger tioning system.
In the automatic operation mode, the air With the indicator off—Simultaneous
conditioning selects the most suitable fan temperature setting for driver and front
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of passenger
the air conditioning according to the tem- Temperature selectors
perature.
Turn the knob to adjust the tempera-
When you press the “AUTO” button with ture—to the right to warm, to the left to
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal cool.
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling. “LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-
mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
You may use manual controls if you want adjust to maximum warming.
to select your own settings.
—“TEMP” knob
Fan speed selector
With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to knob changes the temperature on the driv-
the right to increase, to the left to de- er side only.
crease.
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
In automatic operation, you do not have knob changes the temperature on the driv-
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire er side and front passenger side simulta-
another fan speed mode. neously. This function will be cancelled
when the “PASS TEMP” knob is turned.

391
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
Windshield air flow button
When this button is pressed, air flows

XS19016a mainly from the windshield vents.

Pressing the button once again returns the
XS19015a
air flow mode to the last one used.
Pressing the windshield button turns on
the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
this time, the air conditioning turns on
regardless of the “A/C” button indicator
comes on or goes off. This is not a mal-
Air flow selector function. This is to clean up the front view Air intake selector
Turn the knob to select the vents used for more quickly. Press the button to select the air source.
air flow. For details about air flow selector settings, 1. RECIRCULATE (indicator light is on)—
In automatic operation, you do not have see “Air flow selector settings” described Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.
to select the air flow unless you desire below.
2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Draws
another air flow mode. outside air into the system.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the in- To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
strument panel vents and the rear the air intake mode may change automati-
vents. cally to FRESH depending on the condi-
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor tion of the air conditioning system.
vents, the instrument panel vents and
the rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

392
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your ve-
hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

393
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips

D To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.
D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
∗
leaves or snow, for example).
D On humid days, do not blow cold air
∗ on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside

XS19027a of windshield.
D Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate through-
∗ out the vehicle.
D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.
D When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-
∗ hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
∗: Crew Max models closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed to any set-
ting except off.
:Independent setting
394
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D If following another vehicle on a dusty Heating Air conditioning

road, or driving in windy and dusty For best results, set controls to: For best results, set controls to:
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to For automatic operation— For automatic operation—
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the Press in the “AUTO” button. Press in the “AUTO” button.
outside passage and prevent outside Temperature—To the desired Temperature—To the desired
air and dust from entering the vehicle temperature temperature
interior. Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF Air conditioning—ON
For manual operation— For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards red zone Temperature—Towards blue zone
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF Air conditioning—ON
D For quick heating, select recirculated D For quick cooling, select recirculated
air for a few minutes. To keep the air for a few minutes.
windows from fogging, select fresh af-
ter the vehicle interior has been
warmed.
D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-
fied heating.
D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

395
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Ventilation Defogging and defrosting D On humid days, do not blow cold air
For best results, set controls to: —The inside of the windshield on the windshield—the difference be-
tween the outside and inside tempera-
For automatic operation— For best results, set controls to: tures could make the fogging worse.
Press in the “AUTO” button. For automatic operation— —The outside of the windshield
Temperature—Towards low temperature Temperature—Towards high temperature For best results, set controls to:
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) to heat; low temperature
Air conditioning—OFF For automatic operation—
to cool
For manual operation— Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air flow—WINDSHIELD Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Temperature—Towards blue zone For manual operation—
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Air flow—PANEL Temperature—Towards high temperature Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Air conditioning—OFF to heat; low temperature Temperature—Towards high temperature
to cool Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield button turns on
Pressing the windshield button turns on the defroster−linked air conditioning. At
the defroster−linked air conditioning. At this time, the air conditioning turns on
this time, the air conditioning turns on regardless of the “A/C” button indicator
regardless of the “A/C” button indicator comes on or goes off. This is not a mal-
comes on or goes off. This is not a mal- function. This is to clean up the front view
function. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
more quickly.

396
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Instrument panel and rear

vents
D To heat the vehicle interior while de- If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
frosting the windshield, choose floor/ the instrument panel and rear vents. The
windshield air flow. instrument panel and rear vents may be
opened or closed as shown.

XS19024

Close Open Close Open

Side and center vents

Open

XS19023a
Close

Rear vents (Crew Max models)

397
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Checking and replacing the

Air conditioning filter— air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter may clog af-
ter long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air condi-
tioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily.
XS19017 XS19007 To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with
heavy traffic flow, such as inner city or
desert areas, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Scheduled
The air conditioning filter information The air conditioning filter is behind the Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
label is placed inside of the glove box glove box. Supplement.”)
as shown and indicates that a filter has
been installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.

398
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS19008 XS19009c XS19010a

1. Open the glove box, and slide off 2. Push in each side of the glove box 3. Remove the filter cover while push-
the damper as shown. to disconnect the claws. ing in both ends of the cover.

399
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS19011a XS19012

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet. When installing the filter in the filter
Inspect the filter on the surface. outlet, keep the arrow pointing up.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed prop-
erly in position. The use of air condi-
tioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof per-
formance and then affect air condi-
tioning performance.

400
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 1− 10
OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Accessory meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Intuitive parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Power outlets (12 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Power outlet (115 VAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Glove boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Map holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Pen holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Tissue pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Center console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Rear cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Seatback table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Deck hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Grocery bag/cargo net hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
401
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Accessory meter—
1. Outside temperature and cruise infor-
mation display or outside temperature
display
2. Clock
3. “H” button
4. “M” button
5. “INFO” button (with cruise information)
6. “SELECT RESET” button
(with cruise information)
7. “SETUP US/M” button

XS10001c

402
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Outside temperature
—Before using the accessory display (without cruise
meter information)
Operate the accessory meter with the SELECTING UNIT
engine switch on. You can select the unit between En-
When the engine switch is turned to “ON”, glish/U.S. customary system and metric
the last previously used mode displayed unit.
just before the engine switch is turned off Vehicles without multi−information dis-
will appear.
When the instrument panel lights are
play—
To select unit A (English/U.S. customary
XS10003b
turned on, the brightness of the display system) or unit B (metric unit), push the
will be reduced. “SETUP US/M” button.
The unit variations are as follows:
CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the Information Unit A Unit B

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust Average fuel The displayed temperature ranges from
the display only when the vehicle is consumption and −40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).
stopped. MPG L/100 km
Instantaneous The engine switch must be in the “ON”
fuel consumption position.
Driving range MILES km If an abnormality exists in the connection
Outside of the outside air temperature sensor,
_F _C “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) will appear on the dis-
temperature
play. If “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) appears on the
Vehicles with multi−information display— display, contact your Toyota dealer.
By changing the multi−information display There may be a case that “−−−_C”
unit, the outside temperature display on (“−−−_F”) appears momentarily when the
the accessory meter will change. (See engine switch is quickly turned to “ON”.
“Multi−information display” on page 187 in It is normal if it goes out soon.
Section 1−6 for selecting unit.)

403
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Outside temperature and

cruise information display
The outside temperature display and 1. Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE _F”
cruise information display indicates the or “OUTSIDE _C”)
following information. The outside temperature display indicates
Every time you push the “INFO” button, the outside air temperature.
the display toggles through this infor- The displayed temperature ranges from
mation. −40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).
1. Outside temperature If an abnormality exists in the connection
2. Average fuel consumption of the outside air temperature sensor,
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) will appear on the dis-
play. If “−−−_C” (“−−−_F”) appears on the
4. Driving range display, contact your Toyota dealer.
5. Display off There may be a case that “−−−_C”
The displayed values in the cruise infor- (“−−−_F”) appears momentarily when the
XS10004e mation display indicate general driving
conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
engine switch is quickly turned to the
“ON” position. It is normal if it goes out
habits and road conditions. soon.
To set the unit, push the “SETUP US/M” 2. Average fuel consumption (“AVG
button until the desired unit display ap- MPG” or “AVG L/100 km”)
pears. Average fuel consumption is calculated
When the engine switch is on, the last and displayed based on total driving
previously used mode displayed just be- distance and total fuel consumption
fore the engine switch is off will appear. with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated about ev-
ery 10 seconds.
To reset the calculation, push the
“SELECT RESET” button about 2 second.

404
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Clock
3. Instantaneous fuel consumption 4. Driving range (“RANGE MI” or
(“INST MPG” or “INST L/100 km”) “RANGE km”)
The instantaneous fuel consumption is The distance the vehicle can travel with
calculated and displayed based on dis- the remaining fuel is calculated and
tance and fuel consumption at 20 revo- displayed based on the quantity of re-
lutions of the engine. maining fuel and past fuel consumption.
The displayed value is updated for a short The driving range display indicates the XS10002
time. approximate distance that you can drive
An accurate figure may not be shown if until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is
the vehicle is driving down a long slope, different from the actual distance traveled.
and engine brake is applied. (The display The displayed value is updated every time
will indicate the extremely low fuel con- the fuel equivalent for 1 mile or 1 km is
sumption.) consumed.
Type A (with cruise information)
When the vehicle is stopped with the en- Every time you refuel the vehicle, the cal-
gine running, “−−, −MPG” will be shown culation is reset.
on the display. The actual driving range varies with driv-
The calculation is reset when the engine ing habits and road conditions. If fuel effi-
switch is turned off. ciency is good, the driving range will be
longer than indicated. If fuel efficiency is
poor, the driving range will be shorter than
indicated.
If the low fuel level warning light comes
XS10074
on, refuel the vehicle even if the display
indicates that the vehicle can be driven
further.

Type B (without cruise information)

405
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Intuitive parking assist

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button. The intuitive parking assist is designed
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button. to inform you of the approximate dis-
Vehicles with cruise information only— tance between your vehicle and an ob-
For quicker adjustment of the clock, hold struction by indicator and buzzer when
down “M” or “H” button continuously. This parking the vehicle. This system uses
allows faster advancement of the minutes sensors to detect obstructions.
and hours while setting. This system works when the engine
The engine switch must be in the “ACC” switch is in the “ON” position and the
or “ON” position. transmission is not in the “P” position.
If the electrical power source has been Rear and rear corner sensors work only
disconnected from the clock, the time dis- when the transmission is in the “R” posi-
play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one tion.
o’clock). Front corner sensors works when:
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indi-
XS10061a D Transmission is in the “R” position.
D Transmission is not in the “P” or “R”
cation will be reduced. position and vehicle speed is approxi-
mate 10 km/h (6 mph) or less.

1: Rear sensors
2: Rear corner sensors
3: Front corner sensors
406
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

In the following cases, the buzzer will

sound several times and the indicator Rear sensors
will stay on to indicate that the system
is not working properly.
D When the temperature is extremely low.

XS10062a D When any of the sensors are malfunc-

tion.
If the indicator is continuously on, have
your Toyota dealer check the system. Rear corner sensors
If the indicator remains blinking but
you do not hear the buzzer sound,
clean the sensors with soft cloth.

To turn on: Push the switch.

The indicator comes on and the buzzer
XS10064a
will sound.
To turn off: Push the switch again.
Front corner sensors

407
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

This system is designed to inform you of Front corner sensors D When an obstacle is detected within
the approximate distance between your approximately 400 mm (15.7 in.) of the
vehicle and an obstacle by indicator and Distance shown as C in Indicator and front corner sensor or approximately
buzzer. mm (in.) buzzer 850 mm (33.5 in.) of the rear sensor
Rear sensors Approximately (buzzer is sounding continuously) and
Intermittent another obstacle is detected in the
600—400 (23.6—15.7)
Distance shown as A in Indicator and same way at the other end of the ve-
Approximately Fast hicle, the buzzer sounds 3 times inter-
mm (in.) buzzer
400—250 (15.7—9.8) intermittent mittently then sounds continuously and
Approximately
Intermittent Approximately it continues to sound approximately ev-
1800—1150 (70.9—45.7) Continuous
250 (9.8) or less ery 0.5 seconds.
Approximately Fast
1150—850 (45.7—33.5) intermittent How the buzzer sounds when obstacles
are simultaneously detected at the front
Approximately and rear of the vehicle.
Continuous
850 (33.5) or less
The buzzer sounds as described below:
Rear corner sensors D When an obstacle is detected within
Distance shown as B in Indicator and approximately 400 mm (15.7 in.) of the
mm (in.) buzzer front corner sensor or approximately
850 mm (33.5 in.) of the rear sensor
Approximately (buzzer is sounding continuously) and
Intermittent
850—520 (33.5—20.5) another obstacle is detected at the oth-
Approximately Fast er end of the vehicle, the buzzer
520—400 (20.5—15.7) intermittent sounds 7 times intermittently then
sounds continuously and it continues to
Approximately sound approximately every 1.5 sec-
Continuous
400 (15.7) or less onds.

408
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Perceptible area
CAUTION
A: Approximately 1800 mm (70.9 in.)
B: Approximately 850 mm (33.5 in.) D The intuitive parking assist is in-
C: Approximately 600 mm (23.6 in.) tended as an aid to assist you to
Perceptible area is limited as shown in park and is not a substitute for
the previous illustration. Check the area your personal judgment. Make your
around the vehicle before driving and start driving decisions based on your ob-
driving slowly. servations.
The maximum detection distance of the D Do not attach accessories or other
sensor varies depending on the size of objects to the vehicle within the
the obstacle, the sensor can detect a sensor perceptible area. Doing so
large obstacle such as a wall, up to 1800 may cause the system to malfunc-
mm (70.9 in.) away. However, the detec- tion, which might result in an acci-
XS10066b tion distance of a thin obstacle such as a
pole is less than 1800 mm (70.9 in.).
dent.
D In certain situations, the system
will not function properly and when
the vehicle approaches certain ob-
jects, the system will not detect
those objects. Therefore, always ob-
serve the area around the vehicle
and do not rely solely on the sys-
tem.

1: Front corner sensors

2: Rear corner sensors
3: Rear sensors
409
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

For vehicles sold in Canada In the following cases, the system may The system may not detect the follow-
not work properly. ing.
This ISM device complies with D When ice, snow, mud or other objects D Thin objects such as a wire or rope
Canadian ICES−001. build up on the sensor D Objects with a surface area too small
D When the vehicle is parked in extreme- to reflect ultrasonic waves such as
ly high or extremely low temperature wire gauze or fence
for a long period D Sound wave absorbing objects or mate-
D When driving on bumpy or graveled rial such as cotton or snow
roads or on grass D A person near the vehicle (depending
D When a device such as a horn from on the type of clothes worn)
another vehicle, motorcycle engine, or D Objects with a sharp edge
an air brake sound from a heavy−duty
vehicle, issues ultrasonic waves, near D Small or short objects
your vehicle D Tall objects with an upper part project-
D When attaching a two−way radio anten- ing toward the vehicle
na D Objects just under the bumper
D When rain or water splashes on the D Objects very close to your vehicle
sensor D When the bumper is damaged
D When operating the vehicle on an in- In the following cases, have your
clined surface Toyota dealer check the system.
D When a radio antenna or fender pole D When the bumper is damaged
is mounted on your vehicle
D When the indicator is continuously on
D When a towing hitch is mounted on
your vehicle
D When a towing eyelet is mounted on
your vehicle
D When the tail−gate is opened
D When the bumper is damaged
410
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Compass
The compass indicates the direction D The vehicle is in a place where the
that the vehicle is heading. In the earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
above case, it shows that the vehicle is terference by artificial magnetic fields
heading north. (underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
Displays Directions near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
XS10005a N
NE
North
Northeast
etc.).
D The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
E East magnet or a metal object on or near
SE Southeast the inside rear view mirror.)
S South
SW Southwest
D The battery has been disconnected.
W West If your vehicle is out of the set zone,
NW Northwest refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”
The direction is indicated on the inside below to set the zone number.
rear view mirror. The compass may not show the correct
If the deviation is small, the compass
direction in the following conditions:
If the engine switch was turned off with works to calibrate the direction automati-
the system on, the system will automati- D The vehicle is stopped immediately af- cally while the vehicle is in motion.
cally turn back on when the engine switch ter turning.
For additional precision or for complete
is turned on. D The compass does not adjust while the calibrating, see “CALIBRATING THE
vehicle is stopped. COMPASS” below.
Push the “ ” switch to turn the com-
D The engine switch is turned off immedi-
pass system on and off. ately after turning.
D The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

411
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS10006 XS10007a

The compass sensor is in the inside CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation

rear view mirror. calibration)
The direction display on the compass
NOTICE deviates from the true direction deter-
Do not put magnets or a metal object mined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
on or near the inside rear view mirror angle of deviation varies according to the
of the vehicle. Doing this may cause geographic position of the vehicle.
malfunction of the compass sensor. To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the “ ” switch until
the zone number appears on the display.

Then push the “ ” switch, referring to

the following map to select the number of
the zone where the vehicle is.

412
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

After calibration, leaving the system for

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8 several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while the

vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

XS10008

Zone number

413
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Perform circling calibration just after

you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, re-
placed or disconnected.
D Do not perform circling calibration of
XS10009a LS10039 the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to in-
terference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5 D During calibration, do not operate elec-
tric systems (moon roof, power win-
calibration) mph) or less. If there is not enough space
to drive in a circle, drive around the dows, etc.) as they may interfere with
Sometimes the direction display on the the calibration.
compass may not change after a turn. To block.
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above CAUTION
method, calibration is completed when the
hold the “ ” switch until “CAL” appears
direction is shown on the display. D When doing the circling calibration,
on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because be sure to secure a wide space,
If “CAL” appears on the display because of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your and watch out for people and ve-
of a drastic change in the magnetic field, vehicle to Toyota dealer. hicles in the neighborhood. Do not
perform circling calibration. violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.
D Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

414
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Cigarette lighter and ashtray

ASHTRAY
Type A—
To use the ashtray, open the lid. The
ashtray can be removed and used out-
side the vehicle.

XS10016 When finished with your cigarette, thor-

oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-
vent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid
completely.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the
front cup holder as shown in the illustra-
tion.
XS10076a Type B (bench seats)
Type B—
CIGARETTE LIGHTER To use the ashtray, pull it out.
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in. When finished with your cigarette, thor-
After it finishes heating up, it automati- oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-
cally pops out ready for use. vent other cigarette butts from catching
If the engine is not running, the engine fire. After using the ashtray, push it back
switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” posi- completely.
tion to use the lighter. To remove the ashtray, press down on the
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed lock spring plate and pull out.
in.
Use a Toyota genuine cigarette lighter or
equivalent for replacement.

Type A (separate seats)

415
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Power outlets (12 VDC)

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always completely close
the ashtray after use.
XS10033a XS10038c

Type A (instrument panel) Type C (under the seat cushion of the

front center seat)

XS10032a XS10039c

Type B (instrument panel) Type D (back of the front center seatback)

416
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-

signed for power supply for car acces-
sories.

NOTICE

XS10034 XS10093 z To prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
Type E (inside of the center console box) Type G (back of the front center seatback)
z Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an ap-
propriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
the outlet may cause electrical fail-
ure or short circuits.

XS10035a XS10095

Type F (back of the center console box) Type H (back of the center console box)

417
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Power outlet (115 VAC)

This power outlet (115 VAC) is designed
INFORMATION for use as a power supply for electric
Depending on operating time and cur- appliances in the vehicle.
rent consumption, the power outlets The engine switch must be in the “ON”
may not be used due to the electrical position for the power outlet to be used.
component protection function. Please
start engine and use the power out-
lets again after turn off the engine
XS10092 The maximum capacity for this power out-
let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
switch in this case.
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.
Type A (back of the front center seatback)

XS10094

Type B (back of the center console box)

418
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION To prevent injuries and accidents, se-

curely fix all electric appliances be-
D Use of the power outlet when it is fore use and do not use any ap-
wet with drinking water or snow pliances that may do any of the fol-
may result in electrical shocks and lowing:

XS10079 is extremely dangerous. The power

outlet must be thoroughly dried be-
D Distract the driver while driving, or
hamper safe driving.
fore use.
D Result in a fire or burn injuries due
D Do not allow children to use or to the appliance rolling, falling or
play with the power outlet. overheating while driving.
D Be careful not to get any part of D Emit steam, while the windows of
your body caught in the power out- the cabin are closed.
Main switch let lid.
Do not perform any of the following.
D When using electrical appliances, Doing so is very dangerous and may
To use the power outlet, push the main strictly follow any cautions and no- cause unexpected accidents, such as
switch on the instrument panel. tices written on their labels and in electric shocks.
the manufacturers’ instruction
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate D Using the power outlet for electric
manuals.
that the power outlet is ready for use. heaters while sleeping.
D Do not modify, disassemble or
Push the main switch once again to turn D Contaminating the power outlet with
repair the power outlet or its
the power outlet off. When the power out- liquid substances or mud.
inverter, in any way. Doing so may
let is not in use, make sure that the main
result in unexpected malfunctions D Handling electrical appliance plugs
switch is turned off.
or accidents, which could cause at the power outlet with wet hands
serious damage or injuries. Contact or feet.
a Toyota dealer for any necessary D Inserting foreign objects into the
repairs. power outlet.
D Using malfunctioning electric ap-
pliances.

419
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Inserting inappropriate or badly fit- z Keep the lid closed when the power z If the power outlet gets dirty, turn
ting plugs into the power outlet. outlet is not in use. Do not insert the main switch off and use a soft,
any items other than appropriate clean, dry−wet cloth to wipe it gent-
plugs, as this may cause electrical ly. Do not use any cleansing materi-
NOTICE failure or short circuits. als, such as organic solvents, wax,
z After inserting a plug, gently close or compound cleaners, as these
z To prevent the battery from being may damage the power outlet or
the power outlet lid. Failure to do
discharged, turn off all the vehicle’s cause it to malfunction.
so may cause damage to the plug.
electronic equipment and accesso-
z If any electrical appliances are to z Keep the power outlet free from
ries, such as the headlights, fog
be used while driving, securely fas- dust and foreign materials and
lights and air conditioning, when
ten both the appliances and their clean it regularly.
electrical appliances that consume
in excess of 100W are used contin- cables to prevent them from falling
uously for long periods of time. or getting caught any of the power- The power outlet is not designed for
train components. the following electric appliances even
z To prevent any damage caused by
z Do not use plug adaptors to con- though their power consumption is un-
heat, do not use any electrical ap-
pliances that give off intense heat nect too many plugs to the power der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
such as toasters, in any locations outlet. may not operate properly.
including the internal or external z If the power outlet is loose when an D Appliances with high initial peak watt-
trim, seats and deck. electrical appliance plug is con- age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
z Do not use any electrical ap- nected, replace the outlet. Contact compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pliances, which are easily affected a Toyota dealer for any necessary pumps, electric tools, etc.
by vibration or heat, inside the ve- replacements. D Measuring devices which process pre-
hicle. Vibration while driving, or the cise data: medical equipment, measur-
heat of the sun while parking, may ing instruments, etc.
result in damage to those electrical
appliances.
D Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sen-
sor lamps, etc.

420
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Glove boxes
Certain electrical appliances may cause Upper glove box—
radio noise. To open the glove box, push the button.
Lower glove box—
Open by pulling the lever.
Lock by inserting the master key and turn-
XS10020a ing it clockwise.
Unlock by inserting the master key and
turning it counterclockwise.
On some models—When the tail lights are
on, glove box light will come on when the
glove box is open.
Upper glove box
CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

XS10019a NOTICE
Upper glove box: During hot weather,
the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot. Do not leave anything flam-
mable or deformable such as a light-
er, glasses, etc. inside.

Lower glove box

421
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Garage door opener

(a) Programming the HomeLinkR
Indicator light
The HomeLinkR in your vehicle has 3 HomeLinkR
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the

XS10011 HomeLinkR , install a new battery in the

hand−held transmitter prior to program- XS10012 25 to
75 mm
ming. (1 to
3 in.)
The battery side of the hand−held trans-
mitter must be pointed away from the Hand−held
garage
Buttons HomeLinkR during the programming pro- transmitter
cess.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
The garage door opener ( R
in “Programming an entrance 2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured gate/Programming all devices in the ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
under license from HomeLinkR and can Canadian market”. the surface of the HomeLinkR .
be programmed to operate garage Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLinkR buttons
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, in view while programming.
you want to program.
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

422
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-

maining HomeLinkR button to program
another device.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code”

XS10013 XS10014 equipped, it is necessary to follow

steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLinkR ” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-
ing mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
3. Simultaneously press and hold the 5. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by door opener. Refer to the owner’s
hand−held garage transmitter button pressing the newly programmed button. guide supplied by the garage door
along with the selected HomeLinkR but- If programming a garage door opener, opener manufacturer for the location of
ton. check to see if the garage door opens this “training” button.
Do not release the buttons until step 4 and closes. 2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-
has been completed. If the garage door does not operate, ing mounted garage door opener motor.
4. When the indicator light on the identify if your garage transmitter is of the Following this step, you have 30 seconds
HomeLinkR changes from a slow to a “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the in which to initiate step 3 below.
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can programmed HomeLinkR button. The
3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-
release both buttons. garage door has the rolling code feature if
grammed HomeLinkR button twice. The
the indicator light (on the HomeLinkR )
garage door may open. If the door
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2
does open, the programming process is
seconds. If your garage transmitter is the
complete. If the door does not open,
“Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
press and release the button a third
heading “Programming a rolling code
time. This third press and release will
system”.
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
423
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The ceiling mounted garage door opener 6. Test the operation of the HomeLinkR by
motor should now recognize the pressing the newly programmed button.
HomeLinkR unit and be able activate the Check to see if the gate/device oper-
garage door up/down. ates correctly.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re- 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-
maining HomeLinkR button to program maining HomeLinkR button to program
another rolling code system. another device. XS10015
Programming an entrance gate/Program- Programming other devices
ming all devices in the Canadian market To program other devices such as home
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLinkR but- security systems, home door locks or
tons you want to program. lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
2. Place your hand−held gate/device dealer for assistance.
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) Reprogramming a button
away from the surface of the (c) Erasing the entire HomeLinkR
Individual HomeLinkR buttons cannot be memory (all three programs)
HomeLinkR . erased. However, to reprogram a single
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLinkR button, follow the procedure “Programming To erase all previously programmed codes
in view while programming. the HomeLinkR ”. at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
3. Press and hold the selected (b) Operating the HomeLinkR indicator light flashes.
HomeLinkR button. To operate the HomeLinkR , press the If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) appropriate HomeLinkR button to activate the programs stored in the HomeLinkR
the hand−held gate/device transmitter the programmed device. The HomeLinkR memory.
button every two seconds until step 5 indicator light should come on. The
is complete. HomeLinkR continues to send the signal For additional programming assistance
for up to 20 seconds as long as the with your HomeLinkR Universal
5. When the indicator light on the Home- Transceiver call the:
LinkR changes from a slow to a rapid button is pressed.
flash after 20 seconds, you can release D Toyota Customer Experience Center at
both buttons. 1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)
D Toyota Canada Customer Interaction
Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)
424
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Auxiliary boxes
Refer toHomeLinkR
on the internet at: To use the auxiliary boxes, open the
WWW.HOMELINK.COM This device complies with Part 15 of the lids as shown in the following illustra-
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC tions.
CAUTION Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device CAUTION
D When programming the HomeLinkR may not cause harmful interference, and
Universal Transceiver, you may be (2) this device must accept any interfer- D To reduce the chance of injury in
operating a garage door or other ence received, including interference case of an accident or a sudden
device. Make sure people and ob- that may cause undesired operation. stop, always keep the auxiliary box
jects are out of the way of the ga- WARNING: This transmitter has been closed while driving.
rage door or other device to pre- tested and complies with FCC and IC D Type A only—As these holders are
vent potential harm or damage. rules. Changes or modifications not designed for holding a light object
D Do not use this HomeLinkR Univer- expressly approved by the party re- such as an eyeglass, do not place
sal Transceiver with any garage sponsible for compliance could void any heavy objects in them. Heavy
door opener that lacks the safety the user’s authority to operate the objects may cause the holder to
stop and reverse feature as re- device. open and contents to fly out result-
quired by federal safety standards. ing in injuries.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door open- NOTICE
er which cannot detect an object
Type A only—During hot weather, the
(signaling the door to stop and re-
interior of the vehicle becomes very
verse), does not meet current feder-
hot. Do not leave anything flammable
al safety standards. Using a garage
or deformable such as a lighter,
door opener without these features
glasses, etc. inside.
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

425
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS10088 XS10040b XS10049b

Type A (overhead console) Type C (under the seat cushion of the Type E (back of the front center seatback)
front center seat)

XS10029b XS10041a

Type B (front door) Type D (back of the front center seatback)

426
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Sunglass holder Card holder

NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the
vehicle becomes very hot. Do not
leave anything flammable or deform-
able such as a lighter, glasses, etc.
XS12021b inside. XS10022a

Type A (overhead console)

To use the holder, open the lid as shown
in the illustration.

CAUTION

D To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the holder closed
while driving. XS10057b
D As this holder is designed for hold-
ing a light object such as an eye-
glass, do not place any heavy ob-
jects in them. Heavy objects may
cause the holder to open and con-
tents to fly out resulting in injuries.
Type B (overhead console)

427
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

The card holder is designed for holding

cards, tickets, etc.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box, con-
sole box or holder box closed while
driving.

XS10082a XS10083a

Type C (back of the front center seatback) Type D (center console box)

428
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Map holder

Remove the lid.

Stow the lid

XS10084a XS10085a XS10043a

Type A (back of the front center seatback) Type B (center console box) Type C (center console)

429
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Pen holder
The map holder is designed for holding The pen holder is designed for holding
maps, magazines, etc. pens, pencils, etc.
Type C—
CAUTION
Remove the lid and stow it as shown in
the illustration. Type B only—To reduce the chance of

CAUTION XS10050 injury in case of an accident or a

sudden stop, always keep the console
box closed while driving.
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary or console
box closed while driving.

Type A (back of the front center seatback)

XS10052

Type B (inside of the center console box)

430
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tissue pocket
The console box is equipped with a
tissue pocket on the inside of the auxil-
iary or console box lid.
To use the tissue pocket:
1. Pull up the auxiliary or console box lid
while pushing the lock release lever.
2. Place a tissue pack in the pocket.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary or console
XS10045 XS10046 box lid closed while driving.

Type A (back of the front center seatback) Type B (center console box)

431
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Center console box

Outside—
Outside—
To open or slide the console box lid, pull
up on the lock release lever.
Inside—
The tray slides forward or backward. The
tray and box can be removed.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

XS10075
Inside—
Box
XS10055
Tray

Tray

432
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Front cup holders

Remove the tray and box as shown in the
illustration.
Hanging file folders can be hung on the
hooks when the tray and box are re-
moved.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance on injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

XS10056a XS10086a

hooks

Box Type A (center console)

433
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Rear cup holders

(Double cab models)
The cup holders are designed for hold-
ing cups or drink−cans securely.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

XS10026c XS10025a cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly in-
jured people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.

Type B (front center seat) Type A (back of the center console box)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.
Type A only—
Cup holder is detachable. Replace it in its
original position when using the cup hold-
er. The drink will not be held securely.

CAUTION XS10027a
Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly in-
jure people in the vehicle during sud-
den braking or in an accident. Type B (back of the front center seatback)

434
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Rear cup holders

(Crew Max models) Bottle holders

XS10097 XS10023 XS10031

Rear center seat Type A (instrument panel) Type C (rear door)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.
To use the holder, pull down the rear arm-
rest as shown in the illustration.

XS10030 XS10098
CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly in-
jured people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.
Type B (front door) type D (rear door)

435
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Storage box (on some

Double cab models)
The bottle holders are designed to hold
bottles securely. CAUTION
Type A only— To reduce the chance of injury in
The adapter for bottle holder is detach- case of an accident or a sudden stop,
able. Replace it in its original position always keep the storage box closed
when using the bottle holder. Otherwise
the drinks will not be held securely. XS10071a and locked while driving.

CAUTION NOTICE

Do not attempt to use the holder for To prevent damage to the storage
any other purpose for which it was box, avoid putting heavy loads on the
intended. Inappropriately sized or storage box lids.
shaped objects may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly in- Before using the box, lift up the rear
jure people in the vehicle during a seats. (For detailed information, see
sudden braking or an accident. “—Raising rear seat cushion (Double
cab models)” on page 61 in Section
1−3.)
NOTICE To open the storage box, turn the
knobs “OPEN” direction indicated by
Do not put a cup or open bottle in
the arrow and open the lid as shown in
the bottle holder because the con-
the illustration.
tents may spill when the door opens
or closes. The storage box can be removed. For
detailed information, see “—Removing the
storage box” on page 437 in this Section.

436
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Seatback table (Regular cab

—Removing the storage box models)
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the seat, avoid
putting heavy loads on the temporary
table.

XS10087 XS13006

To remove the storage box: You should use the front passenger’s
1. Remove the storage box lids. seatback as a temporary table only when
the vehicle is stopped.
2. Remove the knobs by turning them
counterclockwise. To use the seatback table, fold the seat-
back down. (For detailed information, see
3. Remove the storage box. “—Folding front passenger’s seat” on page
54 in Section 1−3.)

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury:

D Do not set up the seatback table
while the vehicle is moving.
D Do not sit on the seatback table.

437
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Grocery bag/cargo net hooks

Deck hooks (Crew Max models)
These hooks are designed to hang
Grocery bag hooks
things like grocery bags or cargo net.
Although the cargo net itself is not in-
cluded as original equipment, these hooks
can be used to hang the cargo net.

XS10070a NOTICE
z To prevent damage to the hooks,
avoid hanging heavy loads on them
when using them as grocery bag
hooks.
z To prevent damage to the hooks,
avoid hanging anything other than
To secure your luggage, use the deck
hooks.
XS10096 a cargo net on them when using
them as cargo net hooks.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 470
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.

Cargo net hooks

438
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Floor mat

XS10080 XS10081

Use a floor mat of the correct size.

CAUTION
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have
two holes, then they are designed for use Observe the following precautions.
with two locking clips. Attach the floor mat Failure to do so may result in the
to the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock floor mat slipping and interfering with
the clips into the holes in the vehicle the movement of the pedals during
carpet. driving, resulting in an accident.
D Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the vehicle carpet and
the correct side faces upward.
D Do not place floor mats on top of
existing mats.

439
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

440
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 2
INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Off−road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Long reach iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

441
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Off−road vehicle precautions

This vehicle has higher ground clear-
ance and narrower tread in relation to CAUTION
the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide Always observe the following precau-
variety of off−road applications. Specific tions to minimize the risk of serious
design characteristics give it a higher personal injury or damage to your ve-

XS20003 center of gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design feature
hicle:
D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
causes this type of vehicle to be more son is significantly more likely to
likely to rollover. And, it has a signifi- die than a person wearing a seat
cantly higher rollover rate than other belt. Therefore, the driver and all
types of vehicles. An advantage of the passengers should fasten their seat
higher ground clearance is a better belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
view of the road allowing you to antici- ing.
pate problems. It is not designed for D Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
cornering at the same speeds as ordi- vers, if at all possible. Failure to
nary passenger cars any more than operate this vehicle correctly may
low−slung sports cars are designed to result in loss of control or vehicle
perform satisfactorily under off−road rollover causing death or serious
conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at injury.
excessive speeds may cause rollover.
D Avoid loading any items on the roof
that will raise the vehicle’s center
of gravity.
D Always slow down in gusty cross-
winds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your ve-
hicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have much better control.

442
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Break−in period Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds. FUEL TYPE
D When driving off−road or in rugged
terrain, do not drive at excessive Your vehicle does not need an elaborate Your new vehicle must use only un-
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, break−in. But following a few simple tips leaded gasoline.
strike objects, etc. This may cause for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
loss of control or vehicle rollover to the future economy and long life of Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
causing death or serious injury. You your vehicle: The special nozzle on pumps with un-
are also risking expensive damage D Avoid full throttle acceleration when leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-
to your vehicle’s suspension and starting and driving. dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
chassis. D Avoid racing the engine. not.
D Do not drive horizontally across D Try to avoid hard stops during the first At a minimum, the gasoline you use
steep slopes. Driving straight up or 300 km (200 miles). should meet specifications of ASTM
straight down is preferred. Your ve- D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
hicle (or any similar off−road ve- D Do not drive for a long time at any in Canada.
hicle) can tip over sideways much single speed, either fast or slow.
more easily than forward or back- D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 NOTICE
ward. km (500 miles).
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its ef-
fectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

443
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

OCTANE RATING GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research ADDITIVES Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-
Octane Number 91) or higher. Toyota recommends the use of gasoline formulated gasoline that contains oxy-
Use of unleaded gasoline with an Octane that contains detergent additives to genates such as ethanol or MTBE is
Rating lower than 87 may result in engine avoid build−up of engine deposits. available in many areas.
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
engine damage. contains detergent additives to keep clean burning gasoline and appropriately blended
If your engine knocks... and/or clean intake systems. reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-
QUALITY GASOLINE oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
If you detect heavy knocking even when mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-
using the recommended fuel, or if you Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., prove air quality.
hear steady knocking while holding a Europe and Japan have developed a
steady speed on level roads, consult your specification for quality fuel named OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota dealer. World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
However, occasionally, you may notice is expected to be applied world wide. blended gasoline where the oxygenate
light knocking for a short time while accel- The WWFC consists of four categories content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
erating or driving up hills. This is normal that depend on required emission lev- MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
and there is no need for concern. els. In the U.S., category 3 or 4 has Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
been adopted. The WWFC improves air rating no lower than 87.
quality by providing for better emis- Toyota does not recommend the use of
sions in vehicle fleets, and customer gasoline containing methanol.
satisfaction through better vehicle per-
formance.

444
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Fuel pump shut off system

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
NOTICE plying fuel to the engine to minimize the
Some gasoline contain an octane en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- z Do not use gasohol other than risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). stated above. It will cause fuel sys- or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
tem damage or vehicle performance restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
Toyota does not recommend the use of off system activates, turn the engine
problems.
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con- switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start
taining MMT is used, your emission con- z If driveability problems occur (poor
it.
trol system may be adversely affected. hot starting, vaporizing, engine
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in- knock, etc.), discontinue the use.
CAUTION
strument cluster may come on. If this hap- z Take care not to spill gasohol dur-
pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser- ing refueling. Gasohol may cause Inspect the ground under the vehicle
vice. paint damage. before restarting the engine. If you
GASOLINE QUALITY find that fuel has leaked onto the
In a very few cases, you may experience FUEL TANK CAPACITY ground, the fuel system has been
driveability problems caused by the partic- 100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.) damaged and is in need of repair. In
ular gasoline that you are using. If you this case, do not restart the engine.
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

445
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Operation in foreign Three−way catalytic

countries converters
If you plan to drive your Toyota in The three−way catalytic converter is an
another country... emission control device installed in the
NOTICE

First, comply with the vehicle registration exhaust system. A large amount of unburned gases
laws. The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the flowing into the three−way catalytic
exhaust gas. converter may cause it to overheat
Second, confirm the availability of the cor-
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
CAUTION this and other damage, observe the
number).
following precautions:
D Keep people and combustible mate- z Use only unleaded gasoline.
rials away from the exhaust pipe
z Do not drive with an extremely low
while the engine is running. The
fuel level; running out of fuel could
exhaust gas is very hot.
cause the engine to misfire, creat-
D Do not idle or park your vehicle ing an excessive load on the three−
over anything that might burn easi- way catalytic converter.
ly such as grass, leaves, paper or
z Do not allow the engine to run at
rags.
idle speed for more than 20 minu-
tes.
z Avoid racing the engine.
z Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
z Do not turn off the engine switch
while the vehicle is moving.

446
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine exhaust cautions

z Keep your engine in good running CAUTION D Do not remain for a long time in a
order. Malfunctions in the engine parked vehicle with the engine run-
electrical system, electronic ignition D Exhaust gases include harmful car- ning. If it is unavoidable, however,
system/distributor ignition system bon monoxide (CO) that is colorless do so only in an unconfined area
or fuel systems could cause an ex- and odorless. Inhaling exhaust and adjust the heating or cooling
tremely high three−way catalytic gases may lead to death or a seri- system to force outside air into the
converter temperature. ous health hazard. vehicle.
z If the engine becomes difficult to D The exhaust should be checked D Keep the back window closed while
start or stalls frequently, take your occasionally. If there is a hole or driving. An open or unsealed back
vehicle in for a check−up as soon crack caused by corrosion, damage window may cause exhaust gases
as possible. Remember, your Toyota to a joint or abnormal exhaust to be drawn into the vehicle.
dealer knows your vehicle and its noise, be sure to have the vehicle D To allow proper operation of your
three−way catalytic converter sys- inspected and repaired by your vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
tem best. Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may the inlet grilles in front of the wind-
z To ensure that the three−way allow exhaust gases to enter the shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-
catalytic converter and the entire vehicle, resulting in death or a er obstructions.
emission control system operate serious health hazard.
D If the smell of exhaust is noticed
properly, your vehicle must receive D If the vehicle is in a poorly venti- inside the vehicle, open the win-
the periodic inspections required by lated area, turn the engine off. In a dows. Large amounts of exhaust in
the Toyota Maintenance Schedule. closed area, such as a garage, ex- the vehicle can cause driver drowsi-
For scheduled maintenance haust gases may collect and enter ness and an accident, resulting in
information, refer to the “Scheduled the vehicle. This may lead to death death or a serious health hazard.
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Manual Supplement”.
Toyota dealer immediately.

447
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Facts about engine oil

consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
D Do not leave the engine running in D Toyota does not recommend occu-
an area with snow build−up, or pying the rear cargo area when it Engine oil has the primary functions of
where it is snowing. If snowbanks is fitted with a slide−in camper, lubricating and cooling the inside of the
build up around the vehicle while camper shell or other type cover engine, and plays a major role in main-
the engine is running, exhaust while the engine is running. This taining the engine in proper working order.
gases may collect and enter the ve- caution applies to both driving and ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
hicle. This may lead to death or a stopped or parked situations with It is normal that an engine should con-
serious health hazard. the engine running. Particular care sume some engine oil during normal
D When taking a nap in the vehicle, should be taken to prevent exhaust engine operation. The causes of oil
always turn the engine off. Other- gases from entering camper bodies, consumption in a normal engine are as
wise, you may accidentally move trailers or other enclosures on or follows.
the shift lever or depress the accel- around your vehicle. If exhaust
fumes are detected, open all win- D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
erator pedal, which could cause an rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
accident or fire due to engine over- dows and thoroughly ventilate the
area. is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-
heating. Additionally, if the vehicle ton moves downwards in the cylinder.
is parked in a poorly ventilated High negative pressure generated when
area, exhaust gases may collect and the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
enter the vehicle, leading to death of this oil into the combustion chamber.
or a serious health hazard. This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.
D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High tem-
perature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
448
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Iridium−tipped spark plugs

[4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine]
The amount of engine oil consumed de- IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
pends on the viscosity of the oil, the CHECK
quality of the oil and the conditions the One of the most important points in prop-
vehicle is driven under. er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-
More oil is consumed by high−speed driv- gine oil at the optimum level so that oil
ing and frequent acceleration and decel- function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
eration. is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
CY20008a
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls level be checked every time you refuel
have not become conditioned. the vehicle.
When judging the amount of oil con- NOTICE
sumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge Failure to check the oil level regularly
the true level accurately. could lead to serious engine trouble Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
due to insufficient oil. spark plugs.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-
mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not For detailed information on oil level check, NOTICE
show any drop in the oil level at all, even see “Checking the engine oil level” on
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This page 548 in Section 7−2.
Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-
is because the oil is gradually becoming mance smooth driveability.
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.

449
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Long reach iridium−tipped

spark plugs [5.7 L V8
(3UR−FE) engine] Brake system
The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate CAUTION
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the D Do not pump the brake pedal if the
Long reach pedal will be harder to press, and your engine stalls. Each push on the
type stopping distance will increase. Also, the pedal uses up your reserved vacu-

XS20015 brake system warning light may come on. um.

D Even if the power assist is com-
CAUTION pletely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
Do not drive your vehicle with only a pedal hard, much harder than nor-
single brake system. Have your mal. And your braking distance will
brakes fixed immediately. increase.

Your engine is fitted with long reach BRAKE BOOSTER

iridium−tipped spark plugs.
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
NOTICE power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs. bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor- pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
mance smooth driveability. vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!
For details about the spark plug type, see
“Service specifications” on page 586 in
Section 8.

450
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov- CAUTION
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels er, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day Do not overestimate the anti−lock
during a sudden braking or braking on brake system: Although the anti−lock
slippery road surfaces. This assists in tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-
tem. brake system assists in providing ve-
providing directional stability and steer- hicle control, it is still important to
ing performance of the vehicle under You may hear a click or motor sound in
drive with all due care and maintain
these circumstances. the engine compartment for a few seconds
a moderate speed and safe distance
when the engine is started or just after
Effective way to press the ABS brake from the vehicle in front of you, be-
the vehicle begins to move. This means
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system cause there are limits to the vehicle
that the anti−lock brake system is in the
function is in action, you may feel the stability and effectiveness of steering
self−check mode, and does not indicate a
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. wheel operation even with the anti−
malfunction.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock lock brake system on.
brake system work for you, just hold the When the anti−lock brake system is ac-
If tire grip performance exceeds its
tivated, the following conditions may
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-
pump the brake in a panic stop. This during high speed driving in the rain,
tion of the system:
will result in reduced braking performan- the anti−lock brake system does not
ce. D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys- provide vehicle control.
tem operating and feel the brake pedal
The anti−lock brake system becomes op- Anti−lock brake system is not de-
pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-
erative after the vehicle has accelerated signed to shorten the stopping dis-
hicle body and steering wheel. You
to a speed in excess of approximately 10 tance: Always drive at a moderate
may also hear the motor sound in the
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the speed and maintain a safe distance
engine compartment even after the ve-
vehicle decelerates to a speed below from the vehicle in front of you.
hicle is stopped.
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph). Compared with vehicles without an
D At the end of the anti−lock brake sys- anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
tem activation, the brake pedal may may require a longer stopping dis-
move a little forward. tance in the following cases:
D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

451
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

“ABS” warning light

D Driving with tire chains installed.
The light comes on when the engine
D Driving over the steps such as the switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
joints on the road. the anti−lock brake system and the brake
D Driving on roads where the road assist system work properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,
LS20017
surface is pitted or has other differ-
ences in surface height. if either of the systems malfunctions, the
light comes on again.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
brake system detects vehicle speeds the brake system warning light is off), the
using the speed sensors for respec- following systems do not operate, but the
tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use brake system still operates conventionally.
of tires other than specified may fail D Anti−lock brake system
to detect the accurate turning speed Type A
resulting in a longer stopping dis- D Brake assist system
tance. D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Vehicle stability control system
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the

LS20018 anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels will lock up during a
sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

Type B

452
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If either of the following conditions oc- BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

curs, this indicates a malfunction some- CAUTION
When you slam the brakes on, the
where in the components monitored by brake assist system judges as an emer-
the warning light system. Contact your If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warn- gency stop and provides more powerful
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to braking for a driver who cannot hold
service the vehicle. ing light, immediately stop your ve-
hicle at a safe place and contact your down the brake pedal firmly.
D The light does not come on when the Toyota dealer. When you slam the brakes on, more pow-
engine switch is turned to the “ON” erful braking will be applied. At this time,
position, or remains on. In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the you may hear a sound in the engine
D The light comes on while you are dri- vehicle will become extremely unsta- compartment and feel the vibrations of the
ving. ble during braking. brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-
A warning light turning on briefly during function.
operation does not indicate a problem. The brake assist system becomes opera-
DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
tive after the vehicle has accelerated to
SYSTEM
a speed in excess of approximately 10
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
parking brake system. This type of brake vehicle decelerates to a speed below
system needs burnishing of the brake approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
For an explanation of this system’s warn-
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
ing light, see “Service reminder indicators
Have your Toyota dealer perform the bur- and warning buzzers” on page 197 in Sec-
nishing. tion 1−6.

453
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Brake pad wear limit

indicators Rear step bumper
The rear step bumper is for rear end
protection and easier step−up loading.

CAUTION

D Do not allow more than one person

XS20004 XS20005 to get on the rear step bumper at
a time. It is designed for only one
person.
D Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the rear step bumper.
D Do not stand on the rear step
bumper while the vehicle is moving.
Type A
The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-
tor damage can result if the pads are not XS20007
replaced when necessary.

Type B

454
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification
number —Engine number

XS20006 XS20010 LS20011

4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine

The vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
is the legal identifier for your vehicle. also on the Certification Label.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.
LS20014

4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

455
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Theft prevention labels Suspension and chassis

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-
tion labels which are approximately 47 CAUTION
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
The purpose of these labels is to reduce with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat- can cause dangerous handling charac-
ing the tracing and recovery of parts from
XS20008a stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
teristics, resulting in loss of control.

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to anoth-
er, will be impossible.

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the
The engine number is stamped on the theft prevention labels as it may vio-
engine block as shown. late certain state or federal laws.

456
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire information—
—Tire symbols
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see
“—Tire size” on page 459.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 458.
3. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “—Uniform tire
quality grading” on page 460.
4. The location of the treadwear
XS20011 indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 556.
5. Tire ply composition and mate-
rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-
ber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the
plies in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

457
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)
7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not tire conforms to applicable Federal
have a tube inside the tire and Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside
the tire and the tube maintains
the air pressure. XS20014
8. Load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure—For
details, see “Checking and
replacing tires” on page 556.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pres- This illustration indicates typical
sure to which a tire may be in- DOT and Tire Identification Number
flated. For details about recom- (TIN).
mended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 1. “DOT” symbol
591. 2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
10.Summer tire or all season 3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
tire—An all season tire has mark
“M+S” on the sidewall. The tire 4. Tire size code
not marked with “M+S” is a sum-
mer tire. For details, see “Types 5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
of tires” on page 472. code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

458
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Name of each section of

—Tire size tire

XS20012 SU21026a SU21027

This illustration indicates typical tire 1. Section width 1. Bead

size. 2. Tire height 2. Sidewall
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car, 3. Wheel diameter 3. Shoulder
T=Temporary use)
4. Tread
2. Section width (in millimeters)
5. Belt
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to
section width) 6. Inner liner
4. Tire construction code 7. Reinforcing rubber
(R=Radial, D=Diagonal) 8. Carcass
5. Wheel diameter (in inches) 9. Rim lines
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) 10.Bead wires
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one 11.Chafer
letter)

459
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Uniform tire quality grading

This information has been prepared Treadwear—The treadwear grade is Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
in accordance with regulations is- a comparative rating based on the grades, from highest to lowest, are
sued by the National Highway Traffic wear rate of the tire when tested un- AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
Safety Administration of the U.S. der controlled conditions on a speci- the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
Department of Transportation. It pro- fied government test course. For ex- ment as measured under controlled
vides the purchasers and/or pro- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear conditions on specified government
spective purchasers of Toyota ve- one and a half (1−1/2) times as well test surfaces of asphalt and con-
hicles with information on uniform on the government course as a tire crete. A tire marked C may have
tire quality grading. graded 100. The relative perfor- poor traction performance.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer mance of tires depends upon the ac- Warning: The traction grade as-
any questions you may have as you tual conditions of their use, however, signed to this tire is based on brak-
read this information. and may depart significantly from ing (straight ahead) traction tests
the norm due to variations in driving and does not include cornering (turn-
DOT quality grades—All passen- habits, service practices and differ-
ger vehicle tires must conform to ing) traction.
ences in road characteristics and cli-
Federal Safety Requirements in mate.
addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum sec-
tion width. For example: Tread-
wear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A

460
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Temperature A, B, C—The temper-

ature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standard No.109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum re-
quired by law.
Warning: The temperature grades
for this tire are established for a tire
that is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, under-
inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.

461
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
Cold tire inflation pressure or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that
condition
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
Maximum inflation pressure
is shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be re-
placed) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power win-
Accessory weight
dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maxi-
Curb weight mum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning
and additional weight optional engine
the sum of—
(a) curb weight;
Maximum loaded vehicle weight (b) accessory weight;
((c)) vehicle capacity
p y weight;
g ; and
(d) production
d ti options
ti weight
i ht
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column
Normal occupant weight
of Table 1 that follows

462
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire related term Meaning

distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
Occupant distribution
1 that follows
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
Production options weight not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
Rim
beads are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation rim diameter and width
Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s
(Total load capacity) designated seating capacity
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
Vehicle normal load on the tire its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

463
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire related term Meaning

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by
Bead
ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
Bias ply tire at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread
the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
Carcass
bears the load
Chunking the breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord the strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation the parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to
Cracking
cord material
a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the
rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is de-
CT
signed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim
flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures
Extra load tire
than the corresponding standard tire

464
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire related term Meaning

Groove the space between two adjacent tread ribs
the layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the
Innerliner
inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation the parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deep-
Intended outboard sidewall er than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on light-
Light truck (LT) tire
weight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
Maximum load rating
that tire
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
sure
Measuring rim the rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to
Open splice
cord material

465
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire related term Meaning

Outer diameter the overall diameter of an inflated new tire
the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,
Overall width
including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles,
Passenger car tire and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb.
or less
Ply a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords
Ply separation a parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
a mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other
Pneumatic tire materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction
and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
Radial ply tire
at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures
Reinforced tire
than the corresponding standard tire
the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,
Section width
excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall that portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation the parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

466
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tire related term Meaning

a tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared
to the ASTM E−1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow
traction test as described in ASTM F−1805−00, Standard Test Method for
Snow tire
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow−and Ice−Covered
Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least
one sidewall
the rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as
Test rim
appropriate for use with that tire
Tread that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Tread rib a tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indica-
Treadwear indicators(TWI)
tion of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel−holding fixture the fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

467
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Table 1– Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, num- Vehicle normal load, number of occu- Occupant distribution in a normally
ber of occupants pants loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third
11 through 15 5
seat, 1 in fourth seat
2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third
16 through 20 7
seat, 1 in fourth seat

468
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load Seating capacity: Towing capacity:
capacity, seating capacity, towing Regular cab models Towing capacity means the maxi-
capacity and cargo capacity. Follow With separate seats mum allowable gross trailer weight
the load limits shown below. Total Total 2 (trailer weight plus its cargo weight)
load capacity and seating capacity With bench seats that your vehicle is able to tow. For
are also described on the tire and Total 3 the towing capacity about your ve-
loading information label. For hicle, see “Towing capacity” on page
location of the tire and loading Double cab and Crew Max models
With separate seats 583 in Section 8.
information label, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” on page 553. Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3) Cargo capacity
With bench seats Cargo capacity may increase or de-
Total load capacity: Total 6 (Front 3, Rear 3) crease depending on the size
Total load capacity means combined Seating capacity means the maxi- (weight) and the number of occu-
weight of occupants, cargo and mum number of occupants whose pants. For details, see “Capacity
luggage. Tongue load is included estimated average weight is 68 kg and distribution” that follows.
when trailer towing. For the total (150 lb.) per person. Depending on
load capacity about your vehicle, the weight of each person, the seat- CAUTION
see “Vehicle capacity weight” on ing capacity given may exceed the
page 580 in Section 8. total load capacity. Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
NOTICE not only damage to the tires, but
Even if the number of occupants also deterioration to the steer-
are within the seating capacity, ing ability and braking ability,
do not exceed the total load ca- which may cause an accident.
pacity.

469
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions —Capacity and distribution
When stowing cargo and luggage in Cargo capacity depends on the to-
the vehicle, observe the following: D Never allow anyone to ride in tal weight of the occupants.
the rear deck. It is not de-
D Put cargo and luggage in the rear signed for passengers. They (Cargo capacity) = (Total load ca-
deck when at all possible. Be should ride in their seats with pacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
sure all items are secured in their seat belts properly fas- Steps for Determining Correct
place. tened. Otherwise, they are Load Limit—
D Be careful to keep the vehicle much more likely to suffer (1) Locate the statement “The
balanced. Locating the weight as death or serious bodily injury, combined weight of occupants
far forward as possible helps in the event of sudden braking and cargo should never exceed
maintain balance. or a collision. XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
D For better fuel economy, do not D Do not drive with objects left vehicle’s placard.
carry unneeded weight. on top of the instrument pan- (2) Determine the combined weight
el. They may interfere with the of the driver and passengers
CAUTION driver’s field of view. Or they that will be riding in your vehicle.
may move during sharp ve-
D To prevent cargo and luggage hicle acceleration or turning, (3) Subtract the combined weight of
from sliding forward during the driver and passengers from
and impair the driver’s control
braking, do not stack anything of the vehicle. In an accident XXX kg or XXX lbs.
behind the front seats higher they may injure the vehicle oc- (4) The resulting figure equals the
than the seatbacks. Keep car- cupants. available amount of cargo and
go and luggage low, as close luggage load capacity. For ex-
to the floor as possible. ample, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400–750 (5x150)=650 lbs.)
470
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(5) Determine the combined weight As shown in the above example, if

of luggage and cargo being the number of occupants increases,
loaded on the vehicle. That the cargo and luggage load equaling
weight may not safely exceed the combined weight of occupants
the available cargo and luggage who got on later must be reduced.
load capacity calculated in Step In other words, if the increase in the
4. SU21020 number of occupants causes the ex-
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a Cargo cess of the total load capacity (com-
trailer, load from your trailer will capacity bined weight of occupants plus car-
be transferred to your vehicle. go and luggage load), you have to
Total load reduce the cargo and luggage on
Consult this manual to deter-
capacity your vehicle.
mine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load ca- For details about total load capacity,
pacity of your vehicle. Example on Your Vehicle see “Vehicle load limits” on page 469
For details about trailer towing, see In case that 2 people with the com- in this Section.
“Trailer towing” on page 481 in Sec- bined weight of A kg (lb.) are riding
tion 3. in your vehicle with the total load ca- CAUTION
pacity of B kg (lb.), the available
amount of cargo and luggage load Even if the total load of occu-
capacity will be C kg (lb.) as follows: pant’s weight and the cargo
B kg (lb.) – A kg (lb.) = C kg (lb.) load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load
From this condition, if 3 more pas- unevenly. That may cause not
sengers with the combined weight of only damage to the tire but also
D kg (lb.) get on, the available cargo deterioration to the steering
and luggage load will be reduced E ability due to unbalance of the
kg (lb.) as follows: vehicle, causing an accident.
C kg (lb.) – D kg (lb.) = E kg (lb.)

471
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Types of tires
Determine what kind of tires your All season tires, however, do not
vehicle is originally equipped have adequate traction performance
with. compared with snow tires in heavy
1. Summer tires or loose snow. Also, all season tires
fall short in acceleration and han-
Summer tires are high−speed capa- dling performance compared with
bility tires best suited to highway summer tires in highway driving.
driving under dry conditions.
The details about how to distinguish
Since summer tires do not have the summer tires from all season tires
same traction performance as snow are described on page 457.
tires, summer tires are inadequate
for driving on snow−covered or icy CAUTION
roads. For driving on snow−covered
or icy roads, we recommend using D Do not mix summer and all
snow tires. If installing snow tires, season tires on your vehicle
be sure to replace all four tires. as this can cause dangerous
2. All season tires handling characteristics, re-
All season tires are designed to pro- sulting in loss of control.
vide better traction in snow and to D Do not use tires other than the
be adequate for driving in most win- manufacture’s designated
ter conditions, as well as for use all tires, and never mix tires or
year round. wheels of the sizes different
from the originals.

472
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 3
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . 495

473
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

How to start the engine—

Before starting the engine —Cranking hold function (a) Before cranking
1. Check the area around the vehicle be- Once you turn the engine switch to the 1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
fore entering it. “START” position and release it, the crank- 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, ing hold function continues to crank the sories.
seat cushion angle, head restraint engine in “ON” position until it starts.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
height and steering wheel angle. The function stops cranking the engine need to restart the engine while the
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view after about 25 seconds maximum if the vehicle is moving, put the selector le-
mirrors. engine has not started yet. When you ver in “N”. A starter safety device will
crank the engine again, wait a few sec- prevent the starter from operating if the
4. Lock all doors. onds and restart it. selector lever is in any drive position.
5. Fasten seat belts. If you hold the engine switch in “START” 4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
position, the function will keep cranking the floor until driving off.
for about 30 seconds maximum.

474
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tips for driving in various

(b) Starting the engine conditions
Before starting the engine, be sure to D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
follow the instructions in “(a) Before
NOTICE This will allow you much better control.
cranking”. z Do not crank for more than 30 se- D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-
Normal starting procedure conds at a time. This may overheat sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
the starter and wiring systems. onto high, sharp−edged objects and
The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-
tial multiport fuel injection system in your z Do not race a cold engine. other road hazards. Failure to do so
engine automatically controls the proper can lead to severe tire damage such
z If the engine becomes difficult to
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start as a tire burst.
start or stalls frequently, have the
a cold or hot engine as follows: engine checked immediately. Drive slowly when passing over bumps
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-
crank the engine by turning the engine wise, the impact could cause severe
switch to the “START” position. Release it damage to the tires and/or wheels.
when the engine starts. D When parking on a hill, turn the front
Engine should be warmed up by driving, wheels until they touch the curb so
not in idle. For warming up, drive with that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
smoothly turning engine until engine cool- parking brake, and place the transmis-
ant temperature is within normal range. sion in “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct proce-
dure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
498 in Section 4.

475
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To CAUTION D Do not drive in excess of the speed
see whether they are wet, check that limit. Even if the legal speed limit
there is no traffic near you, and then D Before driving off, make sure that permits it, do not drive over 140
press the pedal lightly. If you do not the parking brake is fully released km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
feel a normal braking force, the brakes and the brake system warning light has high−speed capability tires.
are probably wet. To dry them, drive (parking brake reminder light) is Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
the vehicle cautiously while lightly off. result in tire failure, loss of control
pressing the brake pedal with the park- D Do not leave your vehicle unat- and possible injury. Be sure to con-
ing brake applied. If they still do not tended while the engine is running. sult a tire dealer to determine
work safely, pull to the side of the road whether the tires on your vehicle
D Do not rest your foot on the brake are high−speed capability tires or
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance. pedal while driving. It can cause not before driving at such speeds.
D Four−wheel drive models—Toyota rec- dangerous overheating, needless
ommends not using four−wheel drive on wear, and poor fuel economy. D Do not continue normal driving
dry hard−surfaced roads, because four− when the brakes are wet. If they are
D To drive down a long or steep hill, wet, your vehicle will require a
wheel driving will cause unnecessary reduce your speed and downshift.
noise and wear, and poor fuel econo- longer stopping distance, and it
Remember, if you ride the brakes may pull to one side when the
my. excessively, they may overheat and brakes are applied. Also, the park-
D Four−wheel drive models—In cold tem- not work properly. ing brake will not hold the vehicle
peratures, noise may occur when driv- D Be careful when accelerating, up- securely.
ing in two−wheel drive before the trans- shifting, downshifting or braking on
fer is warmed up. Therefore, first drive a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-
in four−wheel drive until the transfer is tion or engine braking, could cause
warmed up. the vehicle to skid or spin.

476
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Driving in the rain

Driving on a slippery road surface When encountering flooded roads
CAUTION
Drive carefully when it is raining, because Do not drive on a road that has flooded
visibility will be reduced, the windows may D Sudden braking, acceleration and after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
become fogged−up, and the road will be steering when driving on a slippery serious damage to the vehicle.
slippery. road surface may cause tire slip-
D Drive carefully when it starts to rain, NOTICE
page and reduce your ability to
because the road surface will be espe- control the vehicle, resulting in an Driving on a flooded road may cause
cially slippery. accident. the engine to stall as well as cause
D Refrain from high speeds when driving D Sudden changes in engine speed, serious vehicle malfunctions such as
on an expressway in the rain, because such as sudden engine braking, shorts in electrical components and
there may be a layer of water between may cause the vehicle to skid, re- engine damage from water immersion.
the tires and the road surface, prevent- sulting in an accident. In the event that you drive on a
ing the steering and brakes from oper- flooded road and the vehicle is
D After driving through a puddle, flooded, be sure to have your Toyota
ating properly. lightly depress the brake pedal to
dealer check brake function, changes
make sure that the brakes are func-
in quantity and quality of oil and fluid
tioning properly. Wet brake pads
used for the engine, transmission,
may prevent the brakes from func-
transfer (4WD vehicles), differentials,
tioning properly. If the brakes on
etc. and lubricant condition for the
only one side are wet and not func-
propeller shaft, bearings and suspen-
tioning properly, steering control
sion joints (where possible) and the
may be affected, resulting in an ac-
function of all joints and bearings.
cident.

477
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Off−road driving precautions

When driving your vehicle off−road, please D U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of
observe the following precautions to en- Land Management D After driving through tall grass,
sure your driving enjoyment and to help mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
prevent the closure of areas to off−road CAUTION that there is no grass, bush, paper,
vehicles. rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
Always observe the following precau- trapped on the underbody. Clear off
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where any such matter from the under-
off−road vehicles are permitted to trav- tions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your ve- body. If the vehicle is used with
el. these materials trapped or adhering
hicle:
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s to the underbody, a breakdown or
permission before entering private prop- D Drive carefully when off the road. fire could occur.
erty. Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places. D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-
c. Do not enter areas that are closed. son is significantly more likely to
Honor gates, barriers and signs that re- D Do not grip the steering wheel die than a person wearing a seat
strict travel. spokes when driving off−road. A belt. Therefore, the driver and all
bad bump could jerk the wheel and passengers should fasten their seat
d. Stay on established roads. When condi- injure your hands. Keep both hands
tions are wet, driving techniques should belts whenever the vehicle is mov-
and especially your thumbs on the ing.
be changed or travel delayed to pre- outside of the rim.
vent damage to roads. D When driving off−road or in rugged
D Always check your brakes for effec- terrain, do not drive at excessive
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and tiveness immediately after driving in
Puerto Rico: speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
sand, mud, water or snow. strike objects, etc. This may cause
To obtain additional information pertaining loss of control or vehicle rollover
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult causing death or serious injury. You
the following organizations. are also risking expensive damage
D State and Local Parks and Recreation to your vehicle’s suspension and
Departments chassis.
D State Motor Vehicle Bureau
D Recreational Vehicle Clubs

478
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Winter driving tips

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-
NOTICE z Sand and mud that has accumulated tected against freezing.
in brake drums and around brake
z If driving through water, such as Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
discs may affect braking efficiency
when crossing shallow streams, or similar high quality ethylene glycol
and may damage brake system com-
first check the depth of the water based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
ponents.
and the bottom of the river bed for and non−borate coolant with long−life hy-
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid z Always perform a maintenance in- brid organic acid technology. (Coolant with
deep water. spection after each day of off−road long−life hybrid organic acid technology is
driving that has taken you through a combination of low phosphates and or-
z Take all necessary safety measures
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. ganic acids.)
to ensure that water damage to the
For scheduled maintenance in-
engine or other components does See “Checking the engine coolant level”
formation, refer to the “Scheduled
not occur. on page 551 in Section 7−2 for details of
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
z Water entering the engine air intake Manual Supplement”. coolant type selection.
will cause severe engine damage. For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
z Water entering the automatic trans- Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
mission will cause deterioration in 50% deionized water. This coolant pro-
shift quality, locking up of your vides protection down to about −35_C
transmission accompanied by vibra- (−31_F).
tion, and ultimately damage. For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
z Water can wash the grease from Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
wheel bearings, causing rusting and 45% deionized water. This coolant pro-
premature failure, and may also en- vides protection down to about −42_C
ter the differentials, transmission (−44_F).
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities. NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

479
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
NOTICE

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of Do not use engine antifreeze or any
any battery, so it must be in top shape other substitute because it may dam-
to provide enough power for winter start- age your vehicle’s paint.
ing. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
Do not use your parking brake when XS30007
there is a possibility it could freeze.
to check the level of charge.
When parking, put the transmission into
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is “P” and block the front wheels. Do not
suitable for the cold weather. use the parking brake, or snow or water
See page 549 in Section 7−2 for recom- accumulated in and around the parking
mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum- brake mechanism may freeze, making it
mer oil in your vehicle during winter hard to release. Your vehicle is not designed to be
months may cause harder starting. If you Keep ice and snow from accumulating dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
are not sure about which oil to use, call under the fenders. ground) behind a motorhome.
your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
to help. NOTICE
can make steering difficult. During bad
Keep the door locks from freezing. winter driving, stop and check under the Do not tow your vehicle with four
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the fenders occasionally. wheels on the ground. This may
locks to keep them from freezing. To open Depending on where you are driving, cause serious damage to your vehicle.
a frozen lock, try heating the key before we recommend you carry some emer-
inserting it. gency equipment.
Use a washer fluid containing an anti− Some of the things you might put in the
freeze solution. vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
This product is available at your Toyota bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow jumper cables, etc.
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
480
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a WEIGHT LIMITS
passenger−and−load−carrying vehicle. Tow- CAUTION
Before towing, make sure the gross
ing a trailer will have an adverse effect on trailer weight, gross combination
handling, performance, braking, durability To tow a trailer safely, use extreme
care and drive the vehicle in accor- weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
and driving economy (fuel consumption, weight and trailer tongue load are all
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend dance with the trailer’s characteristics
and operating conditions. within the limits.
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your safe- The vehicle stability and braking per- The gross trailer weight and tongue load
ty and the safety of others, you must not formance are affected by trailer sta- can be measured with platform scales
overload your vehicle or trailer. Ask your bility, brake setting and performance, found at a highway weighing station, build-
local Toyota dealer for further details be- and the hitch. ing supply company, trucking company,
fore towing. junk yard, etc.
Follow all the instructions described
in this section. Failure to do so could
NOTICE
cause an accident resulting in death
When towing a trailer, be sure to con- or serious injury.
sult your Toyota dealer for further in-
formation on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.

481
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Reference

Vehicle weight

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross vehicle weight.
The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue load (or the king pin
weight).

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross axle weight.
The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable gross combination weight.
The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional
equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.
Towing Capacity is the maximum allowable gross trailer weight.
Towing Capacity is calculated considering base vehicle with necessary vehicle equipment and 150 pound driver.
Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the towing capacity, Gross Trailer weight
includes the trailer, cargo and necessary equipment for towing.

The tongue load is the load placed on the trailer hitch ball.
The king pin weight is the load placed on the fifth wheel trailer hitch mount.

482
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

GCWR, Towing capacity

kg (lb.)

GCWR Towing capacity

Driving
Model code∗ 7 Engine Cab type Bed type With towing Without tow- With towing Without tow-
system
package ing package package ing package
GSK50L−TRADKA Standard — 4535 (10000) — 2310 (5100)
FE∗1
1GR−FE
1GR 2WD∗ 4
GSK51L−THADKA Long — 4535 (10000) — 2265 (5000)
UCK50L−TRADKA Standard 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3855 (8500) 3175 (7000)
2WD∗ 4
UCK51L−THADKA Long 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3810 (8400) 3125 (6900)
2UZ FE∗ 2
2UZ−FE
UCK55L−TRADKA Standard 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3715 (8200) 3035 (6700)
4WD∗ 5
UCK56L−THADKA Long 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3670 (8100) 2990 (6600)
Regular
7030 (15500) 4715 (10400)
USK50L−TRTDKA Standard 6350 (14000) 4035 (8900)
2WD∗ 4 6800 (15000)∗ 6 4490 (9900)∗ 6
USK51L−THTDKA Long 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4895 (10800) 3990 (8800)
FE∗ 3
3UR−FE
3UR
7030 (15500) 4580 (10100)
USK55L−TRTDKA Standard 6350 (14000) 3945 (8700)
4WD∗ 5 6800 (15000)∗ 6 4350 (9600)∗ 6
USK56L−THTDKA Long 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4760 (10500) 3900 (8600)
∗1 :4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
∗2 :4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
∗3 :5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
∗4 :Two−wheel drive models
∗5 :Four−wheel drive models
∗6 :With P275/55R20 tires
∗7 :The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 455 in Section 2 for the Certifica-
tion label location.
483
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)

GCWR Towing capacity

Cab Driving Bed
Model code∗ 6 Engine Grade With towing Without towing With towing Without towing
type system type
package package package package
GSK51L−CRASKA 1GR−FE∗1 2WD∗ 4 Standard SR5 — 4535 (10000) — 2175 (4800)
UCK51L−CRASKA SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3670 (8100) 3035 (6700)
Standard
UCK51L−CRALKA 2WD∗ 4 Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3670 (8100) 2990 (6600)
UCK52L−CHASKA Long SR5 6120 (13500) — 3625 (8000) —
2UZ−FE∗2
UCK56L−CRASKA SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3535 (7800) 2900 (6400)
Standard
UCK56L−CRALKA 4WD∗ 5 Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3535 (7800) 2855 (6300)
UCK57L−CHASKA Double Long SR5 6120 (13500) — 3490 (7700) —
USK51L−CRTSKA SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4805 (10600) 3900 (8600)
Standard
USK51L−CRTLKA 2WD∗ 4 Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4805 (10600) 3900 (8600)
USK52L−CHTSKA Long SR5 7255 (16000) — 4760 (10500) —
3UR−FE∗3
USK56L−CRTSKA SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4670 (10300) 3760 (8300)
Standard
USK56L−CRTLKA 4WD∗ 5 Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4670 (10300) 3760 (8300)
USK57L−CHTSKA Long SR5 7255 (16000) — 4625 (10200) —
∗1 :4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
∗2 :4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
∗3 :5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
∗4 :Two−wheel drive models
∗5 :Four−wheel drive models
∗6 :The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 455 in Section 2 for the Certifica-
tion label location.
484
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)

GCWR Towing capacity

Cab Driving Bed
Model code∗ 5 Engine Grade With towing Without towing With towing Without towing
type system type
package package package package
UCK51L−PSASKA SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3625 (8000) 2945 (6500)
2WD∗ 3
UCK51L−PSALKA Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3625 (8000) 2945 (6500)
2UZ−FE∗1
UCK56L−PSASKA SR5 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3490 (7700) 2810 (6200)
4WD∗ 4
UCK56L−PSALKA Crew Limited 6120 (13500) 5440 (12000) 3490 (7700) 2810 (6200)
Short
USK51L−PSTSKA Max SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4715 (10400) 3810 (8400)
2WD∗ 3
USK51L−PSTLKA Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4715 (10400) 3810 (8400)
3UR−FE∗2
USK56L−PSTSKA SR5 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4580 (10100) 3670 (8100)
4WD∗ 4
USK56L−PSTLKA Limited 7255 (16000) 6350 (14000) 4580 (10100) 3670 (8100)
∗1 :4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
∗2 :5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
∗3 :Two−wheel drive models
∗4 :Four−wheel drive models
∗5 :The model code is indicated on the Certification label. See “Your Toyota’s identification” on page 455 in Section 2 for the Certifica-
tion label location.

485
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION Gross trailer weight Tongue load

D The gross trailer weight must never

exceed towing capacity described in
the table on page 483.
D The gross combination weight must
never exceed the GCWR described
XS20010 XS30012
in the table on page 483.
D The gross vehicle weight must nev- Tongue load
er exceed the GVWR indicated the × 100 = [9 to 11]%
Gross trailer weight
Certification Label as shown.
D The gross axle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR indi- Certification Label Conventional towing
cated the Certification Label as
shown.
D Exceeding the towing capacity, Gross trailer weight King pin weight
GVWR, GCWR or GAWR can cause
an accident resulting in death or
serious personal injuries.

XS30013a
King pin weight
× 100 = [15 to 25]%
Gross trailer weight

Fifth wheel towing

486
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION 2. Fifth wheel Towing D Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-

The king pin weight is 15 to 25 ent weight capacities established by
D A recommended tongue load or % of the Gross Trailer weight. the hitch manufacturer. Even though
king pin weight varies in accor- the vehicle may be physically capa-
dance with the types of trailers or Current fifth−wheel trailer designs ble of towing a higher weight, the
towing as described below. are not compatible with Short bed operator must determine the maxi-
(Crew Max models). mum weight rating of the particular
D In order to ensure the recom-
mended values shown below, the hitch assembly and never exceed
trailer must be loaded by referring the maximum weight rating speci-
to the following instructions. fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
1. Conventional Towing the trailer hitch manufacturer can
The tongue load is 9 to 11 % of cause an accident resulting in death
the Gross Trailer weight. or serious personal injuries.
If the gross trailer weight is over
907 kg (2000 lbs), it is necessary
to use a sway control device with
sufficient capacity.
If the gross trailer weight is over
2268 kg (5000 lbs), it is necessary
to use a weight distributing hitch
with sufficient capacity.
If using a weight distributing
hitch when towing, keep your ve-
hicle level with the ground.

487
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

HITCHES TRAILER BALL

D If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you Follow these easy steps to properly deter-
should consult with your Toyota dealer. mine the correct trailer ball for your ap-
D Use only a hitch recommended by the plication:
hitch manufacturer and the one which 1. Determine the correct trailer ball size
conforms to the gross trailer weight
requirement.
for the trailer coupler. Most couplers
are stamped with the required trailer LS30011
D The hitch must be bolted securely to ball size. The sizes you will most likely
the vehicle frame and installed accord- find stamped on the coupler are:
ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc- Trailer class Typical trailer ball size
tions.
IV 2 5/16 in.
D The hitch ball and king pin should have
a light coat of grease. II and III 2 in. 1 Trailer ball load rating
D Toyota recommends removing the trail- I 1 7/8 in. 2 Ball diameter
er hitch whenever you are not towing 3 Shank length
a trailer to reduce the possibility of 2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to 4 Shank diameter
additional damage caused by the hitch match or exceed the gross trailer
if your vehicle is struck from behind. weight rating of the trailer. The trailer
After removing the hitch, seal any ball load rating should be printed on
mounting holes in the vehicle body to the top of the ball.
prevent entry of pollutants such as ex- 3. When mounted in the ball mount, the
haust fumes, dirt, water, etc. threaded ball shank must protrude be-
yond the bottom of the lock washer
and nut at least 2 threads. The trailer
ball shank must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter size.

488
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

MATCHING TRAILER BALL HEIGHT TO

TRAILER COUPLER HEIGHT
No matter which class of tow hitch ap-
plies, for a safe trailer hookup, the trailer
ball setup on must be the proper height
for the coupler on the trailer.
XS30001 XS30002

BUMPER TOWING (steel bumper only) FIFTH WHEEL TRAILER

The rear bumper of your vehicle is
equipped with a hole to install a trailer
NOTICE
ball. When towing a fifth wheel trailer, be
For details, contact your Toyota dealer. careful not to hit the cabin or deck
by the trailer while making a sharp
CAUTION turn.

The gross trailer weight (trailer

weight plus cargo weight) when tow-
ing with the bumper must never ex-
ceed 2268 kg (5000 lb.).

489
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

CAUTION
D Toyota recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applica- D If the gross trailer weight exceeds
ble federal and state/provincial regu- 453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes are
lations. required.

XS30003 D A safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the
D Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-
draulic system as it would lower its
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the braking effectiveness.
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to D Never tow a trailer without using a
prevent the tongue from dropping to safety chain securely attached to
the ground in case it becomes dam- both the trailer and the vehicle. If
aged or separated. For correct safety damage occurs to the coupling unit
chain procedures, follow the hitch or or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer manufacturer’s recommenda- trailer wandering over into another
tions. lane.

XS30004

1. Coupler
2. Trailer ball
490
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SERVICE CONNECTOR FOR TOWING TIRES

BRAKE CONTROLLER (with towing D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
package) properly inflated. See page 553 in Sec-
Connector Your vehicle is equipped with a service tion 7−2 and page 591 in Section 8 for
cover
connector for the trailer brake controller instructions.
as shown. D The trailer tires should be inflated to
Access the service connector. the pressure recommended by the trail-
1. Remove the scuff plate. er manufacturer in respect to the gross
trailer weight.
2. Remove the clip (screw type) and trim
board.
Remove the connector cover from the ser-
vice connector before connecting the con-

XS30014a
Trim board
nector.
Link the connector to the trailer brake
controller via the sub wire harness stored
in the glove box. The detailed explanation
Scuff of the sub wire harness circuit is packed
plate together with the sub wire harness.
Be sure to position the trailer brake con-
troller where it does not prevent the driver
from operating the pedal.
Toyota recommends that the sub wire har-
ness be stored in the glove box when it
Clip
is not in use.

491
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

TOWING CONNECTOR FOR TRAILER BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

LIGHTS D If your vehicle is new or equipped with
D Your vehicle is equipped with wire har- any new power train components (such
ness sockets for trailer lights under the as the engine, transmission, differential
rear bumper. Use them to connect and and wheel bearing), Toyota recom-
operate the trailer lights. However, the mends that you do not tow a trailer
XS30005 trailer lights must comply with federal,
state/provincial and local regulations.
until it has been driven for over 800
km (500 miles). After the vehicle has
See your local recreational vehicle been driven for over 800 km (500
dealer or rental agency for the correct miles), you can start towing. However,
type of wiring and relays for your trail- drive the vehicle at a speed of less
er. Check for correct operation of the than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a
turn signals and stop lights each time trailer for another 800 km (500 miles).
4−Pin connector you hitch up. Direct splicing may dam- In addition, avoid full throttle accelera-
age your vehicle’s electrical system tion.
and cause a malfunction of your lights. MAINTENANCE
The towing connector can be also con- D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will
nected to the trailer brake and trailer require more frequent maintenance due
sub battery. to the additional load. For this
information, please refer to the
scheduled maintenance information in
XS30006 the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

4−Pin, 7−Pin connector

492
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK D Before starting out, check operation of D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
D Check that your vehicle remains level the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec- The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is tions. After driving a short distance, tight turn. Slow down before making a
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has stop and recheck the lights and con- turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down nections. Before actually towing a trail- braking.
condition, and check for improper er, practice turning, stopping and back- D Remember that when making a turn,
tongue load, overload, worn suspension ing with a trailer in an area away from the trailer wheels will be closer than
or other possible causes. traffic until you learn the feel. the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely D Backing with a trailer is difficult and turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
loaded so that it cannot shift. requires practice. Grip the bottom of making a larger than normal turning
the steering wheel and move your hand radius with your vehicle.
D Check that your rear view mirrors con- to the left to move the trailer to the
form to any applicable federal state/ D Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-
left. Move your hand to the right to versely affect handling of your vehicle
provincial or local regulations. If not, move the trailer to the right. (This pro-
install the rear view mirrors required and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
cedure is generally opposite to that to the rear from time to time to pre-
for towing purpose. when backing without a trailer.) Also, pare yourself for being passed by large
TRAILER TOWING TIPS just turn the steering wheel a little at trucks or buses, which may cause your
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
handle differently than when not tow- turning. Have someone guide you when happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
ing. The three main causes of vehicle− backing to reduce the risk of an acci- and reduce speed immediately but
trailer accidents are driver error, exces- dent. gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
sive speed and improper trailer loading. D Because stopping distance may be in- straight ahead. If you make no extreme
Keep these in mind when towing: creased, following distance should be correction with the steering or brakes,
D Speed limits for towing a trailer vary increased when towing a trailer. For the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
by state or province. Do not exceed each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow D Be careful when passing other ve-
the posted towing speed limit. at least one vehicle and trailer length hicles. Passing requires considerable
between you and the vehicle ahead. distance. After passing a vehicle, do
Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, not forget the length of your trailer and
resulting in jackknifing and loss of con- be sure you have plenty of room be-
trol. This is especially true on wet or fore changing lanes.
slippery surfaces.
493
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

D In order to maintain engine braking effi- D Always place wheel blocks under both
ciency when driving on a long steep the vehicle and trailer wheels when CAUTION
downgrade, do not use the transmis- parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
sion in “D”. Select an appropriate shift Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park- D Do not use cruise control when you
range in “S” mode (See “Automatic ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it are towing down long, steep grades
transmission” on page 211 in Section cannot be avoided, do so only after or with heavy loads.
1−7). performing the following: D Slow down and downshift before
D Because of the added load of the trail- 1. Apply the brakes and hold. descending steep or long downhill
er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat grades. Do not make sudden down-
2. Have someone place wheel blocks un- shifts.
on hot days (at temperatures over der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or D Avoid holding the brake pedal down
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine 3. When the wheel blocks are in place, too long or too frequently. This
coolant temperature gauge indicates release your brakes slowly until the could cause the brakes to overheat
overheating, immediately turn off the air blocks absorb the load. and result in reduced braking effi-
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road 4. Apply the parking brake firmly. ciency.
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If 5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
your vehicle overheats” on page 502 in
Section 4. When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal, and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

494
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer
Improving fuel economy is easy—just take D Avoid long engine idling. If you have D Keep the front wheels in proper
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last a long wait and you are not in traffic, alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
longer, too. Here are some specific tips it is better to turn off the engine and slow down on rough roads. Improper
on how to save money on both fuel and start again later. alignment not only causes faster tire
repairs: D Avoid engine lugging or over−rev- wear but also puts an extra load on
D Keep your tires inflated at the cor- ving. Use a gear position suitable for the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
rect pressure. Underinflation causes the road on which you are travelling. D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page D Avoid continuous speeding up and from mud, etc. This not only lessens
553 in Section 7−2 for instructions. slowing down. Stop−and−go driving weight but also helps prevent corrosion
D Do not carry unneeded weight in wastes fuel. D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a D Avoid unnecessary stopping and top shape. A dirty air cleaner,
heavier load on the engine, causing braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try improper valve clearance, dirty plugs,
greater fuel consumption. to time the traffic signals so you only dirty oil and grease,brakes not
D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once need to stop as little as possible or adjusted, etc. all lower engine
the engine is running smoothly, begin take advantage of through streets to performance and contribute to poor fuel
driving—but gently. Remember, howev- avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis- economy. For longer life of all parts
er, that on cold winter days this may tance from other vehicles to avoid sud- and lower operating costs, keep all
take a little longer. den braking. This will also reduce wear maintenance work on schedule, and if
on your brakes. you often drive under severe
D Put the selector lever into the “D” conditions, see that your vehicle
when engine braking is not required. D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams receives more frequent maintenance.
Driving with the selector lever in a whenever possible. (For scheduled maintenance
position other than “D” will reduce the D Do not rest your foot on brake ped- information, please refer to the
fuel economy (For details, see al. This causes premature wear, over- “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Automatic transmission” on page 211 heating and poor fuel economy. “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
in Section 1−7.) D Maintain a moderate speed on high-
D Accelerate slowly and smoothly. ways. The faster you drive, the greater
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high the fuel consumption. By reducing your
gear as quickly as possible. speed, you will cut down on fuel con-
sumption.

495
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function with-
out the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is run-
ning.

496
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . 522
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . 523

497
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine
Before making these checks, make sure If the engine will not start, your engine
you have followed the correct starting pro-
NOTICE may be flooded because of repeated
cedure given in “How to start the engine” Do not pull− or push−start the ve- cranking.
on page 474 in Section 3 and that you hicle. It may damage the vehicle or If this happens, turn the engine switch to
have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is cause a collision when the engine the “START” position with the accelerator
equipped with the engine immobilizer sys- starts. Also the three−way catalytic pedal fully depressed. Keep the key and
tem, also check whether the other keys converter may overheat and become a accelerator pedal in these positions for 15
will start the engine. If they work, your fire hazard. seconds and release them. Then try start-
key may be broken. Have the key ing the engine with your foot off the accel-
checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of If the engine turns over at its normal erator pedal.
your keys work, there may be a malfunc- speed but will not start—
tion in the immobilizer system. Call your If the engine does not start after 15 se-
Toyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engine 1. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or conds of cranking, release the key, wait
immobilizer system)” on page 18 in Sec- “LOCK” position and try starting the a few minutes and try again.
tion 1−2.) engine again. If the engine still will not start, it needs
If the engine is not turning over or is 2. If the engine will not start, the engine adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
turning over too slowly— may be flooded because of repeated or qualified repair shop for assistance.
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
1. Check that the battery terminals are engine” for further instructions. NOTICE
tight and clean.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs Do not crank for more than 30 se-
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota conds at a time. This may overheat
on the interior lights or personal lights. dealer or qualified repair shop. the starter and wiring systems.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump start-
ing. See “(c) Jump starting” for further
instructions.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.
498
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

(c) Jump starting

To avoid serious personal injury and JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
damage to your vehicle which might re- D The gas normally produced by a
battery will explode if a flame or 1. If the booster battery is installed in
sult from battery explosion, acid burns, another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
electrical burns, or damaged electronic spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do are not touching. Turn off all unneces-
components, these instructions must be sary lights and accessories.
followed precisely. not smoke or light a match while
jump starting. When boosting, use the battery of
If you are unsure about how to follow this matching or higher quality. Any other
procedure, we strongly recommend that battery may be difficult to jump start
you seek the help of a competent me- NOTICE with.
chanic or towing service.
The battery used for boosting must If jump starting is difficult, charge the
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you battery for several minutes.
CAUTION
are sure that the booster battery is 2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
D Batteries contain sulfuric acid correct. from the booster and discharged batter-
which is poisonous and corrosive. ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents
Wear protective safety glasses when on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
jump starting, and avoid spilling explosion hazard, personal injuries and
acid on your skin, clothing, or ve- burns.)
hicle. 3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
D If you should accidentally get acid booster battery is not running, start it
on yourself or in your eyes, remove and let it run for a few minutes. During
any contaminated clothing and flush jump starting, run the engine at about
the affected area with water imme- 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
diately. Then get immediate medical lightly depressed.
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while en route to the medical office.

499
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Discharged battery Jumper cable

Booster
LS40034 battery
LS40035 XS40001
Positive
terminal Discharged battery Booster
(“+” mark) Jumper Positive terminal Negative terminal battery
cable (“+” mark) (“−” mark)
Connecting point for 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE)
4. Make the cable connections in the or- c. Connect the clamp of the negative engine
der a, b, c, d. (black) jumper cable to the negative (–)
a. Connect the clamp of the positive terminal on the booster battery.
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+) d. Connect the clamp at the other end
terminal on the discharged battery. of the negative (black) jumper cable to
b. Connect the clamp at the other end a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
of the positive (red) jumper cable to point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery. The recommended connecting points XS40002
are shown in the following illustrations:

Connecting point for 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)

engine
500
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

5. Charge the discharged battery with the If the first start attempt is not success-
jumper cables connected for approxi- ful...
mately 5 minutes. At this time, run the Check that the clamp on the jumper
engine in the vehicle with the booster cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery at about 2000 rpm with the ac- battery with the jumper cables connected
celerator pedal lightly depressed. for several minutes and restart your en-
XS40048 6. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
gine in the normal way.
If another attempt is not successful, the
for several minutes with the accelerator battery may be depleted. Have it checked
pedal lightly depressed. at your Toyota dealer.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
Connecting point for 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
engine
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.
Do not connect the cable to or near
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent
any part that moves when the engine
plugs.
is cranked.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
CAUTION not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
When making the connections, to dealer.
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch any-
thing except the correct battery termi-
nals or the ground.

501
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If your engine stalls while If you cannot increase engine

driving speed If your vehicle overheats
If your engine stalls while driving... If engine speed does not increase when If your engine coolant temperature
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping the accelerator pedal is depressed, there gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-
a straight line. Move cautiously off the may be a problem somewhere in the elec- perience a loss of power, or if you hear
road to a safe place. tronic throttle control system. a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
At this time, vibration may occur. Howev- engine has probably overheated. You
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. should follow this procedure...
er, if you depress the accelerator pedal
3. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or more firmly and slowly, you can drive your 1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-
“LOCK” position, and try starting the vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle hicle and turn on your emergency
engine again. checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
If the engine will not start, see “If your possible. and apply the parking brake. Turn off
vehicle will not start” on page 498 in this Even if the abnormality of the electronic the air conditioning if it is being used.
Section. throttle control system is corrected during 2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
low speed driving, the system may not be radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
CAUTION recovered until the engine is stopped and Wait until the steam subsides before
the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” opening the hood. If there is no coolant
If the engine is not running, the pow- or “LOCK” position. boiling over or steam, leave the engine
er assist for the brakes and steering running.
will not work so steering and braking CAUTION
will be much harder than usual. CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erro-
neous pedal operation. To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

502
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If you have a flat tire—

3. Visually check to see if the engine 1. Reduce your speed gradually,
drive belt (fan belt) is broken or loose. CAUTION keeping a straight line. Move
Look for obvious coolant leaks from the cautiously off the road to a safe
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle. Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are place well away from the traffic.
However, note that water draining from
hot. Serious injury could result from Avoid stopping on the center di-
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used. scalding hot fluid and steam blown vider of a highway. Park on a lev-
out under pressure. el spot with firm ground.
CAUTION 2. Stop the engine and turn on your
7. After the engine coolant temperature emergency flashers.
When the engine is running, keep has cooled to normal, again check the 3. With the transmission in “P” firm-
hands and clothing away from the coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-
ly set the parking brake.
moving fan and engine drive belts. sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-
ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the 4. Have everyone get out of the ve-
4. If the engine drive belt is broken or the system. You should have it checked as hicle on the side away from traf-
coolant is leaking, stop the engine im- soon as possible at your Toyota dealer. fic.
mediately. Call a Toyota dealer for as- 5. Read the following instructions
sistance. thoroughly.
5. If the engine drive belt is O.K. and
there are no obvious leaks, you may
help the engine cool down more quickly
by running it at about 1500 rpm for a
few minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Check the coolant reservoir. If it is dry,
add coolant to the reservoir while the
engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, See “Coolant type
selection” on page 551 in Section 7−2.

503
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION D Make sure to set the jack prop- NOTICE

erly in the jack point. Raising Do not continue driving with a
When jacking, be sure to ob- the vehicle with jack improp- deflated tire. Driving even a
serve the following to reduce erly positioned will damage short distance can damage a
the possibility of death or seri- the vehicle or may allow the tire and wheel beyond repair.
ous injury: vehicle to fall off the jack and
D Follow jacking instructions. cause death or serious injury.
D Do not put any part of your D Never get under the vehicle
body under the vehicle sup- when the vehicle is supported
ported by the jack. Otherwise, by the jack alone.
personal injury may occur. D Use the jack only for lifting
D Do not start or run the engine your vehicle during wheel
while your vehicle is sup- changing.
ported by the jack. D Do not raise the vehicle with
D Stop the vehicle on a level someone in the vehicle.
firm ground, firmly set the D When raising the vehicle, do
parking brake and put the not place any objects on top
transmission in “P”. Block the of or underneath the jack.
wheel diagonally opposite to D Raise the vehicle only high
the one being changed if nec- enough to remove and change
essary. the tire.

504
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Required tools and

—Temporary spare tire temporary spare tire
The temporary spare tire is de-
signed for temporary emergency D Replace the temporary spare
use only. tire with the standard tire as
soon as possible.
See also the tire information on page
553 through 562 in Section 7−2 for D Avoid sudden acceleration,
details on the treadwear indicators
and other service information.
sudden deceleration
sharp turns with the tempo-
and
XS40043
rary spare tire.
CAUTION
NOTICE
D The temporary spare tire was
designed especially for your The temporary spare tire does
Toyota. Do not use it on any not have a tire pressure warn- Regular cab models
other vehicle. ing valves and transmitters. If (behind the right seatback)
D Do not use more than one tem- you replace one of the road
porary spare tire at the same tires with the spare, the tire
time. pressure warning light may be
illuminated. Tire pressure
D The pressure for the tempo-
warning system should be op-
rary spare tire must be 230 kPa
erated properly by re−install
(2.3 kgf/cm 2 or 2.3 bar, 33 psi).
the road tire containing the
D Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 tire pressure warning valves
mph) when driving with the and transmitters.
temporary spare tire.

505
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS40009a XS40038a XS40044

Double cab models Double cab models Crew Max models

(under the right rear seats (under the right rear seats with (behind the right rear seatback)
without storage box) storage box)

506
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

1. Get the required tools and tem- Storage box lid

porary spare tire.
1 Tool bag Jack cover
2 Jack panel
To prepare yourself for an emergen-
cy, you should familiarize yourself
with the use of the jack, each of the
XS40037b XS40036b
tools and their storage locations.
When storing the tool bag, make
sure it is securely by the tightening
strap.

Before getting the required tools 2. Remove the jack cover panel as
(Double cab models with the stor- shown in the illustration.
age box)
1. Remove the right storage box lid
by following the procedure below:
1 Turn the knob to the open
position.
2 Lift the lid to an upright posi-
tion.
3 Slide the lid forward until it
disengages from the box.

507
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

To remove the temporary spare tire:

1. Put a jack handle extension and
jack handle end together as
shown in the illustration.
1 Jack handle end
LS40036 XS40049 2 Jack handle extension No.1
3 Wheel nut wrench
4 Jack handle extension No.2

CAUTION

Make sure they are each secure-

Type A ly fixed.
Turn the jack joint by hand.
To remove: Turn the joint in direction
1 until the jack is free.
To store: Turn the joint in direction
2 until the jack is firmly secured to
prevent it flying forward during a col-
lision or sudden braking.
XS40051

Type B
508
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Blocking the wheel

2. Insert the end of the jack handle
end (Type A) or jack handle ex-
tension No.2 (Type B) into the
lowering screw and turn it coun-
terclockwise.

XS40054 3. After the tire is lowered com-

pletely to the ground, remove the XS40011
holding bracket.
When storing the temporary spare
tire, put it in place with the outer side
of the wheel facing up. Then secure
the tire, taking care that the tire goes
Type A straight up without catching on any 2. Block the wheel diagonally op-
other part, to prevent it from flying posite the flat tire to keep the
forward during a collision or sudden vehicle from rolling when it is
braking. jacked up.
Keep winding until three clicks are When blocking the wheel, place a
heard. wheel block in front of one of the
front wheels or behind one of the
XS40008 rear wheels.

Type B

509
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Loosening wheel nuts —Positioning the jack

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may
loose and the wheels may fall
XS40015b off, which could cause a serious
accident.
XS40016b

Front Rear

3. Loosen all the wheel nuts. 4. Position the jack at the correct
Always loosen the wheel nuts before jack point as shown.
raising the vehicle. Make sure the jack is positioned on
Turn the wheel nuts counterclock- a level and solid place.
wise to loosen. To get maximum le- JACK POINTS:
verage, fit the wrench to the nut so Front—Under the frame side rail
that the handle is on the right side, Rear—Under the rear axle housing
as shown above. Grab the wrench
near the end of the handle and pull
up on the handle. Be careful that the
wrench does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-
screw them about one−half turn.

510
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Raising your vehicle

XS40007 LS40037 XS40017a

Front of
vehicle

Put a wheel nut wrench, jack handle 5. After making sure that no one 6. After making sure that no one
extension and jack handle end to- is in the vehicle, as the jack is in the vehicle, raise it high
gether as shown in the illustration. touches the vehicle and begins enough so that the temporary
1 Jack handle end to lift, double−check that it is spare tire can be installed.
2 Jack handle extension No.2 properly positioned. Remember you will need more
3 Jack handle extension No.1 Rear side only— ground clearance when putting on
4 Wheel nut wrench When positioning the jack under the the temporary spare tire than when
rear axle housing, make sure the removing the flat tire.
CAUTION groove on the top of the jack fits with
the rear axle housing.
Make sure they are each secure-
ly fixed.

511
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Changing wheels
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle end with the extension into
the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn
it clockwise with the handle. As the
jack touches the vehicle and begins
to lift, double−check that it is proper-
ly positioned. XS40018 XS40019
CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle

when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
7. Remove the wheel nuts and Before putting on wheels, remove
change tires. any corrosion on the mounting sur-
Lift the flat tire straight off and put faces with a wire brush or such.
it aside. Installation of wheels without good
metal−to−metal contact at the
Roll the spare wheel into position mounting surface can cause wheel
and align the holes in the wheel with nuts to loosen and eventually cause
the bolts. Then lift up the wheel and a wheel to come off while driving.
get at least the top bolt started
through its hole. Wiggle the tire and
press it back over the other bolts.

512
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Reinstalling wheel nuts —Lowering your vehicle

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
XS40020 damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loosen and the wheels may
XS40021
fall off, which could cause a se-
rious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin- 9. Lower the vehicle completely
ger tight. and tighten the wheel nuts.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered Turn the jack handle end with the ex-
end inward) and tighten them as tension counterclockwise with han-
much as you can by hand. Press dle to lower the vehicle, making sure
back on the tire back and see if you the handle remains firmly fitted onto
can tighten them more. the jack handle extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any addi-
tional leverage other than your
hands, such as a hammer, pipe or
your foot. Make sure the wrench is
securely engaged over the nut.

513
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tighten each nut a little at a time in

the order shown. Repeat the pro- D Have the wheel nuts tightened Taper type
cess until all the nuts are tight. with a torque wrench to the (Steel wheels)
following torques, as soon as
CAUTION possible after changing
wheels. Retighten the wheel
D When lowering the vehicle, nuts within 160 km (100 miles)
make sure all portions of your of driving. Otherwise, the nuts
body and all other persons may loosen and the wheels
around will not be injured as may fall off, which could
the vehicle is lowered to the cause a serious accident.
ground. Due to the higher torque
specification for these wheel
nuts, if in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them
XS40047
Flat washer type
(Aluminum wheels)
checked by your Toyota
dealer or at a service sta-
tion.

514
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—After changing wheels

Torque specification: 10.Check the air pressure of the Initial adjustment of the tire
Taper type (Steel wheels)— replaced tire. pressure warning system is
209 N·m (21.3 kgf·m, 154 ft·lbf) Adjust the air pressure to the specifi- necessary after your have
cation designated on page 591 in replaced your tires or wheels. See
Flat washer type “Tire pressure warning system”
(Aluminum wheels)— Section 8. If the pressure is lower,
drive slowly to the nearest service on page 254 in Section 1−7.
131 N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 97 ft·lbf)∗
∗ : When temporarily used on spare station and fill to the correct pres-
sure. CAUTION
tire/wheel, apply 209 N·m (21.3
kgf·m, 154 ft·lbf) Do not forget to reinstall the tire Before driving, make sure all the
inflation valve cap as dirt and mois- tools, jack and flat tire are se-
ture could get into the valve core and curely in place in their storage
possibly cause air leakage. If the location to reduce the possibil-
cap is missing, have a new one put ity of personal injury during a
on as soon as possible. collision or sudden braking.
11.Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to
the torque specified on page 515
with a torque wrench. Have a techni-
cian repair the flat tire and replace
the temporary spare tire with it.

515
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If your vehicle becomes

stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
NOTICE
to rock the vehicle free by moving it If you rock your vehicle, observe the
forward and backward. following precautions to prevent dam-
Your vehicle is equipped with the age to the transmission and other
“AUTO LSD” system, you can use it in parts.
XS40035 this situation. (For details, see “AUTO
LSD system” on page 246 in Section
z Do not depress the accelerator ped-
al while shifting the selector lever
1−7.) or before the transmission is com-
pletely shifted to forward or reverse
CAUTION gear.
z Do not race the engine and avoid
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
spinning the wheels.
free by moving it forward and back-
Aluminum wheels: ward if people or objects are any- z If your vehicle remains stuck after
Before stowing the flat tire, remove where near the vehicle. During the rocking the vehicle several times,
rocking operation the vehicle may consider other ways such as tow-
the center wheel ornament by push-
suddenly move forward or backward ing.
ing from the reverse side.
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
Be careful not to lose the wheel or- or damage to nearby people or ob-
nament. jects.

516
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If your vehicle needs to be

towed—
If towing is necessary, we recommend
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck— (a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
you have it done by your Toyota dealer
—From front —From front or a commercial tow truck service. In
consultation with them, have your ve-
hicle towed using either (a) or (b).
Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or
commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency
—From rear —From rear towing” on page 519 or 521 in this
Section.
Proper equipment will help ensure that

XS40023 XS40024 your vehicle is not damaged while being

towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
(b) Using flat bed truck (b) Using flat bed truck
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following pre-
cautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
Two−wheel drive models Four−wheel drive models must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
517
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Two−wheel drive models— From rear—Place the engine switch in the Four−wheel drive models—
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck “ACC” position. (a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front— NOTICE From front—
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels. Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
z When lifting wheels, take care to
NOTICE ensure adequate ground clearance NOTICE
for towing at the opposite end of
Never tow a vehicle from the front the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the Never tow a vehicle from the front
with the rear wheels on the ground, bumper and/or underbody of the with the rear wheels on the ground,
as this may cause serious damage to towed vehicle will be damaged dur- as this may cause serious damage to
the transmission. ing towing. the transmission.
z Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position, as the
steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight while towing.

(b) Using flat bed truck

518
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Emergency towing
From rear—We recommend using a tow- (c) Towing with sling type
ing dolly under the front wheels. If you do truck
not use a towing dolly, place the engine
switch in the “ACC” position, put the
transmission in “N” and the front drive
control switch knob in “2WD”.

NOTICE XS40027 XS40029

Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position when towing
from the rear without a towing dolly.
The steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight. Type A
All models—
(b) Using flat bed truck (c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-
ther from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.
XS40030

Type B

519
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota CAUTION CAUTION
dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-
vice. Use extreme caution when towing the If the engine is not running, the pow-
vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or errat- er assist for the brakes and steering
If towing service is not available in an ic driving maneuvers which would will not work so steering and braking
emergency, your vehicle may be tempo- place excessive stress on the emer- will be much harder than usual.
rarily towed by a cable or chain se- gency towing eyelet and towing cable
cured to one of the emergency towing or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
eyelet under the front of the vehicle. or chain may break and cause serious
Use extreme caution when towing the injury or damage.
vehicle.

NOTICE
NOTICE
Only use specified towing eyelet;
Use only a cable or chain specifically
otherwise your vehicle may be dam-
intended for use in towing vehicles.
aged.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes. Before towing, release the parking brake
Towing in this manner may be done only and put the transmission in “N”. The
on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis- engine switch must be in the “ACC”
tance and at low speeds. Also, the (engine off) or “ON” (engine running)
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and position.
brakes must all be in good condition. Four−wheel drive models—Put the front
drive control switch knob in “2WD”.

520
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Emergency towing eyelet —Tips for towing a stuck

precautions vehicle
D Before emergency towing, check that The following methods are effective to
the eyelet is not broken or damaged CAUTION use when your vehicle is stuck in the
and that the installation bolts are not mud, sand or other condition from
loose. If the emergency towing eyelet is which the vehicle cannot be driven out
used to get out when your vehicle under its own power. Use extreme cau-
D Fasten the towing cable or chain se- becomes stuck in the mud, sand or
curely to eyelet. tion when towing the vehicle. In addi-
other condition from which the ve- tion, keep away from the vehicles and
D Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady hicle cannot be driven out under its towing cable or chain when towing.
and even force. own power, make sure to observe the
precautions mentioned below. Other- D Remove the sand and soil in the front
D To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not and the back of the tires.
pull from the side or at a vertical wise, excessive stress will be placed
angle. Always pull straight ahead. on the towing cable or chain, which D Place stones or wood under the tires.
could cause breakage to the cable or
chain. As a result, serious injury or
damage may occur.
D If the towing vehicle can hardly
move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.
D Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
D Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.

521
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If you cannot shift automatic

transmission selector lever
If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of “P” position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is de-
pressed, use the shift lock override but-
ton as follows:
1. Turn the engine switch to the
XS40033 “LOCK” position. Make sure
parking brake is applied.
the XS40034
2. Pry up the cover with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.

Floor shift type Floor shift type

XS40031 XS40032

Column shift type Column shift type

522
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

If you lose your wireless

If you lose your keys remote control transmitter
3. Insert the screwdriver or equivalent You can purchase a new key at your You can purchase a new wireless re-
into the hole to push down the shift Toyota dealer if you can give them the mote control transmitter at your Toyota
lock override button. You can shift key number. If your vehicle is equipped dealer.
out of “P” position only while push- with the engine immobilizer system, the Have the registered identification numbers
ing the button. dealer will also need your master key. of your transmitters deleted from your ve-
4. Shift into “N” position. Vehicles with engine immobilizer sys- hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon as
5. Insert the cover. tem—Even if you lose only one key, con- possible to avoid the possibility of theft or
tact your Toyota dealer to make a new an accident. Then, have the identification
6. Start the engine. For your safety, key. If you lose all your master keys, you number of your new transmitter registered.
keep the brake pedal depressed. cannot make new keys; the whole engine At the same time, you must bring all of
Be sure to have the system checked by immobilizer system must be replaced. the remaining transmitters to have them
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. See the suggestion given in “Keys” on registered again as well.
page 18 in Section 1−2. You can use the wireless remote control
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and system with the new transmitter. Contact
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window be-
cause it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

523
07 11.07

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

524
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 5
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

525
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion
Toyota, through its diligent research, de- D Wetness or dampness to certain parts D High pressure water or steam is effec-
sign and use of the most advanced of your vehicle for an extended period tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
technology available, helps prevent corro- of time, may cause corrosion even and wheel housings. Pay particular
sion and provides you with the finest qual- though other parts of the vehicle may attention to these areas as it is difficult
ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to be dry. to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help D High ambient temperatures can cause more harm than good to simply wet the
ensure long−term corrosion prevention. corrosion to those components of the mud and debris without removing. The
The most common causes of corrosion vehicle which do not dry quickly due to lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
to your vehicle are: lack of proper ventilation. frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and The above signifies the necessity to keep as trapped water in these areas can
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under your vehicle, particularly the underside, as cause corrosion.
the vehicle. clean as possible and to repair any dam-
age to paint or protective coatings as D Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-
D Chipping of paint, or undercoating oughly when winter is over.
caused by minor accidents or by soon as possible.
stones and gravel. To help prevent corrosion on your See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
Toyota, follow these guidelines: page 527 in this Section for more tips.
Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your ve- Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of Check the condition of your vehicle’s
hicle under certain environmental condi- course, necessary to keep your vehicle paint and trim. If you find any chips or
tions: clean by regular washing, but to prevent scratches in the paint, touch them up im-
corrosion, the following points should be mediately to prevent corrosion from start-
D Road salt or dust control chemicals will ing. If the chips or scratches have gone
accelerate corrosion, as will the pres- observed:
through the bare metal, have a qualified
ence of salt in the air near the sea− D If you drive on salted roads in the body shop make the repair.
coast or in areas of industrial pollution. winter or if you live near the ocean,
D High humidity accelerates corrosion es- you should hose off the undercarriage
pecially when temperatures range just at least once a month to minimize cor-
above the freezing point. rosion.

526
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Washing and waxing your

Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa- Washing your Toyota
ter and dirt can accumulate under the CAUTION
Keep your vehicle clean by regular
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc- washing.
casionally check under the mats to make D When cleaning under floor or chas-
sure the area is dry. Be particularly care- The following cases may cause weakness sis, be careful not to injure your
ful when transporting chemicals, cleans- to the paint or corrosion to the body and hands.
ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos- D Exhaust gases cause the exhaust
transported in proper containers. If a spill sible. pipe to become quite hot. When
or leak should occur, immediately clean D When driving in a coastal area washing the vehicle, be careful not
and dry the area. D When driving on a road sprinkled with to touch the pipe until it has cooled
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you antifreeze sufficiently, as touching a hot ex-
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud haust pipe can cause burns.
D When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size bird droppings and carcass of an insect
shields, which come as near to the ground 1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-
as possible, are the best. We recommend D When driving in areas where there is move any mud or road salt from the
that the fittings and the area where the a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
underside of the vehicle or the wheel
shields are installed be treated to resist chemical substances
wells.
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be D When the vehicle becomes remarkably 2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
happy to assist in supplying and installing dirty with dust and mud
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
the shields if they are recommended for Hand−washing your Toyota instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
your area.
Work in the shade and wait until the keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated vehicle body is not warm to the touch. the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
garage or a roofed place. Do not park the soap and water remove the dirt.
your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
pressure car wash, for example) at or
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
water or snow, your garage may be so
door opened. If the water enters the air
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
vent, you may experience trouble with re-
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-
fueling or rough engine idling.
rode if the ventilation is poor.

527
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use Waxing your Toyota
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by organic substances or scrub them with a Polishing and waxing is recommended
organic substances. If any organic sub- hard brush. This may damage the sur- to maintain the original beauty of your
stances splash an ornament, be sure to faces of the lights. Toyota’s finish.
wash them off with water and check if the Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
ornament is damaged. Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surface does not repel water well.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap surfaces.
or neutral detergent. 1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-
3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can fore you begin waxing, even if you are
cause streaking. In hot weather you using a combined cleaner and wax.
NOTICE may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it. 2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
z Do not use corrosive chemical−
the finish has become extremely weath-
based cleaners on your wheels. 4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-
(Example: hydrofluoric acid) using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-
z Do not use steam cleaners or the rub or press hard—you might scratch low the manufacturer’s instructions and
chemicals therein to clean your the paint. precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
wheels. the chrome trim as well as the paint.
NOTICE
z Do not use scouring pads, wire Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
brushes, or coarse abrasives to z Do not use organic substances that the nozzles do not become blocked
clean your wheels. (gasoline, kerosene, benzine or when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
z Do not use alcohol, solvents, gaso- strong solvents), which may be tox- blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
line, or other non−neutral deter- ic or cause damage. have the vehicle serviced.
gents, because they may alter the z Do not scrub any part of the ve-
wheel’s appearance and resistance hicle with a hard brush, which may NOTICE
to corrosion. cause damage. If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not object. The nozzle will be damaged.
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.

528
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Cleaning the interior

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the First vacuum over the upholstery to re-
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause CAUTION move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or D Be careful not to splash water or vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
wash it off. spill liquid on the floor. This may minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
prevent the side airbags and curtain and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
3. Wax the vehicle again when water shield airbags from activating cor-
does not bead but remains on the sur- cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-
rectly, resulting in serious injury. peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
face in large patches.
D Do not wash the vehicle floor with type vinyl cleaners are also available
water, or allow water to get onto which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
the floor when cleaning the vehicle instructions.
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other NOTICE
electrical components above or un-
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
der the floor carpet (or mat) and
or window cleaner on the interior.
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.
Carpets

Vinyl interior Use a good foam−type shampoo to

clean the carpets.
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
and water. as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to pro-
duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.

529
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Do not apply water—the best results are After cleaning or whenever any part of the
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
NOTICE leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
possible. Read the shampoo instructions z Do not use organic substances (sol- cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-
and follow them closely. vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, lated shaded area.
Seat belts etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discol- NOTICE
The seat belts may be cleaned with
oring, staining or peeling of the z If a stain should fail to come out
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
surface. with a neutral detergent, apply a
water.
z If you use cleaners or polishing cleaner that does not contain an
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-
agents, make sure their ingredients organic solvent.
ing, check the belts for excessive wear,
do not include the substances men- z Never use organic substances such
fraying, or cuts.
tioned above. as benzine, alcohol or gasoline or
NOTICE z If you use a liquid car freshener, do alkaline or acid solutions for clean-
not spill the liquid onto the ve- ing the leather as these could
z Do not use dye or bleach on the hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con- cause discoloring.
belts—it may weaken them. tain the ingredients mentioned z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
z Do not use the belts until they be- above. Immediately clean any spill fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
come dry. using the method mentioned above. fine grained surface of the leather.
z Mildew may develop on soiled leath-
Windows Leather Interior
er upholstery. Be especially careful
The windows may be cleaned with any The leather upholstery may be cleaned to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
household window cleaner. with neutral detergent for wool. upholstery always clean.
Air conditioning control panel, audio Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened z Long exposure to direct sunlight
panel, instrument panel, console panel, with 5% solution of neutral detergent for may cause the leather surface to
and switches wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces harden and shrink. Keep your ve-
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning. of detergent with a clean damp cloth. hicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-
warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

530
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

z The interior of your vehicle is apt

to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather up-
holstery could result in discolor-
ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the

cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

531
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

532
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . 538

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

533
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for Scheduled maintenance You may also elect to have
fewer maintenance requirements with long- The scheduled maintenance items listed in maintenance, replacement, or repair of
er service intervals to save both your time the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or the emission control devices and
and money. However, each regular mainte- “Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those system performed by any automotive
nance, as well as day−to−day care, is required to be serviced at regular inter- repair establishment or individual
more important than ever before to ensure vals. without invalidating this warranty. See
smooth, and trouble−free, safe, and eco- “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet”
nomical drivings. For details of your maintenance schedule, or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” complete warranty information.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
sure the specified maintenance, including Where to go for service?
general maintenance service, is performed. It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-
Note that both the new vehicle and cialists and are kept up to date with the
emission control system warranties specify repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied. latest service information through technical
that proper maintenance and care must be bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
performed. See “Owner’s Warranty The owner may elect to use non−Toyota training programs. They learn to work on
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual supplied parts for replacement pur- Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
Supplement” for complete warranty poses without invalidating the emission rather than while they are working on it.
information. control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of You can be confident that your Toyota
General maintenance dealer’s service department performs the
equivalent quality may impair the effec-
General maintenance items are those day− tiveness of the emission control sys- best job to meet the maintenance require-
to−day care practices that are important to tems. ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the nomically.
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the Your copy of the repair order is proof that
general maintenance items are performed all required maintenance has been per-
regularly. formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-
These checks or inspections can be done lems should arise with your vehicle while
either by yourself or a qualified technician, under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
pleased to do them at a nominal cost. to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.
534
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

General maintenance
What about do−it−yourself maintenance? Listed below are the general maintenance Engine coolant level
Many of the maintenance items are easy items that should be performed as fre- Make sure the coolant level is between
to do yourself if you have a little mechani- quently as specified. In addition to check- the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−
cal ability and a few basic automotive ing the items listed, if you notice any through reservoir when the engine is cold.
tools. Simple instructions for how to per- unusual noise, smell or vibration, you See page 551 in Section 7−2 for addition-
should investigate the cause or take your al information.
form them are presented on page 539 in
Section 7. vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali- Radiator, condenser and hoses
fied service shop immediately. It is recom- Check that the front of the radiator and
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mended that any problem you notice be condenser are clean and not blocked with
mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are brought to the attention of your dealer or leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 552 in
recommended. Please be aware that the qualified service shop for their advice. Section 7−2 for additional information.
do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your
Battery condition
warranty coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty
CAUTION Check the battery condition by the indica-
Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the details. tor color. See page 564 in Section 7−3 for
Make these checks only with ade- additional information.
quate ventilation if you run the en- Brake fluid level
gine.
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 552 in Section 7−2 for addition-
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT al information.
Items listed below should be checked Engine oil level
from time to time, e.g. each time when Check the level on the dipstick with the
refueling. engine turned off and the vehicle parked
Washer fluid on a level spot. See page 548 in Section
7−2 for additional information.
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the Power steering fluid level
tank. See page 567 in Section 7−3 for
additional information. Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 553 in Section 7−2 for addition-
al information.
535
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Exhaust system Seats Brakes

If you notice any change in the sound of Check that all seat controls such as seat In a safe place, check that the brakes do
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate not pull to one side when applied.
the cause located and corrected immedi- smoothly and that all latches lock securely Parking brake
ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on in any position. Check that the head re-
page 447 in Section 2.) straints move up and down smoothly and Check that the pedal has the proper travel
that the locks hold securely in any latched and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
INSIDE THE VEHICLE is held securely with only the parking
position. For folding−down seatback (Reg-
Items listed below should be checked ular cab and Crew Max models) and lift brake applied.
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic up seat cushion (Double cab models), Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc. check that the latches lock securely. nism
Lights Seat belts On a safe incline, check that your vehicle
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail Check that the seat belt system such as is held securely with the selector lever in
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights buckles, retractors and anchors operate “P” position and all brakes released.
are all working. Check headlight aim. properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Service reminder indicators and warning webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam- Items listed below should be performed
buzzers aged. from time to time, unless otherwise
Check that all service reminder indicators Accelerator pedal specified.
and warning buzzers function properly. Check the pedal for smooth operation and Fluid leaks
Steering wheel uneven pedal effort or catching. Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-
Be alert for changes in steering condition, Brake pedal ter or other fluid after the vehicle has
such as hard steering or strange noise. Check the pedal for smooth operation and been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
that the pedal has the proper clearance. fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
Check the brake booster function. found and corrected immediately.

536
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Does your vehicle need

repairing?
Doors and engine hood Tire rotation Be on the alert for changes in perfor-
Check that all doors including tailgate op- mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
Rotate the tires according to the indicate service is needed. Some impor-
erate smoothly and all latches lock se- maintenance schedule. (For
curely. Make sure the engine hood sec- tant clues are as follows:
scheduled maintenance information,
ondary latch secures the hood from D Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
please refer to the “Scheduled
opening when the primary latch is re- Appreciable loss of power
leased.
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s D
Manual Supplement”.) See page 558 D Strange engine noises
Tire inflation pressure in Section 7−2 for additional D A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-
Check the pressure with a gauge ev- information. ter dripping from the air conditioning
ery two weeks, or at least once a after use is normal.)
month. See page 553 in Section 7−2 D Change in exhaust sound (This may
for additional information. indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
Tire surface and wheel nuts leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked im-
Check the tires carefully for cuts, mediately.)
damage or excessive wear. See
page 556 in Section 7−2 for addition- D Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear
al information. When checking the
tires, make sure no nuts are missing, D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
and check the nuts for looseness. straight on a level road
Tighten them if necessary. D Strange noises related to suspension
movement
D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal al-
most touches floor; vehicle pulls to one
side when braking
D Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

537
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs
If you notice any of these clues, take your Some states have vehicle emission in- The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as spection programs which include OBD after taking several driving trips, but the
possible. It probably needs adjustment or (On−Board Diagnostics) checks. error code in the OBD system will not be
repair. The OBD system monitors the operation cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
of the emission control system. When the taken.
CAUTION OBD system determines that a problem If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
exists somewhere in the emission control even the malfunction indicator lamp does
Do not continue driving with the ve- system, the malfunction indicator lamp not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
hicle unchecked. It could result in se- comes on. In this case, your vehicle may to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.
rious vehicle damage and possibly not pass the I/M test and need to be
personal injury. repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp
does not come on, your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test as readiness codes
have not been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary mal-
function such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

538
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 7− 1
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

539
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine compartment overview

"4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

XS71001a

540
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine

1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

XS71002a

541
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

"5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

1. Windshield washer fluid tank
2. Engine oil level dipstick
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse block
7. Battery
8. Radiator
9. Condenser
10. Power steering fluid reservoir

XS71003a

542
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Do−it−yourself service
Fuse locations precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
Spare fuses
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or in-
complete servicing may result in operating
problems.
XS71005a Performing do−it−yourself maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
XS71004 owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 545 in this Section.

XS71006a Utmost care should be taken when work-

ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental
injury. Here are a few precautions that
you should be especially careful to ob-
serve:

543
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION D Use eye protection whenever you NOTICE

work on or under your vehicle
z Remember that battery and ignition
D When the engine is running, keep where you may be exposed to flying
coil carry high currents or voltages.
hands, clothing, and tools away or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be careful of accidentally causing a
from the moving fan and engine D Used engine oil contains potentially short circuit.
drive belts. (Removing rings, harmful contaminants which may
watches, and ties is advisable.) z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
cause skin disorders such as in-
Coolant” or similar high quality eth-
D Right after driving, the engine flammation or skin cancer, so care
ylene glycol based non−silicate,
compartment—the engine, radiator, should be taken to avoid prolonged
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-
exhaust manifold, power steering and repeated contact with it. To re-
rate coolant with long−life hybrid
fluid reservoir and spark plug move used engine oil from your
organic acid technology to fill the
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care- skin, wash thoroughly with soap
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids and water.
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-
and spark plugs may also be hot. D Do not leave used oil within the ant and 50% deionized water (for
D If the engine is hot, do not remove reach of children. the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
the radiator cap or loosen the drain D Dispose of used oil and filter only deionized water (for Canada).
plugs to prevent burning yourself. in a safe and acceptable manner. z If you spill some of the coolant, be
D Do not leave anything that may Do not dispose of used oil and fil- sure to wash it off with water to
burn easily, such as paper or rags, ter in household trash, in sewers or prevent it from damaging the parts
in the engine compartment. onto the ground. Call your dealer or or paint.
D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al- a service station for information
z Do not allow dirt or anything else
low open flames around fuel or the concerning recycling or disposal.
to fall through the spark plug holes.
battery. Their fumes are flammable. D Be extremely cautious when work- z Use only spark plugs of the speci-
D Do not get under your vehicle with ing on the battery. It contains poi-
fied type. Using other types will
just the body jack supporting it. Al- sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
cause engine damage, loss of per-
ways use automotive jack stands or formance or radio noise.
other solid supports.

544
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Parts and tools

Here is a list of parts and tools you will Tools:
z Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark need to perform do−it−yourself mainte-
plugs by cleaning or regapping. D Funnel (only for adding coolant)
nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-
z Do not overfill automatic transmis- signed in metric sizes, so your tools must CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
sion fluid, or the transmission be metric. Parts (if level is low):
could be damaged. CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
z Do not drive with the air cleaner Parts (if level is low): brake fluid
filter removed, or excessive engine Tools:
wear could result. Also backfiring D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-
could cause a fire in the engine lent D Rag or paper towel
compartment. See page 548 in Section 7−2 for de- D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
tails about engine oil selection.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID
surface with the wiper frame. Tools:
Parts (if level is low):
z When closing the engine hood, D Rag or paper towel
D Automatic transmission fluid
check to see that you have not for- D Funnel (only for adding oil) DEXRONrII or III
gotten any tools, rags, etc. CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT Tools:
LEVEL
D Rag or paper towel
Parts (if level is low):
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)
D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
similar high quality ethylene glycol CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni- Tools:
trite, and non−borate coolant with long− D Warm water
life hybrid organic acid technology.
D Baking soda
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion- D Grease
ized water(for the U.S.A.) or 55% cool- D Conventional wrench (for terminal
ant and 45% deionized water (for Can- clamp bolts)
ada).

545
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):
D Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:
D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze
(for winter use)
Tools:
D Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:
D Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original (See charts in
“Replacing light bulbs” on page 568 in
Section 7−3.)
Tools:
D Screwdriver
D Wrench

546
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 7− 2
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

547
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking the engine oil level

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
Low level Full level Low level Full level end.

CAUTION

LS72004 XS72002 Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE
Add oil O.K. Too full Add oil O.K. Too full
Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
If the oil level is below or only slightly
With the engine at operating tempera- above the low level, add engine oil of
ture and turned off, check the oil level the same type as already in the engine.
Low level Full level on the dipstick. Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle oil in small quantities at a time, checking
should be on level ground. After turning the dipstick. We recommend that you use
off the engine, wait a few minutes for a funnel when adding oil.
XS72001a the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under dipstick is indicated as follows:
the end and wipe it clean. 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−
Add oil O.K. Too full FE) engine
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)
correct. 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
1.1 L (1.2 qt., 1.0 Imp.qt.)
548
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

For the engine oil capacity, see “Service ENGINE OIL SELECTION If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE
specifications” on page 586 in Section 8. “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in 10W−30 oil may be used. However, it
When the level reaches within the correct your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
range, install the filler cap hand−tight. “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent the next oil change.
to satisfy the following grade and viscos-
NOTICE ity.
z Be careful not to spill engine oil on Oil grade:
the vehicle components. ILSAC multigrade engine oil
z Avoid overfilling, or the engine Recommended viscosity:
could be damaged. 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8
(2UZ−FE) engine
z Check the oil level on the dipstick
SAE 5W−30
once again after adding the oil.

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good

fuel economy, and good starting in cold
weather.

549
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

SOIL020

Outside temperature
Oil identification mark To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan- mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20 engine oil may be dardization and Approval Committee) Certi- Motor Oil” is available, which has been
used. However, SAE 0W−20 is the best fication Mark is added to some oil con- specifically tested and approved for all
choice for good fuel economy and good tainers to help you select the oil you Toyota engines.
starting in cold weather. should use. Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

550
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking the engine coolant

level
Look at the see−through coolant reser- Coolant type selection
voir when the engine is cold. The cool- Use of improper coolants may damage
ant level is satisfactory if it is between your engine cooling system.
the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the
reservoir. If the level is low, add the Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
coolant. (For the coolant type, see or similar high quality ethylene glycol
“Coolant type selection” described be- based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
low.) and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with long−life hybrid organic acid
with engine temperature. However, if the technology is a combination of low
level is on or below the “LOW” line, add phosphates and organic acids.)
coolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL”
line. For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
If the coolant level drops within a short 50% deionized water. This coolant pro- Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
time after replenishing, there may be a vides protection down to about −35_C Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
leak in the system. Visually check the (−31_F). ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
radiator, hoses, radiator cap and drain result in malfunction of your engine
cock and water pump. For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota 45% deionized water. This coolant pro- Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
dealer test the cap pressure and check vides protection down to about −42_C with long−life hybrid organic acid
for leaks in the cooling system. (−44_F). technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
CAUTION NOTICE malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
To prevent burning yourself, do not Do not use plain water alone.
further details.
remove the radiator cap when the en-
gine is hot.

551
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking the radiator and

condenser Checking brake fluid
If either of the above parts are extremely Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
dirty or you are not sure of their condi- hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer. line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.
CAUTION Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
To prevent burning yourself, be care-
ful not to touch the radiator or con-
XS72003 the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.
denser when the engine is hot.
CAUTION
NOTICE Take care when filling the reservoir
To prevent damage to the radiator because brake fluid can harm your
and condenser, do not perform the hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
To check the fluid level, simply look at hands or in your eyes, flush the af-
work by yourself.
the see−through reservoir. The level fected area with clean water immedi-
should be between the “MAX” and ately. If you still feel uncomfortable
“MIN” lines on the reservoir. with your hands or eyes, go to the
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go doctor.
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it NOTICE
may indicate a serious mechanical prob- If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
lem. to wipe it off to prevent it from dam-
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or aging the parts or paintwork.
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

552
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking power steering Checking tire inflation

fluid pressure
Clean all dirt from the outside of the res-
ervoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
If hot the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
O.K. If cold “COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
Open O.K. fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
Close If the level is at the low side of either
XS72005 range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONrII or III to bring the level within
If hot the range.
add
If cold To remove the reservoir cap, turn it coun-
add terclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reser-
voir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
Check the fluid level through the reser-
voir. If necessary, add automatic trans-
for leaks or damage. XS72011
mission fluid DEXRONrII or III. CAUTION
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little The reservoir tank may be hot so be
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is careful not to burn yourself.
hot (60_C—80_C or 140_F—175_F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is cold (about room temperature, NOTICE
10_C—30_C or 50_F—85_F) if the engine
Avoid overfilling, or the power steer-
has not been run for about five hours.
ing could be damaged.

553
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Keep your tire inflation pressures The following instructions for

at the proper level. checking tire inflation pressure Tire pressure
should be observed: gauge
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the com- D The pressure should be
bined weight of occupants and cargo checked only when the tires
(vehicle capacity weight) are de-
scribed on page 580 in Section 8.
are cold. If your vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours XS72013
They are also described on the tire and has not been driven for more
and loading information label as than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you
shown. will get an accurate cold tire infla-
You should check the tire inflation tion pressure reading.
pressure every two weeks, or at D Always use a tire pressure
least once a month. And do not for- gauge. The appearance of a tire
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
get the spare! can be misleading. Besides, tire PROCEDURE
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade 1. Remove the tire valve cap.
ride and handling. 2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
D Do not bleed or reduce tire gauge to the tire valve.
inflation pressure after driv- 3. Read the pressure using the
ing. It is normal for the tire infla- graduations of the gauge.
tion pressure to be higher after 4. In case the tire inflation pressure
driving. is not within the prescribed
D Never exceed the vehicle ca- range, insert the compressed air
pacity weight. Passenger and from the valve. In case of apply-
luggage weight should be located ing too much air, press the center
so that the vehicle is balanced. of the valve and release the air
to adjust.

554
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

5. After completing the tire inflation

pressure measurement and ad- CAUTION High tire pressure (overinfla-
justment, apply soapy water to tion)—
the valve and check for leakage. Keep your tires properly in- D Poor handling
flated. Otherwise, the following
6. Install the tire valve cap. conditions may occur and cause D Excessive wear
If a gauge and air pump are not an accident resulting in death or D Uneven wear
available, have your vehicle checked serious injuries. D A greater possibility of tire
by your Toyota dealer. Low tire pressure (underinfla- damage from road hazards
tion)—
CAUTION
D Excessive wear
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve D Uneven wear
caps. Without the valve caps, D Poor handling
dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air D Possibility of blowouts from
leakage. If the caps have been an overheated tire
lost, have new ones put on as D Poor sealing of the tire bead
soon as possible. D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may D A greater possibility of tire
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of damage from road hazards
driving, reduce tire life and make
your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota deal-
er.

555
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking and replacing tires

The tires on your Toyota have built− If air loss occurs while driving, do
Treadwear indicator in treadwear indicators to help you not continue driving. Driving even a
know when the tires need replace- short distance can damage a tire be-
ment. When the tread depth wears yond repair.
to 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indi- Any tires which are over 6 years
cators will appear. If you can see the old must be checked by a quali-
indicators in two or more adjacent fied technician even if damage is
grooves, the tire should be replaced. not obvious.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding. Tires deteriorate with age even if
they have never or seldom been
The effectiveness of snow tires is used.
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.). This applies also to the temporary
CHECKING YOUR TIRES spare tire and tires stored for future
If you have tire damage such as use.
Check the tire’s tread for tread- cuts, splits, cracks deep enough
wear indicators. If the indicators to expose the fabric, or bulges in-
show, replace the tires. The loca- dicating internal damage, the tire
tion of treadwear indicators is should be replaced.
shown by the “TWI” or “∆ ” marks,
etc., molded on the sidewall of If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
each tire. properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage,
it should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota deal-
er.

556
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

REPLACING YOUR TIRES For details about the sidewall of the

tire and the Certification Label, see D Do not use tires of different
When replacing a tire, use a tire brands, sizes and construc-
of the same size and construc- “Tire information” on page 457 in
Section 2 and “Your Toyota’s tions. This may damage the
tion, and the same or greater max- drive system and prevent the
imum load as the originally identification” on page 455 in
Section 2. vehicle stability control sys-
installed tires. Also, on four− tem from functioning correct-
wheel drive models, all the tires ly.
must be the same brand and have CAUTION
the same tread patterns. D Four−wheel drive models:
Observe the following instruc- Do not use tires of different
Using any other size or type of tire tions. Otherwise, an accident brands, sizes, construction or
may seriously affect handling, ride, may occur resulting in death or tread patterns, as this may
speedometer/odometer calibration, serious injuries. cause dangerous handling
ground clearance, and clearance be- characteristics resulting in
tween the body and tires or snow D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your ve- loss of control.
chains.
hicle, as this may cause dan-
Check that the maximum load of the gerous handling characteris- Toyota recommends all four tires,
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of tics resulting in loss of con- or at least both of the front or rear
the Gross Axle Weight Ratings trol. tires be replaced at a time as a set.
(GAWR) of either the front axle or
the rear axle, whichever is greater. D Do not use tires other than the See “If you have a flat tire” on page
As for the maximum load of the tire, manufacturer’s recommended 503 in Section 4 for tire change pro-
see the load limit at maximum cold size, as this may cause dan- cedure.
tire inflation pressure mentioned on gerous handling characteris- When a tire is replaced, the wheel
the sidewall of the tire, and as for tics resulting in loss of con- should always be balanced.
the Gross Axle Weight Ratings trol.
(GAWR), see the Certification Label.

557
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Rotating tires
An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-
NOTICE
hicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular z When the tires must be re-
use and should therefore be bal- paired or replaced, have
anced occasionally. them repaired or replaced by
The tire pressure warning system
must be initialized when the
the nearest Toyota dealer or
authorized tire dealer. Fail- XS72010
specified tire inflation pressure is ure to do so may cause the
changed due to tire replacement. tire pressure warning valves
See “Tire pressure warning and transmitters to be dam-
system” on page 254 in Section aged when the tires are re-
1−7. moved or installed.
z Remove the tire pressure
warning valves and transmit- To equalize the wear and help
ters before replacing the extend tire life, Toyota
tires to prevent the tire pres- recommends that you rotate your
sure warning valves and tires according to the
transmitters from being dam- maintenance schedule. (For
aged. scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.) However, the most
appropriate timing for tire
rotation may vary according to
your driving habits and road
surface conditions.

558
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Installing snow tires and

chains
See “If you have a flat tire” on page WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR
503 in Section 4 for tire change pro- CHAINS D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use snow tires of different
cedure. Snow tires or chains are recommended brands, sizes, construction or tread
When rotating tires, check for un- when driving on snow or ice. patterns, as this may cause danger-
even wear and damage. Abnormal On wet or dry roads, conventional tires ous handling characteristics result-
wear is usually caused by incorrect provide better traction than snow tires. ing in loss of control.
tire pressure, improper wheel align- SNOW TIRE SELECTION
ment, out−of−balance wheels, or se- If you need snow tires, select tires of SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
vere braking. the same size, construction and load Snow tires should be installed on all
The tire pressure warning system capacity as the originally installed tires. wheels.
must be initialized when rotating Also, on four−wheel drive models, all Installing snow tires on the rear wheels
tires, in case that the specified the tires must be the same brand and only can lead to an excessive difference
tire inflation pressure is different have the same tread patterns. in road grip capability between the front
between front and rear. See “Tire Do not use tires other than those men- and rear tires which could cause loss of
pressure warning system” on tioned above. Do not install studded tires vehicle control.
page 254 in Section 1−7. without first checking local regulations for When storing removed tires, you should
possible restrictions. store them in a cool dry place.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
CAUTION
to install them in the same direction when
Observe the following instructions. replacing.
Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
sulting in death or serious injuries. CAUTION
D Do not use snow tires other than D Do not drive with the snow tires
the manufacturer’s recommended si- incorrectly inflated.
ze, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
loss of control. with any type of snow tires.

559
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CHAIN INSTALLATION
Side chain
CAUTION
Install the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
chains on the front tires. Retighten the chain manufacturer’s recom-
chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km mended speed limit, whichever is
(1/4—1/2 miles).
G72017
Cross chain
When installing chains on your tires, care-
lower.
D Drive carefully avoiding bumps,
fully follow the instructions of the chain holes, and sharp turns, which may
manufacturer. cause the vehicle to bounce.
If wheel covers are used, they will be D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel
scratched by the chain band, so remove braking, as use of chains may ad-
the covers before putting on the chains. versely affect vehicle handling.

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION D When driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow
Use the tire chains of correct size. down before entering curves to
Use the following type chains. avoid losing control of the vehicle.
mm (in.) Otherwise an accident may occur.
A Diameter of side chain: 5.0 (0.20)
B Diameter of cross chain: 6.3 (0.25) NOTICE
Regulations regarding the use of tire Snow tires or chains may affect the
chains vary according to location or tire pressure warning system. See
type of road, so always check local reg- “Tire pressure warning system” on
ulations before installing chains. page 254 in Section 1−7.
NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could dam-
age the vehicle body.

560
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Replacing wheels
As you might have difficulty in WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS Replacement with used wheels is not rec-
identifying a flat or deflated tire, a tire If you have wheel damage such as ommended as they may have been sub-
pressure warning system is provided on bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the jected to rough treatment or high mileage
this vehicle. wheel should be replaced. and could fail without warning. Also, bent
When replacing the wheels, be sure to wheels which have been straightened may
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, have structural damage and therefore
install tire pressure warning valves and the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
transmitters on the wheels. Consult your should not be used. Never use an inner
loss of handling control. tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
Toyota dealer about how to set up the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters. WHEEL SELECTION for a tubeless tire.
When replacing wheels, care should be
CAUTION taken to ensure that the wheels are re- CAUTION
placed by ones with the same load ca-
D Have the tires, wheels or tire pres- pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset. Observe the following instructions.
sure warning valves and transmit- Otherwise, an accident may occur re-
Correct replacement wheels are available sulting in death or serious injuries.
ters replaced and ID codes regis- at your Toyota dealer.
tered by Toyota dealer. If you need D Do not use wheels other than the
tire pressure warning valves and A wheel of a different size or type may manufacturer’s recommended size,
transmitters, purchase from Toyota adversely affect handling, wheel and bear- as this may cause dangerous han-
dealer. ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom- dling characteristics resulting in
eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight loss of control.
D The tire pressure warning valve and aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-
transmitter nuts should always be ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to D Four−wheel drive models:
tightened to a torque of 4 N·m (0.4 the body and chassis. Do not use wheels of different
kgf·m, 2.9 ft·lbf). brands, sizes and types, as this
D The use of non−genuine wheels may may cause dangerous handling
result in the tire pressure warning characteristics resulting in loss of
system failure or air−leak. control.

561
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Wheel precautions
D When installing wheels, check that the
wheel nuts are tight after driving your
vehicle the first 160 km (100 miles).
D If you have rotated, repaired, or
changed your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving
160 km (100 miles).
D Wheel nut torque.
Steel wheel:
209 N·m (21.3 kgf·m, 154 ft·lbf)
Aluminum wheel:
131 N·m (13.4 kgf·m, 97 ft·lbf)
D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.
D Use only the Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.
D When balancing your aluminum wheels,
use only Toyota balance weights or
equivalent and a plastic or rubber ham-
mer.
D As with any wheel, periodically check
your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

562
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 7− 3
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

563
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

CAUTION D If electrolyte gets on your skin, Terminals

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS you feel pain or burning, get medi-
The battery produces flammable and cal attention immediately.
explosive hydrogen gas. D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
D Do not cause a spark from the bat-
tery with tools.
there is a possibility of its soaking
through to your skin, so immediate-
XS73001
ly take off the exposed clothing and
D Do not smoke or light a match near follow the procedure above, if nec-
the battery. Hold−down clamp
essary.
The electrolyte contains poisonous Ground cable
D If you accidentally swallow electro-
and corrosive sulfuric acid. lyte, drink a large quantity of water
D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or or milk. Follow with milk of magne-
clothes. sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable Check the battery for corroded or loose
oil. Then go immediately for emer- terminal connections, cracks, or loose
D Never ingest electrolyte. hold−down clamp.
gency help.
D Wear protective safety glasses when a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
working near the battery. with a solution of warm water and bak-
D Keep children away from the bat- ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-
tery. nals with grease to prevent further cor-
EMERGENCY MEASURES rosion.
D If electrolyte gets in your eyes, b. If the terminal connections are loose,
flush your eyes with clean water tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
immediately and get immediate overtighten.
medical attention. If possible, con- c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
tinue to apply water with a sponge enough to keep the battery firmly in
or cloth while en route to the medi- place. Overtightening may damage the
cal office. battery case.

564
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Battery recharging
—Checking battery fluid precautions
During recharging, the battery produces
NOTICE hydrogen gas.
Type A
Clear or
z Be sure the engine and all accesso- Therefore, before recharging:
Green Dark light yellow
ries are off before performing main-
1. If recharging with the battery installed
tenance.
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
z When checking the battery, remove the ground cable.
the ground cable from the negative
Type B 2. Be sure the power switch on the re-
terminal (“−” mark) first and rein-
Blue White Red charger is off when connecting the
stall it last.
charger cables to the battery and when
z Be careful not to cause a short cir- disconnecting them.
cuit with tools.
z Take care no solution gets into the CAUTION
battery when washing it.
CHECKING BY INDICATOR D Always charge the battery in an un-
If the battery is disconnected or run Check the battery condition by the indi- confined area. Do not charge the
down, the moon roof may not operate cator color. battery in a garage or closed room
automatically and the jam protection func- where there is not sufficient ventila-
tion will not function correctly after you Indicator color tion.
Condition
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. Type A Type B D Only do a slow charge (5 A or
In any of these cases, you should normal- less). Charging at a quicker rate is
ize the moon roof. To normalize the moon Green Blue Good dangerous. The battery may ex-
roof, see “Electric moon roof” on page 43 Charging necessary. plode, causing personal injuries.
in Section 1−2. Have battery checked
Dark White
by your Toyota
dealer. NOTICE
Clear or Have battery checked Never recharge the battery while the
light Red by your Toyota engine is running. Also, be sure all
yellow dealer. accessories are turned off.

565
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Checking and replacing fuses

LS73002 GN73013 XS73002

Good Blown
Good Blown

Type A Type C
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 543 in Sec-
tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.
Good Blown
Turn the engine switch and inoperative
XS73029 component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 592 in Section 8 for the functions
controlled by each circuit.
Type B

566
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Adding washer fluid

Type A fuses can be pulled out by the If the new fuse immediately blows out, If any washer does not work or the low
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out there is a problem with the electrical sys- windshield washer fluid level warning
tool is shown in the illustration. tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as light comes on, the washer tank may be
Type B fuses—When any of the fuses are soon as possible. empty. Add washer fluid.
blown, contact your Toyota dealer. You should normalize the moon roof if it You may use plain water as washer fluid.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has does not operate automatically or the jam However, in cold areas where tempera-
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse protection function does not operate cor- tures range below the freezing point, use
with one that you know is good. rectly after replacing blown fuses. To washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
normalize the moon roof, see “Electric product is available at your Toyota dealer
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse moon roof” on page 43 in Section 1−2. and most auto parts stores. Follow the
into the clip. manufacturer’s directions for how much to
Only install a fuse with the amperage rat- CAUTION mix with water.
ing designated on the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an Never use a fuse with a higher am- NOTICE
emergency you can pull out the “A/C” perage rating, or any other object, in
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
fuse, which may be dispensable for nor- place of a fuse. This may cause ex-
other substitute because it may dam-
mal driving, and use it if its amperage tensive damage and possibly a fire.
age your vehicle’s paint.
rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amper- Make sure that the fuse box lid has been
age, use one that is lower, but as close closed securely after closing it.
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your ve-
hicle for emergencies.

567
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Replacing light bulbs—

The following illustrations show how to The inside of the lens of exterior lights Bulb
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing such as headlights may temporarily fog up Light bulbs W Type
No.
a bulb, make sure the engine switch and when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the in a car wash. This is not a problem Headlights
9005 65 A
wattage ratings given in the table. because the fogging is caused by the (high beam)
The side turn signal lights consist of a temperature difference between the outside Headlights
and inside of the lens, just like the — 55 B
number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn (low beam)
out, take your vehicle to your Toyota deal- windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
Front fog lights 9145 45 C
er to have the light replaced. there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water Parking and front
168 5 D
pooled inside the light, contact your side marker lights
CAUTION
Toyota dealer. Front turn
4157
D To prevent burning yourself, do not signal/parking 27/8 E
NAK
replace the light bulbs while they lights
are hot. Rear turn signal
3157A 27/8 E
D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas lights
inside and require special handling.
Stop/tail and rear
They can burst or shatter if 3157 27/8 D
side marker lights
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case. Back−up lights 921 18 D
Do not touch the glass part of a License plate
bulb with bare hands. 168 4.9 D
lights
High mounted
NOTICE stoplight and 921 18 D
cargo lamps
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
Interior lights — 5 D

568
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Headlights (high beam)

Bulb
Light bulbs W Type
No.
Front personal
— 5 D
lights
Rear personal
lights
— 5 D
XS73007 XS73008
Glove box light 74 1.2 D
Foot light — 1.4 D
Door courtesy
168 5 D
light
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs 1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector 2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise
C: H10 halogen bulbs while depressing the lock release. and remove it.
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear) If the connector is tight, wiggle it.
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber) If additional space is required to access
the connector, move the battery rearward
by loosening the battery hold−down clamp.

569
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Headlights (low beam)

XS73009 XS73010 XS73003

3. Plug in a new bulb install it into the 4. Install the connector to the bulb. 1. Open the hood. Unplug the connector
mounting hole. If the battery has been moved, reinstall while depressing the lock release.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing the battery and check that the battery is If the connector is tight, wiggle it.
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec- installed securely by wiggling it.
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

570
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

XS73004 XS73005 XS73006

2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 3. Plug in a new bulb install it into the 4. Install the connector to the bulb.
and remove it. mounting hole.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

571
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Front fog lights

XS73011a XS73030 XS73031

1. Remove the bolts and cover. 2. Turn the bulb base counterclockwise 3. Pull the bulb out of the base. Install
and remove it. a new bulb.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

572
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Parking and front side

marker lights

XS73032 XS73036 XS73026a

Remove the clip and cover.

4. Install the bulb base into the mount-
ing hole by turning it clockwise.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-
essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

XS73025c

573
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail,

—Front turn signal and rear side marker and back−up
parking lights lights

Bolt

XS73015a XS73035 XS73019a

Remove the bolts by using a T30 “TORX” a: Rear turn signal light
socket wrench. b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light
c: Back−up light

XS73016 XS73033

574
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—High mounted stoplight

—License plate lights and cargo lamps

XS73020 XS73022 XS73023

Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

XS73021a XS73024

a: High mounted stoplight

b: Cargo lamps
575
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

576
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 8
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Vehicle capacity weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Towing capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

577
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Dimensions
Two−wheel drive models
mm (in.)

Cabin type Regular cab models Double cab models Crew Max models
Bed type Standard bed Long bed Standard bed Long bed Short bed
Overall length 5330 (209.8) 5810 (228.7) 5810 (228.7) 6290 (247.6) 5810 (228.7)
Overall width 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9)
1930 (75.9)∗1 1925 (75.7)∗1 1930 (75.9)∗1 1925 (75.7)∗1 1925 (75.7)∗1
Overall height
1925 (75.7)∗2,∗3 1920 (75.5)∗2 1925 (75.7)∗2,∗3 1920 (75.5)∗2 1920 (75.5)∗2,∗3
Wheelbase 3220 (126.7) 3700 (145.6) 3700 (145.6) 4180 (164.5) 3700 (145.6)
Front tread 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9)
Rear tread 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9)
∗1 : With P255/70R18 tires
∗2 : With P275/65R18 tires
∗3 : With P275/55R20 tires

578
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Four−wheel drive models

mm (in.)

Cabin type Regular cab models Double cab models Crew Max models
Bed type Standard bed Long bed Standard bed Long bed Short bed
Overall length 5330 (209.8) 5810 (228.7) 5810 (228.7) 6290 (247.6) 5810 (228.7)
Overall width 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9) 2030 (79.9)
1940 (76.3)∗1 1935 (76.1)∗1 1940 (76.3)∗1 1935 (76.1)∗1 1935 (76.1)∗1
Overall height
1935 (76.1)∗2,∗3 1930 (75.9)∗2 1935 (76.1)∗2,∗3 1930 (75.9)∗2 1930 (75.9)∗2,∗3
Wheelbase 3220 (126.7) 3700 (145.6) 3700 (145.6) 4180 (164.5) 3700 (145.6)
Front tread 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9)
Rear tread 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9) 1725 (67.9)
∗1 : With P255/70R18 tires
∗2 : With P275/65R18 tires
∗3 : With P275/55R20 tires

579
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Vehicle capacity weight

kg (lb.)
Cab type Engine Driving system Bed type Vehicle capacity weight
Standard 675 (1495)
4 0 L V6 (1GR−FE)
4.0 Two−wheel drive models
Long 710 (1575)
780 (1730)
Standard
750 (1655)∗1
Two−wheel drive models
830 (1830)
Long
795 (1755)∗1
4 7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
4.7
755 (1670)
Standard
720 (1595)∗1
Four−wheel drive models
800 (1765)
Long
Regular
g 765 (1690)∗1
750 (1660)
Standard
715 (1585)∗1
Two−wheel drive models 895 (1975)
Long
g 860 (1900)∗1
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
( ) 925 (2045)∗2
725 (1605)
Standard
690 (1530)∗1
Four−wheel drive models
865 (1910)
Long
830 (1835)∗1
∗1 : With towing package
∗2 : Without option

580
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)

Cab type Engine Driving system Bed type Grade Vehicle capacity
weight
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) Two−wheel drive models Standard SR5 585 (1300)
640 (1415)
SR5
605 (1340)∗1
Standard
Two−wheel
Two wheel drive models 655 (1450)
Limited
620 (1375)∗1
Long SR5 590 (1305)∗1
4 7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
4.7
600 (1330)
SR5
565 (1255)∗1
Standard
Four−wheel
ou ee drive
d e models
ode s 615 (1360)
Limited
580 (1285)∗1
Double Long SR5 550 (1220)∗1
700 (1550)
SR5
665 (1475)∗1
Standard
Two−wheel
o ee drive
d e models
ode s 720 (1590)
Limited
685 (1515)∗1
Long SR5 655 (1455)∗1
5 7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
5.7
665 (1470)
SR5
630 (1395)∗1
Standard
Four−wheel
ou ee drive
d e models
ode s 680 (1505)
Limited
645 (1430)∗1
Long SR5 615 (1365)∗1
∗1 : With towing package
581
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)
Cab type Engine Driving system Bed type Grade Vehicle capacity weight
605 (1335)
SR5
S 5 570 (1260)∗1
555 (1225)∗2
Two−wheel drive models
615 (1360)
Limited 580 (1285)∗1
565 (1250)∗2
4 7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
4.7
570 (1260)
SR5
S 5 535 (1185)∗1
520 (1150)∗2
Four−wheel drive models
580 (1280)
Limited
ted 545 (1205)∗1
530 (1170)∗2
Crew Max Short
665 (1470)
SR5
S 5 630 (1395)∗1
615 (1360)∗2
Two−wheel drive models
690 (1530)
Limited
ted 655 (1455)∗1
640 (1420)∗2
5 7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
5.7
635 (1400)
SR5
S 5 600 (1325)∗1
585 (1290)∗2
Four−wheel drive models
640 (1420)
Limited 610 (1345)∗1
590 (1310)∗2
∗1 : With towing package or electric moon roof
∗2 : With towing package and electric moon roof
582
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Towing capacity∗1
kg (lb.)
Cab type Engine Driving system Bed type Towing capacity∗1
Standard 2310 (5100)
4 0 L V6 (1GR−FE)
4.0 (1GR FE) Two wheel drive models
Two−wheel
Long 2265 (5000)
3175 (7000)
Standard
3855 (8500)∗2
Two wheel drive models
Two−wheel
3125 (6900)
Long
3810 (8400)∗2
4 7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
4.7 (2UZ FE)
3035 (6700)
Standard
3715 (8200)∗2
Four wheel drive models
Four−wheel
2990 (6600)
Long
3670 (8100)∗2
Regular
4035 (8900)
Standard 4715 (10400)∗2
Two−wheel drive models 4490 (9900)∗2,3
3990 (8800)
Long
4895 (10800)∗2
5 7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
5.7 (3UR FE)
3945 (8700)
Standard 4580 (10100)∗2
Four−wheel drive models 4350 (9600)∗2,3
3900 (8600)
Long
4760 (10500)∗2
∗1 : Trailer weight + cargo weight
∗2 : With Towing package
∗3 : With P275/55R20 tires
583
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)
Cab type Engine Driving system Bed type Grade Towing capacity∗1
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) Two−wheel drive models Standard SR5 2175 (4800)
3035 (6700)
SR5
3670 (8100)∗2
Standard
Two−wheel
Two wheel drive models 2990 (6600)
Limited
3670 (8100)∗2
Long SR5 3625 (8000)∗2
4 7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
4.7 (2UZ FE)
2900 (6400)
SR5
3535 (7800)∗2
Standard
Four−wheel
ou ee drive
d e models
ode s 2855 (6300)
Limited
3535 (7800)∗2
Double Long SR5 3490 (7700)∗2
3900 (8600)
SR5
4805 (10600)∗2
Standard
Two−wheel
o ee drive
d e models
ode s 3900 (8600)
Limited
4805 (10600)∗2
Long SR5 4760 (10500)∗2
5 7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
5.7 (3UR FE)
3760 (8300)
SR5
4670 (10300)∗2
Standard
Four−wheel
ou ee drive
d e models
ode s 3760 (8300)
Limited
4670 (10300)∗2
Long SR5 4625 (10200)∗2
∗1 : Trailer weight + cargo weight
∗2 : With Towing package

584
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)
Cab type Engine Driving system Bed type Grade Towing capacity∗1
2945 (6500)
SR5
3625 (8000)∗2
Two wheel drive models
Two−wheel
2945 (6500)
Limited
3625 (8000)∗2
4 7 L V8 (2UZ−FE)
4.7 (2UZ FE)
2810 (6200)
SR5
3490 (7700)∗2
Four wheel drive models
Four−wheel
2810 (6200)
Limited
3490 (7700)∗2
Crew Max Short
3810 (8400)
SR5
4715 (10400)∗2
Two wheel drive models
Two−wheel
3810 (8400)
Limited
4715 (10400)∗2
5 7 L V8 (3UR−FE)
5.7 (3UR FE)
3670 (8100)
SR5
4580 (10100)∗2
Four wheel drive models
Four−wheel
3670 (8100)
Limited
4580 (10100)∗2
∗1 : Trailer weight + cargo weight
∗2 : With Towing package

585
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine Fuel Service specifications

Model: Fuel type: ENGINE
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE), 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87 Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
and 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
Type: Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.): Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine 100 (26.4, 22.0) Exhaust 0.29—0.39 (0.011—0.015)
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline Automatic adjustment
Bore and stroke, mm (in.): Spark plug type:
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
94.0 × 95.0 (3.70 × 3.74) DENSO K20HR−U11
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine NGK LFR6C11
94.0 × 84.0 (3.70 × 3.31) 4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine DENSO SK20R11
94.0 × 102.0 (3.70 × 4.02) NGK IFR6A11
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.): 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine DENSO SK20HR11
3956 (241.4) Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine 1.1 (0.043)
4664 (284.5)
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
5663 (345.4)

586
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

ENGINE LUBRICATION Recommended oil viscosity: 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine

Oil capacity (drain and refill), 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8 (2UZ− SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20
L (qt., Imp. qt.): FE) engine
SAE 5W−30
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
With filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
Without filter 4.2 (4.4, 3.7)
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
With filter 6.2 (6.6, 5.5)
Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0) SOIL020
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
With filter 7.0 (7.4, 6.2)
OIL008
Without filter 6.6 (6.9, 5.8)
Outside temperature
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
Outside temperature
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-
viscosity. ther details.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

587
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

COOLING SYSTEM BATTERY AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): Open voltage∗
at 20°C (68°F): Fluid capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine 12.6—12.8 V Fully charged 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) engine
9.6 (10.1, 8.4) 12.2—12.4 V Half charged 10.5 (11.1, 9.2)∗
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine 11.8—12.0 V Discharged
∗:
4.7 L V8 (2UZ−FE) engine
9.7 (10.3, 8.5) Voltage that is checked 20 minutes
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine after the key is removed with all the With towing package
With towing package lights turned off 11.1 (11.7, 9.8)∗
13.0 (13.7, 11.4) Charging rates: Without towing package
Without towing package 5 A max. 10.5 (11.1, 9.2)∗
12.1 (12.8, 10.6) 5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine
Coolant type: With towing package
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is 11.7 (12.4, 10.3)∗
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory Without towing package
fill. In order to avoid technical problems, 11.1 (11.7, 9.8)∗
only use “Toyota Super Long Life ∗:
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene The fluid capacity is the quantity of ref-
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine, erence. If replacement is necessary,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with contact your Toyota dealer.
long−life hybrid organic acid technology. Fluid type:
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic Toyota Genuine ATF WS
acid technology is a combination of low Change automatic transmission fluid only
phosphates and organic acids.) as necessary.
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

588
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Generally, it is necessary to change TRANSFER Double cab models

automatic transmission fluid only if your Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.): Standard bed 3.60 (3.8, 3.2)
vehicle is driven under one of the Special 1.12 (1.2, 1.0) Long bed 3.75 (4.0, 3.3)
Operating Conditions listed in your
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or Oil type: Crew Max models
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When Gear Oil API GL−4 or GL−5 Two−wheel drive model
changing the automatic transmission fluid, Recommended oil viscosity: 3.75 (4.0, 3.3)
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF SAE 75W−90 Four−wheel drive model
JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring DIFFERENTIAL 3.60 (3.8, 3.2)
optimum transmission performance. Oil type and viscosity:
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
Notice: Using automatic transmission Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Front differential 75W−85 GL−5 or equivalent
WS” may cause deterioration in shift (four−wheel drive models)
2.05 (2.2, 1.8) “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” is
quality, locking up of your transmission filled in your Toyota vehicle at factory fill.
accompanied by vibration, and ultimate- Rear differential Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine
ly damage the automatic transmission 4.0 L V6 (1GR−FE) and 4.7 L V8 Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of
of your vehicle. (2UZ−FE) engine matching quality to satisfy the above
Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur- Regular cab models specification. Please contact your Toyota
ther details. dealer for further details.
Standard bed 4.05 (4.3, 3.6)
Long bed 4.60 (4.9, 4.0) CHASSIS LUBRICATION

Double cab and Crew Max models Propeller shafts:

4.60 (4.9, 4.0) Spiders
5.7 L V8 (3UR−FE) engine Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
No.2
Regular cab models
Slide yokes
Standard bed 3.50 (3.7, 3.1) Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI
Long bed 3.60 (3.8, 3.2) No.2 or Molybdenum−disulfide lithium
base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

589
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
104 (4.1)
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—5 (0.04—0.20)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Lining wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake adjustment:
Pedal type—when depressed with the
force of 300 N (30.6 kgf, 67.1 lbf)
6—9 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONrII
or III

590
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Tires
Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire size kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi) Temporary spare Wheel size
Front Rear
P255/70R18 112T 210 (2.1, 30) 230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33) 18 × 8J
P275/65R18 114T 210 (2.1, 30) 230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33) 18 × 8J
P275/55R20 111H 210 (2.1, 30) 230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33) 20 × 8J
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
Steel wheels 209 (21.3, 154)
Aluminum wheels 131 (13.4, 97)
NOTE: For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation
pressure” through “Wheel precautions”, pages 553 through 562, in Section 7−2.

591
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Fuses
Fuses (type A)
1. A/F 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
system
2. HORN 10 A: Horn
3. EFI NO.1 25 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system
4. IG2 MAIN 30 A: “INJ”, “MET”, “IGN”
fuses
5. DEICER 20 A: Front windshield wiper
de−icer

XS73034 6. TOW TAIL 30 A: Trailer lights (tail

lights)
7. POWER NO.2 30 A: Power back win-
dow
8. FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
9. STOP 15 A: Stop lights, high mounted
stop light, vehicle stability control sys-
tem, anti−lock brake system, shift lock
system, multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, towing converter
10. TOW BRK 30 A: Trailer brake control-
ler
11. IMB 7.5 A: Engine immobilizer system
12. AM2 7.5 A: Starting system
Engine compartment
13. TOWING 30 A: Towing converter
592
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

20. RAD NO.1 15 A: Audio system, rear 29. HEAD RL 15 A: Right−hand headlight
view monitor, navigation system, rear (low beam)
seat entertainment system 30. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
21. ECU−B1 7.5 A: Multiplex communica- system/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, Multiport fuel injection sys- tion system, leak detection pump
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
XS73028
31. DEF I/UP 5 A: No circuit
system, auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror, power outlets, power front 32. SPARE 5 A: Spare fuse
drivers seat, power tilt and telescopic 33. SPARE 15 A: Spare fuse
system 34. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse
22. DOME 7.5 A: Interior lights, personal 35. INVERTER 15 A: Power outlet No cir-
lights, vanity lights, engine switch light, cuit(115 V)
foot light, door courtesy lights, acces-
sory meter 36. FR P/SEAT LH 30 A: Power front driv-
Instrument panel ers seat
23. HEAD LH 15 A: Left−hand headlight
(high beam) 37. DR/LCK 25 A: Multiplex communication
14. ALT−S 5 A: Charging system system
24. HEAD LL 15 A: Left−hand headlight
15. TURN−HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights, 38. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-
(low beam)
emergency flashers, towing converter tem
25. INJ 10 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-
16. F/PMP 15 A: No circuit 39. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
tem/sequential multiport fuel injection
17. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system, ignition system 40. CARGO LP 7.5 A: Cargo lamp
system/Sequential multiport fuel injec-
26. MET 7.5 A: Gauges and meters 41. AM1 7.5 A: Shift lock system, starting
tion system, electric throttle control
system 27. IGN 10 A: SRS airbag system, multi- system
port fuel injection system/sequential 42. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
18. MET−B 5 A: Gauges and meters
multiport fuel injection system, engine 43. MIR 15 A: Outside rear view mirror
19. AMP 30 A: Audio system, rear view immobilizer system, cruise control sys-
monitor, navigation system, rear seat control, outside rear view mirror heat-
tem ers
entertainment system
28. HEAD RH 15 A: Right−hand headlight 44. FR P/SEAT RH 30 A: Power front pas-
(high beam)
senger seat

593
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

45. TI&TE 15 A: Power tilt and power tele- 56. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights, 62. ALT 180 A (3UR−FE engine with
scopic glove box light, ashtray, accessory me- towing package), 140 A (others):
46. S/ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof ter, audio system, rear view monitor, “LH−J/B”, “HTR”, “SUB BATT”, “TOW
navigation system, rear seat entertain- BRK”, “STOP”, “FOG”, “TOW TAIL”,
47. ECU−IG NO.1 7.5 A: Anti−lock brake ment system, gauges and meters, air “DEICER” fuses
system, vehicle stability control system, conditioning system
multiplex communication system, intu- 63. A/PUMP NO.1 50 A: Multiport fuel in-
itive parking assist system, power front 57. ACC 7.5 A: Accessory meter, audio jection system/sequential multiport fuel
drivers seat, power tilt and power tele- system, rear seat entertainment sys- injection system
scopic, shift lock, tire pressure warning tem, rear view monitor, navigation sys- 64. A/PUMP NO.2 50 A: Multiport fuel in-
system, accessory meter, trailer towing, tem, back−up lights, trailer lights jection system/sequential multiport fuel
power outlet, electric moon roof (back−up lights), multiplex communica- injection system
tion system, power outlet, outside rear
48. LH−IG 7.5 A: Back−up lights, charging view mirror 65. MAIN 40 A: “HEAD LL”, “HEAD RL”,
system, gauge and meters, turn signal “HEAD LH”, “HEAD RH” fuses
lights, air conditioning system, seat 58. BK/UP LP 10 A: Back−up light, gauges
and meters Fuses (type C)
heaters, back window defogger
59. CIG 15 A: Cigarette lighter 66. DEFOG 40 A: Back window defogger
49. 4WD 20 A: Four−wheel drive control
system Fuses (type B) 67. SUB BATT 40 A: Trailer towing
50. WSH 20 A: Window washer 60. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system 68. ABS1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system
51. WIPER 30 A: Wiper and washer 61. LH−J/B 150 A: “AM1”, “TAIL”, “PANEL”,
“ACC”, “CIG”, “LH−IG”, “4WD”, 69. ABS2 40 A: Anti−lock brake system,
52. ECU−IG NO.2 7.5 A: Multiplex commu- vehicle stability control system
nication system “ECU−IG NO.1”, “BK/UP LP”,
“SEAT−HTR”, “A/C IG”, “ECU−IG 70. ST 30 A: Starting system
53. TAIL 15 A: Tail lights, trailer lights (tail NO.2”, “WSH”, “WIPER”, “OBD”, “A/C”,
lights), parking lights, outside rear view 71. POWER NO.1 30 A: Power windows,
“TI&TE”, “FR P/SEAT RH”, “MIR”, power back window
mirror lights “DR/LCK”, “FR P/SEAT LH”, “CARGO
54. A/C IG 10 A: Air conditioning system LP”, “PWR OUTLET”, “POWER NO.1”
55. SEAT−HTR 20 A: Seat heaters fuses

594
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS AND CAMPER INFORMATION
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and
camper information
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Camper information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

595
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners Camper information—
If you believe that your vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may call This information has been prepared in ac-
has a defect which could cause a the Vehicle Safety Hotline cordance with regulation issued by the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
crash or could cause injury or toll−free at 1−888−327−4236 tion of the U.S. Department of
death, you should immediately in- (TTY: 1−800−424−9153); go to Transportation. It provides the purchasers
form the National Highway Traffic http://www.safercar.gov; or write and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 vehicles with information on truck−camper
addition to notifying Toyota Motor New Jersey Ave, S.E., loading. Your Toyota dealer will help an-
swer any questions you may have as you
Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll−free: Washington, DC 20590. You can read this information.
1−800−331−4331). also obtain other information
If NHTSA receives similar com- about motor vehicle safety from
plaints, it may open an investiga- http://www.safercar.gov.
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

596
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Center of gravity location

Rear end of Rear end of Rear end of

Recommended truck bed Recommended truck bed Recommended truck bed
location for cargo location for cargo location for cargo
center of gravity for center of gravity for center of gravity for
cargo weight rating cargo weight rating cargo weight rating

XS90009 XS90010 XS90011a

Regular cab models (with standard bed) Double cab models (with standard bed) Crew Max models

The figures given in the illustration indi-

Rear end of Rear end of
Recommended Recommended truck bed
cate the recommended center of gravity
truck bed
location for cargo location for cargo zone.
center of gravity for center of gravity for
cargo weight rating
mm (in.)
cargo weight rating
A B
XS90001 XS90002 Regular cab
models
1082 955
Double cab models (
(42.6)
) ((37.6))
Crew Max models

Regular cab models (with long bed) Double cab models (with long bed)

597
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CAUTION

If a load is too far back, it can cause

dangerous handling. If it is too far
forward, the front axle may be over-
loaded.

598
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Cargo weight rating and

proper matching
CWR: Cargo Weight Rating
Camper center of gravity
C.W.R
Engine Drive Cab Bed Passenger
Grade number (kg) (lb.)

XS90004 1GR 2WD

Standard 3 474 1045

Long 3 510 1125

Standard 3 547 1205

Recommended center of 2WD
gravity location zone Long 3 592 1305
2UZ
Standard — 3 519 1145
Regular
4WD
Long 3 562 1240

Standard 3 515 1135

2WD
Long 3 658 1450
3UR
Standard 3 490 1080
4WD
Long 3 628 1385

599
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating

C.W.R
Engine Drive Cab Bed Passenger
Grade number (kg) (lb.)

1GR 2WD Standard SR5 6 181 400

SR5 6 200 440

Standard
2WD Limited 5 284 625

Long SR5 6 184 405

2UZ SR5 6 161 355

Standard
4WD Double Limited 5 243 535

Long SR5 6 145 320

SR5 6 261 575

Standard
2WD Limited 5 347 765

Long SR5 6 252 555

3UR
SR5 6 225 495
Standard
4WD Limited 5 308 680

Long SR5 6 211 465

600
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

When the truck is used to carry a slide−in

CWR: Cargo Weight Rating
camper, the total cargo load of the truck
C.W.R consists of the manufacturer’s camper
Engine Drive Cab Bed Passenger weight figure, the weight of installed addi-
Grade number (kg) (lb.) tional camper equipment not included in
the manufacturer’s camper weight figure,
SR5 6 147 325
the weight of camper cargo, and the
2WD weight of passengers in the camper.
Limited 5 227 500
2UZ The total cargo load should not exceed
SR5 6 113 250 the truck’s cargo weight rating and the
4WD camper’s center of gravity should fall with-
Limited 5 191 420 in the truck’s recommended center of
Crew gravity zone when installed.
Max Short
SR5 6 209 460
2WD CAUTION
Limited 5 304 670
3UR Be careful—overloading can cause
SR5 6 177 390 dangerous braking and handling prob-
4WD lems, and can damage your vehicle
Limited 5 254 560 and its tires.

601
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

—Gross axle and vehicle

weight ratings
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating

XS90006 XS90008

Front GAWR Rear GAWR

Not exceed GVWR

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded,
drive to a scale and weigh on the front
and on the rear wheels separately to de-
termine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
These ratings are given on the vehicle
certification label which is located on the
door latch post on the left side of the
vehicle. See “Your Toyota’s identification”
on page 455 in Section 2 for the Certifica-
tion Label location. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to bring
all weights below the ratings.
602
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

GAWR, GVWR
kg (lb.)

Driving GAWR
Cab type Engine Bed type GVWR
system Front Rear

4.0 L V6 Standard 1765 (3900) 1675 (3700) 2810 (6200)

2WD
(1GR−FE) Long 1765 (3900) 1720 (3800) 2900 (6400)
Standard 1765 (3900) 1790 (3950) 2990 (6600)
2WD
4.7 L V8 Long 1765 (3900) 1835 (4050) 3080 (6800)
(2UZ−FE) Standard 1810 (4000) 1835 (4050) 3080 (6800)
Regular 4WD
Long 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
Standard 1765 (3900) 1790 (3950) 2990 (6600)
2WD
5.7 L V8 Long 1765 (3900) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
(3UR−FE) Standard 1810 (4000) 1835 (4050) 3080 (6800)
4WD
Long 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3265 (7200)

603
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)

Driving GAWR
Cab type Engine Bed type Grade GVWR
system Front Rear
4.0 L V6
2WD Standard SR5 1765 (3900) 1720 (3800) 2900 (6400)
(1GR−FE)
SR5 1765 (3900) 1810 (4000) 3035 (6700)
Standard
2WD Limited 1765 (3900) 1810 (4000) 3035 (6700)

4.7 L V8 Long SR5 1765 (3900) 1835 (4050) 3080 (6800)

(2UZ−FE) SR5 1810 (4000) 1855 (4100) 3125 (6900)
Standard
4WD Limited 1810 (4000) 1855 (4100) 3125 (6900)
D bl
Double Long SR5 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
SR5 1765 (3900) 1855 (4100) 3125 (6900)
Standard
2WD Limited 1765 (3900) 1855 (4100) 3125 (6900)

5.7 L V8 Long SR5 1765 (3900) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)

(3UR−FE) SR5 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3220 (7100)
Standard
4WD Limited 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3220 (7100)
Long SR5 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3265 (7200)

604
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

kg (lb.)

Driving GAWR
Cab type Engine Bed type Grade GVWR
system Front Rear
SR5 1765 (3900) 1835 (4050) 3080 (6800)
2WD
4.7 L V8 Limited 1765 (3900) 1835 (4050) 3080 (6800)
(2UZ−FE) SR5 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
4WD
Limited 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
Crew Max Short
SR5 1765 (3900) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
2WD
5.7 L V8 Limited 1765 (3900) 1880 (4150) 3175 (7000)
(3UR−FE) SR5 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3265 (7200)
4WD
Limited 1810 (4000) 1880 (4150) 3265 (7200)

605
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

606
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

SECTION 10
INDEX

607
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

A Shifting speed . . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 Break−in tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

“TOW/HAUL” switch . . . . . . . . . 218,233 Brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
“AUTO LSD” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Automatic transmission fluid
Accessory meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 C
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Automatic transmission fluid
Adjustment temperature warning light . . . . . . . . 197 Camper information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 AUX adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Carbon monoxide caution . . . . . . . . . . 447
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Auxiliary catch, Engine hood . . . . . . . . 39 Cargo and luggage
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . 382,390 B Capacity and distribution . . . . . . . . . 470
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,87,95 Stowage precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . 159 Back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Cargo lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Anti−lock brake system Back window defoggers . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Certification regulation label . . . . . . . . 455
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Back window and outside rear view Charging system warning light . . . . . . 197
Anti−theft steering column lock . . . . . 210 mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . 566
Appearance care Battery Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . 556
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Checking battery condition . . . . . . . 564 Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Protecting your Toyota from Gas caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . 548
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Handling safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Checking the radiator and
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . 565 condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Child restraint
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 474 Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Bluetoothr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,128
Automatic air conditioning system . . . 390 Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Installation with child restraint
Automatic door locking and Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . 454 lower anchorages . . . . . . 147,149,151
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Automatic light control system . . . . . . 166 Brake system warning buzzer . . . . . . . 197 Types of child restraint system . . . . 117
Automatic transmission Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . 197 Using a top strap . . . . . . . . 139,142,145
Driving with a automatic Brakes Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
transmission . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 Fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Shift lock override button . . . . . . . . . 522 Pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . 454 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Shift pattern . . . . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
608
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Cold weather Directional signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,166 E

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Do−it−yourself maintenance
Compact disc changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Economical driving
Compact disc changer controller . . . . 266 Service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Saving money on both fuel
Compact disc player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Does your vehicle need and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Electrical system
Condenser Doors Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564,565
Checking the condenser . . . . . . . . . . 552 Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Connector covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Driver’s seat belt Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 reminder buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Controls, Instrument panel . . . . . . . . 2,12 Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . 197 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . 169
Control and features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Driving Emergency, In case of
Cooling system Automatic transmission Blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . 169
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Radiator and reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 If you cannot increase
Radiator cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Driving position memory system . . . . . 56 engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Driving tips If you cannot shift automatic
Corrosion prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 transmission selector lever . . . . . 522
Cranking hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Driving tips in various If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 If you lose your wireless
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Driving with an automatic remote control transmitter . . . . . . 523
transmission . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 If your engine stalls
D Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Good driving If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . 516
Defogger practice . . . . . . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 If your vehicle needs
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . 177,178 Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 During If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . 498
De−icer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,178 Break−in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Deck hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 DVD player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Dimmer switch, Headlight . . . . . . 164,166 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Emissions inspection and
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . 538
609
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Engine F Front passenger occupant

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . 474 classification system . . . . . . . . . 105,110
Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . 551 Facts about engine oil Front passenger’s seat belt
Emission control device . . . . . . . . . . 446 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Flasher, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,166 Front seat precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Exhaust gas caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Flat tire Front seats
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 After changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,49
Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Power seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Driving position memory system . . . 56
Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Jack point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Front windshield wiper
Oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Jacking precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 de−icer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,178
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Jacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Fuel
Starting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Loosening wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Three−way catalytic converters . . . 446 Lowering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . 445
Engine coolant Wheel block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Operation in foreign countries . . . . 446
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Engine coolant temperature Fluid level Fuel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . 445
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . 21 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Fuse
Engine oil Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Fog light switch, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . 183 Folding front passenger’s
Engine oil replacement seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 G
reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Folding down rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Foot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Engine switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Foreign countries, Operation in . . . . . 446 Gauge
Exhaust gas caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Four−wheel drive Engine coolant temperature . . . . . . 182
Extending rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . 159 Operating the four−wheel Engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Exterior foot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Glasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Front fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

610
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Good driving Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Rear turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Stop/tail/rear side marker lights . . . 574
Grocery bag/cargo net hooks . . . . . . . 438 Automatic transmission fluid Light bulbs, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Light, Interior
H Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . 169 Engine switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . 2,12 Foot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Hands−free phone system . . . . . . . . . . 350 Instrument panel vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Hazard switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Intuitive parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Personal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,166 Load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
High speed operation J Load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
During break−in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Lock
Hood release, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Jack Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
I Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Low engine oil pressure
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
I/M test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 K Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . 197
Identification
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Key reminder buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . 197
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,523 Low windshield washer fluid
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 L
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
M
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Light bulbs
Back−up lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 Maintenance
Indicator symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Do−it−yourself maintenance . . . . . . 543
Instrument panel Cargo lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 Does your vehicle
Brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . 415 Front side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . 573
Front turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . 574 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . 534
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 183 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
High mounted stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Indicator symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . 197
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
611
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Malfunction indicator lamp Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Preloaders

Emissions Inspection and Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 (seat belt pretensioners) . . . . . . . . . . 73
Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . 538 Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . 446 Pretensioners
Service reminder indicator . . . . . . . . 197 Outside rear view mirror defogger . . . 177 (seat belt pretensioners) . . . . . . . . . . 73
Map holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . 403 Protecting your Toyota
Maximum allowable speed Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Automatic transmission Overheating, Engine coolant . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211,218,226,233 Overview R
Mirror Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Anti−glare inside rear view . . . . . . . 159 Radiator
Auto anti−glare inside P Checking the radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Coolant, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Mirrors Parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Extending rear view mirrors . . . . . . 159 Parking brake Raising rear seat cushion . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Folding rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Rear cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Outside rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Power rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Parking brake reminder buzzer . . . . . 197 Rear seat entertainment system . . . . 298
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Passenger airbag off switch . . . . . . . . . 86 Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Pen holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Rear view mirror
N Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Anti−glare inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Rear view mirror,
New vehicle break−in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Power back window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 auto anti−glare inside . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Power outlet (12 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Rear view mirrors
O Power outlet (115 VAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Power rear view mirror control . . . . . . 157 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Power seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . 478 Power steering Rear door child−protectors . . . . . . . . . . 29
Off−road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . 442 Fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Oil Power tilt and telescopic Remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Remove the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reporting safety defects
Pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Viscosity and grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
612
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Roll sensing of curtain shield SRS side airbags Windshield wiper and
airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . 95 washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,177
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
S Starting T
Cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Seat adjustment precautions Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Seat belt extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Steering Telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . 154
Seat belts Adjusting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . 154 Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Power tilt and telescopic Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . 446
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Steering column Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Seat belt pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . 254
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Steering switches, Tires
Seatback table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Storage boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Checking and replacing . . . . . . . . . . 556
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Service and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 534 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Service reminder indicators . . . . . . . . 197 Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 553,591
Side door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Switch Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Side door locks Emergency flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Automatic door locking and Front windshield wiper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459,591
unlocking functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 de−icer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,178 Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Rear door child−protectors . . . . . . . . 29 Headlight, dimmer and Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Spare fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . 458
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Outside rear view mirror Tissue pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Spark plugs defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . 449 Passenger airbag “TOW/HAUL” switch . . . . . . . . . . . 218,233
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 manual on−off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Towing
SRS driver airbag and Roll sensing of curtain shield Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 77, 87 airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . 519,521
613
07 11.02

2008MY TUNDRA (U) L/O 2007.10

Emergency towing eyelet Windshield wiper and washer

precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,177
If your vehicle needs to be Windshield wiper de−icer . . . . . . . 177,178
towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle . . . . 521 Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,166
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . 460

V
“VSC OFF” warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . 455
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . 250
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

W
Warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Washer fluid
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Wheels
Aluminum wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
614
TUNDRA_34467U 1/2/04 5:40 AM ページ1 (1,1)
DIC120 Black

TU–4
Quick index
• If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on.......................... 197
• If your vehicle will not start ............................................................................. 498
• If your engine stalls while driving ................................................................... 502
• If you cannot increase engine speed ............................................................. 502
• If your vehicle overheats ................................................................................ 502
• If you have a flat tire....................................................................................... 503
• If your vehicle needs to be towed................................................................... 517
• Tips for driving during break–in period........................................................... 443
• How to start the engine .................................................................................. 474
• General maintenance..................................................................................... 535
• Complete index .............................................................................................. 607
Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.
See page 443 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
100 L (26.4 gal., 22.0 Imp. gal.)
Engine oil:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.
See page 549 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 553 through 562.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 591.

Publication No. OM34467U

Part No. 01999-34467
Printed in Japan 02–0711–01 Z
( U)